Holidays Archives - Foolproof Living Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Wed, 10 Dec 2025 17:32:19 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png Holidays Archives - Foolproof Living 32 32 Stuffed Onions with Ground Beef and Rice https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/#respond Wed, 10 Dec 2025 15:27:48 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85205 Ingredients You’ll Need If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

Growing up in Türkiye, our holiday tables looked a little different than the ones we have here in the US. Kebabs were always on the menu, but whenever my mom wanted to make something special, she made these ground beef stuffed onions, or soğan dolması as we call it.

It has been years since I last made them, but seeing their recent popularity on social media made me pull out my mom’s handwritten notes and bring this recipe back to life.

Here are a few things that make this version special:

  • It has roots in Turkish cooking. There are many versions of stuffed onions across the Mediterranean and the Middle East, but the Turkish style uses pomegranate molasses to give the dish a gentle, sweet-and-tangy balance.
  • The ingredients are simple. Pomegranate molasses might sound unfamiliar, but most grocery stores now carry it. Everything else is a pantry staple, and I included plenty of substitutions so you can make it work with what you have on hand.
  • It looks impressive, but it is easier than it seems. Once you soften the onions and get the hang of rolling them, the rest of the process is surprisingly approachable and very forgiving.

If you have never made stuffed onions before, I think you will be pleasantly surprised by how doable this dish actually is.

Ingredients You’ll Need

If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a bit. As I worked through each round, I learned a few things about choosing the right ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

The exact measurements are in the recipe card below, but these are the notes I kept from all that testing:

Onions: Look for onions that are firm, fresh, and heavy for their size. Yellow onions work beautifully because they naturally become sweeter as they cook, but Vidalia onions and Walla Walla onions will also work if you want an even milder flavor. Red onions are also an option, but stuffed red onions are slightly sweeter than yellow onions.

Pro tip: In the recipe card, you’ll see four medium onions. If you’re making this for the first time, go ahead and buy one extra just in case. Depending on the size, four to five onions usually give me about 20 to 22 usable layers, which is right around what you’ll need for this stuffed onion recipe.

Ground beef: Fat equals flavor, so I like using 85/15 ground beef because it stays juicy and tender. If you prefer something richer, use 80/20 ground beef. 

You can also use lamb if you like, or half lamb and half beef, which is pretty traditional. If you are looking for a lighter alternative, though not traditional, ground chicken would also work, but be aware that it would have a slightly different flavor profile.

White rice: I’m using long-grain white rice here, the everyday enriched kind that you can find in most grocery stores. 

My mom always rinsed the rice under cold water until it ran clear, so I do that too, but I know some people prefer not to wash their rice, and that’s perfectly fine.

Some people soak their rice before using it, which helps it cook a little faster, but since we are using a rather small amount, I do not think that it is necessary. 

Alternatively, medium bulgur wheat can be a good substitute for rice. It would have a distinct earthy flavor profile, but it would still be delicious.

Pomegranate molasses: Can you make it without it? You surely can. But, should you? Absolutely not, because pomegranate molasses takes these stuffed onions to another level, giving them the signature slightly sweet-and-sour taste. So, do not skip it.

Pro Tip: When shopping for it, look for a brand that uses 100% pomegranate juice and no added sugars. If you can’t find it in your local grocery stores’ Middle Eastern section, look for it online. My favorite one is this Pomegranate Molasses.

Red pepper paste: This is known as biber salçası in Turkish cooking. You can find mild or hot versions, and both work here. If you can’t find it, you can use an equal amount of tomato paste as a substitute, and it will still be delicious.

Most Middle Eastern supermarkets carry it, but if you can’t find it there, you can buy it online. I like Oncu Turkish Mild Pepper Paste, which has great depth without being overly spicy.

Spices: This part of the recipe is the most flexible, and you can get as creative as you want. I use ground cumin, dried mint, black pepper, and red pepper flakes for a little heat.

If you can’t get your hands on dried mint, you can omit using it or use a tablespoon of chopped fresh mint instead.

How to Make Stuffed Onions

If this is your first time making stuffed onions with meat, and it looks like a lot of work, let me assure you, it is not. Once you start stuffing and rolling your first couple of onions, you’ll see quickly that the whole process is actually quite simple.

Below, I am sharing every step of the process with the little things I learned from my mom and from making this Mediterranean dish over the years for my own family:

A collage of images showing the preparation of the onions to make stuffed onions.

Step 1 – Prep the onions: If there’s one part to pay a little extra attention to, it’s this step. We’re trying to separate the layers in one piece as much as we can. Even if a few tear, don’t worry, they still work just fine once they’re stuffed.

Start by cutting off both ends of each onion, peeling the outer skin, and making a single straight cut down to the center without slicing all the way through. Doing this helps the layers loosen easily after boiling. Use a sharp knife here to make it easier on yourself.

Step 2 – Boil the onions: Add the onions to a large pot of water, bring it to a boil, and let it simmer for about 15 minutes.  You don’t want them overly soft, just soft enough that they don’t rip when you start separating the layers later. 

A collage of images showing the onion layers and the beef and rice filling.

Step 3 – Let them cool and separate the layers: Spread the onions out on a plate and let them cool on the counter.

Pro Tip: It takes a while to cool down, especially the inner layers. If you are short on time, you can place them in a colander and run them under cold tap water to speed up cooling. However, it is imperative that you let them drain properly before you start stuffing and rolling them.

When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it. You should have about 20-22 onion layers in the end. 

As you peel off each layer, you’ll notice a thin membrane. If you have the time, remove it; it helps the onions cook more evenly and prevents any chewiness. But if you’re in a pinch, you can skip this step. I’ve made this dish plenty of times, leaving the membrane on, and it still turns out great.

As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the onion cores. Don’t throw them out. We’ll use them in the filling, so put them in a large bowl.

Step 4 – Mix the filling: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C), and while it heats, make the filling. Add the ground beef, rice, red pepper paste, tomato paste, all of the spices and seasoning, pomegranate molasses, and parsley to the bowl with the chopped onion cores.

Using clean hands, give it a good mix so that everything is evenly combined. You’re looking for a mixture that feels slightly sticky and moist but holds together when you press it between your fingers. 

Step 5 – Roll each layer into a little stuffed onion (aka dolma): Place about 1 ½ tablespoons of filling inside each layer and roll it tightly.

Pro Tip: As you stuff and roll, you’ll see that the very outermost layers of the onion are longer than the inner layers. I find that stuffed onions made with these longer layers are a bit chewy, so I cut them in half. This way, all layers are roughly the same size, and every stuffed onion tastes the same after everything is baked.

Stuffed onion in a skillet with the sauce.

Step 6 – Arrange them in the pan: I am using a 3 ½-quart cast iron skillet, but a large casserole dish would also work well. 

Place the stuffed onions in a spiral, starting from the outer edge, tucking each one right up against the next.

You want them close enough to support each other without squeezing them too tightly. In my 12-inch pan, depending on the size of my onions, I can usually fit 18-22 stuffed onions in one spiral layer.

Step 7 – Make the sauce: In a measuring cup, combine olive oil, pomegranate molasses, tomato paste, red pepper paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water. Whisk until everything dissolves. 

Pour the sauce right over the onions. You can cover the pan with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.

Pro Tip: During my recipe testing, I kept thinking the sauce looked like too much. It isn’t. You need that liquid to help the onions and filling cook slowly and evenly, and most of it evaporates in the oven, leaving just the right amount behind.

Stuffed roasted before and after they are baked.

Step 8 – Bake: Place the onions in the oven, covered, for about 30 minutes to soften all the way through. Then uncover the dish and let them brown and caramelize around the edges for another 20 minutes or so.

You’ll see that the remaining liquid will be thicker and reduced almost in half.

Step 9 – Finish with fresh parsley and serve: I love adding a handful of parsley at the end to brighten the entire dish. Serve your baked stuffed onions warm, with extra sauce spooned over the top.

Expert Tips From My Mediterranean Kitchen

Stuffed roasted onions look fancy, but once you understand a few small techniques, the whole process becomes much easier (and more enjoyable).

Here are a few lessons I learned during my recipe testing, along with a few things I learned watching my mom make these when I was growing up in Türkiye.

Don’t over-boil the onions: Keep a close eye on them once they start boiling. Let them simmer just until they become soft enough to bend, usually around 15 minutes. If you cook them too long, the layers become mushy and tear easily when you try to separate them. 

Cool the onions before handling: Letting the onions cool takes some time. If you are in a pinch, you can run them under cold water to speed things up. However, it is imperative that you drain them properly before stuffing.

It is okay to cut long onion layers: The outer layers of the onion are sometimes too long for rolling. If they are, simply slice them in half. Too much onion wrapping around the filling can become chewy after baking.

You do not need extra oil: Some versions of this recipe online (especially on social media) add additional (between ¼ cup to ½ cup) olive oil to the filling. I tested this recipe both ways and did not think it was necessary, especially if you are using 85/15 ground meat.

That said, if you’re using leaner meat, feel free to add ¼ cup olive oil to keep the filling tender and moist.

Use boiling or hot tap water for the sauce: When making the sauce, it is hard to dissolve everything with cold (or even room temperature) water, so I recommend using hot water to make it easier on yourself. 

Use parchment paper or foil to cover: Most Turkish cooks use parchment paper to cover the dish. You need to cut it so it covers the entire surface and stays put. However, aluminum foil can also be used.

Ground beef stuffed onions in a skillet from the top view.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Beef stuffed onions garnished with parsley from the top view.
Print

Stuffed Onions Recipe

This Baked Ground Beef Stuffed Onions recipe is a showstopping main dish made with tender onion layers stuffed with a beef-and-rice filling. Everything bakes in a sweet-tangy pomegranate molasses sauce that caramelizes beautifully in the oven.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Cooling time (for Onions) 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 493kcal

Ingredients

For The Onions

  • 4 large onions ~ 2 ½ lbs
  • Salt

For The Filling

  • ½ lbs ground beef 85-15
  • ½ cup white rice rinsed under hot tap water
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon allspice
  • ½ teaspoon dried mint optional
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes Urfa or Aleppo pepper, optional
  • 1 cup chopped fresh parsley plus more for garnish

For The Sauce

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 ½ cups boiling water or hot tap water

Instructions

  • Cut both ends of the onion and peel them one by one. Slice halfway through to the center without cutting all the way.
  • Fill a medium-sized saucepan with water and add the onions over medium heat. Bring to a boil and simmer for 15 minutes. The leaves will soften, and separate a bit.
  • Using a slotted spoon, carefully remove the onions from the boiling water and transfer them to a plate, and let them cool.
  • When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it, and discard the thin membrane as needed. As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the cores of the onions. Set them aside; we’ll use them in the filling.
  • You should have about 20-22 layers of onions in the end. Set them aside.
  • Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  • While the oven is heating, make the filling. Into a mixing bowl, place ground beef, white rice, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, kosher salt, black pepper, ground cumin, allspice, dried mint, red pepper flakes, and chopped fresh parsley.
  • Chop the reserved onion cores and add them to the bowl. Give it a good mix to ensure everything is fully incorporated.
  • When it is time to stuff, fill each layer of the onion with a tablespoon of the meat filling, then roll tightly. Repeat this process for the remaining onion layers, then arrange them in a spiral pattern in a large skillet or casserole dish.
  • To make the sauce, whisk together olive oil, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water in a measuring cup until combined.
  • Carefully pour the sauce over the stuffed onions. You can cover it with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.
  • Bake in the oven for 30 minutes, then remove the parchment paper and continue baking for an additional 20 minutes, or until onions turn golden brown.
  • Garnish with chopped parsley and serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 18-22 stuffed onions, which is ideal for serving 4 adults, with each adult eating 4-5 stuffed onions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Prep the onions and the filling. Stuff and roll the onions and arrange them in a casserole or skillet. Cover tightly and keep in the fridge for up to 24 hours. When ready to cook, make the sauce and bake as directed.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 493kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 40mg | Sodium: 1353mg | Potassium: 672mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 1596IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 4mg

What to Serve With Stuffed Onions

So you’ve made your beautiful stuffed baked onions. They’re tender, aromatic, and perfectly seasoned. But what should you serve alongside them to turn this into a complete meal?

Below are a few traditional and Mediterranean-inspired pairings to help you serve them the way they’re enjoyed across Türkiye:

Pair them with a cool yogurt sauce: A creamy yogurt sauce is one of the most classic pairings to dolma-style dishes. My Yogurt Dill Sauce adds a bright, herby note with lemon and fresh dill, while my Tzatziki Sauce Recipe is a classic pairing with thick Greek yogurt, cucumber, and garlic. 

Add a refreshing salad: A crisp salad never disappoints. Turkish Shepherd Salad is a traditional go-to with juicy tomatoes, cucumbers, and herbs, especially in the summer months. If you want something a bit more herby, Tabbouleh is another option with lots of fresh herbs.

Serve with rice or pilaf: To make this a little more filling, pair your stuffed onions with a starchy side dish. If you want a Turkish side, my Bulgur Pilaf is a classic, or try my Vermicelli Rice, another staple you’ll often see served alongside dishes like this in many Mediterranean restaurants. And if you want a gluten-free option, Lemon Quinoa brings a fresh, zesty note without overpowering the main dish.

How to Make Ahead, Store & Reheat 

One of the things I love most about this stuffed onion recipe is that you can make it ahead, and it tastes better the next day.  The flavors magically deepen as they sit, which makes it an ideal recipe for make-ahead dinners, holiday prep, or easy leftovers. 

Here’s how I do it:

Make Ahead: You have two make-ahead options:

  • You can prepare, stuff, and roll all the onions, arrange them in your pan, and refrigerate them unbaked, without the sauce, for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to cook, simply mix the tomato sauce, pour it over the onions, and bake as directed.
  • Alternatively, you can bake them completely a day ahead. Let them cool, cover tightly, and refrigerate. Just pop them in the oven to warm thoroughly, sprinkle with fresh herbs, and serve!

Storage: Once baked, let the stuffed onions cool completely before storing. Transfer them to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 4 days. 

Reheat: Reheat the stuffed onions in a 350°F (177°C) oven, loosely covered with parchment or foil, for 10-15 minutes, or just until warmed through. You can also microwave them if needed, but the oven keeps the texture softer and more consistent.

Freezing: Stuffed onions freeze very well. Once completely cooled, place them in an airtight container and freeze for up to 2 months. For the best texture, thaw them overnight in the refrigerator, then reheat.

FAQs

Can I make this recipe vegetarian?

Yes, you can make a vegetarian version. Simply increase the rice to 2 cups and add 3 tablespoons of extra-virgin olive oil to the filling. It is not traditional, but some cooked lentils or mushrooms can be added to the mixture to make it even more satisfying.

What if my onion layers fall apart?

This usually happens when the onions are overcooked. Boil them just until they’re soft enough to bend, but not mushy. Using firm, fresh onions also helps because the layers are sturdier.

Can I make stuffed onions ahead of time?

Yes. To do so, stuff the onions, arrange them in the baking dish, cover tightly, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to serve, simply add the sauce and bake.

Can I use brown rice?

Technically, yes, but it takes much longer to cook and stays much firmer inside the onions. For best results, stick with white rice (long-, medium-, or short-grain). If using brown rice, soak it for at least 1 hour to soften it before adding it to the filling mixture.

Can I use red or white onions?

Yes. Red, white, or yellow onions will all work for this recipe. Just make sure the onions you choose are fresh, firm, and not soft, so the layers hold up well when boiling and rolling.

How is this recipe different than Greek Stuffed Onions?

While the concept is pretty similar, the Greek version of this recipe does not use pomegranate molasses. It is also often made with ground pork, but, similar to my recipe here, ground beef and ground lamb can be good substitutes for pork.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You’ll Love

If these meat-stuffed onions made you curious to try more, I invite you to check out a few of my favorite recipes from the Mediterranean and Middle Eastern regions below:

  • If make-ahead meat dishes are your favorite, try my Greek Lamb Meatballs for an easy dinner or a quick appetizer.
  • You’ve probably seen the Doner Kebab recipe going viral on social media. It takes the century-old classic recipe and turns it into a weeknight dinner with a clever shortcut.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/feed/ 0
Thanksgiving Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/#respond Mon, 24 Nov 2025 20:47:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=84688 Ingredients You’ll Need You’ll need two sets of ingredients for this festive fruit salad recipe: Mostly fall fruits for the…]]>
Aysegul from the front view.

When I think about Thanksgiving, my mind immediately goes to the turkey, all the cozy vegetable sides, and of course, the pies. What we do not often think about is having something on the lighter side.

I first made this fall fruit salad a few years ago for a big family gathering where we had both kids and older relatives at the table. 

The pies still stole the show, but a few people quietly thanked me for having an option that felt a little lighter without taking away from the holiday spirit. I especially love it because:

  • It uses a mix of everyday fall fruit like apples, pears, oranges, and pomegranates that you probably have on hand.
  • The maple-citrus dressing comes together quickly and helps keep the apples and pears from browning.

Yes, there is a bit of chopping, but once everything is in the bowl, it adds something fresh to all the richer dishes on the table.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need two sets of ingredients for this festive fruit salad recipe: Mostly fall fruits for the salad and just a few basic ingredients for the dressing.

You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card, and below are some notes from my recipe testing. 

Fruit Salad Ingredients

Fruits used in the recipe in small bowls from the top view.

Apples: You can easily make this fall fruit salad with one variety of apples, but if you have it, combining two types, like Gala or Honeycrisp with Fuji, gives a way better balance of sweetness and texture. If you prefer a little tartness, you can also mix in one Granny Smith apple. There are no strict rules here, just pick apples that are firm and not overly ripe.

Pears: The same principle goes for pears as well. Bartlet and Anjou are my favorites, but any type would work. When shopping, choose pears that are ripe but still firm so they hold their shape in the salad. 

Grapes: I’m using seedless green grapes for their sweet-tart flavor, but red grapes would work as well. Go with whichever you like best, but I recommend choosing seedless grapes for the best texture in the salad. I like to cut them in half, but if they are too large, you can quarter them as well.

Oranges: Any type of oranges, Navel, Cara Cara, or even Blood Oranges would work beautifully in this autumn fruit salad recipe. You can cut them into small cubes or section them if you have a few extra minutes.

If you need a shortcut, you can also use canned mandarin oranges, but keep in mind that most brands have added sugars, so your Thanksgiving fruit salad will be sweeter. Regardless, if you go down that route, be sure to drain them well.

Kiwi: Look for kiwi that is a little soft when you press it, soft enough to be sweet, but not mushy.

Pomegranate seeds: I love adding pomegranate to this salad because it feels so festive and adds a bright, tart flavor. You can certainly de-seed it yourself, but nowadays, stores sell fresh arils ready to use, which is definitely a good time saver.

If you do not have pomegranate seeds or prefer an alternative, dried cranberries are a good substitute. The dried fruit would give a welcome chewiness and a bit more sweetness to the overall recipe.

Pecans: This is my secret ingredient. The salad tasted good the first time I tried it without pecans, but once I added them, it completely transformed the dish, taking it to a whole other level. They add the best crunch. Walnuts could work too, but pecans are my favorite here.

If you prefer a nut-free option, you can omit it or use pumpkin seeds instead.

Dressing Ingredients

The dressing for this salad is light and simple, and the best part is that it comes together in less than a minute. You will need:

The dressing ingredients from the top view.

Maple syrup: You can use either maple syrup or honey in this dressing. I also recommend adjusting the amount based on how sweet your fruit is. If your fruit is very sweet, you may want a little less, and vice versa.

Orange juice: I use freshly squeezed orange juice because it not only flavors the salad but also helps keep the apples and pears from browning with its acidity. You could also use store-bought orange juice, just make sure to choose one without added sugars since both the fruit and maple syrup are already plenty sweet.

Ground cinnamon: I’m using it here because it complements the fall fruits very well, but you can also use apple pie spice or pumpkin pie spice if you prefer a slightly different fall flavor.

How to Make Fruit Salad For Thanksgiving

When I first tested this recipe, I chopped all the fruit, set it in a bowl, and then mixed the dressing. The apples and pears started browning right away, which wasn’t ideal.

What worked so much better was starting with the dressing in a large bowl, then adding the fruit as I cut it. The acid in the orange juice helps slow browning and keeps everything looking fresh. So, grab a big bowl and follow along.

A collage of images showing the steps of make the dressing and adding the apples and pears in there.

Step 1 – Make the dressing: Add the maple syrup, orange zest, orange juice, vanilla extract, and cinnamon to a large salad bowl, whisking until well combined.

Step 2 – Prep and add the fruit: Once the dressing is ready, start chopping the fruit. I like to start with apples and pears first so I can ensure they interact with the acid in the bowl, which slows browning. From there, you can continue with kiwi, pomegranate seeds, oranges, and grapes.

Gently toss all your fruit to coat it with the dressing.

Thanksgiving fruit salad recipe in a bowl before and after it is mixed.

Step 3 – Add the pecans and garnish: Right before serving, add the pecans to keep them crisp. If you want to add a little color and freshness, add a handful of torn fresh mint leaves. Give everything one last gentle toss, and it’s ready to serve.

Make-Ahead, Storage & Serving Tips

While this Thanksgiving fruit salad is always best the day it’s made, you can also prepare it in advance if you coat the fruit well with the citrus dressing. Here’s how to make it ahead, store it, and serve it so it still tastes fresh:

Make ahead: You can prepare this fruit salad 2-3 days in advance, which is especially helpful for busy holiday cooking. Just be sure your apples and pears are well coated in the citrus dressing, as the orange juice helps prevent them from browning. I also keep the pecans separate until right before serving so they don’t get soggy.

Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator. It will taste its best within the first 2-3 days. If the fruit looks a little soft after it’s been in the fridge, a squeeze of fresh orange juice or lemon juice, or a small drizzle of maple syrup or honey, brightens it back up.

Freezing: I do not recommend freezing fruit salad. The fruit becomes mushy once thawed and loses its fresh texture.

Expert Tips for Perfect Fruit Salad for Your Thanksgiving Table

Slightly ripened fruit works best: When shopping for this recipe, take a few minutes to pick fruit that’s ripe but not overly soft. You want that sweet-juicy moment when you bite in, without the fruit turning mushy once everything is mixed.

Coat apples and pears in citrus right away: Apples and pears oxidize quickly, so I always mix the orange dressing in the bottom of the bowl first, then add the apples and pears. The citrus coats the fruit the moment it goes in, keeping it fresh.

Cut the fruit into equal sizes: Aim for roughly ½-inch bite-sized pieces so the salad feels balanced and you get a little bit of everything in each bite.

Add pecans right before serving: Pecans soften if they sit in the dressing too long, so add them in at the end. If you have a few extra minutes and want to take this fall fruit salad recipe up a notch, toast your pecans in a dry pan for a few minutes to bring out more of their earthy flavors.

Use a mix of seasonal colors and textures: It’s optional, but I really encourage you to play with different varieties of fruit. For example, instead of sticking to one type of orange, try using both a Navel and a Cara Cara. You can do the same with apples and pears. It gives the salad a nicer mix of textures and a little more interest in every bite.

Chill before serving: Refrigerating the salad for 10-15 minutes before serving is optional, but it makes this fruit salad even more refreshing.

Serve in small jars: When I make this for Thanksgiving or Friendsgiving, I like to spoon it into little jars, almost like jam jars. It makes it easier because it is already portioned out. Plus, your guests won’t have to worry about it getting lost on a crowded plate.

Fruit salad for Thanksgiving in a bowl from the top view.

What to Serve It With

This autumn fruit salad is versatile and pairs well with so many things, whether you’re serving it to kids, having it for breakfast, or adding it to a holiday spread. Here are a few ideas:

  • If you’re serving this to kids, you can add my Fruit Dip Recipe on the side. It makes the salad feel more like a treat and is always a favorite with little ones.
  • You can also spoon some fruit salad over a bowl of  Vanilla Yogurt for a quick breakfast or snack. 
  • And if you want to take things up a notch for the holidays, serve the fruit salad with a dollop of my light and airy Maple Whipped Cream. It adds just the right touch of sweetness, making the whole dish feel extra special.

FAQs

How do you keep fruit salad from turning brown?

The best way to prevent apples and pears from browning is to coat them with an acidic ingredient, such as orange juice, which helps slow down the oxidation.

Can I make a fruit salad the night before?

Yes, this fruit salad holds up well when made the night before. Just be sure the apples and pears are fully coated in the orange juice mixture (to prevent them from browning), then give the salad a gentle toss before serving.

What fruits should I avoid in fruit salad?

Most people don’t like adding bananas to fruit salads because they turn mushy as they sit. In my opinion, it is a personal preference, and there are no strict rules. Instead, the important thing is to pick fruit that is neither overly ripe nor soft, and vice versa.

Can I use canned fruit in Thanksgiving fruit salad?

Yes, you technically can. However, keep in mind that most canned fruit is packed in a sugary liquid or juice, which will make your fruit salad sweeter. If you decide to go down that route, be sure to adjust the amount of maple syrup you use in the dressing so it is not overly sweet.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Fruit Salads You Might Like

If you enjoyed this Thanksgiving fruit salad, here are a few more fresh and delicious fruit salads I think you’ll love:

  • If you want something light to enjoy in the mornings, my Breakfast Fruit Salad is a simple recipe you can also make ahead. It’s easy to make and perfect for quick breakfasts or weekend brunch.
  • For something more festive, my Christmas Fruit Salad includes a mix of seasonal fruit tossed in a similar maple-citrus dressing. It’s a great way to add a pop of festive color to your Christmas celebrations.
Thanksgiving fruit salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Thanksgiving Fruit Salad Recipe

A crowd pleaser, this Thanksgiving Fruit Salad is a lighter addition to your dessert lineup made with fall fruits like apples, pears, oranges, and pomegranate arils. No cooking required and comes together quickly.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 208kcal

Ingredients

For the dressing:

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
  • 1 teaspoon orange zest
  • ½ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • teaspoon ground cinnamon or apple spice

For the fruit:

  • 2 medium apples cut into cubes ~ 3 cups
  • 2 medium pears cut into cubes ~ 3 cups
  • 1 cup seedless green grapes cut in half
  • 1 cup pomegranate arils
  • 2 oranges cut into small pieces ~ 2 cups
  • 1 kiwi cut into cubes ~ ½ cup
  • 1 cup pecans or walnuts

Optional Garnish:

  • A handful of fresh mint leaves torn

Instructions

  • To make the dressing, mix together maple syrup, orange zest, orange juice, vanilla extract, and cinnamon in a large bowl until combined.
  • Add in the cubed apples and pears to the bowl and give it a quick toss to ensure they are coated with the dressing (aka the acid in the orange juice) to prevent browning.
  • Then add in the grapes, pomegranate arils, oranges, and kiwi to the bowl. Toss to combine.
  • When ready to serve, add the pecans and toss. If using, garnish with fresh mint leaves and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 8-9 cups of fruit salad, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: You can make this recipe a day (or two) in advance. Just follow the recipe as written (except adding the pecans and mint garnish), place in an airtight container, and store it in the fridge. When ready to serve, transfer it to a serving platter and garnish with pecans and fresh mint leaves, if using.

Nutrition

Calories: 208kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 361mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 171IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 44mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/feed/ 0
Compound Butter for Turkey https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/ https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/#comments Fri, 14 Nov 2025 13:45:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78361 Ingredients You’ll Need With Substitution Ideas The key ingredients in this compound butter recipe have the perfect balance of fresh…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from front view.

Growing up in Türkiye, we did not celebrate Thanksgiving, so I learned how to cook a turkey as an adult after moving to the U.S. more than 20 years ago. Over the years, watching more experienced cooks and learning from a few dry turkeys myself, I discovered one very important truth:

There is a tiny window between juicy perfection and dry disappointment.

So I started focusing on the techniques that truly keep turkey moist. One option is using a Turkey Injection to add seasoning and moisture inside the meat, but I also wanted an option that was easier and required no special tools.

That is where this compound butter, which I specifically created for turkey, comes in.

In the simplest terms, it is softened butter mixed with herbs, garlic, and spices that slowly melts under the skin as the turkey roasts, keeping the meat juicy and helping the skin turn beautifully golden and crisp.

To me, this make-ahead friendly recipe is a simple shortcut with big rewards. And in this post, I will walk you through everything you need to know, from the herbs and spices to use to the easiest way to spread it under the skin so you can confidently cook a tender, flavorful, perfectly browned turkey that everyone will love.

Ingredients You’ll Need With Substitution Ideas

The key ingredients in this compound butter recipe have the perfect balance of fresh herbs, citrus, and garlic, resulting in a perfectly seasoned turkey. You can find the exact measurements and the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few important notes from my testing:

Ingredients for butter mixture for turkey.

Unsalted butter: I like to use unsalted butter to control the amount of salt. With that said, you can use salted butter and reduce the salt to ¾ teaspoon.

Fresh herbs (or dried herbs): Fresh herbs will give you the best flavor. I like adding fresh rosemary, fresh thyme, and fresh sage, but you can also incorporate soft herbs like fresh parsley or chives.

While I recommend using fresh herbs, dried ones can also be used as an alternative. Use the chart below when substituting:

For 1 Stick (4 oz) of ButterDried Herb/Seasoning Equivalent
1 tbsp fresh rosemary1 tsp dried rosemary
1 tbsp fresh rhyme1 tsp dried thyme
1 tsp fresh sage1/3 tsp dried sage
2 cloves fresh garlic1/2 tsp garlic powder

How to Make Compound Butter for Turkey (Step-by-Step)

Once your ingredients are ready, this recipe can be prepared in under 5 minutes. Here’s how to make it step by step:

A collage of images showing how to make butter seasoning for turkey.

Step 1 – Mix butter, herbs, and garlic: In a small bowl, combine softened butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Mash the herbs into the butter with the back of a fork or a rubber spatula until well combined, for about 1 minute. If you’re using salted butter, just reduce the Kosher salt slightly.

A collage of images showing how to roll compound butter for thanksgiving turkey.

Step 2 – Use immediately or shape into a log: At this point, your turkey compound butter recipe is ready to use. You can use it right away or roll it up for later use. 

If you are planning to use it later, place the butter on a sheet of parchment paper or plastic wrap. Then shape it into a log, wrap it tightly, and refrigerate for at least 3 hours.

Pro tip: I like to twist the ends of the parchment like a candy wrapper. It helps the butter keep its shape and makes it super easy to slice later.

Make-Ahead, Storage, and Freezing Tips

One of the reasons I love using this compound butter for Thanksgiving turkey is that it can be made ahead of time, and it stores well. Here’s how I do it:

Make Ahead and Storage: Prepare the butter as directed, then shape it into a log and wrap it tightly in parchment or plastic wrap. I like to do a double wrap (plastic wrap followed by an airtight container) to keep it fresh and prevent it from picking up any fridge odors. It will keep well in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

Freezing: Follow the same wrapping steps and store the butter in a freezer-safe bag or container for up to 3 months.

Thawing: When you’re ready to use it, take it out of the freezer and let it sit at room temperature for about 1 hour, or until it softens enough to slice and spread.

Sliced Thanksgiving turkey compound butter with a knife on the side.

How to Apply Compound Butter Under Turkey Skin (Step-by-Step)

Now that our compound butter is ready, it’s time to put it to use. If it’s your first time spreading compound butter under the turkey skin, don’t worry, as it’s easier than it looks.

A person showing how to place butter and herbs under skin for turkey.

Step 1 – Dry the skin: Let your turkey rest at room temperature for about an hour before you start. This is critical because cold skin is rigid and prone to tearing, but a rested bird’s skin will loosen up and be much more forgiving.

Set your turkey on a clean cutting board and pat the skin dry with paper towels on all sides. This will help the butter stick better and ensure that it crisps up beautifully in the oven. 

Step 2 – Loosen the skin: Locate the neck opening and gently slide your fingers between the skin and meat to loosen it. 

If you feel resistance, stop immediately. Instead of forcing separation, gently wiggle your fingers so that it is loose enough to push the butter under the skin.

Step 3 – Apply the butter: Take about two tablespoons of your turkey butter herb rub and spread it under the skin, focusing on the breast and thighs. Spread it as evenly as possible by massaging the entire bird, including both the under and outer skin. 

Don’t worry about it being perfect, as the butter will melt while the turkey roasts.

Step 4 – Roast the turkey: Place the prepared turkey in a roasting pan with aromatics such as onions, carrots, and celery.

Compound Butter vs. Dry Rub: Which is Best for Your Turkey?

I’ll be honest, when it comes to seasoning the whole bird, this turkey compound butter recipe is my go-to. However, it is not the only way. If you are wondering whether to use this herbed butter or opt for my Homemade Turkey Rub, the choice comes down to your goal:

  • Choose Compound Butter for:
    • Maximum Moisture and Juiciness: The fat melts beneath the skin, self-basting the white meat throughout the long cooking time, which is key to a tender breast.
    • Golden-Brown Skin: The butter is brushed over the skin, which helps brown the turkey beautifully and develop a rich, buttery flavor.
    • Make-Ahead Simplicity: You can prepare this compound butter days in advance, saving time on Thanksgiving day.
  • Choose a Turkey Dry Rub for:
    • Ultra-Crispy Skin: A dry rub acts as a dry brine, helping to draw moisture from the skin and give you an extra-crispy exterior.
    • Convenience & Speed: If you are short on time and need a quick way to add seasoning, the dry rub is much faster to apply than the compound butter.

FAQs

How much compound butter do I need for turkey?

Over the years of using this compound butter when making our Thanksgiving turkey, I learned that 8 tablespoons (1 stick or 4 ounces) is enough for a bird that is up to 12 pounds, which is about ¾ tablespoon per pound. The important thing here is even distribution under and over the skin without overdoing it.
For a larger bird, you can easily multiply the recipe. If your turkey is between 12 and 18 pounds, multiply the ingredients by 1.5 times.

When should I butter my turkey?

It’s best to butter the turkey right before roasting. Applying the butter just before it goes in the oven helps the skin get crispy while the meat stays juicy and tender throughout cooking.

How to make butter stick to turkey?

If the butter isn’t spreading easily, it’s usually because the turkey skin is damp or the butter is too cold. I like to take the turkey out of the fridge about 1 hour before roasting and pat the skin completely dry with paper towels before adding the butter.

Can I add compound butter to the turkey cavity?

I’ve found it’s best to spread the butter under and over the skin rather than inside the cavity. That way, it melts evenly and keeps the skin golden instead of soggy.

Expert Tips for the Best Compound Butter for Turkey

If this is your first time making compound butter, these notes from several rounds of testing will help you get it just right every time:

  • Use softened butter: Let the butter sit at room temperature for about an hour, until it’s soft and spreadable. If it’s too firm, it won’t blend smoothly with the herbs and seasoning.
  • Rinse and dry your herbs: If you’re using fresh herbs, wash and dry them thoroughly before mincing, as they can hold onto moisture, which makes the butter watery. I like to place the washed herbs between two pieces of paper towels to absorb excess moisture; alternatively, put them in a salad spinner to remove as much liquid as possible.
  • Mince herbs finely: Chop your herbs as finely as possible to ensure they distribute evenly throughout the butter. 
  • A word on using fresh garlic and botulism: When using fresh garlic to make compound butter, keep in mind that a foodborne illness called botulism can occur if garlic is stored at temperatures between 50 °F (10 °C) and 113 °F (45 °C).  Therefore, be sure to keep this seasoned butter in the refrigerator unless you plan to use it within the next hour or so.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Delicious Ways to Use Compound Butter (Turkey and Beyond)

Now that you have this perfect turkey butter prepared, it’s ready to transform your Thanksgiving centerpiece. In fact, this is what I use in my Butter Herb Roasted Turkey and Roasted Turkey Breast recipes.

That being said, just because I’m featuring this compound butter for turkey does not mean it cannot be used in other ways. It is truly the perfect finishing touch to many different meals. Here are a few suggestions:

  • Grilled or Roasted Meat Recipes: It’s hard to find a steakhouse that doesn’t serve a slice of compound butter over their hot, juicy steaks. Make a restaurant-quality meal at home by serving rounds of herb butter on top of Grilled Steak, Beef Tenderloin, or Roasted Chicken Breast.
  • Seafood: Don’t you love a warm, garlicky butter with seafood? Use this herb butter mix to elevate Grilled Salmon or Grilled Shrimp.
  • Roasted or Grilled Vegetables: You can truly elevate the flavor of roasted vegetables with this compound butter. Serve it as the topping for Grilled Corn or finish Roasted Butternut Squash with a few melting spoonfuls of this butter.
  • Bread: Butter and bread are a classic pair. Spread a few thin rounds over warm slices of my  Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread, or use it as the butter base when making my Air Fryer Garlic Bread.
Thanksgiving butter with herbs sliced.
Print

Compound Butter for Turkey Recipe

Here's a fantastic compound butter for turkey that you can make in minutes. This is probably the easiest way to flavor your Thanksgiving turkey with succulent flavors from fresh (or dried) herbs, garlic, and lemon zest. Make ahead friendly, this recipe is my secret sauce for properly seasoned and moist turkey.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 8 tablespoons
Calories 104kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 oz unsalted butter 1 stick – at room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary finely minced or 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme finely minced or 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon fresh sage finely minced or ⅓ teaspoon dried sage
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic finely minced or pressed
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place the softened butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, kosher salt, and pepper in a bowl. Mix until well combined using a fork.
  • You can use it right away, or you can turn your compound butter into a log. If you are not using it right away, transfer the butter mixture onto a piece of parchment paper or stretch film and shape it into a log.*
  • Wrap it tightly so it holds its shape. Transfer it to the fridge and let it rest for at least 3 hours.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 tablespoons (4 ounces) of compound butter, which is ideal for a turkey that weighs 10-12 pounds. If your bird is larger, you can multiply the recipe and vice versa. The calorie information below is for one tablespoon.
  • *If it is too soft, you might have to chill it in the fridge for 30 minutes before rolling
  • Make Ahead and Storage: Prepare the butter mixture as directed. Follow the instructions to shape it into a log and wrap it tightly. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for five days.
  • Freezing: Store it in a freezer-safe container or freezer bag for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight, and be sure to take it out of the fridge at least an hour before use.

Nutrition

Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 15mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.02g | Vitamin A: 403IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 0.2mg
Thanksgiving compound butter in a bowl from the top view.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/feed/ 2
Easy Mashed Sweet Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/easy-mashed-sweet-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-mashed-sweet-potatoes/#comments Tue, 04 Nov 2025 20:24:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15392 Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Work This recipe requires only four main ingredients, plus a few optional add-ins. You…]]>

This is the only way I make mashed sweet potatoes.

Aysegul

When it comes to Thanksgiving side dishes, I have a few go-to recipes, and this creamy sweet potato mash has been one of them for over 10 years. I first came across the recipe in Cook’s Illustrated, and it has never let me down.

What I love most is its flexibility. You can make it right before serving dinner, or prepare it ahead of time and reheat it without losing any of its creaminess. I usually keep it simple, but it’s also the perfect base for adding your own twist, whether you prefer a sweet touch with maple syrup or a savory one with herbs and spices.

Over the years, I’ve tried it both slightly sweet and boldly savory, and it always turns out creamy and delicious. I don’t know about you, but for me, this is the best kind of recipe I need for the holidays: easy, reliable, and open to your own creativity.

Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Work

This recipe requires only four main ingredients, plus a few optional add-ins. You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes from my testing:

Ingredients from the top view with text on each one.

Sweet Potatoes: I use the standard sweet potatoes commonly found at most U.S. grocery stores. The most popular kinds are Jewel or Garnet; they both work in this recipe and offer a naturally sweet taste and creamy texture. 

Look for firm ones with smooth skin and no visible bruises. Peel them and cut into similar-sized chunks so they cook evenly.

Unsalted Butter: I used unsalted butter so I can adjust the salt myself, but salted butter can also be used. If you want to make these mashed potatoes dairy-free, you can swap in your favorite vegan butter.

Heavy Cream: If you look at the recipe below, you might think that only 2 tablespoons of heavy cream won’t be enough to cook all the potatoes, but it is. Both sweet potatoes and butter will release their juices, which is plenty to steam them in the pan.

While it won’t be as creamy, you can substitute it with half-and-half, regular milk, or almond milk for a vegan option.

Seasonings: I keep it basic with kosher salt and black pepper. However, if you want a hint of warmth, add a pinch of ground cinnamon and a touch of nutmeg; they both pair particularly well with sweet potatoes.

Maple Syrup (Optional): I personally love how it brings out the natural sweetness of the potatoes, but if you prefer not to add any sweeteners, you can leave it out.

How to Make Mashed Sweet Potatoes

When it comes to mashed sweet potatoes, the first question that always arises is: should you bake, steam, or boil them? While there are recipes for each, over the years of making this creamy sweet potato mash, I’ve found that the easiest and most reliable way is none of those. 

Instead, cooking cubed sweet potatoes right in the pan with a bit of butter and cream is the right answer. 

Images showing the adding of sweet potatoes, cream and butter to the pan.

Step 1 – Cook the Sweet Potatoes: Place the peeled and cubed sweet potatoes in a large pot with butter, cream, a splash of maple syrup, and salt and pepper. There’s no need to add water as the potatoes release their own liquid as they cook. 

Next, cover the pan with a tight lid so they can steam. This step is important because it keeps the potatoes from drying out. Stir every so often to keep them from sticking to the bottom.

Also, keep in mind that this whole process is quite quick, so keep a close eye on it.

Person showing how to mash sweet potatoes after they are cooked.

Step 2 – Mash To Your Liking: Once the potatoes are soft and tender, mash them right in the pot. I like to use a potato masher or even a fork for a more chunky texture.
For a perfectly smooth consistency, consider using an immersion blender or a potato mill.

Easy mashed sweet potatoes garnished with butter and pecans in a bowl.

Step 3 – Season and Serve: Taste the mash and add a little more salt or pepper, as needed. Then, transfer it to a serving bowl and finish with your favorite garnish.

Expert Tips for the Best Mashed Sweet Potatoes

Although this sweet mashed potatoes recipe is as simple as it gets, a few tricks will help you achieve the best results. Here are my notes from making it over the years:

  • Potato masher vs. food processor: A masher works perfectly for a more rustic texture. If you use a food processor, pulse instead of blending continuously, so the mash stays creamy rather than gluey.
  • Use a pot with a tight-fitting lid: The lid helps the potatoes steam in their own juices, which makes them creamy without the need for extra liquid.
  • Keep a close eye on it: This recipe comes together quickly, usually in about 20 minutes. Keep the heat at medium to medium-low and give them a stir a couple of times. Potatoes cook quicker than you think, and if they are left alone, they can stick to the bottom.
  • Cut the potatoes the same size: This helps them cook evenly, so you don’t end up with some pieces still firm while others are mushy.

FAQs

Why are my mashed sweet potatoes watery?

With many recipes, this occurs when the potatoes are boiled but not drained properly. Since this recipe cooks the potatoes in their own juices, you don’t have to worry about excess water.

How do I fix a dry mash?

If the mash feels too thick, stir in a splash of warm cream or milk until it reaches to your desired level of consistency.

Can I use yams instead?

I do not recommend using yams in this recipe. Here in the US, most people refer to sweet potatoes as yams but they are not the same thing. True yams are very starchy with a mild flavor so they won’t deliver the same results.

Serving Suggestions

This is one of my go-to Thanksgiving sides, and it pairs beautifully with both holiday favorites and simple weeknight meals. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Mashed sweet potatoes in a bowl garnished with butter and thyme.
Print

Easy Mashed Sweet Potatoes Recipe

Most mashed sweet potato recipes boil the sweet potatoes, and while that is a good approach, it takes a long time, and you lose most of the flavor in the boiling water. My recipe here cooks them in a pot along with a bit of butter and heavy cream. The result is a super creamy sweet potato mash that comes together in under 30 minutes.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 343kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter cut into 4 pieces, extra for topping if preferred
  • 2 tablespoons heavy cream
  • 2 pounds sweet potatoes 3 medium-sized , peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 teaspoon maple syrup optional
  • 3/4 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon pecans as garnish – optional
  • 1 teaspoon fresh herbs thyme or parsley, chopped – optional

Instructions

  • Place butter, heavy cream, sweet potatoes, maple syrup, salt, and black pepper in a medium-sized saucepan with a tight fitting lid.
    Person pouring in heavy cream into saucepan.
  • Stir well to combine.
    Person mashing sweet potatoes with a potato masher.
  • Cook, stirring occasionally, over low heat until sweet potatoes are soft (almost falling apart), 15-20 minutes. You can check doneness by inserting a knife into a sweet potato. If it comes in and out easily, it should be ready to mash.
    Person checking the doneness of a sweet potato cube with a knife.
  • Using a potato masher (or a fork), mash the potatoes. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    Person mashing sweet potatoes with a potato masher.
  • Place in a bowl or a plate (like I did) and garnish with pecans and/or butter.
    Mashed sweet potatoes in a bowl garnished with butter, thyme, and pecans.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields approximately 4-5 cups of mashed sweet potatoes, enough to serve 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make-Ahead: You can prepare the mashed sweet potatoes 1 to 2 days in advance of serving. Simply let them cool completely, then store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: There are a few simple ways to warm them up:
    • Stovetop: Warm them gently over low heat with a splash of cream or butter until they reach your desired consistency. Stir frequently to prevent it from sticking to the bottom of the pot.
    • Oven: Place them in an oven-safe dish, cover loosely with foil, and let them warm up for about 10-15 minutes. 
  • Freezing: You can also freeze it in a freezer-safe container or bag for up to 2 months. Just thaw it overnight in the fridge and reheat to enjoy.

Nutrition

Calories: 343kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 39mg | Sodium: 565mg | Potassium: 791mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 32640IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 81mg | Iron: 1mg

Holiday Variations and Garnish Ideas

I usually garnish with a couple of pecans, but this mash is super flexible. Here are some of my favorite ways to spice it up:

For a sweet version: You can garnish with cinnamon, brown sugar, roasted marshmallows, or add a little extra maple syrup. A touch of fresh orange zest or lime zest are also good options.

For a savory version: Mix in a small clove of roasted garlic (or try this quick air fryer roasted garlic) and a small amount of fresh herbs like fresh thyme or rosemary. You can also add a sprinkle of shredded parmesan and a handful of fresh chives. 

For the holidays: If you want to take it up a notch for Christmas or Thanksgiving, I recommend browning the butter. Before adding the sweet potatoes to the pot, let the butter simmer until browned. 

You can also garnish with candied bacon or toasted pumpkin seeds for crunch.

Maple sweetened easy mashed sweet potato recipe placed on an oval dish served with pecans

More Sweet Potato Recipes 

If you are like me and can’t get enough of sweet potatoes, here are a few more recipes I make every year around the holidays:

  • My adaptation of Trisha Yearwood’s Sweet Potato Soufflé Recipe has been one of the most popular holiday potato recipes on the blog, thanks to its thick butter and pecan streusel-like topping.
  • If you’re looking for something both sweet and savory, try my Sweet Potato Stacks. It’s baked thin slices of sweet potatoes that are perfect for brunch, dinner, or any holiday meal.
  • And if you’re craving something warm and comforting, this Vegan Sweet Potato Soup is silky, spiced with ginger and carrots, and perfect as either a holiday starter or a simple weeknight meal.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-mashed-sweet-potatoes/feed/ 18
Roasted Brussels Sprouts with Tahini Yogurt Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-tahini-yogurt-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-tahini-yogurt-sauce/#respond Sat, 01 Nov 2025 19:45:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=84257 Ingredients You’ll Need This baked Brussels sprouts recipe might seem a little fancy at first, but I promise it’s simpler…]]>

Roasted Brussels Sprouts with a Mediterranean Twist

Aysegul

Let’s face it, perfectly crispy and tender roasted Brussels sprouts already have their place on the holiday table, but why not spend 5 more minutes to give them a little Mediterranean flair and turn them into a showstopper? 

Growing up in Turkiye, I learned how a few simple ingredients, such as olive oil, Greek yogurt, garlic, and tahini, can transform even the most familiar dishes into something a bit more thoughtful and creative.

This crispy Brussels sprouts recipe follows that same philosophy: an easy way to take a holiday classic and elevate it with bold, balanced flavors, all without adding any extra stress to your cooking routine.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This baked Brussels sprouts recipe might seem a little fancy at first, but I promise it’s simpler than it looks. You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing to make sure it all comes together perfectly:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

For the Brussels sprouts: 

Brussels Sprouts: When shopping, take the time to choose firm, bright green sprouts that are similar in size so they roast evenly. 

Seasoning: I kept the Brussels sprouts seasoning simple with paprika, ground cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper. 

For the Tahini Yogurt Sauce:

The Tahini Yogurt Sauce recipe I am using in this baked Brussels sprout recipe is one of the first recipes I learned from my mom. It is also a staple in many Mediterranean kitchens.

Greek Yogurt: I recommend using a thick Greek yogurt instead of regular yogurt. It’ll give you a creamier texture and will spread smoothly.

Tahini: I really like Soom’s tahini because it’s super creamy, smooth, and easy to work with. Be sure to give your tahini a good stir and a quick taste before using it, as the flavor and texture can vary between brands.

Garlic: I am using freshly minced garlic, but if you prefer a milder taste, you can use ¼ teaspoon of garlic powder as an alternative, or simply omit it.

For Garnish:

Pine Nuts: Taking the time to toast the pine nuts makes all the difference, and it’s, in my opinion, what takes this oven-roasted Brussels sprouts recipe to the next level. 

Toasting them is so easy! Simply add them to a dry skillet and toast over medium heat for 4-5 minutes, stirring often, until they’re golden and fragrant. 

Pomegranate Arils: I am using them to add a festive color, more texture, and to balance the creaminess of the sauce. In a pinch, dried cranberries can be used as a substitute.

Pomegranate Molasses (optional): If you can get your hands on it, a drizzle of pomegranate molasses is a classic Mediterranean finishing touch. Alternatively, you can use balsamic glaze as a substitute. It will have a different flavor profile but will still taste delicious.

How to Make Crispy Roasted Brussels Sprouts: Oven Method

The secret to getting that irresistible crisp edge and tender center is high heat, space on the pan, and a touch of olive oil. Here’s exactly how I roast Brussels sprouts so they come out golden and crisp every single time:

Person arranging Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan.

Step 1 – Prep the Brussels Sprouts: Preheat your oven to 425°F (204°C) and line a sheet pan with parchment paper. Trim the ends of each Brussels sprout and slice them in half. Transfer the sprouts to the pan and drizzle them with extra virgin olive oil, and sprinkle with paprika, ground cumin, salt, and pepper.

Person seasoning Brussels sprouts with ground cumin and paprika on a sheet pan.

Step 2 – Arrange the Sprouts Cut-Side Down for Maximum Caramelization: This may seem like an extra step, but it’s crucial for achieving the best texture. Flip each sprout cut-side down and make sure they’re spaced evenly on the pan. When the flat sides touch the hot pan, they caramelize beautifully. Otherwise, the moisture will trap and steam them instead.

Freshly roasted Brussels sprouts from the top view.

Step 3 – Roast: Bake the Brussels sprouts for about 20 minutes, tossing them once halfway through so they brown evenly. Since each oven is different, check on them around the 18-minute mark. You’re looking for golden edges and centers that are soft enough to pierce with a fork but still hold their shape.

If they’re not crispy enough, leave them for a few more minutes, keeping a close eye on them.

Step 4 – Let Them Cool: Once the Brussels sprouts are out of the oven, allow them to cool in the pan for a few minutes before assembling, allowing the steam to escape and keeping the outsides crisp.

Assembling the Baked Brussels Sprouts with Yogurt Tahini Sauce

Now that we have roasted the Brussels sprouts, it is time to put them all together. Honestly, this is my favorite part as it takes no more than 2 minutes but looks so impressive.

Person making the tahini yogurt sauce for the recipe.

Step 1 – Make the sauce: If you’ve never paired roasted vegetables with a cool yogurt sauce before, you’re in for a treat. To make my Yogurt Tahini Sauce, whisk together thick Greek yogurt, lemon juice, minced garlic, and salt in a bowl. 

Step 2 – Spread: Place a large serving platter (or an oval plate, as shown in the pictures) on a flat surface and spread the yogurt sauce evenly on the bottom in a layer using the back of a spoon. This creamy base should be easy to spread but nice and thick.

Roasted Brussels sprouts served over yogurt sauce with tahini.

Step 3 – Add the Brussels Sprouts: Add the now slightly cooled Brussels sprouts directly over the sauce. It does not have to be perfect; let some of the sprouts overlap or fall to the sides. 

Step 4 – Garnish and Serve: Finish it off with toasted pine nuts for added crunch, a handful of pomegranate seeds for a touch of sweetness, and a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, if using.

Helpful Tips for the Best Roasted Brussels Sprouts

After testing this recipe a few times, I found a few small details that make a big difference in getting Brussels sprouts that are perfectly crisp on the outside and tender on the inside:

  • For the Best Crisp: The key to perfectly golden Brussels sprouts is spacing them so the steam doesn’t trap, which makes them soft instead of crispy. Arrange them cut-side down to get that beautiful golden crust where they touch the pan.
  • Using parchment paper: Direct contact with the hot pan helps the cut sides caramelize more. I’ve tested both ways, and thanks to the high 425°F/218°C oven temperature, the difference was negligible. So, choose whichever matters more to you: easy cleanup or maximum crispiness.
  • Toss halfway through: Giving them a quick stir at the halfway point helps them brown evenly and prevents one side from overcooking or burning. 
  • Dry them thoroughly: Make sure the sprouts are completely dry before seasoning them. It will help them roast better. If you’re short on time, a good shortcut is to buy pre-cut, ready-to-eat Brussels sprouts, which can be easily found in most large grocery stores.

FAQs

How do you prepare Brussels sprouts for roasting?

Rinse them under cold water to remove any debris, then dry them really well. Trim the woody ends and cut each sprout in half.

How long to roast Brussels sprouts at 425°F?

At this temperature, they’ll roast in about 20 minutes. If your sprouts are larger, you may have to roast them a bit longer (no more than 5 minutes).

How do you know when Brussels sprouts are cooked?

The outer layers should look golden brown with a crispy texture, while the insides feel soft and tender in the center when pierced with a fork.

How do you season Brussels sprouts?

Brussels sprouts take well to warm, earthy spices. Start with salt and pepper, then add a warming spice like paprika, cumin, or coriander. They’re also great with smoked paprika, garlic powder, or a little cayenne if you want some heat.

Can I reheat leftovers?

Yes! While roasted Brussels sprouts are always best fresh out of the oven, you can revive leftovers by warming them in a 400°F (200°C) oven for 5-7 minutes to restore their crispness. I don’t recommend microwaving them, as they’ll soften too much and lose their crispiness.

More Brussels Sprouts Recipes to Try

There is a reason why Brussels sprouts are one of the most popular Thanksgiving vegetable sides. They are so versatile and take on pretty much any flavor. So, if you are in need of more inspiration, here are a few Brussels sprouts recipes from the archives:

  • If you love a crisp and tangy green salad that makes sprouts shine, look no further than my Kale Brussel Sprout Salad
  • For another brussels sprouts recipe perfect for your holiday table, try my Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts. This 5-ingredient recipe is just as colorful and easy to make.
  • If you’ve never had shredded Brussels sprouts, you’ll love my Shaved Brussels Sprout Salad. It’s a bright and crunchy salad that is tossed with apples, hazelnuts, and goat cheese. 
  • For an easy sheet-pan side, try my Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes. This is the perfect simple fall side that works for both simple weeknights and holidays.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Roasted Brussels sprouts garnished with pomegranate seeds and served over yogurt tahini sauce.
Print

Roasted Brussels Sprouts with Yogurt Tahini Sauce Recipe

These roasted Brussels sprouts are crispy on the outside, tender on the inside, and served over a creamy tahini yogurt sauce for a bright Mediterranean twist. Finished with toasted pine nuts, pomegranate seeds, and a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, this simple side dish feels restaurant-worthy yet easy enough for any weeknight or your holiday table.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 389kcal

Ingredients

For The Roasted Brussels Sprouts:

  • 1 ½ lbs Brussels sprouts cleaned and sliced in half lengthwise
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Tahini Yogurt Sauce

  • 1 cup Greek yogurt full-fat
  • 2 tablespoons tahini
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

As Garnish

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 425 °F/204 °C. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchement paper.
  • Place Brussels sprouts on the sheet pan. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle them with paprika, ground cumin, salt, and pepper.
    Person seasoning Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan.
  • Give it a good toss to ensure that the sprouts are evenly coated with everything. Arrange the Brussels sprouts cut side down and roast them for 20 minutes, tossing them halfway through.
    Person arranging Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan.
  • Remove from the oven and let them cool down while you are working on making the yogurt sauce.
    Crispy roasted Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • While the sprouts are roasting, make the tahini sauce. In a medium bowl, whisk together yogurt, tahini, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper.
    Two images side by side showing the making and spreading of the yogurt tahini sauce.
  • When ready to assemble, spread the yogurt sauce on a serving platter. Arrange the Brussels sprouts over the top. Sprinkle them with toasted pine nuts and pomegranate arils. If using, finish it off with a drizzle of pomegranate molasses.
    A collage of images showing the roasted Brussels sprouts being assembled.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4-5 cups of roasted Brussels sprouts ideal for 4 generous servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • How to Make Ahead: I’ve tested this recipe both fresh and prepped ahead, and while it’s best right out of the oven, it still tastes wonderful the next day. To prep ahead, you can roast the sprouts and make the sauce, then store them separately in the fridge for up to one day in advance. On the day off, you can reheat the sprouts in a 400-degree oven for 7-8 minutes and then assemble the recipe as written.
  • Storage: Place the leftovers in an airtight container and store in the fridge for 2-3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 389kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 937mg | Potassium: 920mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 1423IU | Vitamin C: 151mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 4mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-tahini-yogurt-sauce/feed/ 0
12+ Showstopping Holiday Potato Recipes https://foolproofliving.com/holiday-potato-recipes/ https://foolproofliving.com/holiday-potato-recipes/#respond Tue, 28 Oct 2025 17:26:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=84044 Look, I get it. Mashed potatoes are a classic, and I am all for them. But when it comes to…]]>

Look, I get it. Mashed potatoes are a classic, and I am all for them. But when it comes to potatoes, we can all do a little more than the standard version everyone pairs with turkey. Don’t get me wrong, I can’t imagine a holiday dinner without them, but potato side dishes are one of those things you can easily have more than one of on your table. 

If you’re like me and don’t mind stepping a little outside your comfort zone, I’ve put together this creative, tested, and perfected roundup of my best holiday potato recipes I make every year.

These are among my most popular Thanksgiving vegetable side dishes. And, they always disappear first and pair beautifully with any main, whether it’s meat, poultry, or vegetarian.

Swirled mashed potatoes garnished with butter and chives.

Creamy and Comforting Mashed Potatoes

Mashed potatoes are a classic for a reason. Soft, buttery, and irresistibly creamy, they’re simple to make and always a crowd favorite. Sure, you can make your grandma’s recipe, but why not take it up a notch and try one that prioritizes flavor above all else?

Garlic Rosemary Mashed Potatoes

Make-ahead friendly, Vegetarian, Serves 4

Rosemary mashed potatoes with butter on top in a bowl.

These rosemary mashed potatoes are what I serve with my Herb Roasted Turkey every year for Thanksgiving. I just can’t imagine a better pairing.

The secret to making this dish truly special is steeping fresh rosemary and garlic in melted butter for a few minutes before mixing it with the boiled potatoes. It is a simple step that infuses every bite with deep, aromatic flavor.

Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes

Make-ahead friendly, Vegetarian, Serves 6

Yukon gold mashed potatoes in a bowl with chives on top.

This is the mashed potato recipe that I make when I want something quick, easy and simple. Ready in 35 minutes, it uses simple ingredients like milk, sour cream (or Greek yogurt), and potatoes, available in most well-stocked pantries. 

Yukon gold potatoes naturally offer a creamy texture and rich buttery flavor, so you do not need to add too many other ingredients to make them taste good. However, you can drizzle the final dish with my Beef Gravy Recipe before serving for an extra flair.

Mashed Potato Casserole

Make-ahead friendly, Serves 6

Potato casserole topped off with crispy leeks.

Now, if you really want to wow your guests, make this mashed potato casserole. It combines regular and sweet potatoes, giving you the best of both worlds. It is a holiday season staple in my household.

Adapted from an old Martha Stewart recipe, it’s super creamy, decadent, and easily customizable. Want to jazz it up? Add your favorite toppings like chopped turkey bacon, sautéed leeks, or melted cheese for a delicious finishing touch.

The Best Sweet Potato Recipes for the Holiday Table

I don’t know about you, but I can’t imagine a holiday table without sweet potatoes. Whether you serve them roasted and caramelized, mashed or baked until tender, they always bring warmth and color to the meal. 

No matter how you prepare them, sweet potatoes are the perfect way to brighten your holiday spread. Below are my foolproof sweet potato side dishes that are guaranteed to impress.

Sweet Potato Soufflé

Make-ahead friendly, Vegetarian, Serves 6-8

Sweet potato casserole with a spoon on the side of the casserole dish.

I made this sweet potato soufflé recipe after watching Trisha Yearwood make it on her Food Network show over 12 years ago. It was also one of the first recipes I shared on the site.

Since then, it has been one of the most popular recipes on Foolproof Living around Thanksgiving. And it’s easy to see why. This recipe takes the classic sweet potato casserole and makes it even better with a generous layer of buttery pecan streusel on top. 

Mashed Sweet Potatoes

Make-ahead friendly, Vegetarian, Serves 4

Mashed sweet potatoes garnished with pecans.

Most mashed sweet potato recipes call for cooking a few peeled and cubed sweet potatoes in a pot of boiling water, which is okay, but my recipe here steams them in a pot with a bit of butter and cream.

In less than 30 minutes, you end up with ultra-creamy mashed sweet potatoes that you can serve sweet with a drizzle of maple syrup or savory with a generous drizzle of my Turkey Gravy

Sweet Potato Stacks

Make-ahead friendly, Vegetarian, Makes 12 stacks

Sweet potato stacks from the front view.

Need something easy to make but visually impressive? Well, I know these sweet potato stacks look fancy, but this recipe couldn’t be easier to make. Just thinly sliced sweet potatoes layered in a muffin tin with butter, fresh herbs, salt, and pepper.

Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes

Make-ahead friendly, Vegan, Serves 4-6

Roasted sweet potatoes and brussels sprouts in a plate with a spoon on the side.

You might think that a recipe like this wouldn’t be all that popular. After all, it’s just two vegetables roasted together with a bit of oil and seasoning. 

But you’d be surprised to know that this is one of the most popular recipes on the blog, especially around Thanksgiving. It’s easy to see why: both vegetables cook at the same time, and you end up with the best of both worlds in under 30 minutes.

While it’s perfect for larger gatherings, it’s just as wonderful for smaller ones too. I especially love pairing it with my Turkey Tenderloin for a simple, satisfying holiday meal.

Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad

Make-ahead friendly, Vegetarian, Serves 6

Roasted sweet potato salad with Mediterrenean flavors.

Now, I know this might not be your traditional Thanksgiving or Christmas salad, but if you’re looking to try something a little different, make this Mediterranean sweet potato salad. 

Made with roasted sweet potatoes, caramelized shallots, and crispy chickpeas on a bed of arugula with feta and maple-candied walnuts, it’s colorful and vibrant.

Crispy, Roasted, and Air-Fried Potato Sides

If you’ve spent any time on social media, you’ve probably seen the crispy potato revolution. Over the last few years, cripsy roasted potatoes have become everyone’s favorite way to satisfy that craving for crunch, and I am completely on board with it.

The good news is that you have options. Roasting them in the oven is always a great choice, but if your oven is full, the air fryer is another handy tool up your sleeve. No matter which method you choose, the recipes below are my go-to roasted and air-fried potato sides that I know you’ll love.

Air Fryer Red Potatoes

Vegan, Serves 4-6

Crispy air fried red potatoes in a casserole dish.

I think red potatoes are one of these vegetables that are underutilized, and this air-fried red potato recipe is here to change that. 

Slightly creamier and sweeter than golden potatoes, this easy potato side dish is perfectly seasoned, crisp on the outside, and creamy on the inside. Oh, and it is ready in 20 minutes from start to finish.

Air Fryer Fingerling Potatoes

Vegan, Serves 4-6

Crispy air fried fingerling potatoes from the top view.

I love fingerling potatoes because they come in fun shapes and sizes, and each potato offers a slightly different flavor. Yes, you can cook them in the oven, but cooking them in the air fryer makes them just as crispy with only one tablespoon of olive oil.

Potato Roses with Bacon

Vegetarian, Makes 6 “roses”

Potato roses in an oval plate from the top view.

If you really want to impress your guests, make these potato roses; they’re guaranteed to be the showstopper on the table. 

You might think it looks complicated, but it’s surprisingly simple to make: thinly sliced potatoes wrapped in turkey bacon (or regular bacon), with some shredded cheese, and baked in a muffin tin. The result is a crispy, golden, and decadent side that’s as beautiful as it is delicious.

Muffin Tin Potatoes

Vegetarian, Makes 12 stacks

Muffin pan potatoes on a plate.

If you love potatoes, cheese, and creamy comfort food, you have to try these muffin-tin potatoes. Made by layering thinly sliced potatoes with heavy cream, parmesan cheese, and seasonings, and baking them in a muffin pan.

They bake up with irresistibly crispy edges and a rich, tender center, giving you the best of both worlds. While it may look like something straight out of a restaurant, they’re surprisingly easy to make at home.

Smashed Fingerling Potatoes

Make-ahead friendly, Vegan, Serves 4

Smashed fingerling potatoes as a holiday potato side dish.

You can’t scroll through social media these days without seeing smashed potatoes, and for good reason. Fingerling potatoes are perfect for this recipe: boiled, gently smashed, then roasted until crisp on the outside and buttery on the inside.

Serve them straight from the oven with a sprinkle of fresh herbs, and, as I like to do, pair them with any of your favorite dipping sauces.

Watch: 3 Easy & Creative Potato Side Dishes For Your Holiday Table

See three of the most popular and impressive dishes from this roundup brought to life! Watch me show you exactly how to make my potato roses, muffin-pan potatoes, and a bonus recipe: crispy smashed potatoes topped with burrata.

FAQs

Can I make mashed potatoes ahead of time for Thanksgiving?

You sure can. Simply make the recipe as written, bring it to room temperature, place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to a day or two before you are ready to serve it.

How do I keep roasted potatoes crispy for serving?

You can do a few things. First, roast them at high heat (425°F/218°C) oven, and once roasted, do not cover them (we do not want them to steam). Second, if you are not serving them right away, keep them warm in a low heat (200°F/95°C) oven so they stay warm and crispy.

What’s the biggest mistake people make when roasting potatoes for a crowd?

By far, the biggest mistake people make when roasting potatoes for a crowd is overcrowding the sheet pan. When the pan is packed too tightly, the potatoes steam rather than roast, preventing them from getting that golden, crispy exterior we all love. For the best results, give the potatoes plenty of space so each piece can make direct contact with the hot pan. If you’re cooking for a larger group, use two baking sheets and rotate them halfway through roasting for even browning.

What’s the best type of potato for mashing or roasting?

I prefer Yukon gold (also known as golden potatoes) for mashing and roasting as they naturally have a buttery flavor and a creamier consistency.

More Holiday Side Dish Inspiration

If you’re planning your full holiday menu, below are a few other sides from fresh salads to cozy soups that pair beautifully with any of your holiday mains:

  • No holiday meal is complete without a colorful salad that will bring everything together. If you agree, don’t miss my roundup of Best Fall Salads all in one place.
  • A warm, comforting soup always adds a special touch to a festive meal. Take a look at my Fall Soups collection for cozy, make-ahead options that will complement your holiday spread perfectly.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/holiday-potato-recipes/feed/ 0
Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/#respond Tue, 14 Oct 2025 19:13:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83779 Would you believe me if I said I never had a sweet potato until I moved to the U.S. in…]]>

Would you believe me if I said I never had a sweet potato until I moved to the U.S. in my early 20s? The fact is, sweet potatoes aren’t a typical ingredient in Turkish/Mediterranean cooking.

However, that doesn’t mean we can’t incorporate some of those classic Mediterranean flavors into a salad that could easily be the centerpiece of your holiday table or, really, any time you need a great fall salad. 

To me, this Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad is just that. Made by roasting sweet potatoes with shallots and chickpeas, layering them with arugula, and topping everything with candied walnuts and feta cheese, it may sound a bit unexpected, but I promise you it works wonderfully.

Ingredients You’ll Need Plus Smart Swaps:

You’ll find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here’s a closer look at what goes into this roasted sweet potato salad, and a few simple swaps, to help you make it your own:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

The Core Components: Sweet Potato & Shallots

Sweet potatoes: When choosing sweet potatoes, go for ones that feel firm with smooth skin and have no soft spots. Smaller to medium-sized potatoes are ideal as they’re sweeter, creamier, and easier to manage than the larger, starchier ones. Once peeled and chop them up into even pieces so they roast evenly. 

PRO Tip: Some people incorrectly call sweet potatoes yams, but they are not the same thing. This recipe is tested only with sweet potatoes.

Shallots or Red Onion: Roasting them in large chunks turns them super sweet and caramelized, but if you are not a fan of large chunks of onion in your salad, you can slice them thinly before roasting.

However, I find that the large pieces give you more caramelized flavor compared to the sliced version. 

Alternatively, you can use a large red onion as a substitute for shallots.

Chickpeas: I am using canned chickpeas for convenience. Though it is imperative to take the time to pat them dry well after draining, as they won’t crisp up if they are still soaking wet.

Green, Cheese, and Dressing

Arugula: I usually buy triple-washed arugula from the store to save on time. 

I think the slightly bitter, peppery taste of arugula pairs beautifully with the rest of the ingredients. However, if you prefer something milder, you can use spring mix or baby spinach. For a heartier baked sweet potato salad, you can use massaged kale

Regardless of the salad greens you are using, make sure that they are rinsed and spin-dried so that the salad dressing can coat the greens well.

Maple Candied Walnuts: I use a handful of walnuts for extra crunch and some sweetness. You can also use pecans or almonds, or for a nut-free version, go for roasted pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds. Maple syrup is my choice of sweetener, but agave or honey would also work.

Feta Cheese: This is a Mediterranean classic, but you could also add goat cheese instead. For a vegan, dairy-free option, simply omit the feta or use a plant-based feta cheese.

Optional Add-Ins and Flavor Boosters

Pomegranate molasses and arils: While this is also a Mediterranean classic and works beautifully in this salad, I know not everyone has it in their pantry. It will change the overall taste a bit, but a drizzle of balsamic reduction would be a good alternative to pomegranate molasses.

Again, optional, but I also like to add a handful of pomegranate arils for a pop of color.

Grains/seeds: If you are making this sweet potato salad as a part of your weekly meal prep and want it to be a bit more filling and satisfying, you can add a cup (or two) of cooked quinoa, couscous, farro, or even bulgur wheat.

How to Make Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad

Here’s how this salad comes together: first, we roast the veggies and make the candied walnuts, and then we make a simple vinaigrette and assemble. Here’s exactly how I do it step by step:

Sweet potatoes, shallots and chickpeas on a sheet pan from the top view.

Step 1 – Roast the Vegetables: After testing this recipe multiple times, I found that roasting everything at once makes cleanup so much easier without sacrificing crispness. 

Grab a large baking sheet, as we want to make sure all the veggies have enough room to roast evenly. I like to use parchment paper for easy clean up, but it is optional.

Spread sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas on the sheet pan, drizzle them with olive oil, salt, and pepper, and give them a good toss. Roast everything in a preheated 425 °F /218°C oven for 20 minutes. Be sure to give it a toss halfway through to ensure everything browns and caramelizes evenly.

A collage of images showing how to make maple candied walnuts.

Step 2 – Make the Candied Walnuts: My version of making maple candied walnuts here is super simple. Simply mix walnuts with maple syrup, spread onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper, sprinkle with coarse salt, and roast for 5-7 minutes in the oven.

I usually roast them while the veggies are in the oven, so I don’t have to wait later on.

Whatever you do, do not (I repeat, do not) skip the parchment paper (because they will stick to the pan) and sea salt (it helps make them even more delicious).

A collage of photos showing how to make the dressing for the salad and how to dress arugula.

Step 3 – Prep the Dressing and season arugula: When the veggies are cooling, make the dressing. It is as simple as it gets: Add olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper to a small bowl and whisk to combine. 

When you’re ready to serve, place the arugula in a large bowl and drizzle with the dressing. Using your clean hands or a pair of tongs, gently toss to ensure that all the greens are coated with the dressing.

Give it a taste and make sure they are seasoned well. If necessary, add more salt and pepper. 

A collage of photos showing the assembly stages of making this roasted sweet potato salad.

Step 4 – Assemble: You can assemble the salad in the bowl with the now-well-seasoned arugula, but since we are planning to serve this as a showstopping centerpiece for Thanksgiving, I transfer it to a large oval serving platter. 

Then all we need to do is to top them off with the roasted veggies, maple candied walnuts, crumbled feta cheese, and, if using, drizzle everything with a few tablespoons of pomegranate molasses. I also add a handful of pomegranate seeds to make it even more colorful and festive, but it is optional.

Making This a Festive Holiday Centerpiece: Make-Ahead & Presentation Tips

This Mediterranean fall salad is a fantastic alternative to your usual boring roasted sweet potatoes that everyone serves on Thanksgiving.

Mediterranean sweet potato salad on a plate from the top view.

And, the good news is that you can make each component of the recipe ahead of time and assemble it right before serving. Here’s how I do it:

Presentation: Platter vs. Bowl

Serve on a Platter: I strongly recommend serving this salad on a large oval platter instead of a deep bowl, which not only makes for a much prettier presentation but also helps the delicate arugula hold its shape since it’s not weighed down by the toppings. It also ensures that every guest gets a bit of everything with each serving.

Make-Ahead Strategy (For a Crispy Salad)

  • Roast Components Ahead: You can roast the sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas, and prep the candied walnuts and salad dressing a day or two in advance.
  • Bring to room temperature: Ensure the roasted veggies and nuts are completely cooled before storing them or adding them to the arugula, as warm ingredients will melt the feta and cause the delicate greens to wilt.
  • Store Separately: Store the cooled components in airtight containers in the refrigerator, and assemble everything right before serving.

Storage of Leftovers

  • Leftovers Keep Well: Leftovers do keep well for up to 3 days in the refrigerator if kept in an airtight container.
  • Arugula will Wilt: The arugula will naturally wilt once dressed. However, a good toss before serving brings it back to life. Always taste for seasoning and add more salt or pepper as necessary before serving.

Serving Suggestions

This Mediterranean baked sweet potato salad is as versatile as it is beautiful. Serve it warm or at room temperature, making it perfect for a cozy fall dinner or your Thanksgiving spread. It is surely one of my favorite Thanksgiving vegetable sides that I make every year.

Here are a few of my favorite dishes to pair it with:

With Turkey: If you’re planning on making a complete Thanksgiving spread, serve it alongside my Herb Roasted Turkey. Or, pair it with my Baked Turkey Tenderloin for a smaller holiday meal or simple weeknight dinner.

With Chicken: For another simple weeknight option, try serving it with my Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast. Alternatively, if you want to keep the Mediterranean flavors going, serve it alongside my Harissa Honey Chicken for a feast that is guaranteed to impress.

Vegetarian: This salad makes the perfect side to my Stuffed Eggplant as a Mediterranean-inspired meatless meal.

FAQs

Can I use canned sweet potatoes?

I wouldn’t recommend it since they’re too soft and won’t caramelize properly in the oven. That said, if it’s all you have on hand, just bake for about 10 minutes to warm them through.

Can I serve it cold?

Yes, this salad tastes great warm, at room temperature, or chilled straight from the fridge.

Can I air fry the veggies?

You technically can, but it will be hard to fit them all at once. If you prefer to roast everything in the air fryer, I recommend either doing it in two batches or air frying each veggie separately to ensure even roasting.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Mediterranean Salads You Might Like

I love keeping a few salads in rotation that are just as easy to make as this sweet potato salad recipe. Here are a few other Mediterranean salads I never get tired of:

  • My go-to for BBQs, picnics, and meal prep is this Mediterranean Pasta Salad. It is easy to make, and just uses a few pantry staples and fresh veggies.
  • Shepherd’s Salad (Çoban Salatası) is a refreshing Turkish tomato and cucumber salad tossed with olive oil and lemon juice. It’s a summer staple I grew up eating in Turkey.
  • If you want a quick, plant protein-packed salad that is ready in 30 minutes, try my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad. It can also be served cold or warm and it is another salad recipe that you can make ahead.
Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad from the top view on a serving platter.
Print

Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad Recipe

Sweet Potatoes are not common in the Mediterranean, but that doesn’t mean we cannot use them in a salad that embodies the flavors of the region. Made by roasting sweet potatoes tossed with chickpeas, feta, and candied walnuts and serving them on a bed of arugula, this make-ahead salad is worthy of your holiday table as a colorful centerpiece or a humble yet filling lunch to take to work with you on a Tuesday.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Cooling time 10 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 250kcal

Ingredients

For The Veggies

  • 2 large sweet potatoes 1 ½ lbs peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 3 shallots medium size – peeled and sliced/quartered (or 1 large red onion, cut into wedges)
  • 1 can chickpeas 15-ounce- drained, rinsed, and patted dry
  • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Candied Walnuts

  • ½ cup halved walnuts
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1/8 teaspoon flaky sea salt

For The Dressing

  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 3 cups arugula leaves loosely packed, rinsed and spin dried
  • ¼ cup crumbled feta cheese 2 oz.
  • 2 tablespoons Pomegranate molasses* optional

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 425°F (220°C). Line a sheet pan with parchment paper.
  • Place cubed sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas onto the baking sheet. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss to ensure they are evenly coated with the seasonings.
    Roasted veggies on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • Roast for 20 minutes, tossing halfway through, until the potatoes are golden, the shallots are caramelized, and the chickpeas are lightly crispy.
  • To make the candied walnuts, in a small bowl, mix together the walnuts with maple syrup.
    Candied walnuts in the making.
  • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and spread the walnuts evenly. Sprinkle them with a pinch of flaky sea salt and roast them in the oven for 5-7 minutes or until lightly toasted and golden. It is okay to roast them while the veggies are roasting.
  • When roasted, remove the veggies and walnuts from the oven and let them cool for 10-15 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, make the salad dressing by whisking together olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper in a bowl.
    Dressing for the salad and tossing the arugula with it by hand.
  • To assemble the salad, place the arugula in a large salad bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing and toss to coat.
  • Pile the veggies on top and give it another big toss.
    A collage of images showing the stages of the assembly of the recipe.
  • Garnish with candied walnuts, crumbled feta, and drizzle with pomegranate molasses (if using) right before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-8 (loose) cups of salad that is ideal for serving 6 people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • *A good substitute for pomegranate molasses is balsamic reduction. The flavor will change slightly, but it will still be delicious. Alternatively, if you do not have either of them, you can omit using them entirely.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare all components of the recipe in advance, let them reach room temperature, store them in an airtight container in the fridge, and assemble the salad right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 748mg | Potassium: 362mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 10953IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 84mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/feed/ 0
Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/#comments Tue, 07 Oct 2025 19:43:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20747 If you’ve ever hosted a holiday dinner, you know the struggle: one guest wants turkey, another is vegetarian, and someone…]]>

If you’ve ever hosted a holiday dinner, you know the struggle: one guest wants turkey, another is vegetarian, and someone else is vegan (and gluten-free, of course). You need a dish that can compete with turkey while meeting all the dietary requirements.

That’s where this Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash recipe comes in. I came up with it when my best friend showed up with her new boyfriend to last year’s Thanksgiving dinner, who happens to be vegan. And let me tell you, it served its purpose.

It worked beautifully as a plant-based holiday main dish for him, while the rest of the crowd enjoyed it as a side dish with turkey. The good news is that you can serve it warm, at room temperature, or cold, making it a no-fuss recipe that checks all the boxes.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This is one of those recipes that includes all the best festive fall ingredients. The full list with exact amounts is in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Acorn squash: While it may be available year-round in most grocery stores, it is at its peak in the fall and winter months. To choose the best squash, look for a mix of dark green and orange skin colors that look slightly dull (not shiny). It should feel firm and heavy. You can use traditional green acorn squash or try white, golden, or even carnival squash. 

Quinoa: Use the type of quinoa you prefer, such as white, red, black, or a mix of all three. You can cook quinoa on the stove, make microwave quinoa, or even make pressure cooker quinoa for a hands-off method. If you are not a fan of quinoa, you can swap it with cooked wild rice, farro, or couscous.

Apples:  I love using Fuji apples here, but Gala and Honeycrisp also work. If you like a tangier bite, go for Granny Smith. You can also swap the apples for pears for a sweeter bite.

Dried Fruit: I prefer dried cranberries for this recipe, but I like to chop them so they are easier to chew. You can also mix it up with other dried fruits, such as chopped apricots or dates.

Nuts: Pecans are my favorite here, but you can use walnuts, almonds, or whichever nut you prefer. 

For a nut-free option, try toasted pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds. I usually opt for roasted nuts for extra flavor, but raw ones also work well.

Herbs: I am using fresh parsley, but you can also add other fresh holiday herbs like thyme, sage, or rosemary. During the fall, stores like Trader Joe’s often have holiday herb bundles, and they work perfectly here.

Optional Additions:

This is one of those recipes you can really customize and make your own. Here are a few of my favorite ways to mix it up:

Pomegranate Arils: For an extra fall touch, add a handful on top for a pop of color and tartness.

Maple syrup: If you enjoy the salty-sweet combination, whisk a tablespoon of maple syrup with olive oil and brush it over the squash prior to sprinkling it with the spice mixture.

Chickpeas: For a protein boost and a more filling dish (especially if you are serving it as a vegan main dish), you can stir in a 15-oz can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas into the stuffing.

Mushrooms: For a distinctive yet delicious umami boost, consider adding sautéed or roasted mushrooms to the filling. 

Cheese: If you don’t mind making the dish vegetarian, you can garnish it with a handful of crumbled feta or Parmesan cheese for a creamy and salty bite.

How to Make Roasted Vegan Stuffed Acorn Squash

From start to finish, this vegan stuffed squash takes less than an hour to make. The process consists of three parts: roasting the acorn squash, preparing the quinoa and apple filling while it bakes, and filling the roasted squash with the stuffing. Here’s how I do it: 

Images showing how to cut acorn squash for stuffing.

Step 1 – Cut the Acorn Squash: You should exercise extreme caution when cutting acorn squash, especially if you have kids around. Start with a sharp knife to make the job easier and safer. 

First, cut a thin slice off the bottom so it can sit flat on your cutting board. Then cut from top to bottom vertically, pressing the tip of the knife into the center and working your way down until you have two halves. 

Lastly, scoop out the seeds and stringy bits inside. You can toss these or bake them; they make a delicious crunchy snack. 

Photos showing how to season and prepare acorn squash for roasting.

Step 2 – Season and Roast the Squash: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C) and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. 

Mix together onion powder, garlic powder, cinnamon, cumin, salt, and pepper in a small bowl. Brush the cut sides of the squash with a little olive oil and sprinkle it with the spice mixture.  

Place the acorn squash halves cut-side down to help the edges caramelize and keep the flesh tender. Roast for about 40 minutes, until you can easily slide a fork through the meat. Your kitchen will smell heavenly while these are baking.

A collage of images showing the quinoa filling and stuffing the roasted squash.

Step 3 – Make the Quinoa Filling: While the squash is roasting, sauté the onion and celery in a pan over medium-high heat until softened for 8-10 minutes, stirring frequently.

Then, add the apples and cook until they’re just soft enough, but not mushy. Stir in the garlic, cooked quinoa, cranberries, and pecans. Let it sit so the quinoa absorbs all the flavors, and add the parsley at the very end.

Step 4 – Assemble and Serve: Remove the roasted acorn squash halves from the oven and let them cool for 10 minutes. Then flip and fill each half with the quinoa mixture.

The acorn squash filling/stuffing recipe below yields 3-4 cups of filling. If you have leftovers, you can enjoy them as a side dish or a quick lunch the next day. It can also be served as a standalone side dish.

You can serve your filled acorn squash right away, or optionally, for a crispy, golden topping, return the stuffed squash to the oven and bake for an additional 10 minutes until the pecans are toasted and the quinoa looks golden brown. Garnish with fresh parsley, pomegranate arils, and your preferred toppings before serving.

Make Ahead, Storage & Reheating & Instructions

I love making this stuffed vegan squash recipe not only because it is a feast for the eyes, but also because you can easily prepare it ahead and serve it warm or cold, making it easy to incorporate into your holiday meal prep schedule.

Make Ahead: You can prepare the quinoa stuffing 1-2 days in advance, bring it to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. You can also roast the squash halves a day ahead, let them cool to room temperature, and refrigerate. When you are ready to serve, reheat the filling, stuff the squash, and warm them in the oven at 275°F (135°C) until heated through.

Alternatively, you can assemble the whole thing a day in advance, bring to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container. An hour before serving, you can reheat it in a low-heat (275°F (135°C)) oven for 15 minutes, or until heated through.

Storage: After the stuffed squash has cooled to room temperature, it can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. The leftovers make the most delicious lunch the next day.

Freezing: While you can technically freeze baked acorn squash, I don’t recommend it. It causes the squash to release extra water when thawed, resulting in a mushy texture and minimal flavor.

Expert Tips for Success

Microwave before cutting: Acorn squash can be hard to cut, especially if it is newly harvested. If you are having trouble cutting it, you can place it in the microwave for 1-2 minutes in 30-second increments to soften. Keep a close eye on it and check often rather than letting it run the whole time.

Cutting vertically vs horizontally: As you can see in the pictures, I cut my acorn squash vertically, but it is a personal preference. You can cut it horizontally if it is easier for you. However, be sure to cut a small amount from the top and bottom so they can sit straight after they are flipped.

Extra Caramelization: This is optional, but for a more golden, caramelized finish, flip the roasted squash cut-side up and place it under the broiler for 1-2 minutes after it’s finished baking. Just keep a close eye on it so it doesn’t burn.

Roast cut-side down: This is a crucial step, as it helps the edges caramelize and makes the flesh extra tender and sweet. While I didn’t think it was necessary, if you prefer, you can flip them at the end and put them under the broiler for a minute or two for even more caramelization.

Cook quinoa with stock: One of the best ways to season quinoa is by using stock instead of water as the cooking liquid. I usually use my homemade vegetable stock I make from scraps, but store-bought vegetable stock would also work. I highly recommend rinsing quinoa before cooking for optimal flavor.

Keep the filling moist: If you make it earlier in the day (or reheating), the quinoa mixture may dry out slightly. You can stir in a splash of water or stock to keep it fluffy and add more moisture.

Toast the nuts: Yes, it is an extra step, but toasting pecans (or pumpkin seeds) in a dry skillet takes just a few minutes and is a major upgrade in the overall taste of the filling. So, if you have a couple of extra minutes, place the nuts/seeds in an empty skillet and toast (keeping a super close eye on them) for 5-7 minutes over medium heat before adding them to the filling.

What to Serve with Quinoa-Stuffed Acorn Squash

This quinoa stuffed squash is one of those recipes that can play more than one role on your holiday table. You can enjoy it as a main dish for a vegetarian or vegan dinner, or serve it as a side alongside your favorite holiday mains. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

FAQs

Can I make this ahead for Thanksgiving?

Yes, you can cook the quinoa filling a day or two before and keep it in the fridge in an airtight container. You can also roast the squash halves ahead of time and store them refrigerated for up to three days.

Can I freeze stuffed acorn squash?

Technically, yes, but I do not recommend it. The squash becomes watery and loses its texture once thawed.

Can I use butternut squash instead?

Yes, butternut squash also works. You can roast butternut squash halves or air-fry them and fill them with the quinoa mixture, following the same recipe.

What’s the safest way to cut acorn squash?

The secret is to use a sharp knife and start by slicing a thin piece off the bottom so the squash sits steady. Then cut from top to bottom to split it in half, and if it feels too tough to cut, microwave it for a minute or two to soften the skin.

What if I don’t like quinoa?

You can easily swap the quinoa for cooked rice, wild rice, farro, or even couscous for a similar filling.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Acorn Squash Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed this vegan acorn squash recipe, you might like these other fall favorite squash recipes:

  • If you are craving a fall salad, try my Acorn Squash Salad. Made with arugula, pepitas, cranberries, goat cheese, and pomegranate seeds, it has everything you crave during the holiday season.
  • Another reader favorite squash recipe is my Roasted Acorn Squash Slices! It takes the basic acorn squash but turns it into an easy side dish with a quick maple-cinnamon glaze.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Quinoa stuffed acorn squash garnished with pomegranate seeds.
Print

Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash Recipe

Tender roasted squash halves filled with a savory-sweet quinoa stuffing of apples, cranberries, pecans, and fresh herbs. Vegan, gluten-free, and make-ahead friendly, this is the perfect holiday main or side dish.
Course Side
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 291kcal

Ingredients

To Roast the Acorn Squash

  • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
  • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 4 large acorn squash cut in half and seeds removed

To Make the Stuffing:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 onion medium-size / chopped (~1 1/4 cup)
  • 3 stalks celery chopped (~3/4 cup)
  • 1 apple peeled and cut into small ½ inch cubes
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 ½ cups cooked quinoa from 1 cup uncooked quinoa
  • ½ cup dried cranberries chopped finely
  • ½ cup pecans coarsely chopped
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped, plus more as garnish
  • Handful of pomegranate seeds as garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400°F (204 °C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • In a small bowl, mix together onion powder, garlic powder, cinnamon, cumin, salt, and pepper.
  • Brush the insides of acorn squash with olive oil.
    Acorn squash halves getting seasoned and roasted on a sheet pan.
  • Sprinkle each half with the spice mixture, ensuring that it is evenly distributed.
  • Arrange the squash cut-side down and roast for 40 minutes, or until a knife inserted into the flesh of one of the squash comes out easily. Let it cool on the counter for 5 minutes before stuffing.
  • While the acorn squash is roasting, make the stuffing. Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the onion and celery, and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 5-6 minutes.
  • Add the apple and cook for 3-4 more minutes, or until the apples are softened.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
    A collage of images showing the quinoa stuffing and as the acorn squash is getting stuffed.
  • Add the cooked quinoa, cranberries, pecans, and season with salt and pepper. Give it a stir and turn the heat to medium-low. Let it cook for 7-8 minutes, stirring occasionally to ensure it remains moist. If you feel like it is drying, add in a few tablespoons of water.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more, if necessary. At the last minute, stir in the parsley.
  • To assemble, fill each roasted acorn squash half with the stuffing and garnish it with pomegranate seeds (if using) and more parsley before serving.
    Vegan and gluten free quinoa stuffed acorn squash on a plate.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 halved stuffed acorn squash, which is ideal for serving 8 as a side dish. If you are serving it as a main dish, I would recommend serving 2 halves per person. The nutritional values listed below are per serving of one half.
  • Filling: Take the time to cut up your apple evenly to ensure that you get some with each bite. I also recommend chopping up the cranberries for the same reason.
  • Make ahead: You can roast the acorn squash and make the filling a day (or two) in advance. Bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. Assemble and bake right before serving.
  • Storing leftovers: Bring them to room temperature and store in the fridge in an airtight container for 3-4 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 291kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 461mg | Potassium: 979mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 1037IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 104mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/feed/ 30
Harissa Roasted Carrots https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-carrots/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-carrots/#respond Mon, 29 Sep 2025 21:22:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83581 Growing up in the Mediterranean, the first thing you learn is that vegetables are never an afterthought. Most meals are…]]>

Growing up in the Mediterranean, the first thing you learn is that vegetables are never an afterthought. Most meals are actually planned around them, and this recipe is a perfect example of that. 

Everyday ingredients like rainbow carrots (naturally sweet, inexpensive, and beautiful when roasted) become the star of the plate when paired with harissa, the North African chili paste I turn to often in my cooking. 

And of course, we can’t forget the whipped feta, the creamy and tangy spread that social media has made famous for good reason.

I tested this dish several times to ensure the steps are clear and the cleanup is minimal. Ready in about 50 minutes from start to finish, the result is a side that looks stunning on the table but comes together with ease. It is such a great recipe to serve as part of a holiday spread, alongside a weeknight meal, or even as an appetizer on a mezze platter.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This recipe has three main components: the creamy whipped feta, the roasted harissa carrots, and the assembly finished with a honey drizzle.

Below, I am sharing some helpful notes on ingredients from my recipe testing. You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For the Carrots:

Carrots: I love using rainbow carrots here because they’re colorful, and when they get roasted, they become slightly caramelized, which pairs beautifully with harissa. 

However, any carrots you have on hand would work. The important thing is to choose ones that are similar in size so they roast evenly. 

Before roasting, I like to give them a good scrub and peel them for a smoother texture, although this step is optional. I usually grab about two to three bunches for this recipe, and if any are very thick, I slice them in half lengthwise.

Harissa: You can go a few different routes here:

Honey: This is a key ingredient in this recipe, so don’t skip it. It helps caramelize the carrots and tames the spiciness of harissa. If you don’t have honey on hand, you can substitute it with maple syrup or agave syrup.

Garnishes: Here is where you can mix it up and make this recipe your own. The toppings are what take these harissa-glazed carrots to the next level. Here are my favorites:

  • Drizzles: I am using honey because the sweet and spicy combo is unbeatable. You can also try maple syrup for a deeper sweetness or opt for tahini lemon sauce for a savory flavor.
  • Nuts: My go-to is pistachios, but almonds, cashews, or even toasted pine nuts would be delicious. If you can, toast them slightly in a pan to enhance their flavor.
  • Fresh Herbs: I opted for parsley, but you can use any herb you love, such as dill, cilantro, or mint. You can even use the carrot tops; just wash and dry them thoroughly before chopping them finely.
  • Optional: During the holiday season, I also use a handful of pomegranate seeds to add a pop of color.

For the Whipped Feta: 

For the creamiest base, start with a block of feta packed in brine rather than the pre-crumbled kind. And for the yogurt, choose plain, unsweetened whole milk Greek yogurt for the creamiest texture. 

Ingredients for the creamy whipped feta spread.

You’ll find the full whipped feta ingredients in the recipe card below. For more tips, steps, and variations, check out my full Whipped Feta Recipe post. 

Alternatively, you can use Cava’s Feta Sauce or my Tahini Yogurt Sauce as a spread; both will provide a similar creamy base.

How to Make Harissa Carrots

The beauty of this recipe is that most of the work happens in the oven. While the carrots roast and caramelize, you whip the feta and prep the toppings. 

Step 1 – Prep the pan: Set your oven to 400°F (204°C) and line a large sheet pan with parchment paper for easy cleanup. 

I know some people recommend against using parchment paper to achieve the most browning, especially when roasting root vegetables like carrots. I prefer to use it to make the clean up easier, but you can go either way.

Steps showing the making of the harissa and spreading it over the carrots.

Step 2 – Make the marinade & coat: In a small bowl, whisk together the olive oil, harissa, honey, and lemon zest. Always taste the mixture before adding any seasoning, especially if you are using a store-bought harissa. 

Add the carrots and toss until fully coated. I like to use my hands here to really work the marinade into all the nooks and crannies, but a pastry brush can also be used.

Images showing the roasted carrots and whipped feta.

Step 3 – Roast: Arrange the carrots in a single layer on the sheet pan, leaving a little space between each one so they bake and caramelize instead of steaming. 

Roast the carrots for about 30 minutes, flipping them halfway through, until caramelized and tender in the center. If your carrots are on the thinner side, start checking around the 25-minute mark.

Step 4 – Make the whipped feta: While the carrots are roasting, break the feta into chunks and add it to a food processor along with the Greek yogurt and lemon zest. 

Pulse it a few times, and then as the food processor is running, slowly drizzle in olive oil until smooth and creamy, scraping the sides as needed. Blend for about 40-45 seconds, until smooth, to maintain a thick and spreadable consistency.

Images showing the assembly of roasted harissa carrots recipe.

Step 5 – Assemble and Garnish: Once the harissa carrots are done, let them cool for 10 minutes so that when you add them on top of the feta cheese spread, they don’t melt.

Spread the whipped feta onto a large serving platter, arrange the carrots on top, drizzle with honey, and sprinkle with pistachios and parsley.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat

One of my favorite things about this honey harissa carrot recipe is that it can be served hot from the oven, made ahead, and enjoyed chilled. Not to mention, they store well in the refrigerator for later use.

Make Ahead: You can roast the carrots and make the whipped feta up to a day in advance. Store them separately or assemble them right away so the dish is ready to serve as soon as you need it. 

Storage: Store the leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2-3 days. The whipped feta may firm up slightly as it chills, so take it out of the fridge 10 minutes before serving to allow it to become creamier. 

Reheating: When it comes to reheating, I do not recommend heating the whipped feta. However, you can reheat the carrots in a 325°F (163°C) oven for about 8-10 minutes, or until they are heated through. Then, reassemble the recipe as written.

Expert Tips for Best Results

While this harissa-roasted carrot recipe is quite simple to put together, here are a few things I learned during my recipe testing:

  • Pick similar-sized carrots: Choose carrots that are roughly the same size so they roast evenly. If some are very thick, cut them in half lengthwise so everything bakes at the same rate.
  • Taste before salting: Some harissa brands are saltier than others, so always give the marinade a quick taste before seasoning to avoid over-salting the carrots.
  • Flip halfway: Give the carrots a quick toss and turn them halfway through roasting so they caramelize evenly and don’t burn on one side.
  • Let them cool slightly: Let the carrots sit for 10 minutes before serving to prevent the whipped feta from getting melty and soggy.
  • Loosen thick harissa: Harissa paste can vary in thickness, so if yours is very thick, whisk in a splash of olive oil to loosen it and help coat the carrots more evenly.

Serving Suggestions

While you can enjoy these carrots straight from the oven, they are even better when paired with a full meal. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve them:

Harissa roasted carrots garnished with pistachios and drizzled with honey.

FAQs

Can I use harissa powder instead of paste?

I wouldn’t recommend using harissa powder by itself for the full effect. Instead, you can make a quick harissa paste with harissa powder in minutes and use it to coat the carrots.

How do I tone down the spice?

You have a few options here. You can make your own harissa or buy a brand that offers a mildly spiced harissa. Additionally, keep in mind that serving the carrots over dairy naturally helps to tone down the spice.

What toppings or spices work best?

Chopped pistachios are my go-to, but almonds, cashews, or even toasted pine nuts are great alternatives. Fresh herbs, such as fresh parsley, dill, or cilantro, add a pop of color and freshness.

Do I need to peel carrots before roasting?

It is a personal choice. If you are buying organic carrots, you can give them a good scrub under cold water and roast them with the skins on. Still, if you prefer, you can peel them as well.

More Harissa Recipes to Try

When I have harissa on hand, I find myself adding it to everything from roasted vegetables to grain bowls. If you want more ways to use harissa, here are a few of my favorites:

  • My Harissa Dressing is a bright and spicy five-minute dressing that I drizzle over salads, grain bowls, grilled meats, and even roasted veggies.
  • For dinner, my BBQ Harissa Chicken is smoky, juicy, and takes just twenty minutes of hands-on time. And if you prefer a recipe that requires no grilling, then I suggest my Harissa Honey Chicken, which caramelizes beautifully in the oven for the perfect sweet-and-spicy bite.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Harissa roasted carrots garnished with pistachios and parsley.
Print

Harissa Roasted Carrots Recipe

These rainbow carrots are roasted with harissa until caramelized, then served over creamy whipped feta and topped with honey, pistachios, and fresh herbs.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 306kcal

Ingredients

For The Harissa Carrots

  • 2 lbs rainbow carrots (18-20 carrots) ~ 20 oz, scrubbed and peeled
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons harissa
  • 1 tablespoon honey plus more to drizzle on top
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest from one lemon
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt optional – add after tasting harissa first
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Whipped Feta

  • 8 ounces feta whole block
  • ½ cup Greek yogurt whole milk / unsweetened
  • 1 teaspoon Zest of a lemon
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil

As Garnish

  • 2 tablespoons honey
  • 2 tablespoons pistachios roughly chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together olive oil, harissa, honey, and lemon zest. Taste for seasoning and season with salt if necessary.
    Person making harissa sauce and spreading carrots with the sauce.
  • Add the carrots to the prepared sheet pan and spread the harissa mixture evenly, ensuring the carrots are fully coated with the mixture. Spread them on a single layer.
  • Roast for 30-35 minutes, flipping them halfway through to ensure even roasting.
  • Remove from the oven and let them cool down for 10 minutes.
    Side by side photos showing the roasted carrots and whipped feta.
  • While carrots are roasting, make the whipped feta. Break the feta into large chunks and place it in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the metal blade, along with Greek yogurt and lemon zest.
  • Pulse a few times to mix, and then turn the machine on and drizzle the olive oil over the tube. Let it run for 40-45 seconds, stopping once or twice to scrape the sides of the bowl to ensure even mixing.
  • Grab a large serving plate, spread the bottom with whipped feta cheese, and then transfer the now-slightly cooled harissa carrots on top.
    Photos showing the assembly of the dish.
  • Drizzle with 1-2 tablespoons of honey and garnish with pistachios and parsley.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields enough harissa carrots to serve 6 people, with approximately 3 carrots per serving, depending on the size of the carrots used. The nutritional values are per serving and include the calories coming from whipped feta.
  • Carrots: While I roasted the carrots whole, you can cut them into 1 1/2- to 2-inch chunks and roast them that way.
  • Spread at the bottom: Whipped feta is optional here, and you can serve the harissa carrots by themselves if you prefer. Alternatively, my yogurt tahini sauce would be a great option as a spread.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be placed in an airtight container and kept in the fridge for 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 306kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 803mg | Potassium: 588mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 25521IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 261mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-carrots/feed/ 0
Whipped Feta Dip https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/#respond Mon, 29 Sep 2025 19:54:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83576 Ingredients You’ll Need You only need four main ingredients to make this whipped feta recipe, so choose the best ones…]]>
Aysegul

Whenever I have friends over, I like to go beyond the usual meat-and-cheese plate and put together a spread that feels a little more Mediterranean and creative without being complicated. 

Over the years, I’ve built a few go-to menus that always get oohs and aahs, and after this whipped feta cheese recipe took off on social media last year, I added this version to the mix. Now I get the same question every time: “Is the recipe on the blog?

It’s popular for a reason: it’s incredibly versatile. Serve it as a cheese dip, spread it under roasted vegetables, or thin it into a sauce; top with savory herbs and spices or go sweet with honey and nuts. 

Think of this creamy feta recipe as a simple base you can dress up a dozen ways. After months of testing, I’ve dialed in the texture so it delivers every time.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You only need four main ingredients to make this whipped feta recipe, so choose the best ones you can find, as their flavor really shines through. 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are some notes from my testing:

Feta Cheese: For the creamiest whipped feta cheese, start with an 8-ounce block of feta packed in brine. You can use either cow’s milk or sheep’s milk feta, but the most important thing is choosing one you like for its flavor, creaminess, and saltiness.

I do not recommend pre-crumbled feta because it often contains caking agents that make the dip grainy. Since we will be blending everything in the food processor, there is no need to buy it pre-crumbled.

Greek Yogurt: Some whipped feta recipes call for cream cheese or sour cream, but I prefer using whole milk unsweetened Greek yogurt for a lighter, tangier base. 

Because it’s thicker and less watery than regular yogurt, it keeps the dip extra creamy while adding a subtle tang. For the best texture, avoid fat-free or 2% yogurt.

Olive Oil: Use your favorite extra virgin olive oil. It doesn’t have to be fancy or expensive, just something you like, since the flavor really shines through.

Lemon zest: Adding a little lemon zest brightens the dip, brings fresh aromatics, and adds a bit of tang.

Optional Add-Ins: I wanted to make this recipe with minimal ingredients, so it is quick and easy to put together. However, if you’d like, you can also add a clove of fresh or roasted garlic for a mild garlic flavor and a squeeze of lemon juice for a bit more tangy flavor.

How to Make Whipped Feta Cheese

Whipped feta comes together in just minutes, and the key is blending it just enough to achieve a smooth, creamy texture without overblending. Here’s how I do it step by step:

Step 1: Prep the feta: First, drain the brine, pat the block dry to prevent a watery dip, and break it into large chunks. This way, there is no excess moisture, and it can blend smoothly. 

Process photos showing how to make creamed feta cheese dip.

Step 2: Blend: Add the feta, Greek yogurt, and lemon zest to the food processor or blender. Turn on the processor and slowly pour in the olive oil through the feed tube. 

Pro Tip: Most whipped feta recipes use ¾ cup of Greek yogurt, but during my recipe testing, I found that using a lesser amount (½ cup of yogurt) yielded a more spreadable dip than a sauce-like, runny whipped feta.

Pouring the olive oil slowly helps the cheese and yogurt emulsify into a silky mixture. If you’re using a high-power blender, blend for a shorter time, as it will thin out more quickly.

A collage of images showing the making of the creamy Greek yogurt feta dip.

Step 3: Scrape halfway through blending: For a smooth and evenly blended whipped feta, stop the machine and scrape the sides with a spatula once or twice during the whipping process.

Doing this also helps with gauging the texture. I thought that 40-45 seconds of blending yielded the perfectly silky and smooth texture, but you can adjust the blending time according to your preference.

Step 4: Serve and garnish: Spoon into a bowl and finish with olive oil and your favorite toppings.

Ways to Customize Whipped Feta with Different Toppings

While this feta spread is perfectly delicious on its own, adding toppings is an easy way to dress it up and make it feel new every time you serve it. Choose a savory or sweet topping below and make it your own:

  • Savory Toppings: Sprinkle with fresh parsley, mint, or dill, plus a pinch of sumac, red pepper flakes, black pepper, or Aleppo pepper. You can keep it light, as I did in the photos, or spread it on a platter and layer on more herbs for a dramatic look.
  • Sweet Toppings: Drizzle a little honey and a handful of toasted pine nuts or crushed pistachios for a more dessert-like spread.
  • Spice Blends: If you prefer a lighter approach, sprinkle it with a pinch of my Mediterranean Seasoning or za’atar for an even more Mediterranean dip. Both bring a subtle herby flavor without overpowering the dip.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

Add this whipped feta cheese dip recipe to your collection of party appetizers asap! Why? Because it stores well and can be made ahead of time. Here’s how I do it:

Make-ahead: You can prepare it up to 2 days in advance. It gets slightly thicker as it sits. If you plan to serve it as a dip, you can serve it right away. However, though it is optional, if you want to use it as a spread for a perfectly creamy, silky texture, you can give it a quick whiz in the food processor right before serving. 

Storage: Transfer the dip to an airtight container. It keeps well in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days. If the dip appears slightly separated after sitting in the fridge, let it rest at room temperature for a few minutes, then give it a quick stir before serving.

Freezing: I do not recommend freezing whipped feta as the texture changes and turns grainy once thawed, so it’s best enjoyed fresh.

Notes from My Kitchen: What I Learned Making This Recipe

After plenty of testing (and a few grainy batches), I’ve figured out what makes whipped feta turn out silky and creamy every time. Here are the tips I wish someone had told me from the start:

  • Use a block of feta cheese: A block of feta in brine is creamier and fresher, while pre-crumbled feta often contains caking agents that make the dip too grainy.
  • Taste your feta first: Some feta cheese sold at supermarkets can be very salty. Since this dip relies on just a few basic ingredients, it would be hard to mask that, so it is best to taste it before whipping it.
    • Too salty? Place the block in an airtight container with enough water covering it and let it sit in the fridge for a couple of hours or overnight. This helps reduce some of the excess salt.
  • Bring to room temperature: If possible, remove your feta from the fridge 5-10 minutes before blending. This is optional, but it will make your dip blend smoother. 
  • Food processor or blender: I prefer using a food processor because it allows for easier control over texture and thickness. In contrast, a blender (especially a high-speed blender) blends faster, which may result in a runny creamed feta cheese dip. Therefore, if you are using a blender, pulse and check often instead of running the machine continuously.

How To Serve Whipped Feta

Don’t get me wrong, this is a wonderful appetizer dip served with fresh veggies like radishes, cucumbers, and bell peppers. However, there are many other ways to use it in your daily cooking, especially if you are a fan of Mediterranean cuisine.

Images of recipe ideas that uses this whipped feta recipe.

Here are some of my go-to ideas:

  • Build a Mezze Platter: Serve your freshly made feta yogurt dip alongside other classics, such as Mediterranean Hummus, Tzatziki Sauce, Baba Ganoush, and fresh vegetables, warm Pita Bread, or pita chips.
  • Add it to any platter: This recipe is not just for a mezze platter. It is wonderful for any meat, cheese, or even seafood platter. I especially love it in my Smoked Salmon Platter.
  • Sandwich or Wrap Spread: Use it as a substitute for mayonnaise or other spreads in your favorite sandwiches and wraps. I love spreading it on lavash bread and then adding some Adana lamb kebab or Chicken Kofta before rolling it into a wrap.
  • As a Creamy Base: Spread a generous layer on a plate and top with roasted, grilled, or even air-fried vegetables. I love pairing it with my Harissa Carrots or Grilled Eggplant whenever I want an impressive side dish, or my Air Fryer Beetroot during the holiday season when I need a pop of color on the table.
  • With Grilled Meats and Kebabs: Serve it alongside Middle Eastern classics like Shish Tawook, Chicken Shawarma, or Lamb Kebabs for a cool, creamy contrast.
  • For Grain Bowls: Add a dollop over any of your Mediterranean bowls as a sauce. It works wonderfully with my CAVA Bowl and Chicken Shawarma Bowl.
  • Over toast with Eggs: Spread it on toast and top with fried or poached eggs, or serve it alongside Turkish Eggs for a savory breakfast or brunch.

FAQs

What’s the best feta for whipped feta?

Use a whole block of feta (not pre-crumbled feta) that you like the taste and creaminess of; it can be cow’s milk or sheep’s milk. I recommend choosing a brand that is not overly salty.

Can I make whipped feta without yogurt?

Yes, you technically can, but I find that the version made with yogurt is better. Still, you can use a splash of water or milk (about ¼ cup) to thin it out and blend until smooth.

How do I thicken whipped feta?

Start with a smaller amount of yogurt and add more as needed until you reach your desired consistency. If your dip turns out too thin and you want to thicken it, blend in a little more feta or chill it for 10-15 minutes to allow it to firm up as it cools.

Can I make this ahead of time?

Yes, you can make it up to 2 days ahead. Simply make a batch, store it in an airtight container, and give it a quick stir right before serving.

How long does whipped feta last?

It keeps well for 3-4 days in the refrigerator. Just give it a quick stir or pulse in the food processor before serving.

Can I freeze whipped feta?

I don’t recommend freezing this whipped feta spread as it turns grainy once thawed. It’s best enjoyed fresh.

Other Mediterranean Dips and Feta Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed this feta Greek yogurt dip, you might also like these other feta-packed and Mediterranean-inspired recipes I make regularly. They’re just as fresh and simple to make:

  • If you love that restaurant-style creaminess and sauces, try the cult favorite CAVA Feta recipe. It’s another wonderful dip (or topping) made with feta, roasted onions, jalapenos, and garlic.
  • If you want something cozy and baked, my Spinach and Feta Borek has a super crisp dough, melty feta, and is perfect for when you are having people over. 
  • And if you are in the mood for something refreshing, my Watermelon Cucumber Salad with cucumber, feta, and fresh mint is perfect for warm weather.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Person scooping whipped feta with pita bread.
Print

Whipped Feta Dip Recipe

This quick 5-minute whipped feta dip is made with just 4 simple ingredients. Creamy, tangy, and perfect for spreading or dipping.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 228kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces feta cheese whole block (both cow's milk or sheep's milk feta would work)
  • ½ cup Greek yogurt unsweetened & whole milk/full fat
  • 1 teaspoon Zest of a lemon
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for drizzling on top

Optional toppings

  • Handful of fresh herbs such as parsley, dill, and mint
  • Pinch of Sumac or red pepper flakes

Instructions

  • Break the feta into large chunks and place it in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the metal blade.
    A collage of images showing the making of whipped feta cheese spread in a food processor.
  • Add in the Greek yogurt and lemon zest.
  • Turn the food processor on. While it is blending, slowly add olive oil through the tube.
  • Blend until smooth, no more than 40-45 seconds, stopping halfway through to scrape the sides as needed.
    A collage of images showing the whipped feta in a food processor and in a serving platter with veggies.
  • Transfer to a bowl and garnish with fresh herbs. Finish with a light drizzle of olive oil and a sprinkle of sumac or red pepper flakes.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ to 1 ¾ cups whipped feta, ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include calories from the optional vegetables and pita bread shown in the pictures.
  • Feta: Use a mildly salty block of feta for the best whipped feta recipe.
  • Storage: Transfer leftovers to an airtight container and store in the fridge for 3-4 days. Give it a stir before serving.
  • Troubleshooting Consistency and Texture: You have two variables to consider here: the amount of yogurt used and the blending time.
    • For a thicker dip, use ½ cup of yogurt, as written in the recipe.
    • For a looser, more sauce-like, spreadable texture, add ¼ cup more (a total of ¾ cup) yogurt.
    • Too grainy? Blend it a bit longer by stopping and scraping the sides a few times.

Nutrition

Calories: 228kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 52mg | Sodium: 656mg | Potassium: 72mg | Fiber: 0.04g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 241IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 308mg | Iron: 0.4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/feed/ 0
Kale Apple Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/#comments Tue, 16 Sep 2025 23:25:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49034 Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them…]]>

Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them with something as sturdy and earthy as kale. A good dressing is key, especially when kale is involved, because let’s be honest, on its own, it’s not everyone’s favorite (my husband would agree). 

For me, the magic is in the balance of textures and tastes. Sweet, crisp apples meet earthy kale, all tied together with a dreamy maple Dijon dressing. Then comes the crunch from sunflower seeds, which makes every bite a little more exciting.

I call it a slaw because I was inspired by the Kale Apple Slaw at Tropical Smoothie Café, a cult-favorite dish that I loved so much that I had to recreate it in my own kitchen. It’s the kind of salad I make as part of my weekly meal prep because it holds up so well in the fridge. 

One bite and I think you’ll agree, let’s make it together.

Kale and Apple Slaw Ingredients 

You only need a handful of produce and a few basic pantry staples to make this fresh kale apple coleslaw. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing on ingredients and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For the Dressing

It is no secret that the dressing is the most important part of any kale salad, as sturdy kale leaves can use a ton of help when it comes to flavoring. I decided to use my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette as it offers the perfect balance of sweet and tangy flavors that complements the rest of the ingredients.

Below are a couple of notes from my recipe testing:

Maple syrup: I love the caramel-like sweetness it brings with the Dijon. For a lighter, citrusy twist, swap it with orange juice. Honey also works if you prefer a richer sweetness. I tested this slaw with all three, and while each works, they give the salad a slightly different character.

Apple cider vinegar: A key ingredient. It adds acidity to the dressing and also ties the apples into the overall flavor. If you don’t have it, red wine vinegar works too, but the taste is a little sharper.

For The Slaw

Apple: Crisp, firm apples hold up best. Fuji, Pink Lady, and Honeycrisp are my top picks, though tart Granny Smith is also great. Whatever you choose, slice or cube them just before serving to avoid browning.

Kale: I usually go with curly kale, but lacinato kale (aka Tuscan kale) works just as well. Each type has a different flavor and texture. If you’re not sure which to use, my Types of Kale guide can help you decide.

Seeds and nuts: I often use sunflower seeds, especially when I want to keep the recipe nut-free. When I do use nuts, I prefer raw almonds, pecans, or walnuts. Their mild taste lets the kale and apples stand out.

Cabbage: Red cabbage adds color and a subtle earthy note, but green cabbage works if that’s what you have. The thinner you slice it, the better it absorbs the dressing. I usually shred it with this insert I keep in my food processor, which I’ve found safer and quicker than a traditional mandoline. If you’re pressed for time, a bagged coleslaw mix is a fine shortcut.

Red Onion: Even though red onion has a stronger taste, I like using it here because it stands up well against hearty kale and crisp cabbage. If you prefer something milder, green onions are a good alternative.

How to Make Kale Apple Slaw

One of my favorite things about this kale apple salad, besides how fresh and crunchy it is, is how easily it fits into any meal. It lasts for days in the fridge and pairs with just about anything. Here’s how I put it together:

Step 1 – Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, dijon mustard, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper. 

Then, add the sliced red onion to the dressing mixture and let it steep in the mixture while you prepare the rest of the ingredients. The vinegar takes away the sharp edge of raw onion, making it softer and slightly sweeter.

person showing how to make maple dijon vinaigrette

Step 2 – Prepare the salad: In a large mixing bowl, add the shredded kale, shredded carrots, and sliced red cabbage. Drizzle with the dressing and red onion, then use your hands to lightly massage the kale to break down the tougher parts of the leaves, making them more tender, less bitter, and better at soaking up the dressing. 

Pro Tip: Massaging kale might seem like an unusual practice, but I believe it is the secret to making kale tender, which is a common complaint among many people. Once massaged, it transforms into something much softer and easier to enjoy.

Person showing how to make kale apple slaw with step by step photos.

Step 3 – Serve: Top it off with the sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Toss the mixture one more time to evenly distribute the toppings, and serve immediately for the best crunch and freshest flavor.

Tropical smoothie kale apple slaw recipe in a bowl.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

This easy slaw recipe is meal-prep friendly, holding up beautifully in the fridge for days, so you can enjoy a crisp side dish all week long. Here are the best ways to ensure it stays fresh:

Make ahead: The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette can be prepared up to 2 days in advance and stored in a mason jar in the fridge. On the day you plan to serve, simply toss it with the kale, cabbage, and carrots, then add the apples just before serving. Assembly takes only about 5 minutes.

Storage: Once assembled, the slaw will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. For the best texture and color, slice the apples right before eating to prevent browning.

Kale and Apple Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side

What to Serve with Apple Kale Slaw

This kale and apple slaw is one of those salads that just works with almost anything. It’s crisp, colorful, and adds a fresh bite that makes any meal feel a little brighter. Here are a few of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • Pair it with grains: For a more filling meal, consider adding a cooked grain like quinoa, bulgur wheat, or wild rice. They will soak up the maple dijon dressing and turn it into a quick lunch you can grab from the fridge.
  • With turkey: If you need a light but satisfying dinner in under an hour, pair this slaw with my Turkey Tenderloin. The turkey is juicy, tender, and quick to cook, so you can have a balanced meal even on a weeknight. 
  • With chicken: My Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast is one of my favorite proteins to serve on top. The crispy skin and juicy meat add just enough richness.
  • With meatloaf: Serve the slaw with my Turkey Meatloaf to lighten up a classic comfort food dinner. The fresh crunch balances the comfort of the meatloaf without feeling heavy.

Expert Tips

While the recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, here are a few pro tips for making the best kale apple coleslaw:

  • Using red onion: Raw red onion can be sharp, even when thinly sliced. I like to soak it in water or massage it with salt to mellow the bite. In this recipe, I let it sit in the dressing instead, which softens the flavor while adding depth. If you enjoy raw onion as-is, you can skip this step.
  • Slice everything thinly: Large pieces of kale are tough to chew. Removing the stems and slicing the leaves into thin ribbons helps them absorb the dressing, making the salad easier to eat. 
  • Massage the kale: This is the step that turns tough kale into something tender and delicious. A quick massage not only softens the leaves but also helps the dressing cling to every bite. 
  • Blanch for a milder taste: If you find kale too bitter, you can blanch it. Just boil for a minute or two, then plunge into ice water. This quick step softens the leaves and tones down their bitterness.
  • Optional Add-Ins: You can easily make this salad your own with a few simple additions or swaps. Try dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds instead of apples for a sweet-tart twist, or add a handful of shaved parmesan to bring a savory, umami note that makes it even more delicious.

FAQs

What part of the kale do you cut off?

Remove the tough center stem (also called the rib) that runs down the middle of each leaf. It’s hard and chewy when raw, so strip the leafy greens away and chop them into bite-sized pieces for the best texture.

How can I make the kale less bitter?

The best way to reduce kale’s bitterness is to massage it with the dressing for 2-3 minutes to soften the leaves. This breaks down the tough fibers and makes the kale more tender and easier to chew. If you’re sensitive to bitterness, blanch the kale for 1-2 minutes before adding it to the salad.

How can I tell if I’m choosing good kale?

Look for kale with firm, crisp leaves that have a rich green color. Skip any that are starting to yellow, feel limp, or have wilted spots.

What’s the best apple to use in kale apple coleslaw?

Firm, crisp apples such as Honeycrisp, Fuji, Pink Lady, or Granny Smith work best.

Can I use a different dressing to make this kale and apple slaw recipe?

Yes. For a lighter, more citrusy flavor, try it with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. For a creamy variation, use my Yogurt Salad Dressing.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Kale Recipes You Might Like:

If this recipe convinced you to give kale a chance, I am confident that you’ll be looking for more. So, here are a few other fresh kale salad recipes that I know you’ll enjoy:

  • If you’re in the mood for something cozy and seasonal, my Fall Harvest Salad is packed with all the fall flavors we love and is drizzled with a sweet dressing that ties it all together.
  • For a crunchy, make-ahead option, my Brussels Sprout Kale Salad includes shaved Brussels sprouts and kale with a bright vinaigrette.
  • And when you’re craving something simple and satisfying, my Kale and Avocado Salad comes together in minutes with a sweet-sour dressing you’ll want to drizzle on everything.
Kale Apple Carrot Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side
Print

Kale Apple Slaw Recipe

15 minute Kale Apple Slaw recipe that is perfect for a satisfying and filling meal. Also gluten free and vegan, you can make a batch as a part of your weekly meal prep and enjoy it throughout the week.
Course Salad
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 407kcal

Ingredients

For The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ small red onion sliced thinly

For The Kale Apple Slaw

  • 6 cups curly kale (1 bunch destemmed and cut into ribbons)
  • 2 carrots shredded
  • 1 cup red cabbage sliced thinly
  • 1 apple sliced thinly
  • 1 cup sunflower seeds or any other nuts

Instructions

  • To make the salad dressing: Whisk together maple syrup, dijon mustard, garlic, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt and pepper in a small bowl or in a mason jar. Add in the sliced red onion and let it steep in it as you work on the rest of the ingredients.
    A collage of images showing the making of the dressing.
  • To make the Apple Kale Slaw: Place kale, shredded carrots and sliced red cabbage in a bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing. Using clean hands, give them a light massage making sure to distribute the dressing evenly throughout the salad. As you massage, the tough kale leaves will soften.
    Person showing how to massage kale for the slaw.
  • Top it off with sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Give it a toss and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 7 to 8 cups of salad and is ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Steep the red onion: This is an optional step but letting your red onion slices soak in the dressing will give them a great texture and make them less bitter and overpowering.
  • Slice everything thinly: To make sure every bite of this recipe bursts with flavor, make sure you thinly slice all of your ingredients. Small pieces make it easier for your veggies to soak up the tangy dressing.
  • Massage the kale: Though it may seem like an odd step, massaging the kale is crucial to giving your leaves the perfect, tender texture. The massaging process infuses the kale with the acidic dressing, which helps break down the parts of fresh kale that are hard to digest.
  • Storage: Once prepared, kale and apple coleslaw will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Be sure to store it in an airtight container in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 407kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Sodium: 381mg | Potassium: 585mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 8535IU | Vitamin C: 48mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/feed/ 2
Vegan Apple Crisp https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/#comments Sun, 14 Sep 2025 13:56:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=35696 Every fall, my husband and I make it a point to go apple picking. And like most apple-picking trips, we…]]>

Every fall, my husband and I make it a point to go apple picking. And like most apple-picking trips, we always come home with more apples than we need. When that happens, this simple vegan apple crisp is the first thing I turn to.

What I love about this version is that it delivers all the comfort of a traditional crisp but with a lighter approach. Instead of the usual butter-flour-sugar crumble, the topping is made with rolled oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, and a touch of coconut oil.

It’s still golden, crisp, and satisfying, just a little more in line with how I like to bake at home.

And the best part? It’s vegan, dairy-free, and gluten-free, so it’s one of those desserts you can easily share or enjoy yourself, no special occasion needed.

Ingredients You’ll Need

As it is with any fruit crisp recipe, this no-sugar-added apple crisp recipe consists of two sets of ingredients: the apple layer and the crispy topping. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes on  key ingredients to help you get the best results:

Ingredients for butterless apple crisp from the top view.

For The Apple Layer:

Apples: You can use any type of apples you like. Use one type of apple or a combination of apples that offer different flavors. I usually use Fuji, Gala, and Honeycrisp apples, as they are sweeter than most other types, which helps make the crisp minimally sweetened. I also like to incorporate a Granny Smith apple for a little tartness.

Maple syrup: I use a small amount of maple syrup to coat the apples, but you can also use one tablespoon of coconut sugar, brown sugar, agave, or even regular sugar.

Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice brightens everything up and keeps your apples from browning before baking. For this recipe, I wouldn’t recommend bottled juice.

Salt: I use kosher salt here. Don’t skip it, because even that tiny pinch enhances the sweetness coming from apples and makes the crisp taste richer.

Arrowroot powder: This helps the apple juices thicken as they bake, so you don’t end up with a watery crisp. An equal amount of cornstarch would be a great alternative.

For The Crisp Topping:

Oats: Use rolled oats (also called old-fashioned oats) for the best chewy texture. Quick oats will not work as they are thinner and tend to disappear into the bake. If you are curious about the difference, check out my Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats guide for a full breakdown.

If you are following a gluten-free diet, make sure to purchase gluten-free certified rolled oats.

Almond flour: Almond flour and almond meal both work in this recipe. I often use Blue Diamond Almond Flour because it is finely ground and easy to find, but Trader Joe’s almond meal is a good choice, too. 

If you can’t find almond flour at the store (or need a cheaper alternative), you can make it at home following my comprehensive guide on How to Make Almond Flour.

How to Make The Best Vegan Apple Crisp: Step-by-Step Instructions

This easy vegan apple crisp might look like something that belongs on a holiday table and takes hours to pull off, but it is actually super simple to make. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Prepare the apples: Chop your apples into small cubes. I prefer smaller chunks so they bake evenly and get soft all the way through. Once they’re cut, toss them in a medium bowl with maple syrup, lemon juice, cinnamon, salt, and arrowroot until everything looks coated. 

A collage of images showing the making of vegetarian apple crisp's topping.

Step 2 – Make the crisp topping: In a large bowl, stir together the oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, cinnamon, salt, coconut oil, maple syrup, and pecans. Mix until it starts to clump together in little bits because those clumps are what bake into those crunchy clusters everyone loves.

Rolled oats are the best choice here since they hold their shape in the oven and give you that real “crisp” texture. Quick oats are thinner and tend to disappear into the mix. 

Side by side photos showing the assembly of the recipe for vegan apple crisp.

Step 3 – Assemble the crisp: Spread the apple mixture evenly in a 9 or 10-inch baking dish. You can use a glass or ceramic pie plate or a square baking pan. The important thing is to ensure that cubed apples are spread evenly at the bottom of the dish.

Spread the topping on top. No need to worry about making it perfect. The uneven clusters are what make this simple apple crisp extra crunchy in the end.

A photo of the freshly baked no butter added apple crisp from the top view.

Step 4 – Bake: Bake in a preheated 350°F (177 °C) oven for about 40 to 45 minutes. You’ll know it’s ready when the topping is golden brown and you see the apples bubbling around the edges.

I did not experience this, but if the topping browns a little too quickly, you can cover the dish loosely with foil towards the end.

Step 5 – Cool and serve: Let the crisp rest for about 10 minutes before serving so the juices settle and the topping stays crunchy. I know it’s hard to wait, but it’s worth it.

How To Store, Reheat, and Freeze Apple Crisp

This gluten-free apple crisp is at its best when it comes out of the oven warm and sizzling, but you can definitely make it ahead or save leftovers to enjoy later. Here’s what I’ve found works best:

Storage: This recipe yields approximately 6 servings, and while it typically disappears quickly, any leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 or 5 days.

Reheating: When you are ready to serve, warm it in the oven at 300°F (149 °C) to 350°F (177 °C) for about 10 to 15 minutes. The microwave works in a pinch, but the topping will soften instead of staying crisp.

Freezing: Apple crisp freezes well for up to 2 months, and you have two options:

  • Freeze before baking: Assemble the crisp in a freezer-safe dish, cover tightly, and freeze. When you are ready, bake it straight from frozen at 350°F (177 °C), adding a little extra time until the apples are tender and the top is golden. This is the best option if you want the topping to stay crunchy.
  • Freeze after baking: Let the crisp cool completely, then wrap it well (to prevent freezer burn) and freeze. When you are ready to enjoy, thaw it overnight in the fridge and warm it in the oven at 350°F (177 °C) for 15 to 20 minutes. The topping will be softer than when freshly baked, but the flavor will still be delicious.
Apple crisp topped off with three scoops of vegan vanilla ice cream.

Expert Tips for the Best Apple Crisp

Even though this vegan apple dessert is one of the easiest desserts you can make, a few small details can really change the outcome. Here are my best tips from testing this recipe:

  • Cut the apples into small pieces: Aim for evenly cut, ½-inch cubes. Larger chunks take longer to cook and soften, which makes the baking time longer.
  • Prevent a watery filling: If your apples are extra juicy (like Honey Crisp), add ½ teaspoon more arrowroot powder or cornstarch to keep the filling from being too watery.
  • Let it rest before serving: Allow it to cool down for about 10-15 minutes before serving so the juices have time to settle.

Variations & Substitutions 

One of the best things about this butterless apple crisp is how easy it is to adapt to your own needs and preferences. Here are a few ideas from my recipe testing:

  • Nut-Free: If you want to skip the nuts, swap the almond flour for oat flour and leave out the pecans. The crisp topping will not be as crunchy, but it can be a good substitute.
  • Sugar-Free Keto: For a keto or sugar-free version, replace the maple syrup with monk fruit sweetener or your favorite keto sweetener. Alternatively, if you want to make a sugar-free apple crisp, you can omit adding maple syrup completely. It won’t have the subtle sweetness that maple syrup offers, but it will still be delicious.
  • Mix-ins and spices: Try soaking raisins in warm apple juice and stirring them into the filling along with a pinch of ground cloves for a bit more spiciness. You can also experiment with chopped dates and even add a dash of cardamom if you are a fan of those cozy spices.

FAQs

Do I need to peel the apples?

It is totally up to you. I prefer not to peel mine, but either way would work.

What is the best way to cut apples?

Use a sharp knife to cut the apple in half, remove the core, and then cut it into ½-inch to ¾-inch cubes. The important thing here is that they are equal in size, so they bake evenly.

How do I keep the topping crunchy?

The key to keeping the topping crunchy is to let it cool for 10 to 15 minutes before serving. This way, the apple crisp has some time to settle and harden before it is served.

What is the difference between an apple crisp and an apple crumble?

They are very similar apple desserts, with a minor difference. A crisp is usually made with oats and nuts in the topping, whereas a crumble typically has a topping made with just flour, sugar, and butter, so it’s more like a streusel.

Serving Suggestions

One of the best parts of this no-butter apple crisp is how versatile it is. It’s the perfect fall dessert to enjoy straight from the oven or dress it up with a few simple add-ons to make it extra special. Here are some of my favorite pairings:

A Glass of milk: Serve it with a glass of cold milk, or for a plant-based option, try my Homemade Almond Milk to balance the sweetness of the warm apples.

Ice Cream: You can never go wrong with a scoop of vegan vanilla ice cream on top. Alternatively, you can try my Coconut Milk Ice Cream for another dairy-free option or my Homemade Honey Ice Cream for a vegetarian option. 

Whipped Cream: If you prefer something lighter than ice cream, a dollop of Maple Whipped Cream on top adds just the right amount of sweetness without overpowering the apples.

Yogurt: You can even use this vegan apple crumble as a topping on my Vanilla Yogurt Recipe. It’s perfect for turning leftovers into a cozy breakfast the next day.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Apple Recipes You Might Like

If you loved this apple dessert, there are plenty of other apple recipes you can try this season:

  • My No Sugar Crockpot Applesauce is one of the simplest ways to use up extra apples and makes the perfect snack or baking staple during the fall months.
  • For a quick breakfast, try my Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal. It’s ready in 15 minutes and has all the warm fall flavors we love in a bowl. 
  • Or, if you’re feeding a crowd, Baked Apple Oatmeal is the ultimate make-ahead breakfast, perfect for fall.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Apple crisp in a bowl with a spoon in the bowl.
Print

Vegan Apple Crisp Recipe

The best vegan apple crisp recipe made without the use of butter and refined sugar (sweetened with maple syrup and fresh apples). Caramelized apples topped with almond flour-oat topping for a perfect vegan apple crumble for fall. Vegan, gluten-free, dairy-free, refined sugar free.
Course Breakfast Sweets, Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 481kcal

Ingredients

For The Apple Layer:

  • 4 apples medium sized – cut into ½ inch cubes*
  • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon 2 gr
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoons arrowroot powder or cornstarch – 14 gr

For The Crisp Topping:

  • 1 cup rolled oats not the quick-cooking kind- 100 gr
  • 1 cup almond flour 120 gr. (or almond meal)
  • ½ cup unsweetened shredded coconut 40 gr (optional)
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 7 tablespoons coconut oil melted and cooled
  • cup maple syrup
  • ½ cup pecans roughly chopped 50 gr

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees F.

To prepare the apples:

  • Place apples, maple syrup, lemon juice, ground cinnamon, kosher salt, and arrowroot powder in a bowl. Give it a stir. Place it in a 9 or 10-inch baking dish.

To prepare the crisp:

  • Mix together the rolled oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, ground cinnamon, kosher salt, coconut oil, maple syrup and pecans in a bowl. Mix until well combined.
    Person making crumb topping.

To Assemble & Bake:

  • Distribute the crisp topping onto the apples in an even layer.
    Collage of images showing the assembly of the apple crisp.
  • Bake for 40-45 minutes or until the topping turns lightly golden.
    Freshly baked apple crisp from the top view.
  • Serve with a scoop of vanilla ice cream or a cup of almond milk on the side.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6 generous servings (approximately 3/4 to 1 cup per serving). The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include optional ice cream on top.
  • * What kind of apples should I use? Feel free to use any kind of apples you like. I personally prefer using two different kinds for different flavors, but either way would work.
  • Can I make it ahead? You can prep the apples a day in advance and keep them in an airtight container in the fridge until you are ready to use them. They will probably brown a little bit, but since you will bake them, it shouldn’t be a problem. I do not recommend making the vegan crumble topping in advance as it could get soggy. Luckily, it takes no more than 5 minutes to put all the ingredients in a bowl and mix them.
  • How to store the leftovers? This recipe serves 6 servings. I doubt that you will have any leftovers, but if you do, place it in an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 2 days. When ready to serve, warm it in a low heat oven (250-300 degrees F) for 5-10 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 481kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 198mg | Potassium: 264mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/feed/ 10
Watermelon Cucumber Salad with Feta and Mint https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/ https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/#comments Wed, 16 Jul 2025 21:24:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9222 Having grown up in the Mediterranean means having a few cooling staples like this cucumber, watermelon, and feta salad in…]]>

Having grown up in the Mediterranean means having a few cooling staples like this cucumber, watermelon, and feta salad in your back pocket. Summers get so hot that refreshing, no-cook dishes like this are a staple on every table.

Versions of this salad show up all across the Mediterranean, from Italy to Greece and beyond. The ingredients may vary slightly, but the combination of juicy watermelon, crisp cucumbers, briny feta cheese, and fresh herbs is a classic in many Mediterranean kitchens.

Every year, as soon as watermelons showed up at the market, my mom would start making it on repeat. With the sweet juiciness of watermelon, the crunch of cold cucumbers, and the creamy-salty bite of feta, it’s the kind of dish that doesn’t need much fuss to shine.

This is what summer tastes like where I’m from: easy, filling, and somehow always the first thing to disappear from the table.

Watermelon Feta Mint Salad Ingredients

This summer watermelon salad with feta and cucumber starts with an easy honey-lime dressing and a short list of ingredients. You can find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes to consider when shopping for this refreshing salad.

The ingredients for watermelon cucumber salad from the top view.

For the Salad Dressing:

I use my honey-lime dressing in this watermelon mint feta salad because the sweet, floral brightness of lime and honey pairs beautifully with the natural sweetness of the watermelon.

Olive Oil: Choose a light and balanced extra virgin olive oil that isn’t overly peppery or grassy. You want something that supports the salad without overpowering the other ingredients. My current favorite single-source olive oil brand is Garcia de la Cruz (affiliate link.)

Lime Juice: Freshly squeezed lime juice is best, but bottled works in a pinch. If you don’t have lime, freshly squeezed lemon juice is an acceptable substitute. It will taste slightly different but still refreshing. You can also add a little lime zest (about ¼ teaspoon) to enhance the citrus notes. Just be sure to zest the lime before juicing it.

Honey: A floral local honey works especially well here, but maple syrup or agave are good alternatives if that’s what you have. Just know they’ll shift the flavor slightly.

For the Salad:

Watermelon: You’ll need 8 cups of watermelon cut into small 1-inch cubes. Seedless watermelon is the easiest option, but if you’re using regular watermelon, try cutting along the natural lines of the seeds to remove them more easily.

Cucumbers: Persian cucumbers offer great crunch, but regular English cucumbers also work well. I usually peel mine, especially if the skin tastes bitter, which can happen if the fruit has been sitting for a while. Removing the seeds is optional.

Fresh Herbs: The classic combo is watermelon, feta, and mint, but I like to add a little torn fresh basil for even more freshness. I don’t recommend using dried herbs here, as their flavors tend to overpower the dish.

Feta Cheese: I recommend buying a block of feta and crumbling it yourself. It’s creamier, fresher, and gives you more control over the size and texture of the crumbles. If you’re looking for alternatives, mild cheeses like goat cheese or queso fresco would also work well.

How to Make Watermelon Cucumber Salad (Easy Step-by-Step Instructions)

This watermelon and cucumber salad recipe comes together in just 15 minutes from start to finish. Here’s how I make it, step by step:

A collage of images shwowing the dressing for watermelon cucumber salad and the ingredients in a bowl.

Step 1- Make the Dressing: In a mason jar or small bowl, combine the olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey. Shake or whisk well until the mixture is fully emulsified and appears creamy and cohesive, with no oil separation. If you’d like to save even more time, you can make the dressing in advance and store it in an airtight jar in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Step 2 – Assemble the Salad: Grab a large bowl (one that gives you plenty of room to toss later without squishing anything) and add the diced watermelon, sliced cucumber, and fresh mint and basil. I recommend tearing the herbs by hand instead of chopping them with a knife. This helps preserve the delicate texture of the basil and prevents it from bruising or darkening.

A collage of images showing Mediterranean watermelon salad being drizzled with the dressing.

Step 3 – Add the Dressing: Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Gently toss with a large spoon (or two spoons, for an even gentler touch), taking care not to mash/bruise the watermelon cubes.

Step 4 – Finish with Feta: Top the salad with crumbled feta cheese just before serving. If you’d like, finish with a pinch of flaky sea salt to bring out the natural sweetness of the watermelon.

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Variations & Easy Add-Ins

Looking to truly make this watermelon cucumber mint salad recipe your own? Below are a few easy ways to switch things up using ingredients you may already have at home. These are optional, but they’re great if you want to build on the base recipe.

Change up the dressing: When I want a different twist, I swap the honey-lime dressing with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. Watermelon cucumber salad with balsamic vinaigrette is just as bright and tangy. You can also finish the salad with a drizzle of balsamic reduction right before serving for a deeper, more concentrated flavor.

Make it heartier: If you’re making this watermelon feta salad as part of your meal prep, stir in a cup (or two) of cooked quinoa, bulgur, or wild rice to make it more filling. For a more traditional green salad base, add a handful of salad greens or baby spinach.

Add Summer tomatoes:  Juicy sliced summer tomatoes (I like heirlooms for salads like these) add another layer of flavor and make the salad even more seasonal and vibrant.

Add Onion: A little onion can bring a nice savory bite. You can use thinly sliced red onions, Pickled Red Onions, or Roasted Red Onions. For a milder option, chopped scallions work well too.

Make it vegan: To make this a vegan-friendly salad, simply omit the cheese or use a store-bought or homemade vegan feta. And don’t forget to swap the honey in the dressing for maple syrup or agave.

Foolproof Tips for the Best Watermelon Cucumber Salad

Making this watermelon feta cucumber salad is simple, but here are a few tips to help you get the best results on your first try:

Be gentle when mixing: Use a light hand when tossing the salad to keep the delicate ingredients from breaking apart. A large spoon or your hands work best for gently combining everything.

Choose a good watermelon: Look for a ripe watermelon that feels heavy for its size and has a large yellow field spot. That spot means it had time to ripen on the vine, which usually means better taste and juiciness.

Cut your watermelon and cucumber evenlyDice the watermelon into bite-sized pieces, or use a melon baller for a more decorative look. For the cucumber, peeling is optional, but I recommend slicing it thinly or cutting it into evenly sized cubes so you get both watermelon and cucumber in every bite.

Do not skip the salt: It may sound unusual, but adding a bit of salt to sweet watermelon makes a big difference. It brings out the natural sweetness and enhances the flavors of both the watermelon and cucumber.

Serve it chilled: This watermelon salad tastes best when it is nice and cold. I like to refrigerate the watermelon, cucumber, and feta before prepping so that everything is cool and refreshing when it is time to serve.

Assemble at the last minute: For the best texture, combine the watermelon, cucumber, herbs, and dressing just before serving. This keeps the watermelon and cucumber from getting soggy.

How to Make Ahead and Store?

If you are planning to make this watermelon cucumber feta salad recipe ahead of time, here are my best tips:

Make Ahead: To save valuable time when you’re ready to serve, you can prep the components ahead: Cut the watermelon, slice the cucumbers, crumble the feta, and make the dressing. Store each component in a separate container with a tight-fitting lid. Assemble your feta watermelon cucumber salad right before serving to ensure the best texture and prevent sogginess.

Storage: Leftover salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Simply drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and mix with a touch more dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

A close up of watermelon salad with feta and mint in a bowl.

What to Serve with Watermelon Cucumber Salad?

There are so many options when it comes to serving this watermelon salad with feta and mint. While I usually make it for lunch and serve it by itself, you can easily pair it with meats and vegetables for your summer meals. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

Grilled Protein: Enjoy it as a light lunch or dinner, and serve it as a side dish to hearty grilled meat and seafood like Grilled Pork Chops, Shrimp Kebobs, Grilled Shrimp, Grilled Mahi Mahi, Shish Tawook, or Greek Yogurt Chicken.

Vegetarian Dinners: Keep the entire meal plant-forward and serve it as a wonderful addition to vegetarian main meals like Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant, Baked Eggplant Ziti or Lemon Ricotta Pasta.

Picnic & Potluck Dishes: This salad is always a hit at summer BBQs, picnics, and potlucks. Pair it with other crowd-pleasers like my No Mayo Coleslaw or Greek Yogurt Coleslaw, or Caper Potato Salad.

Quick Answers to Common Questions (FAQs)

Does watermelon and cucumber taste good together?

Yes, watermelon and cucumber are exceptionally delicious when paired together. The juicy watermelon is the perfect balance to the crisp cucumber.

What is watermelon salad made of?

Watermelon salad consists of watermelon, cucumber, fresh mint, fresh basil, and feta cheese tossed in a lime or balsamic vinegar-based dressing.

How do I pick a ripe watermelon quickly?

Look for one with a creamy yellow field spot, a dull rind (not shiny), and that feels heavy for its size. When you give it a gentle tap, it should sound deep and hollow.

What if I don’t have fresh mint?

Fresh mint adds a lot to this recipe, but if you do not have any on hand, you can simply leave it out. The salad will still be delicious, just a little less aromatic.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Savory Fruit Salads You Might Also Like:

If you love sweet and savory salads, you are in the right place. Here are a few other fruit-forward recipes you might want to try:

Watermelon and cucumber salad in a bowl with two spoons in the bowl.
Print

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Recipe

This Watermelon cucumber salad is an incredibly refreshing savory fruit salad that is flavored with honey lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it is the perfect summer salad you can serve for lunch or take with you to summer potlucks, picnics, and BBQ parties.
Course Lunch
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 290kcal

Ingredients

For the Honey Lime Dressing:

  • 4 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons fresh lime juice from 1 lime
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon honey

For The Salad:

  • 8 cups fresh watermelon ~ 5 to 6 lbs – cut into 1-inch cubes (preferably seedless)
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick, or English cucumbers
  • 3 tablespoons fresh mint roughly torn
  • 2 tablespoons fresh basil roughly torn
  • ½ cup feta cheese crumbled (or goat cheese)
  • Pinch sea salt optional

Instructions

  • Mix olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey in a mason jar and shake vigorously. Set aside.
    Watermelon salad dressing and the ingredients in a bowl.
  • Place watermelon cubes, sliced cucumber, fresh mint, and basil in a large salad bowl.
  • Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a gentle toss being careful not to bruise or break the watermelon chunks.
  • Sprinkle the feta cheese on top, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary. Alternatively, you can sprinkle it with a pinch of sea salt. Serve cold.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 8 cups of cucumber watermelon salad ideal for serving 4 adults. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Serve it chilled. This salad is best when served cold. I like to keep each ingredient in the refrigerator before and after prepping. This way, all the salad is perfectly chill (and super refreshing) before serving.
  • Assemble at the last minute: Toss all the ingredients with the dressing just before serving. This keeps the integrity and texture of the watermelon and cucumber intact.
  • Be gentle while tossing: Use gentle hands to keep the delicate ingredients’ shape and structure.
  • Make Ahead: Prepare all the ingredients and store them in separate containers. You can also make the dressing 3 days in advance and keep it in a mason jar in the fridge. Toss it all together just before serving.
  • Storage: Leftover salad will keep fresh in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and toss with a touch more of the honey lime dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 290kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 365mg | Potassium: 434mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 2056IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 131mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/feed/ 6
Texas Caviar Recipe (Cowboy Caviar) https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/ https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/#comments Wed, 25 Jun 2025 18:24:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=22788 For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re…]]>

For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re like me and didn’t grow up eating it, you might agree that some versions can be overly sweet.

Then I came across Dorie Greenspan’s version in her cookbook Everyday Dorie (affiliate link) and decided to give it another shot. To my surprise, it was nothing like what I had tasted before. Her cowboy caviar dressing was perfectly tangy with just a touch of sweetness, balancing out the earthy beans in the best way.

Cowboy caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.

This recipe, sometimes called Texas Caviar, Cowboy Caviar, Cowboy Salad, or even Cowboy Bean Dip, is my take on her version, with a few minor tweaks.

Whatever name you use, it’s one of the easiest dishes to throw together, and it works as a dip, a salad, or a chunky salsa perfect with a side of tortilla chips.

Texas Caviar Ingredients

For a quick overview, find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. But for truly foolproof results, here are my top tips as you shop and prep:

The Dressing Ingredients:

Some versions of this recipe use bottled Italian dressing, but I find those to be overly oily and lacking in depth. What makes this Cowboy Caviar dip different is the homemade lime and olive oil dressing. It’s just enough to coat the beans and veggies without weighing them down, adding brightness and balance in every bite.

Ingredients for cowboy caviar's dressing.

Here are a couple of helpful ingredient notes as you make the dressing:

Lime zest and lime juice: My version of the Texas Caviar dressing uses both lime zest and fresh lime juice to bring out a bright, tangy flavor. Four tablespoons of lime juice might sound like a lot, but trust me, it’s just the right amount.

If you prefer a milder taste, you can use 2 tablespoons of red wine vinegar and reduce the lime juice to 2 tablespoons.

And just a quick tip: it’s always easier to zest the lime before squeezing it.

Spices: I use a small amount of ground cumin and sweet paprika, following Dorie’s recipe. I think they add a beautiful depth and a welcome punch. Still, if you’re not a fan of either spice, feel free to leave them out.

Sweetener: I almost always reach for natural sweeteners like honey or maple syrup, but granulated sugar works in a pinch if that’s what you have on hand.

Garlic: Whenever I make a salad dressing, I love using fresh garlic. I think the sharp bite and depth of flavor just can’t be replicated. But if you prefer something milder, you can substitute it with 1 teaspoon of garlic powder.

Salad Ingredients:

A photo showing what's in Texas caviar.

Beans: I use a combination of black beans and black-eyed peas in my version of this Cowboy Caviar salad. In my opinion, black-eyed peas are pretty much a must in any Texas Caviar dip recipe. You can swap red kidney beans or pinto beans in place of the black beans if you’d like, and you’ll still get the heart of the dish.

Canned beans help keep things quick and easy, but you can absolutely cook them from scratch if that’s your preference.

Just be sure to rinse and dry them well before assembling the salad to avoid extra liquid watering it down.

Corn: In the summer, I love using fresh shucked corn when it’s in season. But if you’re making this at another time of year, frozen (and thawed) or canned (rinsed and drained) corn works just as well.

Onion: I use a combination of finely chopped green onions and red onions because I love the distinct flavors each one adds. You get a mix of color, crunch, and both mild and sharp flavors. If you prefer a milder taste, you can leave out the red onion. Or if you want something with more bite, skip the green and just use red.

Peppers: Most Texas Caviar recipes use a combination of red bell peppers and jalapeño, and for good reason. Each one brings its own unique flavor. If you like a bit of heat, feel free to leave some of the jalapeño seeds in for a touch of spiciness.

Tomatoes: During the summer months, I love using colorful cherry tomatoes for this Texas Caviar dip. But really, any kind of tomato will work. Heirloom, beefsteak, or even regular Roma tomatoes are all good options. Just be sure to cut them into small, bite-sized pieces so they mix easily with the other ingredients.

Avocado: It is optional and not traditional, but I think a ripe avocado makes a great addition, especially if you’re planning to serve this as a dip with chips on the side. Just be sure to cut it into small cubes so it blends in nicely.

Fresh Herbs: I used a handful of finely chopped fresh cilantro leaves, but if you are not a fan, you can use fresh parsley instead.

How To Make Texas Caviar?

Making this recipe takes no more than 15-20 minutes and requires no special equipment. 

Step 1 – Make the Cowboy Caviar Dressing: 

Person making Texas caviar dressing.

In a mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, paprika, kosher salt, honey, and garlic until fully combined.

Or, if you prefer, add everything to a mason jar, put the lid on, and give it a good shake.

You can also make the dressing a day or two ahead of time to speed things up even more when you’re ready to assemble the dip.

Step 2 – Assemble the salad:

Cowboy caviar salad from the top view in a bowl.

In a large salad bowl, combine the drained and rinsed black beans and black-eyed peas with the corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeños, tomatoes, and chopped cilantro.

If you’re using avocado, I recommend adding it just before serving so it doesn’t brown.

Step 3 – Drizzle and Serve:

Images showing how to make Cowboy caviar.

Drizzle the dressing over the salad and gently toss to combine, being careful not to break up the beans too much.

This is also a good time to give it a taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips:

One of the best things about this Cowboy Salad recipe is that it can be made ahead of time (one or two days). In fact, I recommend it because the extra time allows the flavors to mingle and develop. Here’s how I do it:

  • To make ahead:
    Prepare the dressing and chop all the salad ingredients except the avocado. Toss everything together in a large bowl, drizzle with the dressing, cover tightly, and refrigerate. If you’re using avocado, add it just before serving to keep it from browning.
  • Storing leftovers:
    Transfer any leftover Cowboy Caviar to an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Before serving, give it a good stir and freshen it up with a squeeze of lime juice and a sprinkle of salt if needed.

Expert Tips for The Best Texas Caviar

While this recipe is pretty straightforward, below are a few helpful tips for the best results.

  • Let it rest: This step is optional, but I recommend letting the salad rest in the fridge for about an hour before serving. It gives the tangy lime juice dressing time to soak into the beans and veggies, bringing everything together.
  • Evenly cut vegetables: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is chopping the vegetables, but it’s worth taking your time. Aim to cut everything into similar-sized pieces so each bite feels balanced. Try to slice the tomatoes thinly and cut the peppers into small, bite-sized pieces, ideally smaller than the black-eyed peas.
  • Be gentle as you toss: When mixing the salad, go slowly and gently to avoid breaking the beans. This helps keep the texture nice and prevents everything from turning into mush. 

Cowboy Caviar Variations and Substitutions

Making this Cowboy Caviar dip your own is easy because, let’s face it, this simple recipe is endlessly customizable. Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • Add more veggies: You can pack your Cowboy Caviar with even more fresh vegetables. Try thinly sliced cucumbers, chopped celery, or even finely diced radishes for extra crunch and color.
  • Add fruit: I’ve seen versions of this recipe made with sweet fruit like mango or pineapple. It might sound unexpected, but the sweetness pairs nicely with the tangy dressing, adding a refreshing twist, especially when served as a dip with chips.
  • Switch up the dressing: While my favorite part of this recipe is the tangy lime dressing, I sometimes change things up with my chili lime vinaigrette, which incorporates chili powder and adds a more Mexican-inspired twist.
  • Toss in grains: I love adding a cup of cooked quinoa, wild rice or farro to make it a filling salad especially if I am making this recipe as a part of my weekly meal prep.
  • Make it vegan: If you prefer a vegan version, just swap the honey for maple syrup or agave.

What To Serve with Texas Caviar?

It’s no secret that this recipe makes a great side dish or appetizer, whether you’re heading to a summer BBQ, a potluck, or packing lunch for work. But if you’d like to turn it into a full meal, you have plenty of options. Here are a few ideas:

  • Grilled Meats and seafood: Serve it alongside grilled chicken, shrimp, or salmon for a light and colorful plate. It’s a perfect match for summer cookouts or easy weeknight dinners.
  • With chips on the side: This Cowboy Salsa recipe makes a great appetizer when served with tortilla chips. I like using the scoopable kind, so you can get a little bit of everything in each bite.
  • With eggs: Scrambled eggs wrapped in a tortilla with a generous spoonful of Texas Caviar makes an excellent breakfast burrito. It adds freshness, texture, and just the right amount of zing to your morning meal.

FAQs

What is Texas Caviar?

Texas Caviar is a recipe originally created and served by Helen Corbitt, the culinary director of Neiman Marcus, in 1940s Dallas.

Made with a combination of canned or cooked beans (i.e. red, black, or pinto), black-eyed peas, peppers, tomatoes, garlic, and other extras like corn, avocado, mango, and various herbs and spices, since then it has stood the test of time and become a Southern classic.

Texas Caviar vs. Cowboy Caviar: Is There a Difference?

The dish was originally created in Texas, which is how it got the name “Texas Caviar.” Over time, people started calling it “Cowboy Caviar” as a fun, casual nickname.

How far in advance can you make cowboy caviar?

You can make Cowboy Caviar up to 2 days in advance. Just store it in an airtight container in the fridge, and it should still taste fresh and delicious. If you’re planning to include avocado, wait to add it until right before serving to keep it from browning.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Delicious Bean Salads You’ll Love

Fan of bean salads? Me too! Here are a few more that you might like:

  • My Corn and Black Bean Salad is yet another great alternative to a bean salad that you can serve with chips on the side.
  • What makes my Five Bean Salad recipe the best bean salad is the garlicky mustard dressing. Just like this cowboy caviar recipe, it uses a combination of canned beans and some lightly boiled fresh green beans.
  • If you have extra black eyed peas, then my Black Eyed Peas Salad is just as fresh and satisfying. Not to mention, it takes 15 minutes to make.
Texas caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.
Print

Texas Caviar Recipe

This Texas Caviar (aka Cowboy Caviar)loaded with black-eyed peas, corn, tomatoes, peppers, and tangy lime dressing makes the best salad, dip, or side dish. Ready in 30 minutes and can be made ahead.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 192kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon honey
  • 2 cloves garlic minced

For The Caviar Dip:

  • 1 can black beans 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • 1 can black eyed peas 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • ½ cup corn kernels frozen (and thawed), canned (and drained) or fresh corn would all work
  • 3 scallions both white and green parts are chopped
  • cup red onion chopped finely or diced
  • 1 red bell peppers chopped (approx. 1/2 cup)
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes sliced thinly
  • ½ avocado ripe – cut into small cubes
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro rinsed and chopped

To Serve With (Optional)

  • Your favorite hot Sauce
  • Tortilla Chips

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, smoked paprika, salt, honey and garlic. Set it aside.
    Person making Texas caviar dressing with lime juice.
  • For the Texas Caviar dip (or salad): Place, black beans, black eyed peas, corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeno pepper, cherry tomatoes, avocado, and fresh cilantro in a bowl.
    The ingredients for Cowboy caviar in a bowl from the top view.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    Person drizzling the salad with dressing and mixing it.
  • If preferred, add in a few dashes of your favorite hot sauce and serve with tortilla chips.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5-6 cups of Cowboy caviar ideal for serving 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving and does not include the calories coming from (optional) tortilla chips.
  • Make ahead: You can make this recipe up to 2 days in advance. If you go in that direction, add the avocado right before serving to avoid browning.
  • Storage: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • If you want to go with more of the traditional Italian salad dressing route instead of the lime dressing I used, feel free to use my Italian salad dressing below: ¼ cups extra virgin olive oil
    2 tablespoons white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
    1 tablespoon freshly squeezed lemon juice
    1 clove of garlic, minced
    1 teaspoon dried basil
    1/4 teaspoon dried oregano
    ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper (optional)
    ½ teaspoon Kosher salt (I use Diamond kosher salt)
    ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Nutrition

Calories: 192kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 326mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 982IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 31mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was originally published in March 2019. It has been updated with some additional information with no changes to the original recipe in July 2025.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/feed/ 44
Burrata Caprese https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/ https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/#comments Wed, 18 Jun 2025 22:05:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67454 Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a…]]>

Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata

Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a few key ingredients from the grocery store or farmer’s market. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Below are some helpful tips as you shop for this recipe’s ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Burrata cheese: Fresh burrata cheese is a soft Italian cheese with a delicate, creamy center, similar in taste and texture to fresh mozzarella. It’s usually sold submerged in water in a tub. Before using it in your salad, take it out of the fridge and let it come closer to room temperature to enhance its flavor and texture. 

Also, drain off any excess liquid before tearing it into pieces.

Tomatoes: I like to use a mix of large heirloom tomatoes and sweet cherry tomatoes. The juicy heirlooms bring a meaty, steak-like texture to the salad, while cherry tomatoes add a pop of sweetness. Feel free to use any variety you have on hand, including Roma, beefsteak, vine-ripened, or grape tomatoes.

To get the best flavor, keep your tomatoes on the counter (not in the fridge) and try to use them within a few days of buying them. For easy, clean slices, I recommend using a serrated knife.

Fresh basil leaves: To finish the salad, use whole basil leaves or tear them gently with your hands instead of cutting them with a knife, which can bruise their delicate leaves and release bitter flavors.

Balsamic vinegar: If your budget allows, look for a traditional, aged balsamic vinegar from Modena. Its deep sweetness and complex flavor will elevate the salad. However, you can absolutely use a more affordable condiment-style balsamic vinegar and it’ll still taste delicious!

Extra virgin olive oil: I prefer a single-origin extra virgin olive oil with mild, fruity notes for this recipe. It adds a lovely finishing touch and complements the creamy burrata perfectly.

Seasonings: Keep it simple with kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper. A final sprinkle of flaky salt adds a nice, salty crunch.

How to Make this Burrata Caprese Recipe?

The combination of burrata, tomato and basil is just as delicious here as a traditional caprese salad. The good news is that making it is quick and easy with only a few steps:

A collage of images showing how to make burrata Caprese recipe.

Step 1 – Prepare tomatoes: Slice the larger tomatoes using a serrated knife into ⅓-inch thick slices. If using cherry tomatoes, cut them in half (or you can quarter them as well). 

Grab a large serving platter and arrange the sliced tomatoes overlapping until it covers the bottom of the plate. 

Sprinkle it with salt to ensure they are properly seasoned.

Step 2 – Add burrata: Place burrata balls in the center of the serving platter. Alternatively, gently cut them into smaller pieces with a sharp paring knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes. Alternatively, you can carefully tear into small chunks by hand.

Step 3 – Season: Sprinkle the tomatoes and burrata with the remaining salt and black pepper. Finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil and balsamic vinegar ensuring that each slice of tomato gets a bit of oil and a bit of balsamic vinegar.

Garnish with torn basil leaves before serving.

How to Store Leftovers?

Leftover burrata caprese will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for 2–3 days. Keep in mind that the burrata’s creamy center will solidify a bit over time, so it won’t be quite as creamy on days two and three.

Before serving leftovers, drain off any excess liquid to prevent them from becoming soggy. To “revive” your burrata caprese, add a few fresh tomato slices and some fresh basil leaves, then drizzle with a little extra olive oil and balsamic vinegar. Finish with a sprinkle of flaky salt for a fresh, vibrant bite.

Expert Tips

  • Use peak season tomatoes for the ultimate flavor. While creamy burrata may seem like the star of the show, slightly ripe, juicy tomatoes are just as crucial for the most delicious dish. When shopping for tomatoes for this recipe, take a moment to ensure that they are not overly ripe and free of any bruises.
  • Season tomatoes liberally:  Don’t be shy about salting the tomatoes. Properly seasoning them draws out their natural juices and enhances their sweet, vibrant flavor.
  • Serve at room temperature: To achieve the perfect burrata “ooze”, bring it to room temperature before tearing and adding it to the salad. This way, it will be extra creamy with a soft and spreadable texture.
  • Presentation is key: This is a showstopping salad that will become the talk of the table. Be creative – assemble the tomatoes somewhat haphazardly and whimsical. Allow the burrata to shine in the center or scattered into pieces.
  • Resist the urge to overcomplicate it: This is a super simple tomato salad that truly shines when made with in-season, high-quality ingredients. Stick to the basics and let the fresh flavors speak for themselves. There is no need for extra bells and whistles!
  • Double the recipe or halve it for a small crowd: The recipe below serves four, but I could honestly eat the whole thing myself. Double or triple the recipe for a large party, or halve it when serving for one or two.

Variations

While the combination of basil, burrata, and tomatoes is quite simple and effective, you can take this recipe to the next level by changing it up a bit. Here are a few variations I’ve tried and recommend:

  • Use balsamic reduction instead of balsamic vinegar: Balsamic reduction (also known as sweet balsamic glaze) is reduced balsamic vinegar that is sticky and sweet, and can add just another level of flavor to this burrata caprese salad recipe. Simply drizzle your burrata salad with balsamic glaze at the very end (instead of the balsamic vinegar drizzle) for a robust and tangy finish.
  • Change up the Dressing: Take it up a notch with a simple basil dressing for caprese salad, like Basil Vinaigrette or go for Balsamic and Lemon Dressing.
  • Add avocado: Although unconventional, a ripe avocado adds another layer of creaminess and color to this tomato burrata salad. Simply slice a ripe avocado (or cut it in cubes) for an added layer of flavor and texture.
  • Add summer fruit: Add a handful of summer berries, such as sliced juicy strawberries or raspberries, or some ripe stone fruit like peaches and apricots for a burst of color and natural sweetness.

What to Serve With Caprese Burrata Salad

When you put this Caprese salad with burrata on the table, I think we can all agree that it will be the star of the show. Make it a part of your Memorial Day Menu, Labor Day Menu, or 4th of July celebrations! Here are some pairing and serving suggestions:

  • Crusty Bread: Serve it with warm crusty bread like French baguette or No Knead Olive Bread on the side for an appetizer that is guaranteed to impress.
  • Bruschetta: Slice a baguette, brush with olive oil and toast just before serving alongside the tomato caprese with fresh burrata, or make it a part of your Meat and Cheese Platter.
  • Grilled or Roasted Meats: Give it a nice boost of protein and serve it as a side dish with Marinated Shrimp Skewers, Grilled Mahi Mahi, Greek Yogurt Chicken or Shrimp Scampi.
  • Pasta: Go all-out Italian and serve it with a main dish, such as my Garlic Butter Pasta or Lemon Ricotta Pasta.
  • Crisp White Wine: If all else fails, treat yourself to this gorgeous salad and a crisp, chilled glass of wine like an Italian Pinot Grigio or Sauvignon Blanc.
Burrata Caprese styled on a plate from the top view.

FAQs

What is burrata?

Creamy burrata cheese is an Italian cow’s milk cheese that features an outer shell of fresh mozzarella wrapped around a soft-center of stracciatella (cheese curds and cream).

Where does burrata cheese come from?

Burrata originated in Puglia, Italy at the Castel del Monte and since has become a global sensation around the world.

What’s the difference between burrata and caprese?

Burrata is the soft cheese ball with a creamy center, whereas caprese is the simple Italian salad that can be made with either burrata or fresh mozzarella.

What is the difference between burrata and mozzarella?

Burrata and mozzarella are both creamy, white, semi-soft Italian cheeses very similar in appearance. However, burrata is made with an outer layer of fresh mozzarella and filled with soft, stringy curd and cream known as stracciatella (the cheese, not the gelato). As a result, it has a super creamy texture and taste. Mozzarella is made from cow or water buffalo milk that is firm and bouncy.

How to cut burrata?

Instead of slicing it with a knife (as you would with mozzarella cheese), try breaking it using your clean hands. I usually like to break it into chunks, revealing all the creamy bits, and place it over the tomatoes.

How do you eat burrata?

Burrata is typically first sliced with a knife (or torn with clean hands) to reveal its creamy soft center, drizzled with olive oil and flakey sea salt, then eaten just as is with a fork, summer produce, or toasted bread.

Other Tomato Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you simply love the combination of tomato, basil, and burrata, or need some delicious ideas to use up your summer tomatoes, I have plenty of recipes I know you’ll love. Below are a few that I make over and over again during the peak tomato season:

  • My Caprese Chicken Sandwich is an open-faced sandwich that’s a wonderful weeknight recipe, with the same classic flavor profile as burrata caprese. It’s a fantastic summer dinner idea.
  • For a quick and easy weeknight dinner, my Pizza Caprese celebrates the flavors of the classic Italian recipe by turning it into a pizza that’s especially great when serving kids.
  • If you want to travel down to the South Mediterranean, try my Piyaz – Turkish Tomato White Bean Salad for another tomato salad recipe that’s a bit different but just as delicious.
  • Try my quick Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella Salad for a simple summer side that you can make in less than 15 minutes.
Burrata Caprese placed on a plate from the top view.
Print

Burrata Caprese Recipe

Put your fresh summer tomatoes to good use with this Burrata Caprese recipe that you can make in 10 minutes.This easy summer salad combines the classic Italian flavors we all love, but uses Burrata instead of mozzarella cheese.
Course Salad
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 93kcal

Ingredients

  • 4-5 large tomatoes
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt or flaky sea salt
  • 2 balls burrata cheese 8 ounces in total
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves torn
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for finishing
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze

Instructions

  • Slice tomatoes into ⅓-inch thick slices. Arrange them on a serving platter. Sprinkle tomato slices with ½ teaspoon salt.
  • Arrange burrata balls in the middle or gently break them with a sharp pairing knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes.
  • Sprinkle everything with the rest of the salt and freshly ground black pepper. Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar.
  • Garnish it with basil leaves. Serve!

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 4 generously. I usually serve one ball of burrata and two medium-sized tomatoes for 2 people. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply this recipe using this ratio.
  • Tomatoes: While we use heirloom tomatoes in the recipe, you can use any type of tomatoes you have on hand. Cherry tomatoes, vine-ripened tomatoes and even roasted tomatoes would work in this recipe.
  • You can serve burrata as a whole or gently break it to reveal the creamy center. This way, your guests can easily serve themselves.
  • Storage: Leftover burrata caprese will keep for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. However, keep in mind the buratta’s cream will solidify and lose its viscosity over time, so it will not be as creamy on days two and three.

Nutrition

Calories: 93kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 0.4mg | Sodium: 444mg | Potassium: 307mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1108IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/feed/ 2
Balsamic Chicken Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/#comments Wed, 04 Jun 2025 21:44:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81713 Whether you’re cooking on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop, this versatile marinade transforms everyday chicken breasts…]]>

Whether you’re cooking on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop, this versatile marinade transforms everyday chicken breasts (or thighs) into a flavorful, crowd-pleasing meal. Plus, it’s easy to make ahead, perfect for meal prep, and freezer-friendly, making it ideal for busy weeknights or laid-back weekend BBQs.

Key Ingredients for Balsamic Marinade for Chicken

You can find the full list of ingredients for this balsamic vinegar chicken marinade in the recipe card. Below are a few helpful notes to help you make it your own.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Balsamic vinegar: When choosing a balsamic vinegar, follow your taste buds and your budget. 

You can use a traditional, aged balsamic from Modena for deeper sweetness and complexity, or a more affordable condiment-grade balsamic vinegar. Both will work beautifully to add that sweet-tangy depth to your chicken.

I would not recommend substituting store-bought balsamic glaze here, as it is already sweet and thickened. As a result, it won’t work the same way in the marinade.

Olive oil: I recommend using a high-quality extra-virgin olive oil here. Its smooth flavor perfectly balances the tangy balsamic vinegar and creamy Dijon mustard, helping the marinade coat the chicken evenly and soak up all those delicious flavors.

Sweetener: While I used honey, other liquid sweeteners such as maple syrup and agave can also be used. If you prefer to use brown sugar instead, be sure to stir it thoroughly so that no grainy sugar particles are left behind.

Garlic: I find that fresh garlic cloves make this recipe shine, but for a milder flavor, you can use ½ teaspoon garlic powder (equivalent to 2 cloves of fresh garlic).

Fresh Herbs: I think chopped fresh thyme pairs beautifully with the tangy-sweet flavors in this balsamic vinaigrette marinade, but if you don’t have fresh thyme, use half the amount of dried thyme instead. 

Alternatively, a robust Italian seasoning blend or other fresh (or dried herbs) like rosemary and oregano would also work well in this recipe.

Chicken: While I used skinless and boneless chicken breasts, you can also use skinless and boneless chicken thighs. 

How To Make Balsamic Chicken Marinade?

Making this balsamic vinegar marinade for chicken is easy and quick (in fact, the base is very similar to my versatile Lemon Balsamic Salad Dressing). Here are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make balsamic marinade for chicken.

Step 1 – Mix the Ingredients: Use a container large enough to comfortably hold two pounds of chicken, ideally one with a tight-fitting lid. 

Place the balsamic vinegar, olive oil, honey, Dijon mustard, minced garlic, thyme, salt, and pepper in the container and whisk until thoroughly combined.

Alternatively, you can use a heavy-duty resealable bag, such as a Ziplock bag (for easy cleanup), and pour marinade over the meat. This is especially ideal if you are making it in larger quantities.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken in the marinade, making sure each piece is fully coated. Cover tightly with the lid and refrigerate.

Chicken marinating in balsamic marinade from the top view.

Step 3 – Let time do the rest: Marinate the chicken in the fridge for at least 30 minutes or, if you have the time, overnight for maximum flavor.

How To Cook Balsamic Marinated Chicken?

What makes this balsamic vinegar-marinated chicken so versatile is that you can cook it in any way you like. During the summer months, I love to fire up the grill, while in cooler weather, I let the oven do the heavy lifting. And when I’m short on time, cooking them quickly on the stovetop makes for an easy and delicious lunch. Here’s how you can do it:

Balsamic marinated chicken breasts on the grill.

On The Grill:

This is by far my favorite way to cook chicken marinated in balsamic vinegar—the high heat seals in the juices and creates those beautiful charred grill marks. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Prepare the grill: Preheat your grill to medium-high heat (about 425–450°F). Clean the grill grates to ensure there’s no residue from previous grilling sessions. Use a pad of oiled paper towels to thoroughly oil the grates to prevent the chicken from sticking.

Step 2 – Remove the chicken: Take the chicken out of the marinade, letting any excess drip off. This is an important step, as too much marinade can cause flare-ups on the grill.

Step 3 – Grill: Place the chicken breasts on the hot grill and close the lid. Grill for about 6 to 8 minutes per side. A good way to tell when it is time to flip is to gently lift the chicken. If it releases easily from the grill, it is ready to flip. If it is sticking, give it another minute or two. It will release naturally once it is properly seared. 

Please note that the timing may vary depending on the thickness of your chicken. Check for doneness by inserting a digital thermometer in the thickest part of the chicken—it should read 165°F.

Step 4 – Rest & Serve: Loosely tent the grilled balsamic-marinated chicken with foil and let it rest for 5–7 minutes, allowing the juices to redistribute before serving.

Balsamic marinated grilled chicken on a plate from the top view.

In The Oven:

When I’m after a more hands-off approach, I let the oven do most of the work for me. Below are the steps:

Step 1 – Preheat the oven: My go-to oven temperature for baking chicken is 425°F (218 °C). I find that any lower, and it takes longer; plus, caramelization happens better at this hotter temperature.

Grab a baking sheet and line it with parchment paper. This helps with cleanup later, but if you prefer a more caramelized, slightly sticky exterior, you can skip using it.

Step 2 – Arrange: Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan. Just like with the grilling method, it is important to let any excess marinade drip off first. Otherwise, it will steam instead of roast, and you will miss out on that beautiful caramelized crust.

Step 3 – Roast: Let the oven do its magic for 20 to 22 minutes, keeping in mind that the exact timing will depend on the thickness of your chicken pieces. Rotate the pan halfway through for even roasting.

Again, the best way to check for doneness is by inserting a digital thermometer into the thickest part of the chicken and ensuring that it registers 165°F (74°C).

Step 4 – Rest & Serve: Remove from the oven, cover loosely with foil (or parchment paper) and let it rest 5-10 minutes before serving.

On The Stove Top:

I usually cook it on the stove when I am preparing my balsamic marinated chicken for lunch, to serve with a quick salad or rice on the side. Here’s how:

Step 1 – Heat your skillet: Heat 1 tablespoon of oil in a large (10–12 inch) skillet over medium-high heat. 

Pro Tip: It is essential that the skillet is shimmering hot before adding the chicken. A properly heated skillet ensures the chicken sears immediately, creating a flavorful crust and preventing it from sticking to the pan.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken breasts in the pan, making sure to (1) let the excess marinade drip off first and (2) avoid overcrowding the skillet. Giving the chicken enough space helps it sear and brown properly rather than steaming.

Step 3 – Cook: Let the chicken cook for 5 to 7 minutes on each side. Similar to the grilling method, if the chicken releases easily when you try to flip it, it is ready to be turned. If not, give it a few more minutes to develop a nice sear.

Use a digital thermometer to check doneness.

Step 4 – Rest and serve: Transfer the now-cooked chicken to a plate, cover with foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

How To Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

My favorite thing about this balsamic marinade recipe is that you can make a batch in minutes and have it ready to cook at a moment’s notice. 

It also freezes beautifully, making it perfect for those busy days when you need a quick and flavorful meal.

Storage and reheating: The leftover cooked or grilled balsamic-marinated chicken can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. You can reheat it in a low-temp oven (300 degrees F) for 10 minutes or until it is heated through, being careful not to overcook and dry it out.

Freezing: If you prefer to freeze, I recommend freezing the raw chicken in the marinade instead of cooking it first. Simply place the chicken and marinade in a freezer-safe bag or container, removing as much air as possible to help prevent any ice crystals from forming. It will keep well in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Thawing: Remove the frozen chicken and marinade from the freezer and let them thaw in the fridge overnight.

Balsamic marinated chicken served with a salad on the side.

Expert Tips:

While marinating chicken in this balsamic vinegar marinade is a straightforward process, there are a few key points to consider for optimal results.

  • Marinating time: I find that the ideal marinating time is between 30 minutes and 12 hours, maximum. Balsamic vinegar, as an acidic ingredient, helps break down the muscle fibers in the chicken, making it more tender and juicy.
    However, any longer than that and the acidity can start to break down the chicken too much, especially with lean cuts like chicken breasts, leading to a mushy texture.
  • Take the chicken out of the fridge 15-30 minutes before cooking: While it may sound like an extra step, letting the chicken come close to room temperature helps it cook evenly. If you put cold chicken directly into a hot pan, grill, or oven, the outside will start cooking quickly while the inside remains cold.
  • Save some of the marinade: Before adding the chicken, save a few tablespoons of the marinade to use for a light brushing at the end. I especially recommend this when you’re grilling. It adds a beautiful finishing touch, keeping the chicken juicy and glossy all at the same time.
  • Safety First: Discard any marinade that came in contact with raw chicken once you’re done with it. This helps prevent any foodborne illnesses or salmonella contamination.
  • Large Chicken Breasts: If you’re using very large chicken breasts, I recommend cutting them in half lengthwise or pounding them with a meat mallet to an even thickness. This not only shortens the cooking time but also helps them cook more evenly.

FAQs

How long can you marinate chicken in balsamic vinegar?

I recommend marinating the chicken for at least 30 minutes or up to 12 hours in the refrigerator.

Why did my balsamic chicken burn on the grill?

Balsamic marinated chicken can potentially burn if the grill is too hot or if you use too much sugar in the marinade.

Do I need to rinse the marinade off the chicken before grilling?

No, you do not. Just let the excess marinade drip off before cooking.

Pairing Suggestions with Balsamic Chicken

Starches: Pair it with my Seasoned Quinoa for a light meal, or turn it into a feast with Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes.

Salads: During the summer months, when I need something quick and easy to serve with grilled balsamic chicken, I usually go for my 5 Bean Salad or Greek Cucumber Salad.

Vegetables: If you’re after a low-carb dinner, serve your balsamic marinated chicken with a side of my Garlic and Butter Green Beans or Sauteed Asparagus.

Make it a dinner: Try my Grilled Caprese Chicken, where I use this marinade and then grill the chicken with sliced fresh mozzarella for an easy summer dinner.

Other Chicken Marinade Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoyed this recipe, I think you might also:

  • Enjoy my Yogurt Chicken Marinade. Similar to vinegar-based marinades, the lactic acid in yogurt gently tenderizes the meat, keeping it just as juicy and flavorful.
  • Like my Mediterranean Chicken Marinade recipe, it embodies the characteristics of the Mediterranean diet with fresh lemon juice, olive oil, and fresh herbs. And you only need 15 minutes of marinating time for the most succulent chicken recipe.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Balsamic chicken breasts sliced on a plate.
Print

Balsamic Chicken Marinade Recipe

This easy balsamic chicken marinade comes together in minutes using simple pantry staples. It’s perfect for grilling, baking, or pan-searing, and it leaves your chicken tender, juicy, and full of rich, tangy-sweet flavor.
Course Chicken
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 426kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ cup balsamic vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for cooking and for grill grates
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 cloves minced garlic
  • 1 teaspoon chopped fresh thyme or ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 lbs boneless skinless chicken breasts 6-8 oz each / or thighs

Instructions

To Make The Marinade:

  • In a large container with a lid, whisk together ½ cup balsamic vinegar, ¼ cup olive oil, 1 tablespoon honey, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon chopped thyme, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper until combined.
    A collage of images showing how to make balsamic chicken marinade.
  • Place the chicken in the container and ensure it is thoroughly coated with the marinade.
  • Cover it with the lid and refrigerate for 30 minutes or overnight.
    Chicken marinating in balsamic marinade.
  • When ready to cook, remove it from the fridge 10-15 minutes before you are prepared to cook.

To Cook on the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (450°F/232°C). Clean grill grates and brush them with vegetable oil.
  • Remove the chicken from the marinade, letting excess liquid drip off as much as possible, and place on the grill.
  • Grill for 6-8 minutes per side (the timing would change depending on the thickness of your chicken breasts) or until the thickest part of a chicken breast registers 165°F (74°C) when inserted with a meat thermometer.
    Balsamic grilled chicken on the grill from the top view.
  • Transfer the now cooked chicken onto a plate, cover with aluminum foil and let it rest for 5-7 minutes before serving.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat the oven to 425°F/218°C. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan and bake for 20-22 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 165°F / 74°C.
  • Remove from the oven and onto a plate. Cover with aluminum foil and let them rest for 5 minutes before slicing and/or serving.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet (10 or 12-inch cast iron skillet or a skillet grill is ideal) over medium-high heat.
  • When it is simmering hot, place the chicken breasts in the skillet, making sure not to overcrowd the pan.
  • Cook, turning once until they are fully cooked, 12-15 minutes, or until a digital thermometer inserted in the center of a breast registers 165°F /74°C.
  • Remove the chicken breasts from the skillet and onto a plate; cover with aluminum foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ¾ cups of balsamic vinegar chicken marinade, enough for marinating 2 pounds of chicken which is good for 4 servings. The nutritional values listed below are per serving.
  • Let the excess marinade drip off: Regardless of the cooking method you are using, take the time to let the excess marinade drip off before cooking. This is an essential step for achieving perfectly cooked and lightly caramelized balsamic chicken, rather than burned or steamed chicken.
  • Storage and Reheating: Leftover cooked or grilled chicken can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat oven (300°F / 149°C) for 10 minutes or so until it is warmed to your liking.
  • Freezing & Thawing: You can freeze raw chicken in marinade in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.

Nutrition

Calories: 426kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 48g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 145mg | Sodium: 866mg | Potassium: 889mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 70IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/feed/ 2
Mediterranean Chicken Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/#comments Wed, 04 Jun 2025 21:37:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81740 Inspired by my Turkish roots and my mom’s love for bold, homemade flavors, this marinade is truly foolproof. No more…]]>

Inspired by my Turkish roots and my mom’s love for bold, homemade flavors, this marinade is truly foolproof. No more bottled dressings or long waits needed. Just real, simple ingredients that deliver mouthwatering results with minimal effort. 

Whether you’re firing up the grill, roasting in the oven, or searing on the stovetop, my marinade for Mediterranean chicken guarantees tender, delicious chicken that’s perfect for meal prep or a fast, flavorful dinner.

Key Ingredients – Building Blocks of Flavor

The beauty of this chicken marinade is that it is made with everyday ingredients you likely already have in your pantry. You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below. Below are some helpful ingredient notes.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Olive Oil: I recommend using extra-virgin olive oil, which is the purest and least processed type of olive oil. Look for a brand that offers fruity flavors with balanced bitterness and a slight peppery finish.

Lemon zest: The zest of a lemon is essential for delivering the distinctive lemony flavors that Mediterranean chicken marinade recipes are known for. Keep in mind that zesting the lemon is much easier before juicing it, so zest first, then juice.

Fresh lemon juice: No bottled supermarket juice here. Take the time to juice fresh lemons as freshness is key to a bright, zesty flavor.

Garlic: For the most potent flavor, I recommend using 3 minced fresh garlic cloves. For a milder garlic flavor, feel free to use garlic powder.

Mustard: I prefer Dijon mustard for its smooth tanginess, which brings the marinade together beautifully. However, grainy mustard can also be a great choice, adding a bit of texture and richness.

Fresh herbs: For the most authentic Mediterranean chicken marinade, I used fresh oregano, chopped just before adding it to the mix. Fresh rosemary, thyme, or even parsley (for a milder flavor) also work well in this recipe. If you’re using dried herbs instead, they’re more concentrated, so use about half the amount of fresh to avoid overpowering the marinade.

Seasoning: While I used basic salt and pepper for seasoning my marinade, you can use your favorite seasoning blends or spices from your cabinet. I particularly like my Mediterranean spice blend, also known as Baharat Spice Mix, for its continuation of Mediterranean flavors.

Chicken: I tested this recipe both with skinless and boneless chicken breasts and thighs, and they both worked beautifully. However, I think this is an all-purpose chicken marinade that would work with any cut of chicken.

How to Make Mediterranean Chicken Marinade?

Making this chicken marinade is quick and easy (in fact, the base is very similar to my versatile Mediterranean Salad Dressing). While the steps are pretty straightforward, there are a few things to keep in mind. Below are the steps to follow:

Steps showing how to make the marinade.

Step 1 – Mix the Ingredients: Grab a large container with a tight-fitting lid (big enough to hold 2 pounds of chicken). 

Combine the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, minced garlic, Dijon mustard, oregano, and a good pinch of salt and pepper. Whisk until everything is combined.

Alternatively, you can use a heavy-duty resealable ziplock bag, which makes cleanup easy and is especially handy if you’re doubling or tripling the marinade.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken breasts in the marinade, making sure each piece is fully coated. Cover tightly with the lid.

Chicken breasts submerged in the marinade.

Step 3 – Let it rest: Let the chicken marinate on the kitchen counter for 15 to 30 minutes.

Pro Tip: Due to the amount of lemon juice we’re using, marinating for longer can cause the chicken to start “cooking” in the acid, which can result in a slightly rubbery texture and an overpowering lemony flavor once cooked.

How to Cook Mediterranean Marinated Chicken?

In addition to being a quick marinade that only needs 15 minutes, you can cook your Mediterranean marinated chicken any way you like. While grilling is my favorite method for this chicken recipe, I also love roasting it in the oven for a hands-off approach. And when I need a quick sear, I turn to the stovetop. 

Below, you’ll find my tips and how I use each cooking method.

Marinated Mediterranean chicken on the grill.

On The Grill:

This is one of my favorite grilled chicken marinade recipes because as soon as the chicken hits the hot grill, the tangy juices lock in the flavors, and you get those beautiful grill marks. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Heat Up the Grill: Start by preheating your grill to a medium-high heat about 425–450°F (218-232 °C). Give the grates a good scrub to remove any lingering bits from past cooks, then lightly oil them with a paper towel pad dipped in oil. This keeps the chicken from sticking and makes for easy flipping.

Step 2 – Prep the Chicken: Take the marinated Mediterranean chicken out of the marinade, letting any extra drip off. Too much marinade can cause flare-ups or uneven cooking, so this step is worth taking the extra time to do it right.

Step 3 – Grill Away: Place the chicken on the hot grill and close the lid. Grill for 6 to 8 minutes per side. You’ll know it’s ready to flip when it naturally releases from the grill. If it sticks, give it another minute. Patience here pays off! 

Use a digital thermometer to check for doneness; you’re aiming for 165°F (74°C) in the thickest part.

Step 4 – Rest and Enjoy: Once the chicken is grilled, transfer it to a platter, cover it loosely with foil, and let it rest for 5–7 minutes. This brief pause allows the juices to settle back into the meat, ensuring every bite is juicy and full of Mediterranean flavor.

In the Oven:

When I’m in the mood for a more hands-off approach, I let the oven do all the work.

Oven-roasting helps lock in moisture and ensures the meat cooks through gently and evenly, which is something you don’t always get with quicker, high-heat methods.

Step 1 – Preheat the Oven: Heat your oven to 425°F (218°C). This temperature is ideal for roasting chicken because it cooks quickly, helping the chicken stay juicy and flavorful. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper for easy cleanup, or skip the parchment if you prefer a slightly crispier exterior.

Step 2 – Arrange the Chicken: Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan, making sure to let any excess marinade drip off first. This prevents the chicken from steaming and helps it roast to a golden perfection.

Step 3 – Roast: Bake the chicken for 20 to 22 minutes, rotating the pan halfway through for even cooking. Keep in mind that the exact timing will depend on the thickness of your chicken. Check for doneness with a meat thermometer. It should register 165°F (74°C) when inserted in the thickest part of a chicken breast.

Step 4 – Rest and Serve: Remove the chicken from the oven, cover loosely with foil (or parchment paper), and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing and serving.

Grilled chicken from the top view.

On the Stovetop:

I often turn to the stovetop when I want to get a quick sear for lunch or an easy dinner. 

Step 1 – Heat Your Skillet: In a large skillet (10–12 inch), heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil over medium-high heat. You can also use a cast iron skillet if you prefer.
Pro Tip: Wait until the oil is shimmering hot before adding the chicken—this ensures a flavorful sear and prevents the chicken from sticking.

Step 2 – Add the Chicken: Place the marinated chicken breasts into the pan, shaking off any excess marinade first. Avoid overcrowding the pan to give the chicken space to sear properly.

Step 3 – Cook: Let the chicken cook for about 5 to 7 minutes on each side. If the chicken releases easily when you try to flip it, it’s ready; otherwise, let it cook a bit longer to develop that beautiful crust. Use a digital thermometer to check that the thickest part of the chicken reaches 165°F (74°C).

Step 4 – Rest and Serve: Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes to allow the juices to redistribute.

Expert Tips for the Best Mediterranean Chicken

While this recipe is straightforward and doesn’t involve any fancy steps, there are a few key points to keep in mind for optimal results. Here are some of the helpful insights I picked up while testing this recipe:

  • Reserve Some Marinade: It’s a good idea to set aside a few tablespoons of the marinade before adding the chicken. I love to use this reserved portion to brush over the grilled or cooked chicken at the end for a glossy finish.
  • Toss the Marinade: After marinating the chicken, discard any leftover marinade. This helps prevent the risk of spreading harmful bacteria, such as Salmonella.
  • Don’t Marinate for Too Long: Through testing, I found that the sweet spot for this lemon and olive oil chicken marinade is 15 to 30 minutes. Marinating longer can cause the chicken to become rubbery, so stick to the recommended time.
  • Cooking Times Vary: The cooking times in the recipe card are based on chicken breasts. If you’re using other cuts, such as chicken thighs, keep in mind that they may take a bit longer to cook. The foolproof way to check doneness is with a digital meat thermometer.
  • Pound the Chicken Breasts: I used chicken breasts that were around 6–8 ounces, which is considered a normal size. If yours are larger or thicker, use a meat mallet to pound them to an even thickness, which ensures even cooking and juicy results.
  • Garnish for Presentation: For an extra-special presentation, serve your Mediterranean chicken with slices of fresh lemon and a sprinkle of fresh herbs.

Storage and Freezing Tips

Storage and reheating: You can store leftover cooked chicken in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat oven (300°F/149 °C) for 5-10 minutes, or until warmed to your liking.

Freezing: While freezing does slow down the effects of the acidic lemon in the marinade, it doesn’t completely stop it. As a result, when the chicken is thawed and cooked, it can end up rubbery and mushy. For that reason, I don’t recommend freezing the raw chicken in the marinade.

What to Serve with Mediterranean Chicken?

What I love most about this recipe is its versatility, transforming your marinated Mediterranean chicken into an impressive feast with endless pairing options to suit any crowd. Here are a few of my favorite ways to round out the meal:

  • Salads: Keep things fresh and light with salads that highlight Mediterranean flavors. My creamy yogurt cucumber salad or Greek salad are both low-carb, crisp, and refreshing recipes that pair perfectly with this chicken. If you’re after a vibrant splash of color, my Red Cabbage and Carrot Slaw adds a satisfying crunch and a pop of color.
  • Pilafs: For a more substantial meal or to incorporate into your weekly meal prep, pair your chicken with Mediterranean classics like my Bulgur Wheat Pilaf or Mediterranean Rice with Vermicelli. These cozy sides bring a warm, hearty balance to the lemony chicken.
  • Pasta: Looking for a comforting plate? Slice your chicken and serve it over or alongside my Garlic Butter Spaghetti or Lemon Ricotta Spinach Pasta for a delicious, easy-to-make dinner.
  • Sauce: Add an extra layer of Mediterranean flavor with classic sauces like my Tzatziki sauce or yoghurt tahini sauce. They’re creamy, cooling, and the perfect finish for this juicy chicken.

FAQs

Can I use this marinade for other proteins?

Yes! This Mediterranean marinade recipe is a great all-purpose option that works beautifully with seafood (like shrimp or salmon) and lamb.

Do I need to pat the chicken dry before marinating?

Patting the chicken dry does help the marinade stick better and more evenly coat the meat, but it will still work well if you skip this step.

Can I use the leftover marinade as a sauce?

No. Since the marinade has come into contact with raw chicken, it’s not safe to use as a sauce. Instead, if you’d like to brush it on the cooked chicken for extra flavor, set aside some marinade before adding the raw chicken.

How can I prevent my chicken from drying out?

Use a digital meat thermometer to make sure you don’t overcook the chicken. Once it reaches an internal temperature of 165°F (74°C), take it off the heat. Also, don’t skip the resting step because letting the chicken rest before slicing helps the juices settle back in, keeping every bite tender and juicy.

Other Chicken Marinade Recipes You Might Also Like

  • If you prefer a yogurt-based marinade that still captures those Mediterranean flavors, try my Yogurt Chicken Marinade. It’s creamy and packed with herbs.
  • For a more robust, vinegar-forward flavor, my Balsamic Vinegar Chicken Marinade is a fantastic option with its sweet and tangy notes.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim

Mediterranean marinated chicken on a plate.
Print

Mediterranean Chicken Marinade Recipe

This Mediterranean Chicken Marinade is a quick 15-minute marinade that infuses chicken with fresh, vibrant flavors. Made with basic ingredients, this foolproof recipe guarantees juicy, flavorful chicken that can be cooked on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop.
Course Chicken Recipes
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading Time 15 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 430kcal

Ingredients

  • cup olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • cup lemon juice
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon fresh oregano chopped or 2 tsp dried plus more as garnish
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 lbs chicken breasts boneless & skinless (6-8 oz each) or chicken thighs

Instructions

To make the marinade:

  • In a large bowl, whisk together ⅓ cup olive oil, 1 teaspoon lemon zest, ⅓ cup lemon juice, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon chopped fresh oregano (or 2 teaspoons dried), 1 teaspoon kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper until fully combined.
    A collage of images showing how to make the marinade.
  • Add the chicken into the bowl, making sure it’s fully coated with the marinade.
    Chicken breasts in the marinade.
  • Cover with the lid and refrigerate for 15 minutes or up to 30 minutes.

To Cook on the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (about 450°F/232 °C). Clean grill grates and brush lightly with oil.
  • Remove chicken from the marinade, letting excess drip off, and place on the grill.
  • Grill for 6-8 minutes per side, or until a digital thermometer inserted into the thickest part registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the now-cooked chicken to a plate, cover with aluminum foil, and let rest for 5-7 minutes before serving.
    Grilled Mediterranean chicken from the top view.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat oven to 425°F/218°C. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper.
  • Place chicken breasts on the prepared sheet pan. Bake for 20-22 minutes, or until a digital thermometer registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5 minutes before slicing and serving.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet (10- or 12-inch cast-iron skillet or grill pan) over medium-high heat.
  • Once the oil is hot and shimmering, place chicken breasts in the skillet, making sure not to overcrowd the pan. You may have to cook them in batches.
  • Cook, turning once, for 12-15 minutes, or until a digital thermometer inserted into the thickest part of the breast registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ⅔ cup of marinade, enough for 2 pounds of chicken breasts, which is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional information below is calculated per serving.
  • Drip off the excess marinade: Take a moment to let any extra marinade drip off before cooking. This is especially important if you’re grilling to prevent flare-ups.
  • Storage: Cooked marinated chicken can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can reheat it in a low-heat oven (300°F/ 149 °C) for 5-10 minutes or until it is warmed through.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing raw chicken in this marinade. The acid in the lemon juice will continue to break down the chicken (similar to ceviche), leading to a rubbery texture when cooked.

Nutrition

Calories: 430kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 49g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 145mg | Sodium: 860mg | Potassium: 891mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 93IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/feed/ 2
Easy Yogurt Fruit Dip https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-fruit-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-fruit-dip/#comments Sat, 31 May 2025 14:09:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=35031 Key Ingredients Made with only 3 basic ingredients, this fruit dip with yogurt is a great lighter alternative to traditional…]]>

Key Ingredients

Made with only 3 basic ingredients, this fruit dip with yogurt is a great lighter alternative to traditional fruit dips, focusing on wholesome ingredients and natural sweetness. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. Below are some helpful notes on the ingredients.

The ingredients for fruit platter dipping sauce.

The Best Yogurt for Fruit Dip

I prefer either Greek yogurt or thick Icelandic yogurt for this recipe. The thickness is essential here, as other types of yogurt will result in a runny fruit dip. I find that whole milk (full-fat) yogurt delivers the creamiest yogurt dipping sauce for fruit, but if you prefer a lighter option, you can use non-fat or low-fat yogurt instead.

You can buy already sweetened yogurt or follow my homemade vanilla yogurt recipe to make it in just a few minutes. 

Alternatively, if you are following a dairy-free (or vegan) diet, you can use plant-based yogurt. While almond yogurt and coconut yogurt are options, I prefer unsweetened cashew yogurt as it offers a neutral flavor.

Sweeteners: Natural Options & Adjustments

Honey or maple syrup: You can use maple syrup or honey interchangeably to make this yogurt fruit dip. Whenever I make it for my family, I use local honey as it helps with my husband’s allergies. Still, feel free to use what you have on hand. 

Jam: Alternatively, you can flavor it with a small amount of jam. Though keep in mind that most store-bought jams are packed with sugar, so a small amount goes a long way.

Sugar alternatives: I won’t lie, I am not a big fan of sugar alternatives (primarily used in keto diets) like stevia or erythritol, but if you are, you can certainly sweeten your fruit dip with your favorite sugar-free sweetener.

Regardless of the sweetener you use, be sure to taste your yogurt before adding sugar to adjust the sweetness.

Flavor Boosters: Vanilla, Citrus & Beyond

While the 3-ingredient fruit dip recipe is wonderful by itself, you can make it your own with any of the optional add ins. Below are a few ideas to help you change it up:

Vanilla: It is no secret that vanilla extract makes everything taste better, but if you have it on hand, you can take it up a notch by using vanilla bean paste (affiliate link). The vanilla seeds spread throughout the yoghurt fruit dip not only make it even more delicious but also visually impressive.

Remember that a small amount goes a long way. I usually use ½ teaspoon per cup of yogurt.

Lemon or Orange zest: A small amount (½ teaspoon or so) of lemon zest or orange zest (for sweeter flavor notes) is an easy way to elevate this fruit dip made with yogurt. The oils and concentrated oils in the zest spread throughout the dip add a layer of depth, especially when served with berries. 

Cinnamon: A small amount of cinnamon is a nice way to warm up the flavors of the dip. I especially like adding cinnamon when serving this yogurt-based fruit dip with sliced apples during the fall and winter months.

Fresh mint: Chopped fresh mint introduces a well-balanced flavor and pairs beautifully with berries. 

How to make fruit dip with yogurt?

You can find the detailed instructions in the recipe card, but below are some helpful detailed notes to help you as you make this recipe.

Person showing how to make yogurt fruit dip.

Step 1 – Whisk the dip base for ultimate creaminess: In a medium-sized bowl, combine the yogurt, honey (or your preferred sweetener), and vanilla extract. If you are using any of the optional add-ins, this is the time to add them as well. Whisk to ensure that everything is thoroughly combined.

Step 2 – Taste and Adjust: Give it a quick taste and add more sweetener, vanilla, etc. if preferred.

Step 3 – Chill for Enhanced Flavor: This is optional, but if you have the time, cover and place in the fridge for 30 minutes or so. This way the flavors get a chance to mingle and concentrate.

Step 4 – Plate with fruit: Grab a large plate and place the vanilla yogurt fruit dip in the middle. Peel (if necessary) and slice the seasonal fruit, and put it around the bowl.

A bowl of yogurt fruit dip surrounded with different kinds of fruit on a wooden cutting board.

Make Ahead and Storage Instructions

Make Ahead: You can prepare this easy fruit dip with yogurt up to 2 days in advance and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator. If you are using regular yogurt that is not as thick as Greek yogurt, you may notice some liquid (also known as whey) build-up; if that happens, simply drain it before serving.

Storing leftovers: Leftovers can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. Just be sure to store it in an airtight container.

Expert Tips: 

While this 5-minute recipe is pretty straightforward, there are a few things I would like to mention as you make your version of the best yogurt dip for fruit:

Consistency and Texture: Achieving that perfect creamy, non-runny dip is all about a few key details. You already know to start with thick yogurt, such as Greek or Icelandic (that’s your base for success!). I would also recommend draining any liquid before using in the recipe. Additionally, letting it chill after mixing will help you achieve a thicker, more creamy consistency without extra effort.

Keep seasonality in mind: The basic recipe I’ve included below works all year round. However, if you choose to add any of the optional add-ins, consider the fruit you plan to use as you make your additions. 

For example, if I plan to serve it with apple slices, then a combination of maple syrup and a dash of cinnamon would complement it better. Conversely, if I am serving it with strawberries, honey, and citrus zest would be a better choice.

A man is holding a strawberry dipped in yogurt dip.

FAQs

Can I use flavored yogurt?

Yes, you can. However, most flavored yogurt tends to be already sweet so be sure to taste it before adding any additional sweeteners.

How long does the dip last in the fridge?

This fruit dip recipe should last for up to 2-3 days as long as it is stored in an airtight container in the fridge.

Can I make this recipe vegan?

You sure can. Simply use vegan yogurt (my favorite is cashew) in place of Greek yogurt.

Variations for this fruit dip made with yogurt:

Depending on the season or the crowd I’m serving, I like to create my own variations of this recipe. While the options are endless, I wanted to include a few of my favorite pairings below:

  • Fall Spices: For a cozy, fall twist, add in a dash of ground cinnamon, allspice, and/or some nutmeg. This variation works beautifully when paired with apples or pears. 
  • Fresh mint and Lime: Flavoring the dip with chopped fresh mint, lime zest, and a squeeze of lime juice works well, especially when serving it with strawberries, blueberries or raspberries.
  • Chocolate: If you are a fan of rich chocolate flavors, you can swirl in a tablespoon of cocoa powder and a bit more sweetener. I love pairing this chocolate version with bananas and strawberries.
    Protein-Packed: The Greek yogurt fruit dip is already high in protein, but if you want to add more, you can stir in a scoop of your favorite protein powder. Alternatively, you can also incorporate a spoonful of peanut butter or any other seed butter for an extra boost of protein.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Yogurt Recipes You Might Also Like:

Growing up in a Mediterranean country, yogurt was a staple in our household and I just can’t think of a day without eating a cup of yogurt, which explains why I have so many yogurt recipes on this website. 

If you liked this recipe, below are a few more that you might like:

  • Need a no sugar added dessert? Try my frozen yogurt bark. This is a great summer snack for kids.
  • Chia pudding is wonderful, but did you know that you can make it with yogurt as well? My yogurt chia pudding is a filling breakfast you can make overnight.
  • Keep your money and never order yogurt parfait at Starbucks. My homemade yogurt parfait is just as delicious (if not better) and a great meal prep breakfast.
A bowl of yogurt fruit dip is served with fruit around it.
Print

Yogurt Fruit Dip Recipe

An easy & quick to make 3-ingredient yogurt fruit dip recipe sweetened with honey and flavored with vanilla extract. This is the best fruit platter dipping sauce to serve everyone in your family.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 2 minutes
Total Time 2 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 68kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Greek yogurt full fat (you can use plain or vanilla yogurt)
  • 2 tablespoons honey or maple syrup or orange juice
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract

Optional add-ins:

  • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 1 teaspoon fresh mint thinly sliced/julienned

To Serve:

  • fresh fruit

Instructions

  • Place yogurt, honey (or maple syrup), and vanilla extract in a bowl. Add in the optional ingredients, if you prefer.
  • Whisk until thoroughly combined. *
  • Serve with fruit on the side.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This fruit yogurt dip recipe makes 1 cup that is ideal for serving 4-6 servings. The nutritional information you see below is per serving (of 4).
  • Let it rest *: If you have the time, cover and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes before serving. Sitting in the fridge will help thickened your fruit yogurt dip and make it even more creamy.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare this fruit dip up to 2 days in advance and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator. If you are using regular yogurt that is not as thick as Greek yogurt, you may notice some liquid (also known as whey) build-up; if that happens, simply drain it before serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 3 days. Be sure to give it a stir before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 68kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 48mg | Potassium: 156mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 122mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-fruit-dip/feed/ 8
Mediterranean Pasta Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/#comments Thu, 22 May 2025 12:56:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81553 Even as someone who develops recipes for a living, I still have those moments before a get-together when I’m standing…]]>

Even as someone who develops recipes for a living, I still have those moments before a get-together when I’m standing in the kitchen wondering, what should I bring? I mean, I know I have a blog full of recipes, but when you’re serving a crowd with so many preferences and diet restrictions, it’s always a hard decision to make.

My experience is that this Mediterranean macaroni salad seems to please most people. For one thing, most people love the familiar “Greek” flavors (i.e. cucumbers, olives, tomatoes, etc.) and it rarely needs an introduction. To me, it is like a bistro pasta salad that is the most popular dish on the menu.

Cold Mediterranean pasta salad in a bowl with wooden spoons from the top view.

Key Ingredients:

The good news is that once you understand the process and the flavor profile, it’s easy to make this Mediterranean pasta recipe your own. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but below are a few helpful notes and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Pasta: I used farfalle (also known as bow tie pasta), but other shapes like rotini and fusilli would also work. I prefer these shapes as they hold on to the dressing, blend well with the rest of the ingredients, and are easy to scoop and eat cold. Of course, you can always use gluten-free pasta if preferred. 

Canned & fresh veggies: In my humble opinion, using a combination of canned and fresh vegetables is what makes this Mediterranean noodle salad a winner. And the best part is that if you do not have one ingredient (or you don’t care for it), you can use another. Here are a few optional add-ins and substitution ideas:

  • Onion: Use finely chopped red onion instead of scallions.
  • Tomatoes: If tomatoes are not in season, use finely chopped sun-dried tomatoes instead.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh oregano is the classic “Mediterranean” herb used in salads like this, but other herbs like fresh parsley, dill, and mint would all work.
  • Cheese: Not a fan of feta cheese? Use goat or no cheese if you prefer a vegan or dairy-free version of this pasta salad. 
  • Add protein: If you want to turn this into a more filling meal, feel free to bulk it up with a protein. Chickpeas are a great plant-based option and work beautifully with the Mediterranean flavors. You can also add grilled shrimp, chicken, or even canned tuna for a quick boost. Just be sure everything is cooled before mixing it in.
  • Pasta Salad Dressing: I used my go-to Mediterranean Vinaigrette, but my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette would also be a great dressing option.

How to Make Mediterranean Pasta Salad?

Once you have the ingredients ready, making this Mediterranean diet pasta salad is no more than a few easy steps. You can find the detailed recipe below, but here’s how I put it together:

A collage of images showing cooked pasta and making of the pasta salad dressing.

Step 1 – Cook the pasta: I feel like most pasta salads either have too much pasta or too many “supporting” ingredients. For a salad with so many add-ins, I find that 8 ounces of pasta (which gives you about 4 cups cooked) is the right balance.

Cook it in well-salted boiling water until al dente, according to the package instructions. Then drain and rinse under cold water to stop the cooking process.

Pro tip: Let the pasta cool completely before adding the rest of the ingredients. If it’s too warm, it can wilt the veggies or melt the cheese. Plus, the dressing will soak in too quickly, leaving the salad a bit dry.

Step 2: Make the dressing: You can make the Mediterranean pasta salad dressing in a mason jar (great if you’re making it ahead) or a measuring cup, but if I’m making this for just us at home, I usually grab a large bowl and make it right there. 

That way, (1) I don’t have to wash another dish, and (2) I can start building the salad directly in the bowl.

No matter what vessel you’re using, start by adding the lemon juice, garlic, Dijon mustard, oregano, salt, and pepper. Then, slowly drizzle in the olive oil while whisking. This helps emulsify the dressing, making it a little creamy and helping it cling to the pasta.

Photos showing how to assemble the Mediterranean noodle salad.

Step 3 – Assemble the salad: Grab a large salad bowl. And I do mean large because we’ve got a good amount of vegetables going in. Add the cooled pasta along with the rest of the ingredients. It’ll look like a pile at first, and that’s totally fine.

Step 4: Dress and serve: Drizzle with the dressing and toss to combine. It might get a little messy, but that’s part of the charm of this easy pasta salad. Use tongs or two large spoons, and be gentle (and patient) as you toss.

If you have the time, cover and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes so the flavors can mingle.

Expert Tips:

Before you start cooking, here are a few tips to help you get the best results from this cold Mediterranean pasta salad. These small details can make a big difference in taste, texture, and presentation.

Drain the canned vegetables: One of the reasons this salad is so convenient is that it takes advantage of canned or jarred ingredients like artichoke hearts, roasted bell peppers, and olives. But if you don’t drain them properly, they can add too much moisture and water down the salad. Use a colander and drain each ingredient thoroughly before adding it to the bowl.

Taste for seasoning: Whenever I write a recipe with salty or briny ingredients like feta cheese and olives, I keep the added salt to a minimum. But let’s face it, not all feta or olives are created equal. Some are much saltier than others. So it’s always a good idea to taste those components first, then adjust the amount of salt in the dressing as needed.

Chop everything into similar sizes: For the best texture and an even bite, keep all the ingredients around the same size as the pasta. It’s a small thing, but it helps everything mix well and makes the salad easier to eat.

Serving Suggestions:

While this Mediterranean bow tie pasta salad can stand on its own, it also pairs well with a variety of main dishes. Below are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

  • Roasted or grilled meat and seafood: This pasta salad is the ideal companion to a simply grilled salmonbaked chicken breast, or even lamb chops. The fresh, vibrant flavors of the salad beautifully cut through the richness of grilled proteins, making for a light yet satisfying meal.
  • Make it a Mediterranean weeknight dinner: Make a batch of my mom’s Chicken Kofta Recipe and serve it with your pasta for a true Mediterranean feast.
  • Bread: Serve it with a side of crusty bread (such as my Olive Bread) or warm pita bread to scoop up every last bit of that delicious dressing.
  • Fresh fruit: If all you need is a light and refreshing complement, serve it alongside a bowl of seasonal fresh fruit, such as watermelon, berries, or grapes.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Mediterranean cold pasta salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe

This Mediterranean Pasta Salad is a vibrant, make-ahead dish that’s perfect for gatherings, lunches, or easy dinners. It travels well and tastes even better after a few hours.
Course Vegetarian Pasta
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 350kcal

Ingredients

For the Salad:

  • 8 oz dry pasta farfalle, fusilli or rotini
  • 3 Persian cucumbers or 1 English cucumber – peeled and sliced thinly
  • 1 ½ cups cherry tomatoes quartered
  • 2/3 cup black olives such as Kalamata olives sliced or chopped – 3 oz.
  • 1 cup roasted red peppers sliced and drained (or cut into small strips) (I use jarred)
  • 1 cup marinated artichoke hearts quartered and drained (7 oz after drained)
  • 3 scallions thinly sliced
  • 2 cups arugula or baby spinach – washed and dried
  • 4 oz. feta cheese crumbled

For the Mediterranean Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ½ teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – or ⅛ teaspoon dried oregano
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Cook the pasta until it’s al dente, according to the package directions. Drain and rinse under cold water to stop the cooking process. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing the cooked pasta and salad dressing for the recipe.
  • While the pasta is cooking, make the dressing by whisking together 3 tablespoons lemon juice (or vinegar), 1 clove of minced garlic, ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard, ½ teaspoon chopped oregano, ½ teaspoon of Kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a small bowl. Slowly drizzle in ¼ cup of olive oil while whisking until fully emulsified.
  • To assemble the salad, in a large bowl, combine the cooked and cooled pasta, cucumber, tomatoes, olives, roasted red peppers, artichoke hearts, scallions, arugula, and feta cheese.
    Images showing how to assemble the Mediterranean macaroni salad.
  • Pour the dressing over the salad and toss gently to ensure all ingredients are evenly coated with the dressing. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • If you have the time, cover and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes before serving.
    Pasta salad in a bowl with wooden utensils.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-7 cups of pasta salad that is ideal for six (generous) servings as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead Instructions: Keep in mind that this salad gets better as it sits, so you can absolutely make it a day in advance. The only thing I recommend is holding off on adding the arugula or spinach until just before serving so the greens stay fresh and don’t wilt.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. It is normal to get a bit soggy as it sits. Be sure to give it a good toss and taste (and adjust) the seasoning before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 350kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1104mg | Potassium: 314mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1027IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 154mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/feed/ 4
Lamb Burgers Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/ https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/#respond Tue, 06 May 2025 20:00:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81378 How to Make Lamb Burgers? These Mediterranean lamb burgers are quick to prepare and easy to cook. Whether you’re using…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell

Before we jump into how to make lamb burgers, here are the key things to know that will help you get it just right:

How to cook the lamb patties: I like grilling them during the summer months, but if I make these burgers during the colder months, I cook them in the oven or on the stovetop. You’ll find the cooking instructions for all methods below.

How long does it take to cook? Depending on the thickness of your patties, on the grill, they take about 10–12 minutes. In the oven at 400°F, expect around 15–18 minutes. On the stovetop (using a cast iron skillet), go for 5–6 minutes per side.

Seasoning for lamb burgers: A flavorful blend of cumin, coriander, paprika, and lemon zest gives the ground lamb burgers a Mediterranean-style taste that pairs beautifully with tzatziki.

What to put on lamb burgers: We keep these Greek-style lamb burgers fresh and simple by layering the burger patties with tzatziki sauce, a slice of tomato, pickles, and curly greens. However, other burger toppings like pickled red onions, sumac onions, a dollop of CAVA’s feta cheese dip, or even a spoonful of harissa would also work beautifully, especially if you’re leaning into the Mediterranean flavors.

How to Make Lamb Burgers?

These Mediterranean lamb burgers are quick to prepare and easy to cook. Whether you’re using a grill, oven, or skillet, here’s how to do it with step-by-step photos:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Step 1 Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the complete list in the recipe card below. But here are a few quick ingredient notes and substitutions:

  • Ground Lamb: The base for this lamb patty recipe is ground lamb, which naturally has a higher fat content (typically around 20–25%), making it juicy. If you prefer something slightly leaner or want a milder taste, try a 50/50 mix of ground lamb and ground beef. Lamb and beef burgers still capture that Mediterranean feel but with a milder flavor that some people prefer.
  • Fresh Herbs: Parsley is essential for freshness. Mint is optional, but I recommend using it. Mint adds a bright, cooling note that helps balance the natural gaminess of the lamb.
  • Spices: Cumin, coriander, and paprika create a warm, aromatic base that complements the richness of the lamb. For more depth, you can use a tablespoon of my Mediterranean Spice Blend or Middle Eastern 7 Spice, which work beautifully with these ground lamb patties.
  • Toppings: We used tzatziki, tomato slices, pickles, and greens. For a different sauce for lamb burgers, try my Mint Yogurt Sauce or Lemon Tahini Sauce, which are quicker to make.
  • Hamburger Buns: Store-bought burger buns work just fine, but if you have the time, I highly recommend making my Brioche Burger Buns.
A collage of photos showing how to make the lamb mixture.

Step 2 Prepare the burger meat: Mix ground lamb, garlic, herbs, spices, lemon zest, salt, and pepper in a large bowl until just combined. Resist the urge to overmix the lamb mixture as it can make patties dense and tough instead of tender and juicy.  

A collage of images showing the lamb patties before and after they are cooked.

Step 3 Form the patties: Shape into four patties, about 4 inches wide. Press a shallow thumbprint in the center of each, which is key to a perfect lamb hamburger patty recipe.

Step 4 Cook the patties: Whether you’re grilling, baking, or pan-searing, you can cook these patties to your preferred level of doneness (here is a temperature chart). For medium, aim for an internal temperature of 145°F (63°C); for well done, cook to 160°F (71°C). The best way to check is by inserting an instant-read thermometer into the center of the patty.

  • On the Grill: Preheat the grill to medium-high heat (400–425°F / 200–220°C). Clean and oil the grates, then place the lamb patties on the grill. Cook for 3–4 minutes per side for medium, or 5–6 minutes per side for well done.
  • In the Oven: Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C). Place the patties on a parchment-lined baking sheet and bake for 15–18 minutes, flipping them halfway through.
  • On the Stove: Heat a tablespoon of oil in a cast-iron, grill pan, or non-stick skillet over medium heat. Cook the lamb burgers for 5–6 minutes per side, depending on the size of your patties and doneness preference.
The toppings from the top view.

Step 5 Toast the buns & prep your toppings: While the burgers cook, place the buns on the cooler side of the grill or in the oven to toast them lightly. This is also a great time to slice your tomato, rinse the greens, and get your pickles and tzatziki ready for assembly.

An image showing how to prepare lamb burgers.

Step 6 Assemble: Spread tzatziki on the bottom bun, add a thinly sliced tomato, greens, pickles, and the grilled lamb burger patty. Top with more tzatziki and the top bun. Serve right away.

Expert Tips

Here are a few tips to help you get the best results when making this recipe:

  • Thumbprint trick: Don’t skip the small dent in the center of each lamb patty as it helps the burgers cook evenly and keeps them from puffing up in the middle as they cook.
  • The secret to juicy lamb burgers: Mix the ingredients just until combined to avoid a dense texture, and cook the patties only until they reach your desired doneness (145°F (63°C) for medium or 160°F (71°C) for well done). Overmixing or overcooking are the most common reasons for dry burgers.
  • Prevent falling apart: If your lamb burger patties tend to break apart on the grill, try chilling them in the fridge for 30 minutes before cooking and avoid flipping too early. During testing, I found versions of this recipe that use breadcrumbs or egg as a binder. I didn’t find those additions necessary in my version here, but they can be helpful if your mixture feels too soft or loose.
  • Shape slightly larger than the bun: As the lamb burger patties cook, they shrink slightly. To ensure a perfect fit, shape your patties just a bit wider than the buns. They’ll cook down to the correct size.

Serving Suggestions

These lamb hamburgers are easy to pair with a variety of fresh and satisfying sides. Here are some of my favorite ideas:

  • Coleslaw: If I make these lamb burgers for a cookout, I usually serve them with a bright, crunchy slaw like my Red Cabbage Slaw or Mayo-Free Coleslaw, which pairs beautifully and can be made ahead.
  • Mediterranean-inspired salads: Continuing with the Greek/Mediterranean theme, serve these lamb burgers with a Mediterranean Pasta Salad or a Greek Cucumber Tomato Salad—both are refreshing, easy to prep ahead, and complement the flavors of the burgers beautifully.
  • Bean Salads: Serve alongside my Five Beans Salad or Cowboy Caviar for a colorful, protein-packed addition—great for outdoor cookouts.

More Lamb Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoy cooking with lamb, be sure to check out some of my other go-to lamb recipes like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Ground lamb burger layered with tzatziki sauce from the front.
Print

Lamb Burgers Recipe

These juicy Greek-style lamb burgers are seasoned with warm Mediterranean spices and topped with tzatziki, fresh tomato, and crisp greens. They are quick to prepare and easy to cook on the grill, stovetop, or in the oven. Perfect for a weeknight dinner or casual cookout.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 546kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lb ground lamb
  • 2 garlic cloves peeled and minced
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped finely
  • 2 tablespoons fresh mint chopped finely optional
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For Serving

  • 4 burger buns sliced in half
  • 1 cup Tzatziki Sauce or yogurt dill sauce
  • 1 tomato sliced
  • ½ cup sliced pickles dill or bread-and-butter, depending on your preference
  • 4 leaves curly greens or any other salad greens

Instructions

  • Place 1lb ground lamb, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 2 tablespoons of fresh parsley, 2 tablespoons of fresh mint, 1 teaspoon of ground cumin, 1 teaspoon of ground coriander, ½ teaspoon of paprika, 1 teaspoon of kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon of ground black pepper in a large bowl.
    Lamb mixture before and after it is mixed.
  • Using clean hands, mix until all the ingredients are fully combined, being careful not to overwork the meat.
  • Divide the meat mixture into four equal portions and shape them into 4-inch-wide patties. As you shape them, remember that they shrink slightly during the cooking process so it is best to make them a bit larger than your burger bun.
    Lamb patties being shaped and grilled.
  • Use your thumb to gently press a shallow indent in the center of each patty—this helps them cook evenly and prevents puffing on the grill. Cover and set aside while you preheat the grill.

To Cook On the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (around 400–425°F). Once hot, scrape the grates clean and brush them with olive oil.
  • Place the lamb patties on the grill and cook for 3–4 minutes per side for medium (145°F) or 5–6 minutes for well done (160°F), depending on your preference. Once cooked, place them on a plate, cover with aluminum foil and let them rest for 2-3 minutes for the juices to redistribute.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Transfer the patties to the baking sheet and bake for 15–18 minutes, flipping them halfway through.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat a tablespoon of oil in a cast-iron, grill pan, or non-stick skillet over medium heat.
  • Place the lamb patties on the hot skillet and cook for 5–6 minutes (or more, depending on your doneness preference) per side.
  • While the patties are cooking, place the buns on the cooler side of the grill (or in the oven or the skillet) to warm them through.

To Assemble

  • To make lamb burgers, spread some tzatziki (or yogurt dill sauce) on the bottom half of each bun. Add a slice of tomato, some salad greens, a few pickle slices, and a grilled lamb patty. Spoon a little more tzatziki over the top of the meat, then place the top bun on and serve.
    Ground lamb burgers on a plate with yogurt sauce.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes four lamb burgers. The nutritional values below are per serving and include the toppings. 
  • Other herbs: While I opted for fresh parsley and mint, you can use other fresh herbs like rosemary and oregano in smaller quantities (about 1 to 2 teaspoons each) as they tend to be more potent.
  • Make ahead: You can mix and shape the lamb burger patties up to a day in advance. Store them covered in the fridge until you’re ready to cook.
  • Leftovers: Cooked lamb burgers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat gently on the stove or in the oven to avoid drying them out.
  • Freezing: 
    • To freeze raw, place uncooked patties on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and freeze until solid. Then transfer to a freezer-safe bag or container with parchment between each patty. They’ll keep for up to 2 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.
    • To freeze cooked lamb patties, bring them to room temperature, cover tightly with plastic wrap, and freeze for up to a month.

Nutrition

Calories: 546kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 37g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 93mg | Sodium: 1305mg | Potassium: 454mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 892IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 194mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/feed/ 0
Red Cabbage Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/#comments Wed, 30 Apr 2025 14:37:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81303 How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw? This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

Before you dive in, here are a few quick tips that will help you make the best red cabbage slaw every time:

Slice Thinly for Best Texture: A mandolin is great for getting ultra-thin, even slices, but a sharp knife works just as well. The key is to slice the cabbage as evenly as possible to keep the slaw light, crisp, and not bulky.

Make It Ahead: This simple slaw stores beautifully in the fridge if you prefer to make it ahead. In fact, it gets even better as it sits and the flavors meld together — ideal for meal prep!

No mayo dressing: Made with a light, tangy vinegar dressing instead of mayo, this purple cabbage slaw recipe is naturally vegan. It’s a great option if you’re looking for a coleslaw that’s a little lighter but still delivers on texture and taste.

How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw?

This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably already have on hand, and once everything’s sliced and tossed, you’re ready to go. Here’s how to make it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Step 1 Gather Your Ingredients: For a full list and measurements, check out the recipe card below. Here’s a few ingredient substitution ideas:

  • Make It Creamy: I opted for a vinegar-based dressing to keep it light, but if you prefer your red cabbage coleslaw with mayonnaise, this classic coleslaw dressing will give you that creamy texture and flavor you’re after.
  • Onion: I like the milder bite of green onions here, but thinly sliced red onions work just as well if you want a bit more punch.
  • Fresh Herbs: A handful of parsley brightens up the slaw and adds a pop of green, but feel free to use what you have — fresh cilantro, dill, or even fresh mint would all be delicious.
  • Carrots: I add carrots for extra crunch and a pop of color, but you can definitely leave them out if you prefer a simpler slaw.
    Steps showing how to make coleslaw with red cabbage.

    Step 2 Prepare the vegetables: Using a mandolin (or a sharp chef’s knife if you prefer), shred the red cabbage into thin, even slices. Grate the carrots using the large holes of a box grater, then thinly slice the green onions and chop the parsley. Add all the ingredients to a large mixing bowl and set it aside.

    Step 3 Mix the Dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, whisk together the extra virgin olive oil, minced garlic, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar (or red wine vinegar or rice vinegar), honey (or maple syrup or sugar), Dijon mustard, kosher salt, and black pepper until smooth.

      Red cabbage slaw being drizzled with dressing.

      Step 4 Toss It All Together: Drizzle the dressing over the cabbage mixture. Use clean hands (or tongs) to toss everything together, making sure the vegetables are evenly coated.

      Step 5 Chill and Serve: If you have the time, cover the bowl and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes to let the flavors come together. Serve your red cabbage carrot slaw chilled and enjoy.

        Coleslaw with red cabbage and carrots in a bowl.

        What to Serve It With?

        This simple red cabbage slaw is one of those side dishes that pairs well with many meals. Whether you’re making tacos, grilling, or just pulling together a quick weeknight dinner, it brings the perfect pop of color and crunch. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

        • Tacos: I love using this red cabbage slaw for tacos! It’s especially good piled onto brisket tacos for a smoky, hearty bite. It’s also fantastic with flank steak tacos, adding just the right amount of freshness, and honestly, it’s a must with fish tacos. The crunch balances out the tender, flaky fish so well.
        • Grilled Meats: This slaw is a total no-brainer for BBQ season. Serve it alongside grilled harissa chicken for a spicy kick or with grilled turkey tenderloin for a light but satisfying meal. And I am pretty sure no one would complain if you served it with grilled lamb burgers either.
        • Grilled Seafood: For seafood nights, I love pairing it with grilled shrimp, grilled salmon, or grilled mahi mahi. It’s the kind of side that keeps everything feeling light, bright, and colorful. Perfect for summer dinners!
        • Pulled Pork: Try tossing this purple cabbage slaw onto your pulled pork sandwiches for a crunchy twist, or serve it next to a big plate of roasted veggies and grains for a fresh meal.

        Similar Salad Recipes You Might Like:

        It is no secret that coleslaw recipes are some of the most popular summer salads. Here are a few other reader favorites in case you need more inspiration:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Red cabbage and carrot slow in a bowl.
        Print

        Red Cabbage Slaw Recipe

        A vibrant and easy Red Cabbage Slaw made with a light, zesty dressing — no mayo needed! Great for tacos, pulled pork, grilled meats, and fresh summer meals. Vegan and gluten-free.
        Course Vegan side dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Resting time (otpional) 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 98kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Coleslaw

        • 1 head of red cabbage about 1 ½ lbs shredded (~7-8 loosely packed cups)
        • 2 medium carrots peeled and shredded, about ½ lbs (~2 cups)
        • 3 green onions chopped thinly (or 1/2 cup sliced red onion)
        • 3 tablespoons fresh parsley roughly chopped

        For The Dressing

        • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 2 cloves fresh garlic finely minced
        • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juice
        • 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine or rice vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup, or sugar
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Place shredded red cabbage (about 7-8 cups), 2 shredded carrots, 3 thinly sliced green onions, and 3 tablespoons of chopped fresh parsley in a large bowl. Set it aside.
          Cabbage slaw made with red cabbage preparation photos.
        • In a small bowl (or mason jar), whisk together 3 tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon honey (or your preferred sweetener), 1 tablespoon of lemon juice, 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon of ground black pepper.
          Person drizzling and mixing purple cabbage slaw with dressing and mixing it.
        • If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 30 minutes before serving. Serve chilled.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: Red cabbage can range in size. I used a small to medium-sized head (about 1 ½ pounds with the core), which gave me roughly 7 to 8 cups of sliced cabbage. Once you mix it with the shredded carrots (about 2 cups), you’ll have around 10 cups of veggies. After tossing it with the dressing and letting it sit, the slaw wilts slightly and loses about 1½ to 2 cups in volume. Even so, this recipe still makes plenty — enough to comfortably serve 6 to 8 people as a side dish.
        • Taste for Seasoning: Always give your slaw a taste before serving. If it seems like it needs more salt right away, give it a little time to sit first. As the slaw rests, the flavors develop and become more pronounced, so it might balance out perfectly without adding anything extra.
        • Make ahead: You can prep it a day in advance — just toss everything together, cover it, and place it in the fridge. Letting it sit for a few hours (or even overnight) helps the flavors come together.
        • Storing leftovers: Leftovers will keep well in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Just give it a quick toss before serving. If any liquid has settled at the bottom, that’s totally normal — a quick stir will bring it right back to life.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 98kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 339mg | Potassium: 337mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 3890IU | Vitamin C: 64mg | Calcium: 60mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/feed/ 2
        Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/ https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/#respond Wed, 23 Apr 2025 17:27:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81131 How to Make Brussels Sprouts with Maple Syrup and Balsamic? Making these maple balsamic roasted Brussels sprouts takes just a…]]>

        What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

        This recipe is pretty straightforward, but here are the most important things to know to make your balsamic and maple-glazed Brussels sprouts a success:

        • Cut side down: Roasting the Brussels sprouts with the cut side down gives you crisp, golden edges and more flavor. Tossing halfway through the roasting process ensures that they are roasted evenly and don’t get too dark on one side.
        • Glaze after roasting: Tossing the vegetables in maple syrup and balsamic vinegar after roasting them helps prevent the sugars from burning during the roasting process.
        • Check doneness: The best way to tell if your Brussels sprouts are fully roasted is by inserting a sharp knife into the center of one—it should slide in easily with little resistance.

        How to Make Brussels Sprouts with Maple Syrup and Balsamic?

        Making these maple balsamic roasted Brussels sprouts takes just a few simple steps. The most time-consuming part is slicing the Brussels sprouts in half—after that, it’s mostly hands-off while the oven does the work. Below are the steps:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below. Below are a few ingredient substitutions:
          • Oil: I opted for extra virgin olive oil, but any flavorless oil, such as avocado oil, would also work.
          • Honey: While the flavor profile will change slightly, honey can be a good substitute for maple syrup. 
        2. Preheat & Prep: Preheat your oven to 425°F (218°C). Line a sheet pan with parchment paper for easy cleanup, or roast directly on the pan for more caramelization.
        A person is drizzling Brussels sprouts with olive oil and then spreading them on a baking sheet.
        1. Arrange and season: Spread the halved Brussels sprouts directly onto the pan. Drizzle with olive oil, then sprinkle with kosher salt and freshly ground pepper. Toss lightly on the pan, then arrange in a single layer, cut side down. Don’t skip this step as it is crucial for crispy Brussels sprouts.
        Vegetables before and after they are roasted.
        1. Roast: Roast for 20–25 minutes, flipping halfway through. They should be deeply golden and tender.
        Roasted Brussels sprouts being drizzled and mixed with balsamic maple syrup glaze.
        1. Prepare the maple balsamic glaze: Let them rest for 5 minutes, then transfer to a bowl. In a small bowl, mix the balsamic vinegar and maple syrup. Drizzle this maple glaze for Brussels sprouts over the top and toss gently to coat.
        2. Finish & serve: Add optional toppings like chopped toasted pecans and pomegranate seeds for extra flair. Serve your roasted maple Brussels sprouts warm and enjoy!
        Roasted maple balsamic brussel sprouts in a plate with a spoon on the side.

        Expert Tips:

        This balsamic maple Brussels sprouts recipe is pretty straightforward, but there are a couple of things I want to highlight to help you get the best results.

        • Keep an eye during the last 10 minutes: Brussels sprouts can go from perfectly roasted to overdone quickly. Start checking around the 20-minute mark, and give them a toss to promote even browning.
        • Don’t toss the loose leaves: Any leaves that fall off during trimming will crisp up beautifully in the oven. Leave them on the pan—they’ll add great texture and a bit of crunch.
        • Great served warm—or cold: While I prefer serving this dish warm, the flavors hold up well even when served at room temperature or chilled. It’s a versatile side that works beautifully for gatherings or even for meal prep.

        Serving Suggestions:

        While most people think of roasted balsamic Brussels sprouts as more of a holiday side dish (and trust me, it’s one of my favorite Thanksgiving veggie sides), I make it all year round . Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        You Might Also Like:

        Brussels sprouts can surprise you in the best way. Here are a few more recipes I love making when I have a fresh bag in my fridge.

        Roasted brussel sprouts with maple syrup and balsamic on a plate.
        Print

        Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts Recipe

        These Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts are golden, crisp, and full of flavor—the perfect easy vegetable side dish for weeknights or holiday gatherings.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American Vegan
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 25 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 148kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 lb Brussels sprouts clean and sliced in half lengthwise
        • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon grond black pepper
        • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup

        Optional Toppings *

        • ¼ cup pomegranate arils optional
        • ½ cup pecans chopped, optional

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F/218 C. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
        • Spread the prepared Brussels sprouts in the pan, drizzle with olive oil, and sprinkle with kosher salt and black pepper. Toss to combine. Spread them, cut side down, in a single layer.
          Person drizzling oil and spready brussel sprouts on a sheet pan.
        • Roast for 20-25 minutes until tender, tossing halfway through.
          Brussel sprouts before and after they are roasted.
        • Let it cool for 5 minutes, then transfer it to a large bowl.
          Person drizzling brussel sprouts with maple syrup and balsamic vinegar mixture.
        • Mix the balsamic vinegar and maple syrup in a bowl. Drizzle it over the roasted Brussels sprouts and toss to combine.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if needed.
        • Transfer to a serving platter or bowl and garnish with pecans and pomegranate seeds, if using. Serve.
          Roasted balsamic maple Brussels sprouts in a plate from the top view.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 cups of roasted Brussels sprouts with maple and balsamic, which is ideal for four servings as a side dish. The nutrition information below does not include the optional toppings.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for upto 4 days. Be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing.
        • Reheating: I find that reheating them in the oven is the best way to keep their crispiness. Simply preheat the oven to 350°F (175°C) and warm for about 10 minutes, or until heated through.
        • Air fryer method: If you prefer cooking Brussels sprouts in an air fryer to save on time, simply preheat your air fryer to 375°F, spread the halved sprouts on a single layer, and air fry for 15 minutes, rotating halfway through. 
        • It’s easy to customize this dish with a variety of optional toppings. Below are some ideas:
          • Nuts: The toasted pecans and pomegranate seeds are optional, but they elevate the dish with texture and color. You can easily swap the pecans for other nuts, such as walnuts, hazelnuts, or sliced almonds. 
          • Fruit: For a fruity touch, try using dried cranberries or chopped dried apricots instead of pomegranate seeds. 
          • Cheese: And if you want to add a bit of richness, a sprinkle of crumbled goat cheese or shredded Parmesan cheese works beautifully too.
          • Bacon: For a smoky-salty bite, try crumbling in some cooked bacon. I prefer baked turkey bacon, but regular bacon would also work.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 148kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 614mg | Potassium: 477mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 855IU | Vitamin C: 96mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/feed/ 0
        Roasted Whole Carrots https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-carrots/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-carrots/#comments Fri, 11 Apr 2025 19:33:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20085 How to Roast Whole Carrots? Roasting carrots in the oven is just a few easy steps. Whether you’re prepping for…]]>

        What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

        • Ideal temperature and time: My preferred temperature for roasting is 425°F (218°C), and the roasting time is usually around 20–25 minutes. That said, cooking carrots in the oven depends on their thickness—thinner carrots (like the young ones from the farmers market) tend to roast quickly, while thicker ones may need 10-15 more minutes, depending on their size.
        • Uniform size matters: When shopping for this recipe, try to pick carrots that are similar in size so they roast evenly. If some are much thicker than others, you can cut them lengthwise to even them out.
        • To peel or not to peel? It’s totally up to you! I usually peel mine, but if you’ve got fresh, young carrots from the market, a good scrub under cold water works just as well.
        • Don’t crowd the pan: Spread the carrots in a single layer on the sheet pan. Overcrowding can lead to steaming instead of roasting.

        How to Roast Whole Carrots?

        Roasting carrots in the oven is just a few easy steps. Whether you’re prepping for a weekday dinner or a special gathering, here’s how to make roasted carrots that are tender, flavorful, and beautifully caramelized.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are a few substitutions and optional add-ins:
          • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is what I use most often, but melted butter or avocado oil are great options, too.
          • Seasonings: Keep it simple with salt and pepper, or add spices like cumin, smoked paprika, garlic powder, or even a touch of cinnamon for warmth.
          • Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme is a favorite, but rosemary, oregano, or chopped parsley also work beautifully. Feel free to adjust the herbs based on what you’re serving—using the same or complementary herbs can help bring the whole meal together.
          • Sweeteners:  For holiday versions like honey-roasted carrots, try drizzling with a tablespoon of honey or maple syrup or sprinkling with a bit of brown sugar. If you’re after a more glazed finish, check out my Maple Roasted Carrots recipe for a richer, sweeter take.
        2. Preheat & Prep: Preheat your oven to 425°F (218°C). I usually roast vegetables directly on the sheet pan because I find that the hot surface helps them caramelize better—especially when it comes to onions or root veggies. But if you prefer easier cleanup, feel free to line your pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil.
        Steps showing how to season carrots to bake in the oven.
        1. Season the carrots: Place your carrots on the prepared sheet in a single layer. Drizzle with olive oil and season with salt and pepper. Give them a good toss so they’re evenly coated.
        2. Roast the carrots: Pop the tray into the oven and roast carrots in oven for about 25 minutes, or until fork-tender. Test doneness by inserting a fork into the thickest part—if it slides in easily, they’re ready.
        3. Serve and garnish: Transfer the baked whole carrots recipe to a platter and top with fresh parsley or your favorite herb for a little extra color and flavor.

        Expert Tips

        A few final tips to make your easy baked carrots even better:

        • Carrot tops: If your carrots have tops, you can trim them down but leave a little bit for a rustic look. And don’t toss those tops! They’re great for making a vibrant carrot top pesto—fresh, herby, and perfect for using up the whole vegetable.
        • For extra caramelization: Don’t flip the carrots during roasting—just let them roast cut-side down. This allows the natural sugars in the carrots to caramelize where they’re in contact with the hot surface, giving you those golden, slightly crisp edges that are so delicious.
        • Using baby carrots: While this recipe works well with any type of carrot, baby carrots tend to cook faster due to their smaller size. If you’re using this recipe to make roasted baby carrots, start checking for doneness around the 15-minute mark to avoid overcooking.
        • Cutting them in chunks: If you prefer, you can cut the carrots into 1½-inch pieces. Roasting them in chunks should take about the same amount of time, as long as they’re evenly sized.
        Whole roasted carrots garnished with parsley from the top view.

        Serving Suggestions

        This simple carrot side dish pairs beautifully with so many mains. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

        • Roasted Chicken – You really can’t go wrong pairing these carrots with any kind of roasted chicken, but I especially love serving them alongside a whole roasted chicken or bone-in chicken breast. The flavors and textures just work so well together.
        • Prime Rib – These carrots are a great way to add a pop of color to your prime rib dinner, which I usually serve for Christmas. One of my favorite tricks is to roast the carrots while the meat is resting—everything comes together beautifully without any extra fuss.
        • Leg of Lamb – For a festive Easter meal (or any special occasion), serve these roasted carrots with roasted leg of lamb. The natural sweetness of the carrots is a great complement to the rich, savory lamb.

        My Favorite Way to Serve Whole Roasted Carrots:

        While this easy roasted carrots recipe is a delicious side dish straight from the oven, I love giving it a Mediterranean twist when I have a few extra minutes. The flavor profile in this version is inspired by my roasted carrot hummus recipe.

        A woman is serving oven Baked Carrots Recipe on a sheet pan

        I top the carrots with a cup of canned (and drained) chickpeas, a handful of crumbled feta cheese, fresh dill (or any other fresh herb I have on hand), and pomegranate seeds.

        Then, I finish it off with a generous drizzle of my tahini lemon sauce.

        It takes no more than 10 additional minutes, but it transforms this basic savory roasted carrots dish into a colorful, crowd-pleasing vegetable side dish that’s just a little extra special.

        More Carrot Recipes You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this roasted whole carrots recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Overn roasted carrots on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Roasted Whole Carrots Recipe

        This Roasted Whole Carrots recipe is all about simplicity and flavor. With just olive oil, salt, and pepper, the natural sweetness of the carrots shines through. It's a versatile side that fits seamlessly into everyday meals or special holiday spreads.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 25 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 104kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 lbs whole carrots cleaned, stems cut, and peeled
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh parsley

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 425 °F (218 °C).
        • Place the carrots onto a large baking sheet* in a single layer.
        • Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
        • Toss to ensure all carrots are coated evenly with the oil and seasoning.
        • Roast in the preheated oven for 20-25 minutes or until fork tender. You can check doneness by inserting a fork into the thickest part of a carrot; if it comes in and out easily, it should be ready.
        • Transfer onto a serving platter and garnish with parsley before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: Two pounds of roasted carrots serve 6 as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Carrots: I used whole carrots that are sold with stems. They tend to be thinner than regular carrots sold in plastic bags. This recipe would work with any carrot, but please remember that there is a direct correlation between the thickness of the carrots and cooking time. For best results, I recommend cutting larger carrots vertically to ensure they are equal in size for even roasting.
        • Lining the baking sheet: I usually roast carrots without lining the baking sheet with parchment paper, as roasting them directly on the hot surface caramelizes them better. However, you can line the baking sheet with parchment paper if preferred.
        • To Store: Let the roasted whole carrots cool, then transfer them to an airtight container. They’ll keep well in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days. You can enjoy them cold, at room temperature, or reheated.
        • To Reheat: I prefer warming them up in a low-heat oven (around 300°F/150°C) for 10–12 minutes. This gentle method helps preserve their texture and prevents them from drying out. You can also reheat them in a covered skillet over low heat if you’re short on time.
          To Freeze: While you can freeze roasted carrots, the texture will be softer once they are thawed. If that’s okay with you (for soups or purees), place the cooled carrots in a freezer-safe bag or container and freeze for up to a month. Thaw it overnight in the fridge and reheat it in the oven for best results.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 299mg | Potassium: 489mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 25316IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-carrots/feed/ 24
        Goat Cheese Quiche https://foolproofliving.com/goat-cheese-quiche-with-caramelized-onions-and-thyme/ https://foolproofliving.com/goat-cheese-quiche-with-caramelized-onions-and-thyme/#comments Wed, 09 Apr 2025 16:12:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3098 If you’re a fan of cooking with goat cheese, this quiche is a great addition to your collection—right alongside some…]]>

        If you’re a fan of cooking with goat cheese, this quiche is a great addition to your collection—right alongside some of my other favorite goat cheese recipes.

        A slice of chevre quiche served with a green salad.

        What You Need to Know in a Nutshell:

        Here are the key things to keep in mind when making this spinach and goat cheese quiche:

        • Crust options: While I made my goat cheese quiche using a homemade pie crust, you can use a store-bought premade pie shell as well. If you choose to make your own, it can be made ahead and frozen. If preferred, you can use a gluten-free pie crust.
        • Creamy custard base: This isn’t your average quiche. Unlike most recipes that use milk, this goat cheese quiche recipe uses heavy cream to create a custard that’s extra rich and velvety. The result is a filling that’s exceptionally smooth and creamy.
        • Let it rest: The quiche might look a little soft in the center when it first comes out of the oven, but it firms up as it cools.

        How To Make Goat Cheese Quiche?

        This caramelized onion goat cheese quiche recipe comes together in a few easy steps. While it looks impressive, it’s quite approachable—especially if you prep the crust ahead. Let me walk you through how to make it:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. Below are a few helpful notes:
          • Goat Cheese: Buy already crumbled goat cheese to save on time. Alternatively, you can also use herbed goat cheese that you can find in most supermarkets.
          • Pie Crust: If you’re making your own crust (which I highly recommend if you have the time), you can prep it a few days ahead, cover it tightly with stretch film, and keep it in the freezer until you’re ready to use it. Store-bought is perfectly fine too, especially when time is tight.
          • Fresh or frozen spinach: I used fresh spinach that was previously washed and spin-dried (a great time saver!). You can use an equal amount of frozen (and thawed) spinach, but make sure to remove the excess liquid before adding it into the filling. If preferred, you can omit using spinach and flavor the caramelized onion with a tablespoon of chopped fresh thyme.
          • Optional additions: While my recipe for my goat cheese quiche only uses a combination of caramelized onions and spinach, you can add ¼ cup of drained sun-dried tomatoes, sauteed or roasted mushrooms, or a handful of thinly sliced prosciutto into the mixture.
        Pie crust dough in food processor.
        1. Make the pie dough: Start by mixing together the sour cream and ice water in a small bowl. In a food processor, combine the flour, sugar, and salt, then add cold butter. Pulse a few times until the butter is incorporated into the flour. Pour in the sour cream mixture and pulse again until the dough clumps together. 
        Steps showing how to shape the pie crust.
        1. Let it rest: Turn it out, form it into a 4-inch disk, wrap it up with stretch film, and transfer it into the fridge for at least an hour—or overnight if that works better for you.
        2. Roll and shape the crust: When you’re ready to bake, let the dough sit out for 10 minutes so it’s easier to roll. Roll it into an 11-inch circle on a lightly floured surface, then carefully transfer it to a 9-inch glass tart pan, gently pressing it into the bottom and up the sides.. Tuck any excess dough under itself to create a neat edge. If preferred, using your thumb and index finger on one hand and the knuckle of your opposite index finger, gently pinch the edge to form a fluted pattern. This optional step is a small touch, but it gives the quiche a lovely, classic look. Cover it and place it in the freezer for about 15–20 minutes so it holds its shape when baking.
        Pie crust with beans and onions in a pan.
        1. Blind bake the crust: While the crust is chilling, preheat your oven to 375°F (190°C). Once chilled, line the crust with parchment paper (or aluminum foil) and fill it with pie weights (or you can use dried beans like I did). Bake for 30 minutes, then remove the weights and parchment and bake for another 5 minutes until the edges are lightly golden. Set it aside to cool a bit. (No need to turn off the oven.)
        2. Caramelize the onions: While the crust bakes, make caramelized onions—heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add your sliced onions and cook them slowly—this takes about 15–20 minutes, but it’s worth it for that deep caramelized flavor. 
        Caramelized onion with spinach and the filling in a bowl.
        1. Add spinach: Add baby spinach leaves and cook just until wilted, about 5–6 minutes more. Let the mixture cool slightly before using.
        2. Mix the custard: While the quiche filling is cooking, whisk together the eggs, heavy cream, salt, and pepper in a medium bowl until fully incorporated. 
        Steps showing how to assemble the goat cheese quiche with spinach and caramelized onions.
        1. Assemble the quiche: Layer the crumbled goat cheese evenly over the crust. Top with your onion and spinach mixture, then pour the custard over everything, ensuring it’s evenly distributed.
        2. Bake: Carefully transfer your chevre quiche to the oven and bake at 375°F (190°C) for 30–35 minutes. The edges should be set, and it’s totally okay if the center has a slight jiggle—it will finish setting as it cools.
        3. Cool and serve: Let your spinach goat cheese quiche sit on the counter for about 15 minutes before slicing. It will be easier to cut and serve, and the flavors will settle nicely. Enjoy it warm or at room temperature.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips:

        While this goat cheese and spinach quiche recipe is pretty straightforward, I’d like to share a few tips that can help make the process even easier and ensure your quiche turns out perfectly every time:

        • Do not skip the blind baking: This step is essential for avoiding a soggy bottom. Make sure that the pie crust is fully baked before adding the filling.
        • Glass vs Metal Pie Plate: This recipe was tested using a glass 9-inch pie dish. If you are using a metal pie plate, check the doneness of the crust 5-10 minutes before the suggested baking time. Consider using some foil around the edges if the crust starts to brown too fast before the filling is set.
        • Using store-bought pie crust: If you opt for premade frozen pie crust, let it sit at room temperature for about 10–15 minutes, just until it’s soft enough and follow the baking instructions as written. You don’t want it to be too warm, or it may lose its shape.
        • If the center looks a little soft, that’s expected: When the quiche comes out of the oven, the middle may look slightly undercooked. That’s completely normal—it will continue to set as it cools on the counter. Just give it about 15 minutes before slicing.
        Sliced quiche with goat cheese and caramelized onions in a pie plate.

        What to Serve it With?

        While this spinach and goat cheese quiche is perfect on its own, you can easily turn it into a brunch feast by pairing it with one of the dishes below:

        Other Goat Cheese Recipes You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        The “all butter pie crust” part of this quiche is adapted from Cook’s Illustrated Cookbook (affiliate link).

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Goat cheese quiche sliced in a pie pan from the top view.
        Print

        Goat Cheese Quiche with Caramelized Onions and Spinach

        This Goat Cheese Quiche is a brunch favorite made with a flaky crust, creamy custard, caramelized onions, and spinach. Whether you're hosting for a holiday or enjoying a slow weekend morning, it’s an easy, elegant dish that is guaranteed to impress.
        Course Brunch
        Cuisine French
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 1 hour
        Resting time 1 hour
        Total Time 2 hours 20 minutes
        Servings 8 slices
        Calories 321kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Crust:

        • 4 teaspoons sour cream*
        • 4 tablespoons ice water
        • 1 ¼ cups all-purpose flour 177 g.
        • 1 ½ teaspoons sugar
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • 8 tablespoons unsalted butter cold – cut into small pieces, 114 g.

        For The Filling:

        • 1 tablespoon olive oil
        • 2 small onions sliced thinly into half-moon slices (400 gr)
        • 5 ounces baby spinach leaves rinsed and spin dried, 142 g.
        • ½ cup heavy cream
        • 3 large eggs
        • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt
        • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
        • 4 oz. goat cheese crumbled, 113g

        Instructions

        • To make the crust, mix 4 teaspoons of sour cream and 4 tablespoons of ice water in a bowl until combined. Set it aside.
          Steps showing how to make the pie crust.
        • Place 1 ¼ cups all-purpose flour, 1 ½ teaspoons sugar, and ½ teaspoon kosher salt into a food processor. Pulse 3-4 times to combine.
        • Scatter the small pieces of butter on the flour mixture and process for 10 1-second pulses until the butter is incorporated into the flour with small pieces of butter still remaining.
          Butter scattered over the flour in a food processor.
        • Pour the sour cream mixture over the top and pulse 6 or 7 1-second pulses.
        • Stop the machine and pinch the dough with your fingers. If it holds together, you are done. If not, add 1 tablespoon of ice-cold water and pulse until dough forms large clumps and no dry flour remains, 3 to 5 pulses.
        • Transfer the dough onto your kitchen counter, turn it into a 4-inch disk, and wrap it tightly with stretch film. Refrigerate for at least an hour or overnight.
          Steps showing the pie crust before and after it is rolled out.
        • Before rolling it out, let it sit on the counter for 10 minutes.
        • When ready to bake, preheat the oven to 375 F Degrees (191 C).
        • Lightly flour your work surface and roll the dough into an 11-inch circle. Carefully transfer it over a 9-inch tart pan. Tuck the excess 1-inch pieces underneath to form a neat and even edge.
        • Cover it with plastic wrap and place it in the freezer for 15-20 minutes until thoroughly chilled and firm.
        • Take it out of the freezer. Place a sheet of parchment paper (or aluminum foil) over the dough and fill it with pie weights or a cup of dry beans.
          Pie crust with beans and onions in a pan.
        • Transfer it to the preheated oven and bake for 30 minutes.
        • Remove the pie weights and the parchment paper, and bake for another 5 minutes until lightly browned. Take it out of the oven and set it aside. Do not turn the oven off.
        • To make the filling: While the crust is baking, heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add sliced onions, and, stirring often, cook for 15-20 minutes or until they turn golden brown.
          Vegetables cooked in a pan and quiche filling is being whipped.
        • Add baby spinach and cook until wilted, stirring often, about 5 minutes. Set aside aside to cool.
        • To make the filling, mix together the ½ cup heavy cream, 3 large eggs, ½ teaspoon kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a small bowl.
        • To assemble the quiche, scatter 4 ounces of crumbled goat cheese pieces, caramelized onion, and spinach mixture over the pie crust.
          A collage of images showing how to assemble the goat cheese and spinach quiche.
        • Pour the heavy and egg mixture over it.
        • Bake for 30-35 minutes. When you first take it out of the oven, it may look like the middle part of the quiche is not fully cooked. This is normal. It will continue to cook as it cools on the kitchen counter.
        • Allow it to cool for 10-15 minutes, slice, and serve while still warm.

        Notes

        • Yields: This goat cheese quiche recipe makes a 9-inch quiche that yields 8 slices. The nutritional values below are per slice.
        • Using store-bought frozen crust: You can skip making your own and use a pre-made frozen pie crust instead. When shopping, look for one that is 9 inches wide and about 1¼ inches deep—this size works best with the amount of filling in this recipe. Anything smaller or larger might not hold the filling properly or bake evenly.
        • Using sour cream: It might seem like an unusual (and tiny) addition, but that little bit of sour cream is what makes this all-butter crust tender, flaky, and surprisingly easy to work with. It helps even beginner bakers get great results—no fuss, no cracking, just a beautifully baked crust. While I highly recommend sour cream, an equal amount of full-fat Greek yogurt would be a good substitute.
        • Make-Ahead Instructions: You can prep all the components—crust, caramelized onions, and filling—a day in advance. Wrap each tightly and store them in the fridge, then assemble the quiche just before baking.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat (300°F (148°C) oven for 10-15 minutes or until warmed to your liking.
        • Freezing: While I always prefer serving this quiche freshly baked—when the crust is crisp and the filling is at its creamiest—freezing is a great option if you need to make it ahead, especially when cooking for a crowd. To freeze, let the quiche cool completely to room temperature after baking. Then, wrap it tightly with stretch film or foil and freeze for up to one month. When you’re ready to serve, unwrap it and let it thaw on the kitchen counter for about 4 hours. Reheat in a 300°F (148°C) oven for 20–25 minutes or until heated through.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 321kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 116mg | Sodium: 388mg | Potassium: 207mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 2479IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 72mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/goat-cheese-quiche-with-caramelized-onions-and-thyme/feed/ 32
        Greek Lamb Meatballs https://foolproofliving.com/greek-lamb-meatballs/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-lamb-meatballs/#comments Mon, 24 Mar 2025 20:28:28 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80784 Meatball dinners are a lifesaver when you’re short on time. If you love these Greek lamb meatballs, feel free to…]]>

        Meatball dinners are a lifesaver when you’re short on time. If you love these Greek lamb meatballs, feel free to check out some of my other favorites, like Turkish Meatballs for a bold, spiced twist or Turkey Zucchini Meatballs for a lighter, veggie-packed option.

        And if you’re in the mood for something handheld, my new Lamb Burger recipe is just as flavorful and quick to make. It’s perfect for a weeknight dinner with tzatziki on top.

        What You Need To Know in A Nutshell:

        • Taming the Gamey Flavor: Lamb has a stronger, more distinct taste than beef, which some find too “gamey.” This ground lamb meatballs recipe uses a mix of fresh mint (or parsley), lemon zest, and feta cheese (a small amount of dairy) to help mellow that flavor, making these meatballs well-balanced and delicious.
        • Make Ahead Friendly: Prepping these simple lamb meatballs a day ahead makes them an ideal protein-packed meal for busy weeknights and allows the flavors to develop for an even better taste. But you can also cook them immediately if you are short on time.
        • Evenly Sized Meatballs: A small cookie scoop (affiliate link) is a game-changer for portioning—ensuring uniform meatballs that cook evenly every time. If you don’t have one, a tablespoon works just as well—just aim for consistent sizes for even cooking.
        Greek lamb meatballs served over a bed of lemon orzo garnished with tzatziki sauce and mint.

        How To Make Greek Lamb Meatballs?

        This lamb meatball recipe comes together with a few easy steps. You can serve them with tzatziki on the side or use them in a Greek-inspired grain bowl for a satisfying weeknight dinner. But first, let me show you how to make them:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are some ingredient substitutions:
          • Ground Meat: While this recipe is made with lean ground lamb, you can use a 50/50 mix of ground beef and lamb for a milder flavor.
          • Bread crumbs: Panko breadcrumbs or regular bread crumbs can be used interchangeably in this recipe. Use a gluten-free brand if you are following a gluten-free diet.
          • Fresh herbs: Fresh mint is a classic pairing with lamb, but fresh parsley, fresh oregano, or fresh dill can also be used.
          • Cheese: Feta cheese is one of the most popular cheeses used in most Mediterranean recipes, but crumbled goat cheese can also be used. Alternatively, if you prefer your lamb mince meatballs to be dairy-free, omit using them.
        2. Preheat & Prep: Preheat oven to 425 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
        A collage of images showing how to make the lamb meatball and feta mixture.
        1. Mix Ingredients: In a large bowl, combine the ground lamb, onion, panko breadcrumbs (or regular breadcrumbs), garlic, spices, egg, lemon zest, feta (if using), and chopped herbs. Give the meatball mixture a good mix until all the ingredients are thoroughly combined. If you have the time, cover it with stretch film and let it marinade in the fridge for an hour or even overnight. Otherwise, move on to the next step.
        Lamb mince balls formed into a ball and placed on a sheet pan.
        1. Form meatballs: Using a small cookie scoop or a spoon, measure about 1 ½ to 2 tablespoons of the mixture to form meatballs. Your meatballs can be slightly smaller or larger, but the more important thing here is to have them as equal in size as possible so that they can cook evenly.
        2. Bake or Pan Fry: While I prefer the baked option for more of a hands-off cooking approach, you can cook your lamb meatballs in a pan as well. Here is how I do it:
          • To bake in the oven: Arrange the lamb meatballs on the prepared baking sheet, spacing them about 1 inch apart for even cooking. Bake for 10 to 12 minutes or until a meatball inserted with a meat thermometer registers 160 degrees F. (71 C). It is optional, but if you want, turn the broiler on in the last 2 minutes of the baking time for slightly crispy and golden browned lamb meatballs.
          • To cook on the stove top: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil in a large cast iron skillet (or you can use a nonstick pan) over medium heat. Once shimmering hot, add your meatballs on a single layer and cook for about 8-10 minutes, turning a few times to ensure even browning. Work in batches if needed to avoid overcrowding.
        A collage of images showing what to do with lamb meatballs.
        1. Serve: Enjoy them as a quick appetizer with tzatziki sauce on the side, or serve them over a bed of my creamy lemon orzo, garnished with pickled red onions, kalamata olives, fresh mint (or the herb of your choice) and a squeeze of lemon juice.

        Expert Tips:

        While this Greek lamb meatball recipe is pretty straightforward, there are a few things that I’d love to include to help you succeed on your first try:

        • Taste your feta before adding salt: Some feta brands are saltier than others, so give it a quick taste before seasoning your meat mixture. You can always add more salt, but you can’t take it out!
        • Let them sit before baking: If making the meatballs ahead of time, take them out of the fridge 30 minutes before baking. This helps them cook evenly, preventing the centers from being too cold while the outside browns.
        • Mix by hand: While some recipes suggest using a food processor to mix the meatball mixture, I don’t recommend it. Overmixing can make the meatballs dense and tough. Instead, use your hands to gently combine the ingredients for the best texture.

        What to Serve with Lamb Meatballs?

        Many people wonder about what to do with lamb meatballs. The good news is that these Mediterranean lamb meatballs are a dynamic protein you can enjoy in multiple ways:

        • As an appetizer: The classic pairing for lamb meatballs is tzatziki sauce, but if you want to kick things up a notch, try pairing them with a bold harissa sauce or a creamy tahini yogurt sauce, mint yogurt sauce for a delicious appetizer. Simply plate your lamb and feta meatballs, add a bowl of your sauce, and don’t forget some warm pita bread for scooping—it’s all about those perfect bites!
        • Make Greek lamb bowls: Get creative and toss your easy lamb meatballs into a bowl with Mediterranean veggies such as pickled onions, cucumbers, and tomatoes, then use rice or another grain as your base. My favorite options include: Lemon Parmesan Orzo, Bulgur Wheat Pilaf, and, for a gluten-free option, Lemon Quinoa
        • Serve them with a salad: Skip the bland chicken and use these Greek meatballs as a topping for a simple Greek Salad or a refreshing Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad
        • Stuff them into pita pockets: For an easy handheld meal, tuck these lamb meatballs into warm pita bread with lettuce, tomatoes, onions, and a drizzle of tzatziki for a Mediterranean-inspired wrap.

        If you make this Greek Lamb Meatballs recipe, please take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Lamb meatballs with tzatziki on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Greek Lamb Meatballs Recipe

        Juicy, flavorful, and ready in under 30 minutes, these Greek Lamb Meatballs are a must-try! Made with aromatic spices, fresh herbs, and a touch of lemon zest, they’re perfect as an appetizer with homemade tzatziki sauce or served over lemon orzo for a satisfying meal.
        Course Appetizer, Weeknight Dinner
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Halal
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 12 minutes
        Total Time 32 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 418kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 lb ground lamb
        • ½ cup onion finely chopped
        • ¼ cup panko breadcrumbs (or regular breadcrumbs)
        • 3 garlic cloves minced
        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt*
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 large egg
        • 2 teaspoons lemon zest ~ zest of 1 large lemon
        • cup feta cheese crumbled, (optional) plus more for garnish
        • 2 tablespoons fresh mint/parsley chopped finely, plus more for garnish
        • 1 teaspoon olive oil to keep your hands moist

        For Serving (optional*)

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
        • In a large mixing bowl, place 1 lb ground lamb, ½ cup finely chopped onion, ¼ cup panko breadcrumbs, 3 cloves of minced garlic, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, ½ teaspoon ground coriander, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper, 1 large egg, 2 teaspoons lemon zest, ⅓ cup crumbled feta cheese, and 2 tablespoons finely chopped fresh parsley.
          Images showing how to serve lamb meatballs.
        • Using your hands or a large spoon, mix everything until all ingredients are well combined.
          Person shaping meatballs.
        • Scoop about 1 ½ to 2 tablespoons of the mixture (a small cookie scoop works beautifully here ), coat your hands with a small amount of olive oil, and roll it into a ball.
        • Repeat this process for the rest of the meat.
        • Place the meatballs on the prepared baking sheet, spacing them evenly (about an inch) apart. You should end up with approximately 18-22 meatballs.
        • Bake 10-12 minutes or until the meatballs are lightly browned and a meatball inserted with a meat thermometer registers 160 degrees F. (71 C)
        • If desired, during the last 2 minutes of baking, turn the broiler on to give the meatballs a slightly crispy, golden-brown finish. However, keep a close eye on them to prevent burning.
        • Serve meatballs by themselves with tzatziki on the side or with lemon orzo. Garnish with a few tablespoons of crumbled feta, pickled red onions, and chopped mint/parsley.
          Images showing how to serve lamb meatballs.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 18-22 lamb meatballs ideal for serving 4 adults with 4-5 meatballs per serving. The nutritional values below do not include the optional serving ingredients and are per serving.
        • Salt: Before adding salt, be sure to taste your feta, as some brands can be saltier than others.
        One of the best things about this lamb feta meatball recipe is its versatility—it can be made ahead, stores well, and even freezes beautifully for a quick meal when you’re short on time. Here’s how I do it:
        • Make Ahead: Blend your lamb and feta mixture, form it into evenly sized meatballs, then place them on a parchment paper-lined baking sheet. Cover with cling wrap and store in the fridge up to 1 day in advance to cut your prep time before they go into the oven.
        • Storage: First, be sure to bring your baked lamb meatballs to room temperature. Then, store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
        • Reheating: Bake them in a low-heat oven of 275 degrees F for about 5 minutes or until they’re heated through.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 418kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 33g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 135mg | Sodium: 677mg | Potassium: 335mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 150IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/greek-lamb-meatballs/feed/ 2
        Lemon Orzo https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-orzo/ https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-orzo/#comments Mon, 24 Mar 2025 20:05:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80826 Cooked in chicken broth, this small pasta may resemble rice but has an incomparably tender consistency. The lemon, garlic and…]]>

        Cooked in chicken broth, this small pasta may resemble rice but has an incomparably tender consistency. The lemon, garlic and Parmesan create a zesty flavor profile that will have you licking the spoon. If you can’t get enough of orzo after this, I know you’ll also appreciate my Lemon Chicken Orzo Soup.

        Lemon orzo garnished with lemon and parsley in a pot from the top view.

        What You Need To Know in A Nutshell:

        Before you dive into the lemon orzo recipe below, here are a few essential notes from my test kitchen to ensure your success:

        • My preferred ratio of orzo to liquid is 1 to 2. Because this recipe for lemon orzo has you cooking the pasta with the pot’s lid off, some of the liquid will evaporate as it simmers. Thus, my recipe calls for a bit more broth than others you may find. 
        • Stay close and stir often. This is a quick-cooking dish that you will want to keep a close eye on to prevent the pasta from scorching at the base of the pot. If you find that it’s cooking too fast, turn down the heat slightly and add a splash more of your stock.
        • 1 cup of dry orzo yields about 2 to 2.5 cups of cooked orzo. If you’re wondering how much dry orzo per person to cook, a good rule of thumb is to use  ⅓ cup (about 2 ounces) of dry orzo per person as a side dish. If you’re serving it as a main dish, you may want to increase the portion to ½ cup (about 3 ounces) per person.

        How To Make Lemon Orzo?

        The simplicity and versatility of this lemon orzo recipe are what you will love most about it. Here’s how I make it:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are some ingredient notes:
          • Oil: I opted for butter, but you can use extra virgin olive oil (or other vegetable oils) if you prefer. 
          • Chicken stock: Need to make this vegetarian? In this recipe, we are cooking orzo with chicken broth (or stock), but it can easily be made with vegetable broth instead. Whichever option you choose, if you use storebought, remember to select the low sodium version.
        Steps showing how to sautee orzo with oil.
        1. Sautee orzo with butter (or oil): Heat your butter in a medium-sized saucepan or Dutch oven over medium heat, then add the minced fresh garlic and lemon zest and saute for 30 seconds. Next, add the orzo and continue to saute, stirring constantly, until the orzo is coated with oil and lightly browned, about 4 minutes. While it may look like an extra step, toasting orzo in oil brings out a nutty, slightly roasted flavor that deepens the dish’s overall taste.
        Lemon orzo with parmesan in a pot from the top view.
        1. Add your stock and boil: Carefully pour in the chicken stock and add the kosher salt and black pepper. Stir to combine. Bring it all to a boil, then lower the heat to medium-low, and let it simmer, uncovered, until the orzo is cooked through (most of the liquid is absorbed) but still al dente, about 10 minutes, stirring occasionally. The whole thing happens quickly, so it is best to keep a close eye on it.
        2. Serve: Remove the pan from the heat, then add lemon juice and parmesan cheese. Taste for seasoning and add more salt and pepper, if necessary, before serving. Garnish with parsley and serve immediately.

        Optional Add-ins and Variations

        This easy lemon orzo is highly modifiable—one of my favorite things about it! Not only does this flavor combo go with just about any main dish, but you can also elevate it with a few different vegetables. Here are some that I think are worth trying in your kitchen:

        • Add in a vegetable. You can easily toss frozen blanched peas or fresh baby spinach into your lemony orzo during the last 3 minutes of cooking. My favorite veggie add-in is asparagus; you will also mix this into your lemon orzo pasta in the last 3 minutes as it cooks. However, I recommend blanching or steaming asparagus first before adding it in. You can do the same with broccoli if you prefer.
        • Select your cheese & fresh herbs according to your menu. While this creamy lemon orzo recipe calls for Parmesan cheese, you can mix things with regional flavors. Serving this as an Italian side dish? Use Parmesan and fresh basil. Using your garlic lemon orzo as a part of a Mediterranean meal? Swap in feta cheese and fresh dill. Want some added heat? Garnish your finished lemon orzo with red pepper flakes. 
        • Want an extra creamy lemon orzo pasta? Add a splash of heavy cream (¼ cup or so) towards the end (in the last 3 minutes or so) of your cooking time.

        What to Serve with Lemon Orzo?

        This lemon parmesan orzo is the ultimate side dish for a reason: it is versatile and can be enjoyed in many ways. Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

        • As a side dish: While I would devour this lemon garlic orzo with just about any main dish, my current go-to pairings are either serving it alongside my Chicken Kabobs or with my Honey Harissa Chicken
        • As the base of a bowl: Orzo with lemon is an excellent (and surprising!) grain option in place of rice for a wide variety of bowls. Top your lemon orzo with your favorite veggies and a protein like Turkey Zucchini Meatballs or Lamb Feta Meatballs.

        FAQs

        What is orzo made of?

        Orzo is a rice-shaped pasta made of semolina durum wheat, and its tiny size is what makes it so easy to use in everything from salads, bowls, soups, and more.

        Can I use rice instead of orzo in this recipe?

        Even though orzo looks like rice, it isn’t a 1-to-1 substitute. Orzo cooks faster than rice and absorbs liquid differently, creating a creamier texture. If you want to use rice, you’ll need to adjust both the cooking time and the liquid ratio—plus, the result will be less creamy and more like a pilaf than a pasta dish.

        You Might Also Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make your own Lemon Orzo recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim

        Lemony orzo recipe in a pot garnished with parsley.
        Print

        Lemon Orzo Recipe

        This lemony orzo pasta is a one-pot, go-with-anything side dish that’s ready in 20 minutes and perfect for busy weeknights. The lemon, garlic, and Parmesan create a zesty flavor profile that will have you licking the spoon.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Kosher
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 356kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or extra-virgin olive oil
        • 2 cloves garlic minced
        • 2 teaspoons lemon zest approx. zest of 1 large lemon
        • 1 ½ cups orzo 9 oz.
        • 3 cups chicken stock homemade or store bought (low sodium) or vegetable stock for a vegetarian option
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
        • ½ cup grated parmesan cheese or crumbled feta cheese
        • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley or fresh basil leaves

        Instructions

        • Heat one tablespoon of butter in a medium-sized saucepan or Dutch oven over medium heat.
          A collage of photos showing how to sautee orzo with butter.
        • Add two cloves of minced garlic and two teaspoons of lemon zest and sautee using a wooden spoon for 30 seconds.
        • Add 1 ½ cups of orzo and cook, stirring constantly, until orzo is coated with oil and lightly browned, about 4 minutes.
        • Carefully pour in the 3 cups of chicken stock and add one teaspoon of kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon of black pepper. Stir to combine.
        • Bring it to a boil, lower the heat to medium-low, and let it simmer, uncovered, until the orzo is cooked through but still al dente, about 10 minutes, stirring occasionally and keeping a close eye on it.
          A collage of images showing how to add chicken broth and parmesan to lemon orzo as it is cooking.
        • Off the heat, add lemon juice and parmesan cheese. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary before serving.
          Cooked lemon parmesan orzo in a pot from the top view.
        • Garnish with fresh chopped parsley and serve immediately.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 to 3 1/2 cups of cooked lemon orzo pasta that is ideal for 4 to 6 servings as a side dish.
        • Storage: Allow the leftovers to come to room temperature, then store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
        • Reheating: Place your leftover lemon orzo in a saucepan with a splash of water or stock and warm over low heat. 
        • Freezing: While you can, in theory, freeze orzo cooked in broth, I don’t recommend it. Pasta will always be mushy when thawed; I find it best to make this side dish fresh.
        • Cook only until al dente: While I listed the cooking time as 10 minutes (or so), please be aware that the timing might slightly differ based on the brand you are using. Be sure to check the package instructions and taste for texture (and doneness) towards the end to ensure it is cooked to your liking.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 356kcal | Carbohydrates: 51g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 24mg | Sodium: 1062mg | Potassium: 361mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 287IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 135mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-orzo/feed/ 2
        Air Fryer Asparagus https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/#respond Sat, 08 Mar 2025 16:54:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48753 Why You Need To Know In a Nutshell With the help of air frying technology, getting deliciously crispy asparagus is…]]>

        Why You Need To Know In a Nutshell

        With the help of air frying technology, getting deliciously crispy asparagus is easier than ever now. Here are a few reasons why you should give this recipe a try:

        • The quickest method: Compared to roasting in the ovencooking on the stovetop, or steaming it, roasting asparagus in the air fryer is faster, with only 13 minutes from start to finish. 
        • Perfect texture every time: The light and crispy texture of air fried asparagus can’t be duplicated through any other method. It also has less oil than deep fried asparagus.
        • Easy to jazz up: Easy customizations with different spices, add-ons and toppings make this a new favorite you’ll make again and again.
        • Versatile: It is the perfect side dish, healthy snack, or a great addition to recipes like Asparagus Salad, Asparagus Tart and even Butter Lettuce Salad.
        Air fried asparagus on a plate from the top view

        Ingredients

        This air fryer asparagus recipe has five simple ingredients:

        • Fresh asparagus
        • Olive oil
        • Minced garlic
        • Kosher salt
        • Black pepper

        You probably have most of these at home already.

        Ingredients for cooking asparagus in air fryer

        How to Cook Asparagus in Air Fryer

        1. Preheat the air fryer: Plug in your air fryer and let it preheat to 375 F / 190 C. Rinse and dry asparagus spears. Place the asparagus on a cutting board. While holding the bunch with one hand, cut the woody ends by one inch from the bottom using a sharp knife.
        person showing how to prepare asparagus for cooking with multiple step by step pictures
        1. Season the asparagus: In a large bowl, combine the trimmed asparagus, a little bit of oil, minced garlic, and salt and black pepper. With clean hands or kitchen tongs, give it a toss to make sure that each asparagus spear is thoroughly coated with the mixture.
        asparagus in the air fryer before and after it is cooked
        1. Arrange in the basket: Carefully arrange asparagus spears in the air fryer basket in a single layer. A larger air fryer might fit all the asparagus stalks, but a smaller air fryer may require multiple batches. 
        2. Cook until tender: Cook for only 6-7 minutes until tender, but don’t forget to turn the spears halfway through. If you are using thin asparagus, air fry for 3-4 minutes.
        3. Transfer to serving platter: Carefully transfer to a serving plate, season with salt and pepper, a squeeze of fresh lemon juice (or a sprinkle of parmesan cheese), and serve while it is still warm.

        How to Store & Reheat

        Use this air-fried asparagus recipe to batch-cook asparagus for your weekly meal prep and store it in the refrigerator following my directions below:

        • Storage: Let the leftovers of your cooked asparagus come to room temperature, place in an airtight container and store for up to 3 days in the fridge.
        • How to Reheat Asparagus: To reheat, air fry your asparagus at 375 F / 190 C for about 3 minutes making sure to give it a toss halfway through the cooking process.

        Recipe Variations

        Want to check it up and make it your own? Here are a few ways to take your air fryer roasted asparagus to a whole new level:

        • Freshen with herbs: Fresh herbs give this dish new flavor. Try basil, parsley, mint or chives.
        • Experiment with spices: Make this dish unique each time with new spices. Try paprika, garlic powder or even red pepper flakes to start.
        • Use lemon zest and balsamic: Drizzle it with a mixture of lemon zest, balsamic vinegar (or lemon juice) and a little olive oil to give it a refreshing flavor.
        • Sprinkle with cheese: Shredded mozzarella or parmesan cheese makes the dish more scrumptious.
        • Imitate Asian flavors: Use soy sauce, maple syrup or honey to create an Asian-inspired sauce.

        Expert Tips

        • Take time to trim asparagus, dry it thoroughly and cook in single layers – even if it requires batch cooking. This is crucial for light, crispy asparagus. 
        • Change the cooking time if necessary. As I mentioned earlier, this recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and pencil thin asparagus. If you are using thin asparagus, be sure to reduce the cooking time by half. And don’t forget to turn the asparagus halfway through cooking.
        • Add variety with new flavors. Make this dish new each time by experimenting with spices, herbs and other fresh ingredients.
        • For more of a crispy air fryer asparagus, air fry it for 1-2 more minutes.
        • Keep in mind that the cooking time may differ from one air fryer to another. I tested this recipe in my Instant Vortex 6 Quart Air Fryer (affiliate link). For the best results, it is best to keep a close eye on the asparagus and check doneness after the 5-minute mark.
        Air Fryer Roasted Asparagus in the basket right after it is cooked

        Serving Suggestions

        There isn’t one right answer when it comes to serving this air fried asparagus recipe. It tastes great in so many ways, so consider your options! 

        FAQs

        What temperature do you air fry asparagus?

        The ideal temperature for air frying asparagus is 375 F degrees (190 C).

        How long to cook asparagus in air fryer?

        Cooking asparagus in air fryer takes about 6-7 minutes at 375 F degrees. 

        How to cook frozen asparagus in air fryer?

        Frozen asparagus takes 9-10 minutes to cook in the air fryer, but there’s no need to thaw beforehand.

        How long do you reheat asparagus in air fryer?

        Air frying leftover asparagus only takes 3 minutes to reheat, so it couldn’t be easier. 

        Do I need to adjust the cooking time when using thin asparagus?

        Yes, you do. This recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and thin asparagus. By thick asparagus, I mean the regular asparagus you would find in most grocery stores. Thin asparagus is usually available for a short time at the beginning of spring. You can cook both types of asparagus in an air fryer. However, the thinner should be cooked for a shorter amount of time. While the exact time depends on how thin the asparagus stalks are, shortening the air frying time by 2-3 minutes (and keeping a close eye on it) is a good place to start.

        Why did my asparagus come out stringy and tough?

        If you do not take the time and cut the woodsy ends, you will end up with stringy and tough asparagus.

        Do I need to soak my asparagus before air frying?

        No, you do not need to soak asparagus before air frying. Instead, we recommend giving it a quick rinse and drying it as much as possible.

        Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this air fryer asparagus recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        asparagus in air fryer basket from the top view
        Print

        Air Fryer Asparagus Recipe

        Learn how to cook asparagus in air fryer for perfectly crispy and tender asparagus cooked in less than 10 minutes by using only a teaspoon of oil. Easy, quick, and convenient.
        Course Vegetarian Side Dish
        Cuisine American Vegan
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 3 minutes
        Cook Time 7 minutes
        Preheating Air Fryer 3 minutes
        Total Time 13 minutes
        Servings 4 people
        Calories 33kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 pound asparagus* woody ends trimmed
        • 1 teaspoon olive oil
        • 1 garlic clove minced (optional)
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Preheat air fryer to 375 F degrees.
        • Place asparagus, olive oil, minced garlic, and salt and black pepper in a bowl. Using your clean hands or kitchen tongs, toss to make sure that each asparagus spear is coated with oil, garlic and seasonings.
        • Arrange them in your air fryer basket making sure that they are on a single layer. If you have a smaller air fryer, you may have to air fry your asparagus in batches.
        • Cook until tender for 6-7 minutes making sure to toss halfway through the cooking process.
        • Carefully transfer the now air fried asparagus to a platter and serve right away.

        Notes

        • Thick Asparagus vs Thin Asparagus: This recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and pencil-thin asparagus. If you are using thin asparagus, be sure to reduce the cooking time by half. And don’t forget to turn the asparagus halfway through cooking.
        • To Store: Let your cooked asparagus come to room temperature, place in an airtight container and store for up to 3 days in the fridge.
        • How to Reheat Asparagus: To reheat, air fry your asparagus at 375 F / 190 C for about 3 minutes making sure to give it a toss halfway through the cooking process.
        • For more of a crispy air fryer asparagus, air fry it for 1-2 more minutes.
        • I listed fresh garlic as an optional ingredient as this recipe would work perfectly without it. You can also substitute fresh garlic with 1 teaspoon garlic powder if you wish.
        • Optional toppings: Depending on what I am serving it, I usually finish it off with a squeeze of fresh lemon juice (ideal if I am serving it seafood) or a sprinkle of parmesan cheese (ideal if I am serving it with chicken or meat dishes).

        Nutrition

        Calories: 33kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 234mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 858IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/feed/ 0
        Mint Chimichurri https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/ https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/#respond Fri, 07 Mar 2025 16:28:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80649 My chimichurri with mint is also a playful alternative to my other mint sauces—Lamb Mint Sauce and Yogurt Mint Sauce.…]]>

        My chimichurri with mint is also a playful alternative to my other mint sauces—Lamb Mint Sauce and Yogurt Mint Sauce. Serve them with lamb, seafood, steak, and more!

        Mint chimichurri in a jar with a spoonful of it.

        Ingredients and Substitutions

        The fresh, crisp flavor of my mint chimichurri recipe is all thanks to these fresh ingredients that you can find at your local grocer, farmer’s market, or in your garden. 

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Fresh mint leaves: We will be using only the leaves for my mint chimichurri sauce, as I find the stems to be too “woodsy” in flavor to include. 
        • Fresh parsley leaves: While I prefer to use only the leaves of the parsley, if you can chop it all very finely, feel free to include the stems as well. 
        • Red chili pepper: Traditional chimichurri sauce uses red chili peppers, but you’re welcome to swap them out with ¼ teaspoon of red pepper flakes, if that’s what you have available. Or, if you’d like to up the heat, you can also try using serrano or jalapeno peppers instead. 
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Garlic is a big part of the classic recipe, and the fresh cloves add a bold spiciness that you won’t want to skimp on. 
        • Vinegar: In Argentina, chimichurri sauce is always made using red wine vinegar. If you don’t have any on hand, you are welcome to swap in white wine vinegar. Another non-traditional option for the acid in this chimichurri sauce with mint that works, too, is lime juice.
        • Seasonings: With so many fresh herbs, the only additional seasonings needed are Kosher salt and black pepper. 
        • Extra virgin olive oil: I recommend a good extra-virgin olive oil since this isn’t being cooked (unless you end up using it as a marinade), and the flavor will really shine through. 
        • Shallot (optional): The traditional chimichurri sauce does not use shallots, but you can add a finely chopped shallot, especially if you plan on using this as a salad dressing. 

        How to make Mint Chimichurri?

        You can chop the ingredients of this simple sauce by hand, or use a food processor. I personally prefer the rough traditional hand-chop method, but a few quick pulses of the processor do the trick, too. Here are the simple steps to throw it all together:

        Steps showing how to make the recipe.
        1. In a medium-sized bowl, combine your finely chopped fresh mint and parsley leaves, chopped small red chili pepper, minced garlic cloves, red wine vinegar, Kosher salt, ground black pepper, and extra virgin olive oil. 
        2. Mix to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

        How To Store and Freeze?

        This is an excellent make-ahead condiment that stores well. Here’s how I do it:

        • Storage: You can store your mint chimichurri in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
        • Freezer: Freezing is a fantastic way to enjoy recipes with mint sauce for months to come. Simply pour your chimichurri sauce into an ice cube tray and freeze it. Once frozen, place the chimichurri cubes in a freezer bag and take out a cube to enjoy whenever needed. 

        Serving Suggestions

        This multi-purpose sauce can be used to add a cool burst of flavor to an array of dishes. Whether it’s enjoyed as a sauce, marinade, condiment, or dressing, these are some of my top choices to pair it with:

        • With Lamb: Mint and lamb are such a classic flavor combination. This mint chimichurri sauce is excellent with any of my lamb recipes but I particularly like serving it as a sauce for my Leg of Lamb and Rack of Lamb.
        • Seafood: Mint sauces like this pair beautifully with seafood dishes. Drizzle a generous spoon over  Grilled Shrimp or Grilled Salmon for a refreshing and bright finish.
        • Roasted Veggies: Savory veggies fresh out of the oven shine with a splash of chimichurri sauce with mint. I love pairing it with my Baked Eggplant and Roasted Asparagus, especially when I serve them with meat dishes.
        • Salad Dressing: Mint chimichurri can perk up your homemade salad dressing for an unexpected taste that perks up any boring salad. Try adding a few tablespoons to either my Lemon Vinaigrette or my Yogurt Salad Dressing.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Recipes with Fresh Mint

        If you make your own Mint Chimichurri recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photography by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Mint chimichurri sauce in a bowl with a spoon.
        Print

        Mint Chimichurri Recipe

        A classic chimichurri with a mint twist, this play on the traditional Argentinean herb sauce comes together in about 5 minutes with everyday ingredients. It complements beautifully with any lamb, seafood, and veggie dishes.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Argentina
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 177kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup fresh mint leaves finely chopped
        • 1 cup fresh parsley leaves finely chopped
        • 1 small red chili pepper deseeded and chopped, or ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
        • 3 garlic cloves minced
        • 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • cup extra virgin olive oil

        Instructions

        • Place 1 cup of finely chopped fresh mint leaves, 1 cup of finely chopped fresh parsley leaves, 1 chopped small red chili pepper, 3 minced garlic cloves, 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper, and ⅓ cup extra virgin olive oil in a medium-sized bowl.
        • Mix to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes ~ 2/3 cups of mint chimichurri sauce that is ideal for 4-6 servings.
        • Using a food processor: While I chopped the herbs by hand, you can certainly use a food processor if you want to make it quicker.
          • Storage: You can store it in an airtight container for up to 4 days. The green color of the chimichurri gets darker as it sits, which is normal.
        • Freezing: Place it in ice cubes and freeze overnight. Store the frozen cubes in an airtight container in individual portions.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 177kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 304mg | Potassium: 161mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 1742IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 53mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/feed/ 0
        Roasted Boneless Leg of Lamb https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-boneless-leg-of-lamb/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-boneless-leg-of-lamb/#comments Fri, 07 Mar 2025 16:28:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80631 Served with a bright and herby mint chimichurri, this leg of lamb roast recipe is a showstopper whether you serve…]]>

        Served with a bright and herby mint chimichurri, this leg of lamb roast recipe is a showstopper whether you serve it for Easter dinner, Christmas, or a special Sunday dinner. 

        If you’re looking for more roasted lamb recipes, we also have a roasted rack of lamb that is incredibly tender and has a well-rounded flavor profile through plenty of fresh garlic and rosemary.

        Sliced roasted boneless leg of lamb served with mint chimichurri.

        Ingredients and Substitutions for Leg of Lamb Roast

        With a few simple ingredients—all of which you can find on a single supermarket run!—you can make this boneless leg of lamb roast recipe and wow everyone at your table. Here’s what you will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Boneless (or deboned) leg of lamb: Here in the U.S., you’ll typically find lamb from New Zealand, Australia, or the U.S. I usually buy mine from Costco, which carries Australian lamb leg. It is sold in different weights, so choose one based on how many people you plan on serving. The leg of lamb without bone I’m using here is just over 5 pounds, which is perfect for 6 to 8 adults, but you can go smaller or larger depending on your needs.
        • Dijon mustard: Dijon adds a nice tangy flavor and helps tame the gameness of lamb. I do not recommend swapping it out for yellow or brown mustard, which can be too harsh for this simple leg of lamb recipe.
        • Extra Virgin Olive oil
        • Fresh garlic cloves: We use a lot of fresh garlic in this recipe to balance out the gamey flavor of the boneless lamb roast—8 whole garlic cloves! You will use 4 of them, finely minced, for the inside of the lamb (mixed into the marinade), and the remaining four cloves will be stuffed into slits on the outside once it’s rolled.
        • Fresh herbs: We used a combination of fresh rosemary and parsley, though you’re welcome to substitute in thyme, as well. However, it’s important to finely mince the rosemary, if that’s what you plan on using, so the pine-like needles blend in well. 
        • Spices and seasonings: This rosemary and garlic lamb roast is quite adaptable to a range of seasoning blends, depending on the flavor profile you’re aiming for. As a nod to my own Mediterranean roots, I opted for ground cumin and coriander. 
        • Lemon zest: The brightness of lemon mellows out the gamey flavor in our seasoned leg of lamb. 

        How to Cook Boneless Leg of Lamb in the Oven

        If you’ve been feeling a little intimidated when you see photos of perfectly roasted lamb, don’t worry—if you follow these simple steps that I’ve outlined for you, accompanied by the step-by-step photos, you can easily achieve a stunning roast boneless leg of lamb of your own. Here, my friends, is the best way to cook a boneless leg of lamb:

        1. Prep your oven: Adjust your oven rack to the lower-middle position and heat the oven to 425 degrees F. (218 C). Place a wire rack on a baking sheet and set it aside to warm with the oven.
        Steps showing how to make the seasoning and prep the lamb for the recipe.
        1. Make the seasoning: Into a medium-sized bowl, combine your Dijon mustard, olive oil, 4 cloves of minced garlic, finely chopped fresh rosemary, finely chopped fresh parsley, ground cumin, ground coriander, Kosher salt, black pepper, and zest of a lemon. Stir mixture evenly. 
        2. Prepare the lamb: Remove the lamb from its packaging. It will likely look like an uneven bundle of meat. Lay it flat on a cutting board with the inside facing up. Do your best to spread it out into as even of a shape as possible. Pat it dry with paper towels on both sides to remove excess moisture. Using a sharp chef’s knife, trim off any excess fat, focusing on removing any greyish or tough fat. *Note: the grey fat is what brings out the gamey flavor, which is why we focus on removing that type in this step.
        3. Remove the excess fat (optional): Turn it over and trim away any thick or uneven patches of fat, leaving a thin layer for flavor and moisture retention. 
        Steps showing how to prepare the boneless leg of lamb for roasting.
        1. Even out the thickness: Flip the meat back to the inside facing up position. Cover the meat with plastic wrap. Using a meat mallet, gently pound the meat to create an even thickness of about 1-inch, focusing on the thicker areas. Remove the stretch film. 
        2. Spread it with the seasoning rub: Spread ⅔ of the Dijon-herb mixture evenly over the inside layer of the meat.
        3. Roll into a cylinder: To roll the leg of lamb, begin with the right bottom part of the meat and roll it towards the center (away from your body), pulling it snug as you go. Then, take the left top side and roll it towards you, meeting the first roll in the middle. It should have a uniform cylinder shape. Tuck the ends of the meat inside the roll as much as you can.
        4. Tie the lamb: Using butcher’s twine, secure the roast by tying loops around it at roughly  1 ½ inch intervals, ideally starting from the center and working towards both ends. You’ll likely need about 8-9 loops to keep everything in place. It doesn’t have to be perfect!
        Person inserting sliced garlic in the lamb and seasoning the outside.
        1. Cut small slits for more garlic: Using a pairing knife cut 14-16  1-inch slits evenly around the exterior of the lamb and insert the leftover four sliced garlic cloves into each cut as evenly as you can.
        2. Season the outside: Spread the rest of the dijon-herb mixture over the outside of the deboned lamb roast, ensuring that all sides are evenly coated.
        3. Roast: Transfer the meat onto the prepared baking sheet from the oven. Bake for 15 minutes in the preheated 425 degrees F oven for a nice sear and then turn the heat down to 350 degrees F and bake until the internal temperature reaches 125-130 degrees F (for medium-rare) when a thermometer is inserted in the middle of the roast. This takes about 40-45 minutes* (a total of 1 hour in the oven). 
        4. Let lamb rest: When the leg of lamb is finished roasting, remove it from the oven, tent it with foil, and let it rest for 10-15 minutes. As the lamb rests, the internal temperature will increase by 5 to 10 degrees, thanks to the residual heat.
        5. Slice and serve: Transfer the roast onto a cutting board, remove the twine, and slice it into about 1-inch thick slices, depending on your preference. Transfer your boneless leg of lamb roast onto a plate and serve it with your favorite sauce (I served mine with my mint chimichurri sauce).
        Boneless leg of lamb roast sliced and served with mint sauce on the side.

        Ideal Temperature and Cooking Time (Based on Doneness Level)

        Some of the top questions I receive are: How long to cook boneless leg of lamb? and What is the optimum cooking temperature? I promised you an easy boneless leg of lamb recipe, so here are a few notes to keep it easy & foolproof:

        • How long to roast a boneless leg of lamb depends on the weight and your preferred doneness level. While most boneless leg of lamb recipes say the cooking time per pound is about 15-20 minutes, I think it is more like 10-15 minutes.
        • 3 things affect the boneless leg of lamb roasting time:
          •  The boneless leg of lamb temperature (I usually take the meat out of the fridge to come to room temperature for at least 30 minutes to an hour before working with it); 
          • The weight of your boneless lamb leg roast
          • Your preferred doneness (rare, medium-rare, or medium). 
        • The two-step process – My approach to roasting lamb starts with a high-heat sear to lock in flavor, followed by a slow, gentle cook. I begin at 425°F for the first 15 minutes, then lower the temperature to 350°F to ensure a tender, evenly cooked roast. The final touch happens as the lamb rests, allowing residual heat to finish the cooking process while keeping it juicy and flavorful.
        • Looking for a boneless leg of lamb roasting chart based on doneness? The below chart from America’s Test Kitchen cookbook, Meat Illustrated (affiliate link), is the one I use.
        Desired DonenessCooking Stop TemperatureFinal Temperature After Resting
        Rare115 to 120 °F (46 – 49 °C) 120 to 125 °F (49 – 52 °C)
        Medium-Rare120 to 125 °F (49 – 52 °C)125 to 130 °F (52 – 54 °C)
        Medium130 to 135 °F (52 – 57 °C)135 to 140 °F (57 – 60 °C)
        Medium-Well140 to 145 °F (60 – 63 °C)145 to 150 °F (63 – 66 °C)
        Well-Done150 to 155 °F (66 – 68 °C)155 to 160 °F (68 – 71 °C)
        • Residual heat will likely raise the temperature of your leg of lamb with garlic and rosemary by 5–10 degrees during the 10–15 minutes of resting. That means if I pull my lamb out when the internal temperature is at 120°F, it should ultimately reach around 130°F, which is exactly how I like it—perfectly tender and juicy.

        Expert Tips

        Here are a few tips from my foolproof test kitchen to help you get the best results on your first try:

        • Before cooking it in the oven, be sure to take it out of the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes to an hour prior. You do not want to put it directly in the oven while it’s still cold.
        • A wire rack is essential. A wire rack allows the air to circulate, producing an evenly cooked roasted leg of lamb. If you do not have a wire rack, you can use a roasting pan with a V-rack.
        • Chop your herbs finely.  Rosemary is a pine-y shaped herb, and can add unpleasant bits to chew on if you don’t chop it finely enough. Feel free to experiment with the amount of herbs you use based on your preferences.
        • Remove the fat from the inside and outside of your leg of lamb in the prep stage. My boneless lamb roast recipe is perfectly flavored in large part due to this step, so don’t skip it. The grey fat on the inside is what contributes most to the gamey flavor of the lamb, so if that’s not something you enjoy (I do not), removing a large part of the grey fat will solve this issue. While the outer layer of fat does help retain moisture as it roasts, you want to remove some of it so the end slices are not excessively fatty. 
        • Evening out the meat makes rolling your roast easier. This is a great tip that I picked up in my research from America’s Test Kitchen. Using a meat mallet (or you can also use a can or mason jar in a pinch) helps create an even layer, which then makes it easier to achieve the cylinder shape you see in my photos.
        • Do not skip resting your meat. Resting allows the juices to redistribute, making the meat extra tender.
        • Slice your baked boneless leg of lamb evenly. Using your chef’s knife to slice your roast into 1-1.5” slices will give you a beautiful presentation and equal serving sizes. 

        How To Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

        Looking to save some time on the roasting day? Here are some quick tips:

        • Make Ahead: This entire recipe can be prepared ahead of the roasting day. Simply follow all of the steps before putting it in the oven, then wrap it in stretch film. This is a great way to bring out more flavor by allowing it to marinate overnight. Just remember to take it out of the fridge an hour or two before cooking to allow it to come to room temperature. 
        • Storage: Store any leftover lamb as a cylinder or as slices. First, allow the meat to come to room temperature—you don’t want to store it while it’s still hot. Then, wrap it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days.
        • Freezing and Thawing: You can freeze any leftovers as a cylinder or as slices as well. Bring it to room temperature and then store it in a freezer-safe container for up to a month in the freezer. Thaw it overnight in the fridge.
        • Reheat: Warm slices of the lamb in a low heat (275 F to 300 F oven) for 10 minutes or until heated thoroughly.

        FAQs

        Do I cook lamb with netting on?

        No. For even cooking, you must first remove the net and follow my instructions to flatten the meat, then roll it into a cylinder to get the best results.

        How much boneless leg of lamb per person?

        I usually serve ¾ lbs per person, about 2 slices each.

        Should you cover lamb with foil when roasting?

        No, there is no need. You want the oven air to circulate evenly around the meat for a nice sear on the outside.

        What To Serve with It?

        This leg of lamb recipe is a versatile main dish that pairs well with many sides, making it perfect for any special meal. Here are some great serving ideas:

        Other Lamb Recipes You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make your own Roasted Boneless Leg of Lamb recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photography by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Roasted boneless leg of lamb sliced on a plate.
        Print

        Roasted Boneless Leg of Lamb Recipe

        Looking for a foolproof way to make a juicy, flavorful, roasted boneless leg of lamb? This easy recipe walks you through every step—from seasoning to roasting—so you get a perfectly tender, golden-crusted lamb every time.
        Course Dinner
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 30 minutes
        Cook Time 1 hour
        Resting time 15 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 363kcal

        Ingredients

        • ¼ cup Dijon mustard
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 8 cloves garlic divided – 4 cloves for rub minced, 4 cloves for inserting into slits sliced
        • 2 tablespoons fresh rosemary leaves removed from stems and chopped finely
        • ¼ cup fresh parsley finely chopped
        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
        • 3 teaspoons kosher salt
        • 1 teaspoon black pepper
        • Zest of 1 lemon about 1 ½ teaspoon
        • 5 lbs Boneless leg of lamb

        Instructions

        • Adjust oven rack to lower-middle position and heat oven to 425 degrees F. (218 C). Place a wire rack on a baking sheet and set it aside.
        • Into a medium-sized bowl, place ¼ cup of Dijon mustard, 2 tablespoons of olive oil, 4 cloves of sliced garlic, 2 tablespoons of finely chopped fresh rosemary, ¼ cup finely fresh parsley, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon ground coriander, 3 teaspoons kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, and zest of a lemon. Stir to combine.
          A collage of images showing the garlic mustard seasoning.
        • Remove the leg of lamb from its packaging. It will likely look like an uneven bundle of meat. Lay it flat on a cutting board with the inside facing up. Do your best to spread it out into as even a shape as possible. Pat it dry with paper towels on both sides.
        • Using a sharp chef’s knife, trim off any excess fat, focusing on removing any greyish or tough fat.
        • Turn it over and trim away any thick or uneven patches of fat, leaving a thin layer for flavor and for keeping the moisture in.
          Person removing fat from lamb.
        • Flip the meat back to the inside facing up position. Cover the meat with plastic wrap.
          Person evening out the meat and spreading it with the seasoning.
        • Using a meat mallet, gently pound the meat to create an even thickness of about 1-inch, focusing on the thicker areas. Remove the stretch film.
        • Spread ⅔ of the dijon-herb mixture evenly over the meat.
        • To roll the leg of lamb, begin with the right bottom part of the meat and roll it towards the center away from you, pulling it snug as you go. Then, take the left top side and roll it towards you, meeting the first roll in the middle. It should have a uniform cylinder shape. Tuck the ends inside the roll as much as you can.
          Person rolling the lamb and then it is tied.
        • Using kitchen twine, secure the roast by tying loops around it at roughly 1 ½ inch intervals, ideally starting from the center and working towards both ends. You’ll likely need about 8-9 loops to keep everything in place.
        • Using a pairing knife, cut 14-16 1-inch slits evenly around the exterior of the lamb and insert the leftover four sliced garlic into each cut as evenly as you can.
          Person inserting garlic into the meat and spreading it with the rest of the seasoning.
        • Spread the rest of the dijon-herb mixture over the meat, ensuring that all sides are evenly coated.
        • Transfer the meat onto the prepared baking sheet.
        • Bake for 15 minutes in the preheated 425 degrees F oven and then turn the heat down to 350 degrees and bake until the internal temperature of the meat reaches 125-130 degrees F for medium-rare when a thermometer is inserted in the middle of the roast. This takes about 40-45 minutes* (a total of 1 hour in the oven).
        • When the leg of lamb is finished roasting, remove it from the oven, tent it with foil, and let it rest for 10-15 minutes. As the lamb rests, the internal temperature will increase by 5 to 10 degrees, thanks to the residual heat.
        • Transfer the roast onto a cutting board, remove the twine, and slice it into about 1-inch thick slices, depending on your preference.
          Finished dish from the top view.
        • Transfer onto a plate and serve it with your favorite sauce.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 10-12 slices (as shown in pictures), which is ideal for serving 6 adults (~2 slices per person and about ¾ lb per serving).
        • *Use a thermometer: As it is with any large cut of meat like this, the best way to check doneness is by using a probe thermometer or an instant-read thermometer. If you have a probe thermometer, you can insert it into the meat before placing it in the oven and set it to your desired temperature. Alternatively, you can use a meat thermometer to check doneness.
        • Make ahead: You can season, roll, and tie the lamb a day in advance and store it in the fridge in an airtight container. Be sure to remove it from the refrigerator a couple of hours before roasting.
        • Storage and reheating: Bring leftover lamb to room temperature, transfer to an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 4 days. Warm them up in a low heat (300 F) oven for 10 minutes or until warmed.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 363kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 50g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 152mg | Sodium: 1428mg | Potassium: 753mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 244IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 5mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-boneless-leg-of-lamb/feed/ 2
        Asparagus Salad Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/#comments Tue, 04 Mar 2025 23:34:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=36068 For many of us home cooks, spotting fresh asparagus at the store is the first sign that spring has finally…]]>

        For many of us home cooks, spotting fresh asparagus at the store is the first sign that spring has finally arrived. After months of cold and hearty winter meals, those vibrant green spears feel like a promise of warmer days ahead.

        And with asparagus in season, I’m always looking for new ways to enjoy it. This simple asparagus salad is one of my go-to recipes—it’s fresh, easy to make, and perfect for meal prep. And if you’re looking for more salad recipes with asparagus, my Butter Lettuce Salad is another great option to try.

        Asparagus Salad with Feta, Tomatoes and fresh basil in a large salad bowl from the top view.

        Key Ingredients and Substitutions:

        This simple asparagus salad is packed with everyday ingredients that come together to create a refreshing and satisfying dish. The good news, you ask? You can easily customize it to your taste or use what you have on hand. Below is what you’ll need, along with ingredient substitutions, so you can make it your own with what you have on hand.

        Ingredients for the recipe are laid out
        • Fresh asparagus: During asparagus season, you’ll often find different varieties at the store—thin or thick, and sometimes even in shades of green, purple, or white, depending on where you live. Any of these will work beautifully in this recipe! Just be sure to trim off the tough woody ends for the best texture. And if you’re not using them the same day you buy them, don’t worry—I’ve written a whole guide on how to store asparagus to keep it fresh for longer.
        • Tomatoes: I opted for cherry tomatoes that I sliced in half but you can use any tomatoes you have on hand. Just slice them in bite sized pieces.
        • Radishes: I love adding thinly sliced radishes for a pop of color and crunch.
        • Olives: Use any olive you have on hand. Kalamata olives, Castelvestrano olives, or green olives would all work. Not a fan of olives? Omit them. It will still be delicious.
        • Onions: I prefer the mild flavor of scallions but a thinly sliced red onion would also work.
        • Cheese: Adding cheese is optional. I opted for feta cheese for a Mediterranean flair, but parmesan cheese, goat cheese, and shredded mozzarella would also work. And if you need a dairy-free salad, omit cheese altogether.
        • Fresh herbs: The combination of fresh basil and asparagus is terrific, but fresh mint, dill, and parsley would also work beautifully in this fresh asparagus salad recipe.
        • The dressing: My go-to asparagus salad dressing is my homemade lemon vinaigrette. However, you can also use my avocado salad dressing, lemon balsamic vinaigrette in this asparagus salad recipe. Or you can also try my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette for more of a sweet and tangy salad.

        Optional Add-ins:

        What I love most about this spring asparagus salad is that you can keep it simple or jazz it up with these optional add-ins to make it your own. Here are a few ideas:

        • Add nuts: You can easily add in some crunch and extra protein by adding a handful of pecans, walnuts, or pine nuts.
        • Spring mix or Butter Lettuce: If you’d like to turn this into more of a green asparagus salad, toss in a handful of spring mix or butter lettuce leaves for extra freshness and texture.
        • Peas: A handful of blanched peas make a great addition to this salad. They add a subtle sweetness and a pop of color, making the dish even more vibrant and seasonal.

        How To Cook Asparagus for A Salad?

        Asparagus is one of those wonderfully versatile vegetables that can be enjoyed in so many ways, no matter the season.

        However, if you’re making this salad during peak asparagus season and have access to freshly picked spears, you can even serve them raw following this recipe.

        Raw asparagus salad offers a satisfying, crisp, and refreshing bite that is truly a treat.

        However, I also encourage you to try other methods of cooking asparagus for this salad recipe. Whether you prefer oven baked asparagus, air fryer asparagus, steamed asparagus, or pan sautéed asparagus, this vibrant spring vegetable always makes for a quick and delicious addition to any salad recipe, and this one is no exception.

        How To Make Asparagus Salad?

        There’s something so satisfying about creating a beautiful salad with fresh, seasonal ingredients. And this asparagus salad is just that—a simple yet flavorful dish that highlights the best of spring. Here are the easy steps to follow:

        Person cooking asparagus for salad in a baking sheet
        1. Cook the asparagus: As mentioned earlier, if you’re making this salad during the asparagus season, you can serve it raw for a crisp, fresh bite. However, I personally love roasting it—drizzling the spears with olive oil, seasoning with salt and pepper, and letting the heat bring out their natural sweetness. The slightly smoky, caramelized flavors are just so delicious and addictive.
          Alternatively, you can blanch the asparagus for a few seconds to keep it tender-crisp while maintaining its vibrant green color. The instructions below are for medium size asparagus. For thick asparagus, I recommend increasing the cooking time by 1-2 minutes.
        Person making lemon vinaigrette from the top view
        1. Make the lemon vinaigrette: I make a batch of this dressing during the weekend and keep it in a jar in the fridge. To make it, whisk together extra-virgin olive oil, fresh lemon juice, garlic, dijon mustard, salt, and pepper in a small mixing bowl until emulsified.
        Cold asparagus salad with all ingredients placed in a salad bowl top view
        1. Assemble the salad: Once you have your asparagus ready, all you have to do is to chop the rest of the ingredients. Then, go ahead and place chopped asparagus, cherry tomatoes, sliced radishes, chopped green onion, and kalamata olives in a large bowl and drizzle it with the lemon vinaigrette. Grab two large spoons or tongs and give it a gentle toss, making sure that all the veggies are coated with the dressing.
        2. Garnish and Serve: If preferred, top your asparagus salad with feta cheese and a handful of freshly torn basil leaves. Serve immediately or cover with stretch film and refrigerate.
        Cold asparagus salad recipe placed in a bowl with lemon dressing on the side

        How To Store Leftovers & Make Ahead Instructions

        One of the great things about using asparagus in salad is that it holds up well, even after a day or two in the fridge. Whether you’re making it ahead for meal prep or saving leftovers, here’s how to keep it fresh and delicious.

        • To Store Leftovers: The best part about this spring asparagus salad is that it holds up well. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • To make it ahead of time: If you want to make this salad in advance, I recommend preparing and storing all the vegetables in a bowl and then adding the lemon vinaigrette, feta cheese, and basil leaves at the very end, right before serving.

        Serving Suggestions:

        While this asparagus salad with lemon vinaigrette is perfect when served by itself, you can turn it into a whole meal with other recipes like:

        Expert Tips

        • Trim the woody ends: Asparagus spears have tough, fibrous ends that aren’t pleasant to eat. Be sure to snap or trim them off using a sharp knife before cooking.
        • Skip the frozen asparagus: While you can use thawed asparagus, it won’t have the same crisp, fresh bite that makes this salad so delicious. Fresh asparagus is best for both texture and flavor.
        • Serve it warm or cold – This salad is delicious both ways! Serve it warm right after roasting the asparagus for a cozy side dish, or let it chill in the fridge for a refreshing, make-ahead option.
        • Use good quality ingredients: Since this salad is made with just a few simple ingredients, each one really shines. Opt for fresh, in-season asparagus, juicy cherry tomatoes, and good-quality olive oil for the best flavor.

        You Might Also Like:

        If fresh veggie-packed salads are your jam, here are a few more you might like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Asparagus Salad recipe, please take a minute to give it a star rating and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Asparagus salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Asparagus Salad Recipe

        A simple Asparagus Salad drizzled with homemade lemon vinaigrette and topped with feta, tomatoes, and olives. Light, crunchy, and perfect as a side dish, light lunch, or meal prep option. Gluten-free and vegetarian.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 12 minutes
        Total Time 17 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 229kcal

        Ingredients

        To roast the asparagus:

        • 1 bunch asparagus spears rinsed and the woody ends cut
        • 2 teaspoons vegetable oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the lemon vinaigrette:

        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • 1/2 teaspoon dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper

        For the salad:

        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
        • ½ cup radishes thinly sliced
        • 3 scallions stalks – chopped
        • ½ cup kalamata olives optional
        • ½ cup feta cheese cut into cubes or crumbled or grated parmesan cheese (optional)
        • ½ cup basil leaves loosely packed and torn (optional)

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. Place asparagus on a sheet pan in one layer. Drizzle with oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Give it a toss, making sure that all the spears are coated with the oil and seasoning.
        • Roast for 12 minutes or until the asparagus is cooked*. Transfer onto a plate and let asparagus cool. When cooled, cut the asparagus into 2-inch pieces. Place into a salad bowl.
        • While the asparagus is roasting make the lemon vinaigrette by mixing together 1/4 cup olive oil, 3 tablespoons of lemon juice, 1 clove of minced garlic, 1/2 teaspoon of dijon mustard, 1 teaspoon of kosher salt, and 1/2 teaspoon of black pepper.
        • To assemble the asparagus salad: Place tomatoes, radishes, scallions, olive into the bowl with the asparagus. Drizzle with the dressing.
        • Stir in the feta cheese (if using) and basil leaves. Give it a gentle toss. Serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups (loosely packed) salads that serves four adults as a side dish. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Raw asparagus: During the spring, when asparagus is in season, you can use raw asparagus to make this salad, especially if you can get your hands on freshly picked asparagus. Some people like to shave it (using a vegetable peeler), which will work, but I also like to cut it into bite-size pieces for a fresh and crispy spring salad.
        • Blanched Asparagus: Alternatively, you can blanch asparagus to make this recipe. To do so, bring a pot of salted water to a boil. Add the asparagus spears and cook them for 4-5 minutes or until fork tender. Meanwhile, prepare the ice bath by placing some ice cubes and cold tap water in a bowl. Remove the asparagus using a slotted spoon and place it in the bowl of ice water (to stop the cooking process). Drain and cut it into smaller pieces.
        • How To Store Leftovers? The best part about this spring asparagus salad that it holds up well. Store it in an airing container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • Instructions to Make It Ahead: If you want to make this salad in advance, I recommend preparing and storing all the vegetables in a bowl and then adding the lemon vinaigrette, feta cheese, and basil leaves at the very end right before serving.
         

        Nutrition

        Calories: 229kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1363mg | Potassium: 172mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 606IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 121mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/feed/ 13
        Quinoa Tabbouleh https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/ https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/#comments Sat, 01 Mar 2025 12:47:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20389 Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring…]]>

        Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring and summer salad, which she paired with pretty much everything. 

        This version, made with protein-rich quinoa (a fantastic substitute for bulgur), is the latest addition to my Quinoa Salad recipes collection, and it’s just as delicious as the traditional recipe. If you love quinoa as much as I do, be sure to check out my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad for another fresh and vibrant option. 

        Quinoa tabouli being drizzled with the dressing.

        And if you’ve ever wondered about the different names and spellings—tabbouleh, tabouli—they’re simply variations of the same name, reflecting different versions of the Arabic word.

        Recipe Ingredients:

        This tabouli quinoa recipe is made with simple ingredients that make a bright and refreshing salad. The fresh herbs and crisp vegetables provide a delicious contrast to the fluffy quinoa, while the tangy lemon dressing ties everything together beautifully. You will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Quinoa: This quinoa tabbouleh salad will work with any type of quinoa. Red, black, tricolor and white quinoa would all work. It is imperative to rinse quinoa before cooking if you want it to taste good. 
        • Cooking liquid: While water works just fine, I highly recommend cooking your quinoa in vegetable stock. It adds depth of flavor, ensuring that the base of your quinoa tabouli salad is tasty right from the start.
        • Fresh lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is my favorite acid for the dressing used in this recipe, but in a pinch, white wine vinegar can be used. The flavors would be slightly different but still be great.
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil
        • Fresh herbs: A mix of fresh herbs is key to classic tabouli, and this quinoa version is no exception. I like to use a cup of fresh flat-leaf parsley, a cup of fresh dill, and half a cup of fresh mint leaves, but there’s no strict rule—adjust to your taste! You can stick to just parsley and dill or skip the dill altogether if it’s not your favorite.
        • Fresh tomatoes: I prefer using colorful cherry tomatoes for their sweetness and vibrant look, but any variety will work—just be sure to chop them into small pieces for even distribution.
        • Cucumber: I prefer Persian cucumbers as they are crunchy, but English cucumbers would also work.
        • Scallions: Green onions provide a mild onion flavor that ties everything together. While it is not traditional, finely chopped red onion could be a good substitute in a pinch. 
        • Seasonings: I kept it simple with just kosher salt and pepper in this tabbouleh quinoa salad recipe, but you can add a touch of ground cumin, ground coriander, or a pinch of red pepper flakes to the dressing for extra depth of flavor.

        Optional Add-Ins

        While the recipe for quinoa tabouli I’m sharing stays close to the traditional version, you can easily customize it with a few extra ingredients. These aren’t traditional, but they add delicious new flavors:

        • Feta Cheese: A handful of crumbled feta adds a creamy, salty contrast that pairs perfectly with the Mediterranean flavors.
        • Kalamata Olives: Their briny, tangy taste enhances the salad and adds an extra punch of flavor.
        • Garlic: The traditional tabbouleh salad recipe does not use garlic in the lemon dressing, but you can always add a minced garlic clove if you are a fan.
        • Chickpeas: Again, the classic tabbouleh recipe does not use chickpeas, but sometimes I add a can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas to make it even more satisfying.

        How To Make Quinoa Tabbouleh?

        Making this quinoa tabouli recipe is easy, and it comes together in just a few steps in under 20 minutes. Yes, there is a bit of chopping involved, but the result is a refreshing and wholesome dish that you’ll want to make on repeat.

        A collage of images showing how to cook quinoa and make the dressing.
        1. Cook the Quinoa: Place the rinsed quinoa in a medium saucepan along with your cooking liquid and salt. Bring to a boil, reduce to a simmer, cover, and cook for about 10-12 minutes until the liquid is absorbed. Let it rest for 10 minutes, then fluff with a fork and transfer it to a large bowl to cool.
        2. Make the Dressing: While the quinoa is cooking, prepare the dressing. In a small bowl, whisk lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and black pepper until fully combined. 
        3. Chop the fresh herbs and veggies – Finely chop the fresh parsley, dill, and mint. Quarter the cherry tomatoes, dice the cucumbers and thinly slice the scallions. Add the chopped herbs, tomatoes, cucumbers, and scallions to the cooled quinoa.
        Tabbouleh with quinoa in a salad bowl.
        1. Assemble your tabouli quinoa salad – Drizzle the cooked quinoa and the veggies with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
        2. Serve – Taste for seasoning and add more salt, pepper, or lemon juice as needed. Serve immediately or refrigerate for later.

        How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        My favorite thing about this quinoa tabbouleh salad recipe is that it stores well. As a matter of fact, since the flavors meld together over time, it actually tastes even better the next day. Here is how I make-ahead and store leftovers:

        • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
        • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Before serving, give it a quick stir, taste for seasoning, and refresh it with a squeeze of lemon and more seasoning if needed.
        • Freezing: You can technically freeze this dish, but I do not recommend it as it will lose most of its fresh flavors when thawed.

        Expert Tips:

        This recipe is simple and easy to make, but to ensure the best quinoa tabbouleh, here are a few key tips to help you get it right on your first try:

        • Chopping by hand vs. using a food processor: I like to chop the herbs by hand using a sharp chef’s knife as it gives me more control over the texture, ensuring evenly chopped herbs. Plus, there is no risk of over-processing, which can turn herbs into a paste. However, if you prefer a food processor, pulse in short bursts instead of running it continuously to prevent the herbs from turning into a paste.
        • Herb stems: When it comes to herbs, you can chop the parsley and dill stems, as they are tender and flavorful. However, with mint, I prefer using only the leaves unless you’re growing your own and it’s super fresh.
        • Are you short on time? You can prep the herbs and veggies a day in advance and store them in the fridge until you’re ready to put it all together.
        • Let the quinoa cool a bit: You can mix everything together while the quinoa is still warm for a slightly different texture and flavor, but letting it cool first helps keep the herbs fresh and vibrant. I usually cook the quinoa a day in advance—not only does this save time, but it also ensures it’s perfectly cooled and ready to use.
        • Cooking quinoa: While I opted to cook quinoa on the stovetop, you can cook quinoa in the microwave, in an instant pot, and a rice cooker. Feel free to pick the method that works best for you. Also, I usually cook a big batch and freeze some for later. If you have some cooked quinoa on hand, this quinoa tabbouleh comes together in minutes.
        • Serve at room temperature: This tabouli recipe with quinoa tastes best when served at room temperature, allowing the flavors to fully develop. If you made it in advance, take it out of the fridge 15 minutes before serving for the best taste and texture.

        Serving Suggestions:

        You can serve this gluten-free tabbouleh salad with any protein or vegetarian main or just by itself for a light meal. Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

        Other Quinoa Salads You Might Also Like

        If you make this recipe for tabbouleh salad with quinoa, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to leave a star rating and a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        This recipe was originally published in September 2018 and updated in March 2025 with new step-by-step photos and more helpful tips. The recipe itself remains the same, with only minor edits for clarification.

        Quinoa tabbouleh in a salad bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Quinoa Tabbouleh Recipe

        Traditional Mediterranean Tabbouleh Salad made with a twist. Made with protein-rich quinoa, this vegan and gluten-free Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad Recipe is the perfect year-round salad for all your indoor and outdoor parties.
        Course Side Dish – Salad
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Turkish
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 27 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 205kcal

        Ingredients

        For the Quinoa:

        • 1 cup uncooked quinoa rinsed
        • 1 ¾ cups water or vegetable stock
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

        For The Dressing:

        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed – plus more to taste
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more to taste as needed
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the Tabbouleh:

        • 1 cup fresh parsley chopped
        • 1 cup fresh dill chopped (optional)
        • ½ cup fresh mint leaves chopped
        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes quartered
        • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and chopped or 1 English cucumber
        • 3-4 scallions sliced thinly both white and green parts

        Instructions

        • Place 1 cup quinoa in a saucepan along with 1 ¾ cups of vegetable stock (or water) and a half teaspoon of kosher salt. Stir to combine, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat.
          Person showing how to cook quinoa.
        • Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and cook for 10-12 minutes or until water is fully absorbed. Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes. Fluff it with a fork, transfer it to a large salad bowl, and let it cool while working on the rest of the ingredients.
        • Meanwhile, prepare the dressing by whisking together 4 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a bowl. Set it aside.
          A collage of images showing how to make the dressing and prep the ingredients.
        • To assemble the quinoa tabbouleh, add 1 cup of chopped parsley, 1 cup of fresh dill, ½ cup fresh mint, 1 cup of quartered cherry tomatoes, 2 chopped Persian cucumbers, 3 thinly sliced green onions into the bowl with the quinoa.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing. Give it a gentle toss.
          A bowl of tabouli with quinoa is being drizzled with the dressing.
        • Taste for seasoning and serve immediately.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 5 to 6 cups of tabbouleh, ideal for serving six adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Using dill: Most tabouli recipes are made with fresh parsley and mint, but my mom always added fresh dill, so I followed in her footsteps. If you are not a fan, you can omit using dill (and use more parsley or mint instead.)
        • A quick note on chopping herbs: Traditional tabbouleh is made with finely chopped herbs for a light, delicate texture, but if you prefer a rougher chop, that works too! It all comes down to personal preference.
        • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
        • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Before serving, taste for seasoning and add more lemon juice and salt and pepper if needed. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 408mg | Potassium: 404mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1812IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/feed/ 22
        Almond Flour Brownies https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-brownies/ https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-brownies/#comments Thu, 13 Feb 2025 18:15:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=38940 These homemade brownies with almond flour are so incredibly fudgy that you’d never know they were gluten-free! Sweetened with maple…]]>

        These homemade brownies with almond flour are so incredibly fudgy that you’d never know they were gluten-free! Sweetened with maple syrup, this extra chocolatey and easy gluten-free brownie recipe is guaranteed to be your next favorite recipe to bake when the chocolate cravings hit. 

        Like my Almond Flour Chocolate Cake and Flourless Chocolate Cupcakes recipes, this easy brownie recipe is easy to make. Plus, it is a great alternative to traditional brownies that are butter and sugar-packed and not so healthy.

        Almond Flour Chocolate Brownies on top of each other

        Why You’ll Love This Recipe:

        1. Made with everyday ingredients: The almond flour brownie batter comes together in one bowl in just a few minutes and uses only 7 simple ingredients, all of which are pantry staples.
        2. No different than a brownie made with regular flour: You won’t be able to detect any difference when it comes to taste and texture. Perfectly fudgy, almond flour brownies pack the same addictive chocolate flavor you’d expect from a brownie.
        3. Made with diet restrictions in mind: Like all of my almond flour recipes, compared to traditional baked goods made with all-purpose flour and butter, it uses a minimal amount of oil. It is also low-carb, grain-free (great for Passover), and paleo-friendly. Plus, thanks to the healthy fats in ground almonds, you can even count this as a healthy brownie recipe.
        Almond brownies sliced into squares from the top view

        Ingredients:

        The ingredient profile for this gluten-free almond flour fudge brownies recipe is similar to that of my Almond Flour Chocolate Cake recipe and even my Flourless Chocolate Cupcakes recipe. (Can you tell I love almond flour desserts?)

        Ingredients for almond flower brownie from the top view

        In terms of ingredients, you will need:

        Substitutions:

        • Oil: If you don’t have coconut oil on hand, you can substitute another neutral oil like avocado oil.
        • Almond Flour: If you cannot find it, you can make almond flour at home using a blender or food processor. This paleo brownie recipe can also be made with almond meal. However, almond meal brownies will be a tad bit dense compared to brownies made with almond flour.
        • Sweetener: You can swap agave nectar in place of maple syrup. You can also use honey, but I would recommend using less honey (¾ cup to 1 cup) as it is sweeter.
        • Keto Sweetener: If you are after keto almond brownies, I recommend sweetening with Keto Maple Syrup (affiliate link) sweetened with monk fruit. Liquid stevia can also be an acceptable substitute.
        • Nuts: Feel free to swap the walnuts in this almond flour brownie recipe for whichever nuts you prefer. Pistachios, pecans, sliced almonds, and even unsweetened coconut would work beautifully here!
        • Optional – Chocolate Drizzle: If you want to take this almond flour fudge brownies to the next level, I recommend drizzling them with chocolate. I prefer refined sugar free sweeteners like Enjoy Life or Lily’s dark chocolate chips (sugar free chocolate chips for the keto option) (affiliate links) for drizzling, but any of your favorite chocolate brand would work.
        • Optional – Dried or fresh fruit: If you want to make it a little bit colorful, top it off with fresh berries, or do what I do, sprinkle it with dried strawberries (affiliate link).
        • Optional – Sea Salt: You can sprinkle it with sea salt or lightly salted nuts as well. 
        • Serve them with ice cream: I can’t imagine a better way to serve these than a scoop of vanilla ice cream or whipped cream made with maple syrup on top.

        How To Make Brownies with Almond Flour?

        The steps to making this easy almond flour brownie recipe have 6 folds:

        1. Prepare for baking: Preheat the Oven to 350 Degrees. Line an 8X8 square baking dish with parchment paper.
        Person Mixing dry ingredients for brownie with almond flour.
        1. Combine Dry Ingredients: Whisk together almond flour and cocoa powder in a large bowl until homogeneous, and no lumps remain.
        Gluten free chocolate brownies batter is being mixed by a woman.
        1. Add Wet Ingredients: Add coconut oil, maple syrup, eggs, and vanilla extract to the bowl of dry ingredients, and whisk until fully incorporated.
        2. Add the Nuts: Fold in half a cup of the nuts.
        Almond meal chocolate brownies in the baking pan before and after photos.
        1. Prepare to Bake: Transfer the raw batter into the prepared pan and spread it out evenly using a spatula. Sprinkle it with the rest of the walnuts.
        2. Bake: Cook them for 35-40 minutes in the prepared oven or until a toothpick inserted in the center of the brownies comes out clean (or with a few tiny crumbs). Allow the brownies to cool for 5 minutes, and remove them from the pan onto a wire rack. Let it cool to room temperature before slicing to avoid them falling apart. Serve with coffee, milk, or plant-based milks such as almond milk.
        3. Optional step: If you are like me, and enjoy extra chocolatey, gooey brownies, then I recommend drizzling them with melted chocolate. I think the easiest way to melt chocolate is in the microwave. To do so;
          1. Place 2 oz. of your favorite chocolate chips (both semi-sweetened and unsweetened would work) in a microwave-safe glass bowl. 
          2. Microwave at high for 30 seconds. Give it a stir and then repeat in 30-second intervals until fully melted. Slice your brownies and drizzle them with melted chocolate chips.
        Paleo Chocolate brownies cut into squares with a knife on the side

        How To Store, Freeze and Thaw?

        My favorite thing about these homemade almond flour brownies is that they get better as they sit. I recommend storing them in the refrigerator and warming them slightly before serving.

        • Storage: These gluten-free chocolate brownies will keep for 3-4 days in the fridge in an airtight container or plastic bag. You can also store them on your counter in the same fashion for a day as long as your kitchen stays fairly cool. 
        • Freezing: To freeze, bring brownies to room temperature, individually wrap them with parchment paper, and store them in an airtight container in the freezer for up to a month.
        • Thawing: To thaw, let it sit on the counter for 15 minutes and warm in a low-heat (300 degrees F) oven for 10-15 minutes and serve.
        Almond Brownies sliced with a knife on the side.

        Expert Tips:

        While this recipe for the most fudgy almond flour brownies you see below is pretty straightforward, there are a few things you can do to get the best results on your first try:

        • Room temperature ingredients: As it is with most baked goods when making these brownies, we recommend using ingredients that are at room temperature.
        • Wait for it to cool completely: We know it is hard to wait, but as it is with all almond flour desserts, these brownies need time to cool down. If you slice while they are still warm, the middle section will be (somewhat) wet, looking like it is not fully baked. Therefore, it is imperative to give them enough time to firm up.

        FAQs:

        Can you make brownies with almond flour?

        You sure can. As a matter of fact, due to its high-fat content, brownies made with almond flour are just as fudgy, moist, and chocolate packed with a similar taste and texture to brownies made with traditional flour and butter.

        Can I make this recipe without eggs?

        This recipe will not work without eggs or egg replacers (i.e., flax eggs or chia eggs). I find that when it comes to baking with almond flour, eggs are crucial for making them rise and stay super fudgy. If you need a vegan brownies recipe, I recommend checking out my Almond Butter Brownies recipe. It’s made with wholesome ingredients like nut butter, spelt flour, Medjool dates, coconut oil, and maple syrup. 

        How many calories are in each serving of almond flour brownies?

        This recipe makes 9 servings and each serving is 375 calories.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Almond Flour Recipes You Might Like:

        If you are in need of creative and healthier gluten-free recipes made without the use of refined sugars (i.e., white sugar), you’ll like the recipes below:

        This almond flour chocolate brownies recipe is adapted from Almond Flour Brownies at Allrecipes.com with changes.

        If you try this for Almond Flour Brownies, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Almond flour brownie cut into squares and placed on top of each other from the front view.
        Print

        Almond Flour Brownies Recipe

        Almond Flour Brownies recipe made with only 7 ingredients in one bowl. They are just the trick to satisfy your sweet tooth without going totally overboard. Fudgy, moist, and Paleo-friendly, meaning they’re gluten-free, wheat-free, and dairy-free! Plus, they get their sweetness from maple syrup, making them refined sugar-free, as well.
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 40 minutes
        Total Time 55 minutes
        Servings 9 servings
        Calories 375kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 ½ cups almond flour 6.3 oz.
        • ½ cup + 2 tablespoons cocoa powder 2.3 oz.
        • ½ cup coconut oil melted and cooled
        • 1 ⅓ cups maple syrup at room temperature
        • 4 large eggs at room temperature
        • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
        • 1 cup walnuts or pecans chopped & divided

        Chocolate Drizzle (Optional)

        • 2 oz. chocolate chips i.e. Naturally sweetened Enjoy Life brand
        • 1 tablespoon dried strawberries

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Line an 8X8 square baking pan with parchment paper.
        • Mix together almond flour and cocoa powder in a large mixing bowl until no lumps remain.
        • Add in coconut oil, maple syrup, eggs, and vanilla extract and whisk until fully incorporated.
        • Fold in half a cup of the nuts.
        • Transfer batter to the parchment lined pan and spread it throughout the pan using a spatula.
        • Sprinkle it with the rest of the walnuts.
        • Bake for 35-40 minutes or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean (or with a few tiny crumbs).
        • Let it cool for 5 minutes and remove from the pan on to a wire rack. Let it cool before slicing.
        • If you are using chocolate drizzle, place the chocolate chips in a glass bowl and melt in the microwave in 30-second intervals, mixing after each time until fully melted.
        • Drizzle the melted chocolate over the brownie and sprinkle with dried strawberries.
        • Slice & serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • To Store leftovers: Place the leftover brownies in an airtight container after they come to room temperature. Store in the fridge for up to 4 days. You can also store them on your counter in the same fashion for a day as long as your kitchen stays fairly cool. 
        • Freezing: To freeze, bring brownies to room temperature, individually wrap them with parchment paper, and store them in an airtight container in the freezer for up to a month.
        • Thawing: To thaw, let it sit on the counter for 15 minutes, warm in a low-heat (300 degrees F) oven for 10-15 minutes, and serve.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 375kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 32mg | Potassium: 136mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 31g | Vitamin A: 106IU | Calcium: 103mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-brownies/feed/ 35
        Baked Goat Cheese Balls https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/#comments Sun, 29 Dec 2024 17:08:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15644 Is there anything better than tangy cheese coated in breadcrumbs and baked until crisp on the outside and creamy on…]]>

        Is there anything better than tangy cheese coated in breadcrumbs and baked until crisp on the outside and creamy on the inside? I think not. I also think that goat cheese makes some of the most flavorful dishes, so make sure to try any of our Goat Cheese Recipes if you are a fan as well. 

        On a side note, if you’ve ever been to Lisa Vanderpump’s restaurant, Sur, then you know all about their famous fried goat cheese balls. I know people who visit the restaurant just to order them! The good news? With our recipe, you can now recreate a baked version of the goat cheese balls at Sur right at home. They’re just as delicious but a bit lighter and perfect for any occasion.

        Baked Goat Cheese Balls served on a plate by a person.

        Ingredients

        This baked goat cheese ball recipe is made with just a handful of simple ingredients readily available in any grocery store. We will need:

        • Fresh herbs: I love the savory mix of fresh thyme and parsley. Other herbs that would be delicious include fresh rosemary or basil.
        • Panko bread crumbs: We love the extra crisp bite of plain panko breadcrumbs, but this is your chance to have fun with the coating. While it’s not traditional, you can use Italian-seasoned breadcrumbs, Melba toast crumbs, or even swap out half the breadcrumbs for crushed pecans or walnuts. For a gluten-free option, try almond flour crackers. Simply use your food processor to break them down into fine crumbs, making it easy to coat your goat cheese balls to perfection.
        • Garlic powder: Garlic powder adds a nice savory bite to the breadcrumb mixture. Toss in some lemon zest for a bright citrus flavor.
        • Egg: One large egg is needed to coat the goat cheese before dipping it into the breadcrumbs.
        • Dijon mustard: A hint of Dijon mustard adds a unique flavor to the egg mixture.
        • Seasonings: All you need is a sprinkle of Kosher salt and black pepper for each layer of the dipping station.
        • Goat cheese: We recommend buying a whole goat cheese log instead of goat cheese crumbles. You can buy them in 4 oz portions or a large 12 oz log.

        How to Make Goat Cheese Balls?

        Goat cheese bites are a quick and easy recipe that requires a quick setup of your breading station and a chill in the freezer. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        1. Prep baking sheet: Line a small baking sheet (small enough to fit in your freezer) with parchment paper.
        2. Prepare dipping station: In a small shallow bowl, mix the fresh thyme and parsley. In another small bowl, whisk together the egg, mustard, salt, and pepper. Third, toss the panko breadcrumbs and garlic powder in another small bowl.
        3. Cut goat cheese: While you can use a sharp chef’s knife, we prefer unscented dental floss to cut the goat cheese into 12 equal goat cheese rounds. This works best if your goat cheese log is chilled, so do it right after you remove it from the fridge. To slice goat cheese using a dental floss:
          1. Using a knife, score the surface of the goat cheese log into 12 equal sections.
          2. Cut yourself a long (about 20 inches long) unscented dental floss and slide it under the log at the first score mark.
          3. Cross the ends of the floss over the log, pulling them in opposite directions to slice through the cheese cleanly. Repeat this process until you slice the whole log, wiping the floss with a paper towel as needed.
          4. Roll each piece into a small ball between the palms of your hands.
        4. Coat goat cheese balls: Start by dipping each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture. Then, roll them in the egg mixture and allow the excess liquid to drip off. Then, gently press them into the panko mixture to ensure they are fully coated.
        5. Freeze goat cheese balls: Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Freeze for 30 minutes.
        6. Bake: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Bake the goat cheese balls for 8-10 minutes, or until golden brown.
        7. Serve: Cool slightly, drizzle with honey, and serve warm.

        Make Ahead and Storage Tips

        Talk about a goat cheese appetizer that’s a true make-ahead marvel. The best part? You can prepare these ahead of time, freeze them, and have them ready to pop in the oven whenever you need them. Frozen goat cheese balls that bake up in minutes are a lifesaver when you want something quick, effortless, and absolutely impressive.

        • Make Ahead and freezing instructions: Follow the recipe as written, flash freeze them (meaning place them on a sheet pan, freeze until hardened), transfer to a ziplock freezer bag, label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. If baking from frozen, add 2 minutes to the baking time and keep an eye on them to ensure they are not burning.
        • Storage: While these goat cheese bites are best served the day they are made, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3 days.
        • Reheat: Reheat the balls of goat cheese in a low oven (300 degrees F) until warm, about 5 minutes.

        Expert Tips

        Here are some of my helpful tips for the best baked goat cheese balls recipe:

        • Cutting the goat cheese: The goat cheese is easiest to cut when it is cold. The best method is with unflavored dental floss. However, you can use a sharp knife, but make sure to wipe the knife clean with a paper towel after each slice.
        • Set your dipping station up before starting: It’s best to prep your ingredients before starting since the process happens quickly.
        • Dredge quickly: Go through the breading station quickly and thoroughly, then pop them right into the freezer.
        • Ensure they are cold before placing them in the oven: Even though it sounds like an extra step to freeze them before baking, it helps to make the outside crispy while the inside stays soft and creamy.
        • Fried goat cheese balls: While we love the baked version, you can certainly fry goat cheese balls for a crisp, golden treat. Heat 1–2 inches of vegetable oil in a shallow skillet over medium heat until it shimmers. Fry the goat cheese balls in batches (preferably two) for 1–2 minutes, turning frequently to ensure they cook evenly and achieve a beautiful golden-brown crust on all sides.
        • Double the recipe: This recipe makes 12 individual balls—double or triple the recipe, depending on the number of people you serve. Or, make them mini by cutting the goat cheese rounds in half and reducing the baking time to 5-6 minutes.
        • Bake them right before serving: If you’re serving these goat cheese balls as an appetizer, we highly recommend serving them warm for the best experience. We like to pop them in the oven just before our guests arrive so they’re greeted with the irresistible aroma of golden, creamy goat cheese oozing with tangy, melt-in-your-mouth goodness.

        Serving Suggestions

        When it comes to serving baked goat cheese balls, the possibilities are as delightful as the dish itself! Whether you are planning an elegant appetizer, a show-stopping salad, or just looking to add a little magic to your meal, these versatile bites have you covered. 

        Goat cheese appetizer balls served as a holiday cheese spread.
        • Appetizer: Serve them with a drizzle of honey or extra virgin olive oil. Or, add them to your Meat and Cheese Platter for a little pizzazz.
        • Salad: Enjoy a French classic and turn it into a Baked Goat Cheese Salad. This also does double duty as a delicious holiday appetizer salad or elegant weeknight dinner at home.
        • Croutons: Turn them into cheesy croutons to top off a warm, comforting bowl of soup, like creamy Butternut Squash Soup or velvety Zucchini Soup.
        • Pasta & grain bowls: Crumble them over pasta or add them to your favorite grain bowls for a tangy goat cheese twist that adds creamy texture and bold flavor.

        You Might Also Like

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Baked goat cheese balls served on a plate by a person.
        Print

        Baked Goat Cheese Balls Recipe

        These Baked Goat Cheese balls are coated with herbs, dipped in an egg-mustard mixture, and then rolled in breadcrumbs. You can prep these ahead of time and freeze them until you are ready to serve. They make the perfect appetizer for any cheese board setup and usually disappear a few minutes after they come out of the oven.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 10 minutes
        Cooling time 30 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour
        Servings 12 Goat Cheese Balls
        Calories 122kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh thyme
        • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh parsley
        • ¾ cup panko breadcrumbs
        • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
        • 1 large egg
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 12-ounce log goat cheese
        • 2 tablespoons honey for drizzling (optional)

        Instructions

        • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
        • Prep your dipping station: First, place fresh thyme and parsley in a small shallow plate and mix to combine. Second, place panko and garlic powder in a shallow bowl. Stir to combine. And third, whisk egg, mustard, salt, and pepper in a small bowl and set aside.
        • Cut the goat cheese into 12 pieces. You can slice them using (unscented) dental floss (see notes for more*) or a knife. Roll each piece into a small ball.
        • Dip each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture, ensuring it is coated on all sides. Next, roll them in the egg mixture (allowing the excess liquid to drip), then press the panko mixture gently to ensure it is fully coated with the panko breadcrumbs.
        • Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Place in the freezer for 30 minutes.
        • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Remove the cheese from the freezer and bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes or until golden brown on top.
        • Let it cool for a few minutes, drizzle it with honey, if preferred, and serve while still warm.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 12 baked goat cheese balls, ideal for 6 servings (2 per person). The nutritional values below are per serving. 
        • Slicing the goat cheese: While you can use a sharp chef’s knife to slice the cheese, we find it easier to use an unscented dental floss to cut it into 12 equal goat cheese rounds. This works best if your goat cheese log is chilled, so do it right after you remove it from the fridge. To slice goat cheese using a dental floss:
          1. Using a knife, score the surface of the goat cheese log into 12 equal sections.
          2. Cut a long (about 20 inches) unscented dental floss and slide it under the log at the first score mark.
          3. Cross the ends of the floss over the log, pulling them in opposite directions to slice through the cheese cleanly. Repeat this process until you slice the whole log, wiping the floss with a paper towel as needed.
          4. Roll each piece into a small ball between the palms of your hands.
        • Make Ahead and freezing: The best part of this recipe is that you can prepare these ahead of time, freeze, and have them ready to pop in the oven whenever you need them. Frozen goat cheese balls that bake up in minutes are a lifesaver when you want something quick, effortless, and impressive. To freeze, follow the recipe as written, flash freeze them (meaning place them on a sheet pan, freeze until hardened), transfer to a freezer bag (or a freezer safe airtight container), label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. If baking from frozen, add 2 minutes to the baking time and keep an eye on them to ensure they are not burning.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 122kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 54mg | Sodium: 171mg | Potassium: 39mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 391IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 58mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/feed/ 2
        Christmas Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/#respond Mon, 23 Dec 2024 15:15:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79518 Making a fruit salad for Christmas is probably one of the easiest ways to bring a burst of color, freshness,…]]>

        Making a fruit salad for Christmas is probably one of the easiest ways to bring a burst of color, freshness, and flavor to your holiday table with minimal effort. While I focused on red and green fruits to keep it festive, the great thing about this recipe is that you can use virtually any fruits you have on hand.

        Christmas salad with fruit in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients and Substitutions:

        Like any great salad recipe, this fruit Christmas salad has two main components: the dressing and the fruit. To achieve the best flavor and texture, use ripe—but not overripe—fruits. Here’s everything you’ll need:

        For the Dressing:

        The dressing ingredients to make Christmas brunch fruit salad.
        • Maple Syrup: With its rich, caramel-like flavor, maple syrup adds a touch of natural sweetness to the salad. If you prefer, honey makes an excellent substitute.
        • Lemon zest: Be sure to zest the lemon before squeezing it, and whatever you do, do not skip using it, as it enhances the dressing by adding a concentrated burst of citrus flavor and aroma.
        • Lemon Juice: The bright, tangy flavor of lemon juice adds a refreshing tartness to the salad, while its acidity helps prevent the apples and pears from oxidizing and browning. However, you can use other citrus and fruit juices like lime juice, pineapple juice or orange juice.
        • Vanilla Extract
        • Spices: Ground cinnamon and a pinch of nutmeg add warm, spiced notes to the dressing, giving it a cozy, festive flavor perfect for the holiday season. 

        For the Fruit Salad:

        While I am listing a bunch of fruits, feel free to use this as a guide and a place to start to make your own winter fruit salad with whatever fruit you have on hand.

        The fruit used in the recipe in bowls.
        • Apples: I used a combination of green apples (such as Granny Smit) and red apples (Gala or Honeycrisp), but any other type of apple would be lovely.
        • Pear (Red, Anjou, or Bosc): Sweet and juicy pears balance the tartness coming from apples. 
        • Oranges: You can use a combination of navel oranges and mandarin oranges (if you can get your hands on them). I know it is an extra step, but take the time to segment the orange for a clean, membrane-free presentation that ensures each piece is tender, juicy, and easy to eat. Alternatively, you can use clementines as a substitute if you can get your hands on them.
        • Kiwis: I included kiwis for their green color and sweet and tart flavor. 
        • Red or green grapes: When buying grapes for making this Christmas day fruit salad, be sure to choose firm, seedless green or red grapes for the best texture and ease of eating.
        • Pomegranate seeds: Many Christmas recipes with fruit feature pomegranate arils, not just for their sweet-tart flavor but also for their vibrant, jewel-like pop of color they bring to the dish. Here is an easy way to cut pomegranate if you need a refresher.
        • Raspberries: I included raspberries for their vibrant red color and to add a delicate, softer texture that balances the crunch of the other fruits in the salad. Strawberries would be a great substitute if you can’t find raspberries.

        Optional Toppings:

        Many Christmas fruit dishes can end up looking like just a simple pile of fruit in a bowl. While optional, by adding a few thoughtful toppings, you can elevate the presentation and bring in extra pops of color and texture, making the salad as stunning as it is delicious. Try adding:

        • Coconut flakes: If you have the time, toast them to enhance their flavor with a warm, nutty aroma that adds even more depth to the salad.
        • Fresh mint: A few sprigs of fresh mint can add a refreshing aroma and a vibrant pop of green, making your salad look and taste even more festive.

        How To Make Christmas Fruit Salad?

        Yes, there’s a bit of chopping involved, but don’t let that intimidate you—this xmas fruit salad recipe is super simple to put together. It’s quick to assemble, making it a great choice for busy holiday mornings. Here’s how to do it:

        A collage of images showing how to make fruit bowl for Christmas.
        1. Make the Dressing: To keep cleanup simple, prepare the dressing directly in a large bowl. Whisk together the maple syrup, lemon juice, lemon zest, vanilla extract, ground cinnamon, and nutmeg until well combined.
        2. Chop the Fruit: Begin by chopping the apples and pears, then add them to the bowl with the dressing. Coating them in the acidic dressing immediately helps prevent browning. Continue peeling and chopping the rest of the fruit (except raspberries) and place them in the bowl. Give it a toss to ensure all the fruit is evenly distributed and coated with the dressing. If you have the time, chill it for an hour or for upto six hours before serving.
        3. Garnish and serve: Right before serving, top it off with raspberries and garnish with coconut flakes and/or fresh mint, if using. 

        How To Make Ahead, Store and Freeze?

        Once you’ve made this fruit salad for xmas, you won’t want any of it to go to waste. With a bit of planning, you can keep it fresh and delicious for longer. Here’s how:

        • Make ahead: Prepare the salad dressing and store it in a jar in the fridge for up to two days in advance. You can rinse, peel, and cut all the fruits—except the apples and pear—a day ahead. Keep in mind that pre-cut fruit will release some of their juices. When you’re ready to serve, chop the apples and pear, add them to a bowl with the other fruits, and drizzle everything with the dressing. Add the raspberries and serve.
        • Storage: Store leftovers of this holiday fruit bowl in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Keep in mind that the fruits will release their juices over time, but the salad will still taste great. Give it a good toss before serving.
        • Freezing: The leftovers of this Christmas fruit salad can be used to make smoothies. However, I recommend draining the juices (and the dressing) before freezing. Once drained, portion and place the leftover fruit in freezer-safe bags and freeze for upto 3 months.

        Expert Tips:

        • Uniform Cuts: Chop all fruits into similar-sized pieces for even mixing and easy eating. If you have the time, use cookie cutters (affiliate link) to cut apples and pears in fun shapes (like I did in the pictures). This is especially a fun way to make this salad with kids.
        A collage of images showing cutting of the fruit using cookie cutters and the finished dish.
        • Presentation: Use a clear trifle dish or a colorful holiday fruit bowl to show off the salad’s vibrant red and green colors, perfect for a Christmas morning fruit salad centerpiece.
        • Add Raspberries Last: I intentionally added the raspberries at the last minute as their soft texture can easily break.
        • Portion Planning: This recipe yields approximately 8 cups, suitable for a small Christmas dinner, but can be multiplied as needed. 
        • Make it your own: This recipe is a perfect starting point for creating your own signature fruit salad for any holiday! While the citrus-maple dressing is my go-to for Christmas, I love switching things up for other occasions. For Thanksgiving, I’ll often use my honey lime dressing for a bright, zesty twist that complements the autumnal flavors of the season. For Easter, I might add a splash of orange blossom water to the dressing for a festive springtime touch. No matter the holiday, this salad is versatile enough to adapt and impress every time!

        Serving Suggestions:

        This Christmas fruit salad recipe is wonderful when served on its own or as a refreshing side dish, but why not make it extra special for the holidays? Here are a few indulgent serving ideas to take it to the next level:

        You Might Also Like

        If you make this festive fruit salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Christmas fruit salad in a bowl.
        Print

        Christmas Fruit Salad Recipe

        Celebrate the holidays with this easy Christmas Fruit Salad recipe. Red and green fruits, drizzled with a citrus-maple dressing, make it a light and refreshing addition to your holiday table.
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 277kcal

        Ingredients

        For the dressing

        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
        • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
        • ¼ cup lemon juice freshly squeezed or lime juice
        • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
        • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • Pinch of nutmeg

        For the fruit salad

        • 1 green apple (about 1 ½ cups) peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Granny smith apples
        • 1 red apple about 1 ½ cups, peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Honey Crisp, Gala or Fuji
        • 1 pear (180g/1 ½ cups) peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Red, Anjou or Bosc
        • 2 oranges (140g) peeled and segmented or mandarin oranges
        • 2 kiwis (142g/1 cup) peeled, quartered, and cut into ½- inch cubes
        • 1 cup green grapes 190g cut in half
        • 1 cup pomegranate arils (160g)
        • 6 ounces raspberries (170g)

        Optional Garnish

        • Sprigs of mint optional topping

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing: In a large salad bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, lemon juice, lemon zest, vanilla extract, cinnamon and nutmeg.
        • To make the salad: Add the apple, pear, orange segments, kiwis, grapes and pomegranate arils. Toss to coat thoroughly. Chill for at least an hour or up to 6 hours in the refrigerator.
        • Right before serving, top it off with raspberries and garnish with fresh mint leaves, if using. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 8 cups of fruit salad, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Make ahead: Prepare the salad dressing and store it in a jar in the fridge for up to two days in advance. You can rinse, peel, and cut all the fruits—except the apples and pear—a day ahead. When you’re ready to serve, chop the apples and pear, add them to a bowl with the other fruits, and drizzle everything with the dressing. Add the raspberries and serve.
        • Storage: Store leftovers of this holiday fruit bowl in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
        • Freezing: The leftovers of this fruit salad can be used to make smoothies. However, I recommend draining the juices (and the dressing) before freezing. Once drained, portion and place the leftover fruit in freezer-safe bags and freeze for up to 3 months.
        • Uniform Cuts: Chop all fruits into bite-sized pieces for even mixing. If you have the time, use cookie cutters to shape the apples and pears into fun designs (like I did in the pictures). It’s a great way to make the salad more festive and a fun activity to enjoy with kids!
        • Presentation: You can serve this salad in a large salad bowl or transfer it into a trifle dish, if you have one. Alternatively, you can place it in a large platter as well.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 277kcal | Carbohydrates: 57.1g | Protein: 2.8g | Fat: 5.4g | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 405mg | Sugar: 40.4g | Calcium: 100mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/feed/ 0
        Easy Cranberry Apple Cake https://foolproofliving.com/easy-cranberry-and-apple-cake/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-cranberry-and-apple-cake/#comments Sat, 21 Dec 2024 15:27:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1865 Bright red cranberries and tart apples capture the essence of cozy, cold-weather cooking, bringing a festive warmth to your table.…]]>

        Bright red cranberries and tart apples capture the essence of cozy, cold-weather cooking, bringing a festive warmth to your table. This apple cranberry cake is the perfect centerpiece for a holiday gathering, whether celebrating with family or hosting friends. 

        And if you find yourself with extra cranberries, don’t let them go to waste—transform them into a stunning Cranberry Almond Tart or a versatile Cranberry Maple Sauce to complement your holiday spread.

        Cranberry and apple cake being sliced by a person.

        Ingredients and Substitutions:

        This apple and cranberry cake is made with a list of simple ingredients. Here’s more detail about what we need from the grocery store:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Cranberries: You can use fresh or frozen cranberries. Take the advice of the Barefoot Contessa herself and buy a few extra bags of fresh cranberries when they are widely available in the fall and freeze the extra. Also, sort through the cranberries and pick out any stems.
        • Apples: I recommend a Granny Smith apple since it is tart and balances the sweetness. With that said, you can use any variety of apples you prefer, like Gala, Pink Lady, or Jonagold.
        • Coconut Sugar: Coconut sugar keeps the filling naturally sweetened, but you can use light brown sugar instead.
        • Orange Zest: Be sure to zest the orange before squeezing it.
        • Orange Juice: Freshly squeezed orange juice from a fresh orange will provide the best flavor.
        • Ground Cinnamon
        • Large Eggs: Ina uses extra large eggs in her original recipe, but I can never get my hands on them. Large eggs work just fine.
        • Cane Sugar: I like to use organic cane sugar for the cake recipe, but you can use granulated sugar if that is all you have. Make sure to save some extra for sprinkling on top just before baking.
        • Unsalted Butter: Unsalted butter controls the salt in the recipe. If you only have salted butter, omit the salt in the recipe. It is essential to let it cool before mixing it with the rest of the ingredients.
        • Vanilla Extract: A hint of pure vanilla extract rounds out the flavors.
        • Sour Cream: Full-fat sour cream provides the best texture and tang. Creme fraiche would be a wonderful substitute, or full-fat Greek yogurt, too.
        • All-Purpose Flour: Regular all-purpose flour creates a cohesive cake batter. If you want to make this gluten-free, use 1:1 gluten-free baking flour.
        • Kosher Salt

        How to Make Ina’s Cranberry Apple Cake Recipe?

        There is nothing to it. This apple cranberry pie recipe is so easy to make, it will become a new holiday staple. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F/163 C. Grease a 10-inch glass pie plate with butter or cooking spray. 
        A collage of images showing how to make the batter for this cranberry and apple cake.
        1. Mix fruit filling: Add fresh cranberries, apple, coconut sugar, orange zest, orange juice, and ground cinnamon to a large bowl. Mix to combine.
        2. Whip eggs: Using a hand mixer, beat the eggs on medium-high speed until thickened, about 2 minutes.
        3. Add wet ingredients: Add the cup of cane (or granulated) sugar, cooled butter, vanilla extract, and sour cream and mix on low speed until combined.
        4. Add dry ingredients: With the mixer still running, add the flour and salt. Mix until just combined. Do not overmix.
        A collage of images showing the steps to baking this cake.
        1. Fold in fruit mixture: Fold in the cranberry apple mix with a rubber spatula.
        2. Transfer to baking pan: Pour the cake batter into the prepared baking dish. Sprinkle the top with the remaining tablespoon of sugar.
        3. Bake: Bake for 60-65 minutes, until lightly golden brown. The cake is done when the middle of the cake is pierced with a toothpick, and it comes out clean. Cool for 15 minutes before serving.

        What to Serve It With?

        It’s important to note, that the flavor of this cake is more sour than sweet, which is why I love to serve it with a creamy component to balance the sourness. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

        • Ice Cream: Serve it with a scoop of vanilla ice cream or our Vanilla Honey Ice Cream if you want to try something new.
        • Whipped Cream: A dollop of whipped cream would be extra delicious, like our Maple Whipped Cream.
        • Creme Fraiche: Creme fraiche is another rich, tangy counterpoint that makes it elegant and divine.
        • Yogurt: Another good idea is Vanilla Yogurt if you don’t have any other toppings on hand.
        Freshly baked cake from the top view.

        How to Store Leftovers?

        This cranberry apple dessert is best served the day it is made, but it can be stored for later with fantastic results. Here are my best storage and reheating tips:

        • Storage: The cake is very moist because of the fresh fruit. For this reason, I allow it to come to room temperature and then store it in an airtight container in the fridge. The cake will last for 3 days.
        • Reheat: While you can enjoy the cake cold, if you prefer it warm, reheat in a low oven (300 degrees F) until warm, about 5-10 minutes, depending on the size of your slice.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Easy Cranberry Apple Cake recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        This recipe is adapted from Ina Garten’s cookbook Barefoot Contessa, How Easy Is That?

        Cranberry and apple cake is being sliced from the top view.
        Print

        Easy Cranberry Apple Cake Recipe

        An easy to make and quick to put together Cranberry Apple Cake recipe right out of Barefoot Contessa's cookbook. A recipe that I make every year as soon as the fresh cranberries are available in the market.
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 1 hour
        Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 389kcal

        Ingredients

        • 12 ounces fresh cranberries rinsed and picked over to remove stems (frozen cranberries can also be used)
        • 1 Granny Smith apple peeled, cored and diced into 1-inch cubes
        • ½ cup coconut sugar or light brown sugar
        • 1 tablespoon orange zest grated zest from 1 orange
        • ¼ cup orange juice
        • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • 2 large eggs at room temperature
        • 1 cup cane sugar plus 1 tablespoon to garnish or granulated sugar
        • ¼ pound unsalted butter melted, cooled slightly plus more for greasing the pie plate
        • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
        • ¼ cup sour cream full fat
        • 1 cup all-purpose flour
        • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F/163 C. Grease a 10-inch pie plate with butter or cooking spray and set it aside.
        • In a large bowl, add cranberries, diced apple, ½ cup coconut (or brown) sugar, orange zest, orange juice, and ground cinnamon. Mix to combine. Set aside.
        • Using a hand mixer, beat the eggs until frothy, approximately 2 minutes.
        • Add 1 cup of cane (or granulated) sugar, melted and cooled butter, vanilla extract, and sour cream. Beat on low until thoroughly combined.
        • While the mixer is on low, add flour and salt. Mix just until combined. Do not overmix.
        • Fold the batter into the fruit mixture, ensuring that the fruit and batter are evenly distributed and mixed.
        • Pour the mixture into the 10-inch pie place. Sprinkle with the additional tablespoon of cane sugar.
        • Place in the oven and bake for 60-65 minutes* until lightly brown. To test for doneness, insert the cake with a toothpick or sharp knife. It should come out clean when removed.
        • Let cool for 15 minutes and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes a 10-inch cake that serves 8 slices. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Baking dish: You must use a 10-inch baking dish. We tested it with a 9-inch pie pan and the cake batter overflowed. However, if you only have a 9-inch baking dish, place it on a baking sheet before baking it in the oven. The baking sheet will catch any cake batter if the cake starts to overflow.
        • Bake time*: While Ina Garten’s recipe calls for a baking time of 55 – 60 minutes, we found it took longer for us. I recommend you start checking it with the toothpick test at the 55-minute mark. Then, bake in additional 5-minute increments if it is not ready.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 389kcal | Carbohydrates: 87g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 60mg | Sodium: 133mg | Potassium: 182mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 64g | Vitamin A: 210IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/easy-cranberry-and-apple-cake/feed/ 20
        Reverse Sear Filet Mignon https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-filet-mignon/ https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-filet-mignon/#respond Tue, 10 Dec 2024 17:54:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79318 If you’ve been a reader of our website for a while, you’ll know this isn’t the first time we’re raving…]]>

        If you’ve been a reader of our website for a while, you’ll know this isn’t the first time we’re raving about the reverse searing method. This Reverse Seared Tenderloin steak recipe joins our collection of reverse-seared beef favorites, including Reverse Sear Whole Beef Tenderloin and Reverse Sear Prime Rib Roast.

        We’re huge fans of this two-step, foolproof cooking technique (perfected by J. Kenji Lopez-Alt), where the meat is gently cooked at a low temperature first, then finished with a quick sear in a blazing hot cast-iron skillet or grill. The result? A perfectly crisp, caramelized exterior with a tender, juicy interior.

        Reverse seared tenderloin steak in a cast iron skillet from the top view.

        Recipe Ingredients

        You’ll need 5 simple ingredients for this filet mignon reverse sear. Here’s a little more detail about each ingredient:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Filet Mignon: We used filet mignon steaks that were about 6 ounces each, 2 inches thick. You can use thicker steaks, but thickness and timing go hand-in-hand, so pay attention to cooking time if your steaks are thicker (see chart below).
        • Kosher salt: We used Diamond Crystal kosher salt, which has smaller flakes and promotes better coating around the steaks. Use half the amount if you use any other brand (such as Morton’s kosher salt).
        • Neutral oil: Use a high-heat vegetable oil, such as avocado oil, olive oil, or sunflower oil, or you can also use ghee.
        • Butter or ghee: Finishing the steaks with a butter baste is optional, but let’s be honest—it takes them to the next level. You can use butter, and ghee, or, if you have a little extra time, try making our Garlic Compound Butter for an added layer of deliciousness.
        • Fresh herbs: If you are basting, toss in a few fresh rosemary sprigs or fresh thyme for additional flavor.

        How to Reverse Sear Filet Mignon?

        Reverse searing is particularly suited for premium cuts like filet mignon because it highlights their tenderness. Because filet mignon does not have a lot of fat (or marbling) reverse searing filet mignon ensures even doneness throughout. Here’s how we do it:

        Oven Method

        Here is our step-by-step guide for reverse sear filet mignon in the oven:

        A collage of images showing how to prepare filet mignon steaks for reverse searing in the oven.
        1. Prepare steaks: Remove the filet mignon from the fridge 30 minutes to 1 hour before cooking. Pat the entire surface dry with paper towels. Season all sides with salt.
        2. Prepare baking sheet: Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and place a wire rack over it. Place the filet mignon steaks on the wire rack.
        3. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 250 degrees F/121 C.
        4. Roast: If you have a probe thermometer (affliate link), stick the probe in one of the filet mignons and bake until the internal temperature of the steak reaches your desired doneness (see the chart below). For a rare steak (doneness at 120 degrees F), you’ll need to bake it for 35 minutes, and for a medium-rare steak (doneness at 125 degrees F), 40 minutes should be sufficient. If you do not have a probe thermometer, you can use a digital meat thermometer to check the temperature of your steak.
        A collage of images showing how to sear filet mignon on a cast iron skillet.
        1. Rest: Remove the steaks from the oven and rest them uncovered on the counter (while the cast iron skillet is heating). 
        2. Preheat skillet: Heat a large cast iron skillet over high heat for 5-10 minutes. You will know it is hot enough when you splash a drop of water into the pan, and it sizzles, dances around, and evaporates rapidly.
        3. Sear: Add the oil to the hot pan and sear the filet steaks for 45 seconds on each side (including the sides) until a nice brown crust forms. There is no need to rest the steak when reverse searing, you can serve them right away or baste them following the instructions below.
        4. Baste: Optionally, in the last 30 seconds of searing, add ghee or butter and a few sprigs of fresh herbs into the skillet. Spoon the melted butter over the meat for 10 seconds.
        5. Serve: Transfer the steaks to a platter or slice them against the grain and pour over any excess juices from the pan before serving.

        On the Grill

        Here are the step-by-step instructions for reverse sear filet mignon on a gas grill:

        1. Season steaks: Season the filets and let them rest for an hour at room temperature before grilling.
        2. Preheat grill: Preheat the grill by turning one side to high heat and leaving the other off, creating two zones (hot zone and cool zone).
        3. Prepare grill: Clean the grates with a grill brush, then dip a wad of paper towel into a bowl with oil, grab the paper towel with tongs, and generously coat the grates.
        4. Reverse sear: Place the filets over the indirect heat (cool side), cover, and cook depending on your desired level of doneness. Check doneness with a meat thermometer after 15 minutes of grilling. It took about 20 minutes to reach 130 degrees F (medium rare) for us.
        5. Sear steaks: When done, move the filets to the hot side of the grill. Grill, uncovered, for 45 seconds on each side and 30 seconds on each edge. Since this side is very hot, you should be able to get nice grill marks as soon as the steak hits the grates.
        6. Rest: Remove the steaks and place them on a platter, uncovered. Let them rest for 5 minutes before serving.

        Temperature and Timing for Reverse-Seared Steak

        How long to reverse sear filet mignon depends on the thickness and your desired degree of doneness. For the most consistent results, it’s important to remember to remove the filet steak from the fridge at least 30 minutes, and up to 1 hour, before cooking.

        Even more so, the best way to test for doneness is with a probe thermometer, which takes the guesswork away, but an instant-read digital thermometer is the next best thing. If using an instant-read thermometer, I recommend beginning to check the internal temperature after 20 minutes of cooking.

        Here is a handy time chart when reverse searing filet mignon:

        DonenessInternal Temperature (°F)Approximate Time 250 degrees F oven
        Rare120 – 125°F25 – 30 minutes
        Medium Rare130 – 135°F35 – 40 minutes
        Medium140 – 145°F42 – 45 minutes
        Medium Well150 – 155°F45 – 48 minutes
        Well160°F50 minutes
        Cooking time and temperature chart for reverse sear filet mignon.
        Reverse seared steak sliced and served on a bed of mashed potatoes.

        Expert Tips

        Follow the recipe as written, and you’re likely to nail it on your first try. That said, here are a few extra tips to ensure your reverse sear filet mignon steak turns out absolutely perfect:

        • Local Butcher: It is no secret that filet mignon is an expensive cut of beef. We recommend seeking your local butcher for the best quality if you can. The good thing is you can even have them cut it based on your desired thickness.
        • No wire rack? The wire rack helps circulate the hot air in the oven while the meat cooks, but the recipe will still work without one.
        • Cast iron: The cast iron skillet must be screaming hot to seal that dreamy crust. Let it get hot (at least 10 minutes) before adding the oil.
        • No Need to Rest: Unlike a traditionally seared steak, which needs to rest before slicing to allow the juices to redistribute, this method eliminates that step. Thanks to the low-temperature cooking, the juices have already settled evenly before the final sear, so you can slice and serve immediately after searing. Still, if you want, you can let it sit for a few minutes.
        • Overnight Salting: During our recipe testing, we found some methods that recommend salting the steak the night before and leaving it uncovered on a lined baking sheet in the refrigerator. While you can certainly do this if you have the time, we tested both approaches and found the difference to be minimal.

        FAQs

        What Is The Reverse Sear Method?

        Reverse searing is a foolproof method that starts by cooking the steak in a low-temperature oven until it reaches your desired doneness. Then, it’s quickly finished in a blazing hot skillet to develop a beautiful crust.

        Why Should You Reverse Sear Your Steak?

        Because this technique ensures the inside stays perfectly cooked at the desired temperature while the outside achieves that irresistible sear. When followed to a t, this method will deliver perfectly cooked filet mignon every time.

        Can I Reverse Sear Other Cuts Of Steak?

        Yes, you can. You can follow the reverse sear method for any other thick cut of meat, such as bone-in rib eye, Tomahawk, New York strip, T-bone, or porterhouse. However, please keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the thickness of the meat and the time of cooking in the oven for the meat to reach your desired level of doneness.

        Storage and Reheating

        Filet mignon is a special cut of meat and we do not want this expensive cut going to waste. Here are my best storage and reheating instructions for reverse-seared steak:

        • Storage: Bring leftover tenderloin steaks to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • Reheat: Reheat the steaks in a low oven (300°F) until warm, about 10 minutes.

        What to Serve with This Recipe

        Filet mignon reverse sear is an elegant recipe that deserves the spotlight on your plate. A few of my favorite ways to serve that highlight this gorgeous piece of meat even further are:

        You Might Also Like

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this Filet Mignon Reverse Sear recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Reverse seared filet steak sliced and served on a bed of mashed potatoes.
        Print

        Reverse Sear Filet Mignon Recipe

        Once you learn how to reverse sear filet mignon, you'll never go back to cooking steak any other way. This easy method is foolproof and works every time.
        Course Dinner
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 2 minutes
        Cooling time 30 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour 7 minutes
        Servings 2 servings
        Calories 498kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 filet mignon steaks about 6 ounces each; 1 ½-2 inches thick
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt*
        • 1 tablespoon neutral oil such as ghee or vegetable oils like avocado oil
        • 1 tablespoon butter or ghee (optional)
        • 2 sprigs fresh herbs such as rosemary or thyme, (optional to finish)

        Instructions

        In The Oven:

        • Thirty minutes to an hour before you are ready to start cooking, remove the filet mignon from the fridge. Pat dry with paper towels to remove the excess moisture, and sprinkle them liberally on all sides.
        • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and place a wire rack* over it. Transfer the filet mignon steaks to the wire rack. Loosely cover it with stretch film.
        • While the meat is resting, preheat the oven to 250 degrees F/121 C.
        • Transfer the filet mignon to the oven and bake until it reaches your desired doneness*. For a rare steak ( doneness at 120 degrees F), you’ll need to cook for about 35 minutes; for a medium-rare steak (doneness at 125 degrees F), it would take about 40 minutes for the meat to reach the ideal temperature.
        • Remove the steaks and let rest, uncovered on the counter ((while the cast iron skillet is heating).
        • Meanwhile, heat a large cast iron skillet over high heat for 5-10 minutes or until very hot. You will know it is hot enough when you splash a drop of water into the pan, and it sizzles, dances around, and evaporates rapidly.
        • Add the oil to the hot pan and sear the steaks for 45 seconds on each side (including the sides of the steak) until a nice brown crust forms.
        • At this point, you can remove the steaks from the pan and slice it right away. There is no need to let reverse seared filet mignon rest.
        • Optionally, in the last few seconds of searing, you can add a tablespoon of ghee or butter and a few sprigs of fresh herbs into the skillet and spoon the melted oil (baste) over the meat for 10 seconds.
        • Transfer the steaks onto a platter, or alternatively, slice them against the grain and pour over any excess juices from the pan before serving.

        Grilling on a gas grill:

        • Pat dry, season the filets, and let them rest for an hour before grilling.
        • Preheat your grill by turning one side to high heat and leaving the other side off, creating two zones—we’ll use the cooler side for the initial cooking (until it reaches our desired doneness) and the hot side for searing.
        • Clean the grates well, dip a wad of paper towel into a bowl with oil, and then generously coat the grates.
        • Place the filets on the cool side, cover and cook depending on your desired level of doneness. It is best to check doneness (using a meat thermometer) after 15 minutes of grilling. It took about 20 minutes to reach 130 degrees F (for a medium-rare steak).
        • When done, move the filets to the hot side of the grill and grill, uncovered, for 45 seconds on each side and 30 seconds on each edge.
        • Remove from the grill. Serve as a whole or slice against the grain before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe serves two filet mignon steaks, which is ideal for 2 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving. If serving a larger crowd, you can multiple the recipe following the same method.
        • Checking doneness*: Using a probe thermometer is the best way to check doneness. You can find the one we like and use in the equipment section above. If you have one, insert it in one of the steaks before placing them in the oven. This way, it can alert you as soon as your steak reaches the set temperature. If you do not have a probe thermometer, we recommend using an instant-read thermometer and checking it (depending on the desired temperature) after the 20-minute mark.
        • A note on Kosher Salt: We used Diamond Crystal Kosher salt, which has a finer texture and less salty taste than Morton salt. I recommend decreasing the salt to ½ teaspoon if using Morton. You can always finish the steaks with Maldon flakey sea salt if desired.
        • Black pepper: We did not find the steaks needed black pepper since it changes the flavor of the meat. It also tends to burn during the last few minutes of searing. However, if you want, you can season your reverse-seared filet steak with black pepper right before serving.
        • Charcoal Grill: If you’re using a charcoal grill, start by lighting the charcoal and letting it burn until it’s covered in white ash. Then, create two zones—an indirect heat side for cooking and a direct heat side for searing—by arranging the coals to one side of the grill, leaving the other side empty.
        • Storage and reheating: Store leftover steak (after it comes to room temperature) in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low heat (300 F) oven until warmed to your liking, about 10 minutes.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 498kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 119mg | Sodium: 1208mg | Potassium: 524mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 175IU | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-filet-mignon/feed/ 0
        Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/yukon-gold-mashed-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/yukon-gold-mashed-potatoes/#comments Tue, 10 Dec 2024 17:51:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79352 I think we can all agree that no holiday meal is complete without everyone’s favorite, creamy mashed potatoes. And no…]]>

        I think we can all agree that no holiday meal is complete without everyone’s favorite, creamy mashed potatoes. And no mashed potato recipe turns out as silky as one made with Yukon Golds. 

        The reason is simple. They have just the right amount of starch and a naturally buttery flavor that creates the smoothest, creamiest texture without needing a ton of added fat.

        Yes, my version uses a bit of butter, sour cream, and milk, but I’ll also share ways to make it your own, whether that means swapping in Greek yogurt, keeping it extra rich, or making it vegan without losing that velvety texture. 

        Plus, I’ll walk you through everything you need to know, from whether to peel them to how to season them so they taste restaurant-worthy, and how to make them ahead for your holiday table.

        Mashed golden potatoes in a bowl garnished with butter and chives.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Ingredients and Substitutions

        This recipe for mashed potatoes with Yukon gold is remarkably simple. The adaptability and ease of this recipe are what make it such a classic. It comes together with a few basic ingredients that you can find at any grocery store. 

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        Yukon gold potatoes: At the supermarket, you may also see these referred to as yellow potatoes, golden potatoes, baby gold potatoes, petite gold potatoes, or even Yukon golden potatoes. While the smaller “baby” potatoes will work for this recipe, I prefer the standard size for ease of peeling. 

        Whole milk: Mashed yellow potatoes are intended to be rich and creamy in consistency and that requires a full-fat milk. You could also achieve the same result using half and half. If you prefer to use a vegan milk such as oat milk or almond milk, just be sure you select one that is unsweetened and unflavored. 

        Fresh garlic: The real secret to the best gold mashed potatoes is garlic. The infusion of fresh garlic complements the yellow potatoes in such a decadent way. If you’d like an extra intensity here, I recommend that you use roasted garlic, which can easily be prepped in the oven or even in the air fryer!

        Unsalted butter: While you can use salted butter, it is harder to control the overall saltiness of the dish this way; using unsalted butter gives you more control to make adjustments later. If you prefer, vegan butter can be swapped in. 

        Sour cream: Traditional mashed baby gold potatoes always call for sour cream, as it adds a welcome tang to the side dish. But if you aren’t a fan of sour cream, feel free to substitute in either whole milk plain yogurt (or Greek yogurt) or cream cheese.

        Salt & Pepper: I used Kosher salt and black pepper. If you’d prefer a more even color for your Yukon whipped potatoes, you may switch to white pepper instead.

        Cheese (optional): I didn’t include cheese to keep it light, but for a cheesy twist, you can fold in a cup of shredded cheddar, Parmesan, or Gruyère just before serving. The heat from the potatoes will gently melt the cheese, adding a richer, more indulgent taste. Alternatively, you can also sprinkle a handful of shredded cheese on top before serving.

        Additional toppings (optional): What to add to mashed potatoes for flavor, you ask? There are lots of options that pair well with this pliable mashed yellow potatoes recipe. Some of my favorite toppings include fresh herbs, green onions, and turkey bacon. A true Epicurean upgrade: drizzle some truffle oil on top before serving!

        How to Make Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes?

        The steps to prepare my signature creamy Yukon gold mashed potatoes are quite straightforward. I have tested this recipe more times than I can count.

        So, if you follow along below, you’ll end up with golden mashed potatoes that disappear faster than any other side dish on the table.

        A collage of images showing how to make mashed potatoes with gold potatoes.

        Step 1 – Boil the cubed yellow potatoes: Fill a large pan with cubed potatoes and enough cold water to cover them by about an inch. Stir in 1 tablespoon of kosher salt and bring it to a boil on medium-high heat.

        Starting with cold water helps the potatoes cook evenly from the inside out.

        Step 2 – Cook the potatoes until fork tender: In my testing, I found that it took about 15-20 minutes to reach the desired consistency when the potatoes were cut into even 1-inch cubes.

        You can check doneness by inserting a sharp knife into a potato. If it comes in and out easily, the golden potatoes are done.

        Step 3 – Drain the potatoes: Then return the warm potatoes to the pot.

        Step 4 – Warm your milk and butter: While the gold potatoes are cooking, place your milk, fresh (or roasted) garlic, and butter in a saucepan and heat on medium-low heat until the butter is melted and the milk is warmed. There is no need to bring it to a boil; you just don’t want to be using cold ingredients.

        A collage of photos showing how to mash yellow potatoes after they are cooked.

        Step 5 – Add the warmed milk mixture to the pan: Combine the milk mixture with the drained potatoes and lightly mash to combine. You want to move fast here so you can take advantage of the residual heat from potatoes to help you mash easily and reach to that creamy consistency.

        Step 6 – Add the sour cream and season: Then continue mashing to your desired consistency. Season your mashed gold potatoes with a sprinkle of kosher salt and pepper to your desired taste.

        Transfer it into a serving bowl and add more butter on top, if preferred. 

        How To Make Ahead, Store, Reheat, and Freeze Leftovers

        Do you have a lot to do for an upcoming brunch or a holiday dinner and would like to make ahead Yukon gold mashed potatoes to save time on the big day? Here are the instructions to do so: 

        • Make Ahead: I recommend making these potatoes no more than a day in advance for optimal freshness. Simply make a batch, bring to room temperature, and store in an airtight container in the fridge.
        • Storage Instructions: To store, let the golden mashed potatoes cool to room temperature, place them in an oven-safe baking dish (for easy reheating) or airtight container, cover them with stretch film, and place them in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.
        • Freezing & Thawing Instructions: I don’t recommend that you freeze any leftovers, as freezing fundamentally changes the consistency and flavor. If you have leftovers, I recommend that you refrigerate them and then form them into potato “pancakes” to fry in the skillet for a creative brunch the following day. 
        • Reheating: You can reheat your yellow mashed potatoes in a low-heat (300 degrees F) oven for 10-15 minutes (or until warmed thoroughly), making sure to stir them a few times for even reheating. If you’re making this recipe for a holiday dinner, pop them in the oven after your turkey or ham comes out to take advantage of an already-warm oven. 
        Mashed Yukon gold potatoes in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes Recipe

        These Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes are easy to make, unbelievably creamy and fluffy, and ready in 30 minutes. A timeless American side dish, whipped Yukon gold potatoes literally go with anything, making them an all-around crowd-pleaser for all year round.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 20 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 257kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 pounds Yukon gold potatoes peeled* and cut into 1-inch cubes
        • 1 tablespoon Kosher salt plus more for seasoning
        • ¾ cup whole milk or half and half or heavy cream
        • 3 cloves garlic minced
        • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter
        • ¼ cup sour cream or Greek yogurt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper or white pepper
        • 1 teaspoon fresh herbs such as chives or parsley chopped – optional

        Instructions

        • Fill a large pan with cold water and add the cubed potatoes, making sure the potatoes are fully submerged. Stir in 1 tablespoon kosher salt and bring it to a boil on medium-high heat.
        • Cook the potatoes until tender, 15-20 minutes. You can check doneness by inserting a sharp knife into a potato. If it comes in and out easily, they are ready to go. Drain the potatoes and return them to the pot.
        • While the potatoes are cooking, place milk, garlic, and butter in a saucepan and heat on medium-low until the butter is melted and the milk is warmed—there is no need to bring it to a boil.
        • Add the warmed milk mixture into the pan containing the now drained potatoes and lightly mash* to combine.
        • Add the sour cream and mash all of it to your desired consistency.
        • Season with salt and pepper to your desired taste.
        • Transfer into a serving bowl, sprinkle with fresh herbs and add more butter on top, if preferred. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 1/2 to 3 cups of mashed potatoes, ideal for serving six as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can double the recipe.
        • Should I peel the potatoes? When it comes to peeling, Yukon Gold mashed potatoes offer flexibility. Unlike Russet potatoes, golden potatoes can be used with or without their skin. For the creamiest texture, peel the potatoes before mashing. If you prefer a more rustic flavor or are using baby potatoes, leaving the skin on works perfectly, too. Just note that it will add a slightly earthier texture and taste.
        • Tools: I recommend using a hand masher for mashing potatoes, but a food mill or potato ricer can also be used. I do not recommend using a food processor or blender for mashing as you’ll end up with a gooey texture.
        • Make ahead, storage and reheating: This recipe can be made a day ahead. To store, let it cool down, place it in an airtight container, and store it in the fridge. Reheat in a preheated 325-degree oven for 10 minutes or until warmed through.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 257kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 39mg | Sodium: 1188mg | Potassium: 705mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 464IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 73mg | Iron: 1mg

        FAQs

        How long do you boil Yukon gold potatoes for mashed potatoes?

        If you boil cubed potatoes, it should take about 15-20 minutes for them to cook. If you would rather boil the gold potatoes whole, then expect them to take around 25-30 minutes to reach doneness.

        Do you peel Yukon gold potatoes for mashed potatoes?

        Whether or not you go for skin-on Yukon gold mashed potatoes is a personal preference. Choosing not to peel your potatoes will give them an earthier vibe, in both consistency and appearance. Peeling simply makes for a smoother end product, creamy in both color and texture.

        How to season mashed potatoes?

        If you’re looking to elevate this recipe, then selecting the right mashed potato seasoning beyond the basic salt, pepper, and butter will do the trick. Some ideas include: Fresh herbs such as rosemary and sage; dried herbs like nutmeg; Dijon mustard for some tanginess; truffle oil or olive oil for a more gourmet feel; or even cheese (Parmesan, cheddar, or cream cheese) to bring out the richness of the potatoes.

        Why are my mashed potatoes gummy & how to fix it?

        If you have ended up with mashed potatoes that are gluey or gummy in texture, it simply means that the starch has gotten overworked or your ingredients were too cold. I recommend that you try folding in a little warm milk, cream, or melted butter to loosen them.

        What can I do with leftover mashed potatoes?

        You can use them to top a shepherd’s pie, stir them into soups to make them creamier, or even freeze them for later. For a quick meal, reheat them and serve with roasted vegetables or a fried egg on top.

        Expert Tips for Mashed Golden Potatoes

        This recipe is intentionally uncomplicated and will be accessible for any home cook. Here are a few additional tips to ensure this Yukon gold mashed potatoes recipe comes out perfectly for you, every time you make it:

        • Check the doneness of your potatoes before draining them: You want to make sure that they are cooked throughout and not still hard at their center. When you think they may be done, insert a sharp knife in their center. If it slides in easily, they are done and ready to be drained from the boiling water.
        • Make sure you have the best tools for mashing: How much you mash your yellow potatoes depends on the consistency you prefer. You don’t want to use a food processor or a blender, as that will result in overworking the starch, which leads to gummy mashed potatoes. My favorite tool is a potato masher, but a food mill or a potato ricer would also work well to achieve a creamy, smooth texture.
        • Warm your milk and butter mixture before adding them: We aren’t cooking these ingredients, but rather warming them. This step is essential because using cold milk and butter can lead to a gummy texture. Warming the mixture will give you creamy, smooth Yukon gold potato puree.
        • Drain well: No one wants watery mashed potatoes, and usually, the leftover excess water from boiling is the reason why this happens. Therefore, it is imperative to drain them well. I also let the potatoes sit in the hot pot for a minute after draining to let the remaining water evaporate.

        What To Serve the Best Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes With?

        This recipe is so adaptable—it tastes great with just about everything! In fact, it is among my top Thanksgiving veggie sides, year after year. Here are a couple of ideas to assist you as you plan your upcoming meals, whether it’s for the holidays, a weeknight dinner, or some other special feast:

        • Meat: Is there any comfort food combo more well-known than meat and potatoes? If you’d like to complement your next meat main with this easy potato recipe, I recommend you check out my Pot Roast recipe, my Reverse Sear Prime Rib, or my Filet Mignon
        • Turkey: No Thanksgiving meal is complete without turkey and mashed potatoes, right? If you’re cooking for the big holiday, this recipe will be divine with my Herb Roasted Turkey. Or, if you’re looking for a weeknight dinner throughout the rest of the year, I recommend that you pair it with my Turkey Meatloaf recipe
        • Chicken: Serve it with my Marry Me Chicken or Chicken Fricassee for an easy yet simple weeknight dinner.

        Other Potato Recipes You Might Like

        Over the years of writing this blog, I have shared many potato dishes, from holiday-worthy potato recipes to easy weeknight mashed potatoes, so if you love potatoes as much as I do below are a few others I hand-picked for you:

        • If you want something still as creamy but with a herby touch, my Rosemary Mashed Potatoes are a bit more elevated, while just as fluffy and creamy.
        • My Muffin Tin Potatoes turn simple ingredients like Russet potatoes, garlic, and Parmesan into mini potato stacks that bake up golden and crisp on the edges. 
        • If you love crispy and golden potatoes, try my Smashed Fingerling Potatoes. They have the crunchiest exterior and buttery, melt-in-your-mouth center. 
        • And if you are a fan of the classics, my Red Skin Potato Salad is creamy, tangy, and full of bacon bits, dill, and pickles. A go-to side for summer BBQs and picnics.
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/yukon-gold-mashed-potatoes/feed/ 2
        Mont Blanc Dessert https://foolproofliving.com/mont-blanc-dessert/ https://foolproofliving.com/mont-blanc-dessert/#respond Wed, 04 Dec 2024 17:54:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79170 If you’ve been looking for ideas for what to do with all of those chestnuts you’ve been roasting this holiday…]]>

        If you’ve been looking for ideas for what to do with all of those chestnuts you’ve been roasting this holiday season (or boiling, fire-roasting, or air frying, for that matter!), then this Mont Blanc recipe is your elegant, decadent answer to what to do with chestnuts.

        While it is a slightly more hands-on recipe than you may be used to here on Foolproof Living, we believe the finished chestnut mont blanc is well worth the effort. The combination of crisp meringue, sweetened cream, and the nutty notes in the chestnut puree is divine! 

        Chestnut mont blanc on a plate from the front view.

        Below, you will find everything you need to know, including step-by-step photos, equipment to use, and some time-saving tips to help make this Mont Blanc dessert recipe approachable and accessible for you to master as an at-home baker.

        What is Mont Blanc dessert made of? 

        Our recipe for Mont Blanc is split into three separate components. We’ve listed the ingredients needed for each part of the recipe below—each requires a short list of easy-to-find ingredients.

        Mont Blanc Meringue Ingredients:

        Ingredients from the top view.
        • Egg whites: You’ll need two large egg whites to make enough for ten individual servings of this French Mont Blanc dessert. It is best to separate the egg whites from the yolks when the eggs are cold—this will help you keep them out of whites, which is essential for a proper meringue. 
        • Cane sugar: We used natural cane sugar in this recipe, but you can also swap in coconut sugar or granulated sugar. 
        • White vinegar and cream of tartar: Both of these ingredients add acidity, which helps aerate the meringue structure quicker and greatly improves the structure. 
        • Vanilla extract: Just a touch adds sweetness and flavor to the meringue discs.

        Mont Blanc Chestnut Puree Ingredients:

        • Chestnuts: We’re using store-bought peeled and cooked chestnuts (affiliate link), which are readily available and reduce the preparation time by skipping the roasting and peeling of the chestnuts. But if you’d like to cook the chestnuts yourself, you can follow my recipes for roasted chestnuts in the oven, boiled chestnuts, air fried chestnuts, or roasting chestnuts on an open fire.
        • Milk: We used whole milk in this recipe and recommend sticking to full-fat dairy here rather than skim milk.
        • Kosher salt: Kosher’s granule size is key here, so we recommend not swapping in table salt. 
        • Cane sugar: We used natural cane sugar in this recipe, but you can also use coconut sugar or granulated sugar. 
        • Vanilla extract: If you’d like a richer flavor than extract, feel free to swap in half of a whole vanilla bean with the seeds scraped out. 

        Mont Blanc Whipped Cream Ingredients:

        Ingredients for the whipped cream from the top view.
        • Heavy cream: Both heavy cream and whipping cream can be used in this recipe. The cream must be cold to whip successfully, so we recommend removing it from the fridge right before using it.
        • Maple syrup: Two tablespoons is enough to sweeten the cream. Make sure to use proper maple syrup rather than maple flavoring—the taste is far superior and perfectly complements the chestnut flavors.
        • Vanilla extract and kosher salt: These two ingredients add flavor and balance to the whipped cream. 

        Mont Blanc Dessert Finishing Decor Ingredients (Optional):

        • Powdered (confectioners) sugar: Traditionally, Mont Blanc cake is dusted in powdered sugar over the top of the domed chestnut puree strands. The confectioner’s sugar adds sweetness, making this dessert resemble the highest snowy mountains in the Alps.
        • Edible gold leaf: It is optional, but if you’d like to add a pop of color to this decadent dessert, you can decorate the finished dessert with pieces of gold leaf (affiliate link).

        How To Make Mont Blanc Dessert?

        While the process below might look intimidating, we covered all the detailed steps to walk you through. After all, this is one of the most iconic chestnut desserts of all time, and we hope that after reviewing each component covered below, you will see that it is actually not that difficult.

        Make The Meringue

        Start by making mont blanc with the meringue as it takes the most amount of time. Below are the steps to making the meringue:

        1. Get your oven ready: Preheat your oven to 200 degrees F. (93 degrees C.) Line your baking sheet with parchment paper. 
        A collage of images showing how to make meringue for this chestnut dessert.
        1. Create a bain-marie: A bain-marie is essentially a double boiler, so if you have one, feel free to use it here. Otherwise, place a bowl over a pan of simmering water—just make sure the pan doesn’t touch the water. 
        2. Dissolve the sugar in warmed egg whites: Add the egg whites and sugar to the bowl and stir continuously with a rubber spatula. Scrape down the sides as you go to ensure all of the sugar is blended into the mixture. Keep stirring until the sugar has completely dissolved and no grains are left. You can test this by rubbing some mixture between your fingers, or when the mixture has reached 160 degrees F. (71 degrees C).
        3. Whisk the egg mixture: Add the egg white mixture to a stand mixer’s bowl and whisk until aerated. Then add the vanilla extract, cream of tartar, and vinegar. 
        4. Whip into peaks: Turn the speed up and whip the mixture until it’s cooled, voluminous, and glossy. When the whisk is lifted out, the mixture should stand in stiff peaks. 
        Person showing how to pipe meringue.
        1. Pipe the meringue: Spoon the meringue into a piping bag fitted with a large round tip (affiliate link). You can also cut the end off a ziplock bag, leaving a roughly 1” diameter hole—pipe ten meringue rounds onto a parchment paper-lined baking sheet. The discs should have a dome and be 2 inches or so in diameter. Use the back of a spoon to clean them up if necessary.
        2. Bake the meringues: Transfer the tray to the oven and bake for one and a half hours. Do not open the door at any point. When done, turn the oven off and let the meringues cool in the oven for a couple of hours. In the end, they should be fully cooled and crisp to the touch. 

        Make The Chesnut Puree

        It is best to make the chestnut puree while the meringues are baking. Below are the basic steps of making chestnut puree (also called chestnut vermicelli). You can learn more about it in our chestnut puree recipe if you need further information.

        1. Soften the chestnuts: Add chestnuts, milk, sugar, vanilla extract, and salt to a saucepan set over medium-high heat on the stovetop. Cook for 20-30 minutes or until the milk has reduced by half. Keep a close eye on it and stir it frequently. 
        2. Strain: Pass the mixture through a strainer, reserving the reduced milk mixture. Let the chestnuts and milk cool for 10 minutes. 
        Steps showing how to make chestnut cream in a food processor.
        1. Puree the chestnuts: Add the softened chestnuts to the bowl of a food processor along with ½ cup of the reserved milk mixture. Blend until a smooth puree is formed. Add more milk, if necessary, in one tablespoon increments until you have a perfectly smooth, pipeable consistency. 
        2. Pass the puree through a sieve: Since we’ll pass the puree through the piping tip to turn it into “vermicelli”, it is imperative that the puree have no lumps. Therefore, while it might come as an extra step, pressing it through a fine mesh sieve is best to produce a beautifully smooth chestnut puree. We’ll then cover it and let it rest at room temperature to cool completely.

        Make The Whipped Cream:

        While it is not traditional, we use our maple whipped cream for this chestnut Mont Blanc dessert recipe. That being said, if you want, you can use more of a traditional whipped cream made with confectioner sugar instead.

        A collage of images showing how to make whipped cream.
        1. Gather the ingredients: Add heavy cream, maple syrup, and salt to the bowl of your electric mixer fitted with the whisk attachment. 
        2. Whip the cream to firm peaks: Start whisking on low until the cream has soft peaks. Then, turn the mixer up to medium and continue to whisk until the cream forms a firm peak and holds its shape. 
        3. Cool: Refrigerate until ready to assemble your Mont Blanc.

        The Assembly

        A collage of images showing how to assemble French mont blanc dessert.
        1. Pipe cream onto meringues: Place the meringues onto a serving platter. Spoon the maple whipped cream into a piping bag fitted with a medium piping tip. Pipe dollops of cream onto the meringue. The shape of the meringue with cream on top should resemble a mountain’s peak. 
        2. Pipe on chestnut puree: Spoon the chestnut paste dessert into a piping bag fitted with a small piping tip (affiliate link) and pipe the puree around the whipped cream until the cream is completely covered. This is called chestnut vermicelli; how thin your piping tip is will determine the thickness of the strands. Don’t worry about them being perfect. Do your best to create the highest mountain you can. It is totally fine for it to look rustic.
        3. Decorate: Dust the top of the meringue liberally with powdered sugar (for white mountains) and decorate it with flakes of edible gold leaf, if preferred. Alternatively, sprinkle broken-up meringue (or grated chocolate) over the top. Serve immediately. 

        How To Make Ahead & Store?

        This is one of those recipes that definitely benefits from some pre-planning. Here are some helpful tips on how to prep & store the various elements.

        • Make Ahead: All three elements can be made a day before serving. Simply make the meringues the night before and let them cool in the oven overnight. You can make the chestnut puree and whipped cream a day in advance and store them in the refrigerator until you are ready to assemble this chestnut dessert. However, we recommend removing the chestnut puree and letting it come to room temperature before piping.
        • Storage: We recommend assembling your Mont Blanc desserts right before serving, as the meringue will soften and lose its crisp exterior quickly. If you’d like, you can store the separate components individually, though the completed dessert will not hold up.

        Expert Tips

        As far as dessert recipes with chestnuts go, this one is quite involved. However, if you’re excited to undertake this impressive French delicacy, then these Mont Blanc dessert tips and tricks will help you achieve a gorgeous final product:  

        • Use clean and dry equipment: This is one of the most important factors when making meringue. Your bowl, whisk, and utensils should be clean, dry, and grease-free. Any residue can inhibit the egg whites from whipping to the necessary voluminous peaks.
        • Go low and slow when baking meringue: Don’t be tempted to turn the oven up to speed up the process. The meringue will only brown and have a burnt taste. Baking them in a low-heat oven helps dry out the egg whites, resulting in the signature crisp shell meringues known for.
        • Process your puree for long enough: The chestnut puree must be smooth. Blend it in the food processor thoroughly, scraping the sides and base periodically. The piping tip used to create the chestnut vermicelli is so small that any lumps in the puree will get stuck in the tip when piping around the cream—a smooth, blended texture will avoid this frustration.
        • Chestnut Cream: While testing this recipe, we noticed that some versions incorporate store-bought chestnut cream (a popular brand is Clement Faugier) to thin out the puree. However, since chestnut cream can be hard to find in the US, we opted to make our own puree from scratch using only chestnuts.
        • Be patient when piping: Don’t rush the piping stage. Piping the chestnut puree is the main wow factor of this dessert. Start from the bottom and patiently go around the dome until fully covered. Also, remember that there’s no such thing as too messy. Snow-capped mountains are rustic!
        • Assemble the individual Mont Blanc desserts right before serving: This recipe is best eaten on the day it’s served. The meringue will soften from the moisture of the cream if left for too long. 
        • Turn it into a Mont Blanc cake (aka Gateau Mont Blanc): As we worked on this recipe, we found variations where bakers turned this chestnut paste dessert into individual cakes by placing the meringue, cream, and chestnut vermicelli over a sponge cake. If you want to go in that direction, bake a sponge cake, bring it to room temperature, and cut rounds using a round cookie cutter (no larger than the diameter of your meringue). To assemble, place the meringue, and whipped cream on top and then pipe the chestnut puree over, starting from the bottom and going around until you reach the top and the whole thing is covered with chestnut vermicelli.
        French chestnut dessert on a plate decorated with powdered sugar and edible gold leaf.

        FAQs

        What is a Mont Blanc dessert?

        Mont Blanc is a French dessert created in the 19th century in Paris. It’s made by layering a disc of meringue with a dome of cream. Strands of sweet chestnut puree encase the outside of the cream and are dusted in powdered sugar to create the visual effects of mountain peaks.

        What is the difference between Mont Blanc and Monte Bianco?

        Monte Bianco dessert is the Italian variation of Mont Blanc with a few minor differences. While both versions featured sweetened chestnut puree, the Italian version usually includes the addition of rum (or other liqueurs) and cocoa powder. 

        What does Mont Blanc taste like?

        Mont Blanch has a rich flavor profile, predominantly characterized by the earthy taste of sweetened chestnuts with a slightly buttery and nutty undertone. It is balanced with the mildly sweetened whipped cream and the crispy sweet meringue. The overall flavor is mildly sweet and luxurious chestnut dessert that celebrates the harmony of creamy textures and earthy autumnal flavors.

        Other Chestnut Recipes

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Mont blanc dessert on a small plate.
        Print

        Mont Blanc Dessert Recipe

        Chestnuts are the essence of holiday indulgence, and the Gateau Mont Blanc recipe is the perfect way to showcase their rich, nutty flavor. This elegant dessert features a crisp baked meringue base, topped with airy whipped cream and a delicate swirl of sweetened chestnut puree, finished with a dusting of powdered sugar.
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine French
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 45 minutes
        Cook Time 1 hour 30 minutes
        Chill time 30 minutes
        Total Time 2 hours 45 minutes
        Servings 10 servings
        Calories 210kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Meringue

        • 2 large egg whites at room temperature
        • 6 tablespoons cane sugar or granulated sugar
        • ½ tsp vanilla extract
        • ¼ tsp cream of tartar
        • ¼ tsp white distilled vinegar or lemon juice

        For The Chestnut Puree

        • 1 ½ cups chestnuts cooked peeled – storebought, or roast your own
        • 1 ½ cups whole milk
        • 2 tablespoons cane sugar or granulated or coconut sugar
        • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
        • Pinch kosher salt

        For The Maple Whipped Cream

        • 1 cup heavy cream cold
        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
        • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract or ½ vanilla bean (seeds scraped)
        • 1/8 teaspoon kosher salt

        To Decorate

        • ¼ cup powdered sugar
        • Edible gold leaf optional

        Instructions

        To Make The Meringue:

        • Preheat the oven to 200F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
        • On the stovetop, bring a saucepan with a few inches of water to a simmer. Add the egg whites and sugar into a clean metal or glass bowl and place it over the pan of water to make a double boiler. Be careful that the water does not touch the base of the bowl.
        • Using a rubber spatula, gently and continuously stir the egg whites and sugar mixture, scraping down the sides and bottom of the bowl. Stir until the egg whites are warmed throughly and the sugar crystals have dissolved. This takes about 4 to 6 minutes. Test this by rubbing some of the mixture between your thumb and forefinger. The mixture should be warm to the touch, and you should not feel any sugar grains. If you do, it needs a little longer. Alternatively, a temperature probe should read 160F (70C) for a more accurate reading.
        • Remove the bowl from the heat and pour the mixture into the clean bowl of a stand mixer fitted with a whisk attachment. Alternatively, use a handheld electric whisk. Whisk on medium to low until the egg whites are foamy. Add in the vanilla extract, cream of tartar, and vinegar.
        • Increase the speed to medium-high and whisk until the mixture has cooled significantly. The meringue should be voluminous and glossy, and when the whisk is removed, you should get stiff peaks.
        • Spoon the meringue into a piping bag fitted with a large plain piping tip, and pipe ten 2-inch round meringues* in a swirling motion so they end up approximately 1.5 inches tall on the tray in a cone shape. Once piped, you can use an offset spatula to clean them up, if necessary. With any remaining meringue, pipe little meringues that can be used as decoration or enjoyed separately.
        • Bake the meringues for 1 ½ hours or until they are crisp. Remove the tray from the oven and leave to cool thoroughly. Or, if you have the time, leave it in the oven to cool thoroughly.

        To Make The Chestnut Puree:

        • Add chestnuts, milk, sugar, vanilla extract, and salt to a saucepan set over medium-high heat on the stovetop.
        • Bring liquid to a boil, reduce heat, and simmer on medium to low heat, stirring occasionally, for 20-30 minutes or until the milk has reduced to 2/3 cup and the chestnuts are tender. Towards the end, stir more frequently to prevent the liquid from scorching on the base and to break up the chestnuts.
        • Place a mesh strainer over a bowl and strain the chestnuts from the liquid, keeping it for later. Allow the chestnuts and liquid to cool for ten minutes or so.
        • Transfer the semi-cooled chestnuts to the bowl of a food processor, adding ½ cup of the reserved liquid. Process until pureed, stopping and scraping down the base and sides a few times.
        • If necessary, add more of the reserved liquid (in one-tablespoon increments) until a smooth, pipeable consistency is achieved that will hold its shape.
        • Press the chestnut puree through a fine mesh sieve to remove any remaining lumps and ensure the puree is extra smooth. Cover until ready to assemble.

        To Make the Maple Whipped Cream:

        • Add all of the ingredients to the bowl of a stand mixer fitted with a whisk attachment. Whisk at medium-low speed until it reaches soft peaks, about 1 minute.
        • Increase the speed to medium and whip until firm peaks form. Cover and refrigerate until you are ready to assemble.

        To Assemble:

        • Arrange meringues onto a serving platter.
        • Spoon the chestnut puree into a piping bag fitted with a small plain piping tip. Set it aside.
        • Spoon whipped cream into a piping bag fitted with a medium plain piping tip.
        • Pipe whipped cream onto the meringue in a cone shape. Smooth the cream with a spatula, if necessary.
        • Pipe the chestnut puree around the whipped cream in overlapping circles, starting from the bottom and going around until the entire cone is covered.
        • When ready to serve, dust with powdered sugar and decorate with edible gold leaf, if preferred.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 10 chestnut mont blancs. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • *Helpful guide: If you are new to making meringue, you can use a small glass or bowl 2 inches in diameter and draw around it on the parchment paper to guide you through. Just be sure to flip the paper over before piping. You should see the circles through the paper as you pipe the meringue.
        • Whipped Cream: We used our maple whipped cream to make sure that this recipe is naturally sweetened, but you can use any whipped cream recipe you like.
        • To Make Ahead: You can make all components of this recipe a day or two in advance, store them individually and assemble them right before serving.
        • Storing Leftovers: This is one dessert that doesn’t store well. Therefore, we recommend storing each component separately and assembling it right before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 210kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 31mg | Sodium: 61mg | Potassium: 215mg | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 415IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 70mg | Iron: 0.2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mont-blanc-dessert/feed/ 0
        Marron Glace Recipe (Candied Chestnuts) https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/#comments Wed, 04 Dec 2024 17:52:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79176 Humans have relished in candied chestnuts, or marron glacés, since the 16th century. Marron glacé (sometimes also referred to as…]]>

        Humans have relished in candied chestnuts, or marron glacés, since the 16th century. Marron glacé (sometimes also referred to as Marron Lyonnaise) originated in Northern Italy and France, where chestnuts thrive in the autumn and winter months. While preparing this French chestnut delicacy does take four days, the hands-on time is surprisingly minimal once your chestnuts are peeled.

        If you love roasting chestnuts in the oven or over an open fire but are looking to expand your chestnut repertoire, this European classic is a must-try. Yes, the prep time for this marrons glacés recipe may be a bit lengthy, but the process is straightforward and requires no advanced skills. Plus, making these candied chestnuts at home is far more budget-friendly than purchasing them at the store—without compromising that irresistible sweetness!

        Candied chestnuts in a gift box.

        What is marron glacé made of? The Ingredients List:

        Our recipe for candied chestnuts uses just four basic ingredients. However, the success of the end product will significantly depend on the quality of the ingredients you choose. 

        Below is everything you need to look for when buying them:

        Chestnuts:

        It is no secret that the chestnuts are the star ingredient in this recipe. When buying chestnuts, there are a few things to pay attention to:

        • Get the freshest chestnuts you can find: If possible, we recommend hand-selecting your chestnuts to ensure they are equal in size. Look for those that are plump, smooth, shiny, and without any blemishes or mold. Feel it between your fingers to ensure the skin is not dry. Once you’re back at home, one way to test freshness is to drop your chestnuts in a bowl of water. If any float, discard them, as they’re likely hollow inside the shell.
        • Not all chestnuts are created equal: In terms of chestnut variety, the French ‘marrons’ are superior in quality as they tend to be larger in size and more tender in texture. However, it’s hard to find them here in the US. A great alternative is Italian chestnuts, sold at national supermarkets like Whole Foods and Trader Joe’s during the holiday season. For this recipe, we recommend avoiding Chinese chestnuts. While they tend to be cheaper, we find them more challenging to peel.
        • Store-bought pre-cooked and peeled chestnuts are a great shortcut: If you’re short on time or don’t have access to fresh chestnuts, you can buy them (affiliate link) from the store. One important thing to remember is you need to ensure that the only ingredient used is chestnuts. Store-bought, already-sweetened chestnuts won’t work in this recipe. 
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        For The Syrup:

        • Water: You need a ratio of 1 part water to 1 part sugar to make the sugar syrup the peeled chestnuts soak in.
        • Vanilla Bean: Use a whole vanilla pod sliced in half to flavor the sugar syrup. The vanilla beans infuse into the syrup for maximum flavor. We advise you against using vanilla extract if you can avoid it. While it won’t ruin the recipe, we found that much of it evaporates along with the water as the syrup reduces.
        • Sugar: Since we do our best to use natural sugars in our recipes, we sweetened the syrup with cane sugar, but granulated white or brown sugar can also be used.

        How to Make Marron Glace?

        Below are the step-by-step instructions detailing the process of making glazed chestnuts. At first glance, the process might look intimidating, but once you’re done with boiling and peeling the chestnuts, the rest will take no more than 5 minutes a day.

        If you’re new to boiling chestnuts, we recommend you first review our guide on How To Boil Chestnuts, as we go into all the nitty gritty details there.

        1. Score the chestnuts: Use a small, sharp knife (or a paring knife, chestnut knife, or a sharp serrated knife) to score a cross outside the shell, right across the middle or “belly” of the chestnuts. Turn it 90 degrees and cut another one, creating an X. Don’t go too deep with your cuts—you want to pierce through the outer shell and the inner fuzzy skin, but do your best not to cut through the flesh too much.
        2. Boil the chestnuts in water: Place two cups of cold water into a medium-sized saucepan and boil over medium heat. Carefully drop the chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for 15-20 minutes. Towards the end, you’ll see the cut part start opening up as they cook, revealing the fuzzy skin on the inside. To check for doneness, carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow flesh is fully cooked. If the pulp is soft and creamy, it is cooked. Remove the pan from the heat once they are all (mostly) open.
        Person peeling chestnuts and images showing sugar syrup.
        1. Peel your chestnuts while they are still warm: Carefully remove chestnuts one at a time from the hot water and hold them using a clean dish towel if they’re too hot. Using a sharp knife, peel off the shell and fuzzy skin underneath. If you’re having difficulty removing it, place it back in hot water for a few more minutes.
        2. Make the sugar syrup: Place the chestnuts in a colander and rinse them under cool water. Add the sugar and water to a saucepan and bring to a simmer. Stir continuously until the sugar is fully dissolved. Continue simmering for another five minutes until the sugar syrup turns golden brown. If you are using granulated sugar, the syrup should remain clear.
        Chestnuts in sugar syrup with vanilla bean.
        1. Cook the chestnuts in the sugar syrup: Add the chestnuts and halved vanilla bean into the syrup. Simmer your marrons in syrup for 10 minutes while stirring gently, being careful not to break up the chestnuts. 
        2. Set aside for 24 hours: After 10 minutes, take the saucepan off the heat, put the lid on, and let it sit on the counter for 24 hours. The chestnuts will cool down in the syrup and soak up some of the liquid as they rest.
        3. Cook the chestnuts in syrup a second time: The next day, place the saucepan back on the stovetop and gently heat the syrup until it is simmering. Continue to simmer for another 3 minutes. Remove from the heat, place the lid back on, and set aside to cool.
        Marron glaces drying on a wire rack.
        1. Cook the chestnuts in syrup two more times: Repeat the process of cooking the chestnuts in syrup two more times, waiting 24 hours between each time.
        2. Place chestnuts on a wire rack: After the 4th and final round of simmering in syrup, using a slotted spoon, remove the chestnuts one at a time, draining off excess liquid. Place them onto a baking tray fitted with a wire rack. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts one by one and spread them evenly on the wire rack. Make sure you lift out any little bits that may have broken off.
        3. Dry out the chestnuts in the oven: Preheat the oven to 120F (or as low as it will go) and place the chestnut tray in it. Cook the chestnuts for an hour. Remove the tray from the oven if the nuts have dried and hardened. If they’re still a bit sticky, prop the oven door open and leave the tray inside until thoroughly dried out. 
        4. Serve your marrons glaces: This French confection took effort to make and thus deserves a presentation worthy of your efforts! The best way to serve them is to individually wrap the chestnuts in parchment paper, paper cases, or place them in mini cupcake liners (affiliate link). 

        How To Store and Freeze Candied Chestnuts?

        • To store: Wrap each candied chestnut individually in parchment paper. Place in a sealed container and refrigerate for up to a week.
        • To freeze: Store the individually wrapped chestnuts in an airtight container and freeze for up to 1 month. Defrost at room temperature.

        Ways To Use Marron Glaces

        This candied chestnut recipe is incredibly versatile. Once you’ve made your marrons glacés, there are many ways to enjoy these delicacies:

        • Dessert: Make a Coupe Marron. This is a French classic that, I think, is worthy of your caramelized chestnuts. Add a scoop of vanilla ice cream to a tall glass, add your candied chestnuts, and then top it with a spoonful of whipped cream. It’s a simple yet decadent dessert, perfect for holiday entertaining.
        • Breakfast: Crumble marrons glacés over your favorite oatmeal, porridge, granola, or stack of pancakes
        • Meat and Cheese Board: Adding a sweet element to a cheese and charcuterie board is perfect alongside savory bites. The nutty, sweet earthiness from these chestnuts makes a beautiful, elevated addition to your serving platter.

        Expert Tips

        While making this glazed chestnuts recipe is fairly simple, there are a few important details to remember. Here are some helpful tips we’ve learned along the way to ensure your first attempt is a success:

        • Patience is key when scoring and peeling chestnuts: Take your time to carefully score the outer shell and fuzzy skin, aiming to pierce the skin without cutting too deeply into the flesh. Once cooked, peel the chestnuts while they’re still hot, as the skin becomes much harder to remove once they cool. Keep a paring knife nearby to help with any stubborn bits of skin that get stuck in the folds of the chestnut.
        • Save the broken pieces: Store them in a jar; they will taste just as good. Use them as a topping for ice cream or oatmeal.
        • Heat the syrup gently: Keep the sugar syrup at a gentle simmer rather than letting it boil. Also, it is best to stir regularly to prevent the chestnuts from sticking to the bottom of the pan and ensure they’re evenly coated throughout the whole process.
        • Watch the sugar syrup level: Towards the end, if your syrup reduces too much, the chestnuts will start sticking to the bottom of the saucepan. If that happens, feel free to add a small amount of water (¼ cup or less) to thin it out and maintain consistency.
        • Keep the sugar syrup: Don’t discard the syrup after removing the chestnuts. Pass it through a sieve and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. It’s a great alternative to maple syrup. I love it when poured into cocktails and drizzled over oatmeal and ice cream.
        Candied chestnuts on a plate.

        FAQs

        What is marron glacé in English?

        In English, marron glacé translates to candied chestnuts. It is a French candy made by simmering chestnuts in a sugar syrup until they become tender and coated with a glossy, sugary glaze.

        What do marrons glacés taste like?

        Marrons glacés are sweet through the center with a hard, sugared exterior and tender, nutty, sweet-tasting flesh.

        Why are candied chestnuts so expensive?

        Marron glacé is expensive because making them is labor-intensive and time-consuming. Each chestnut must be carefully scored, peeled, and cooked in sugar syrup over several days, requiring precision and attention to detail. Additionally, high-quality chestnuts add to the cost, making it a luxury treat.

        Other Chestnut Recipes

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Marron Glace (Candied chestnuts) on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Marron Glace Recipe (Candied Chestnuts)

        Marron Glacé, or candied chestnuts, are a luxurious French treat you can make at home. Sweet, nutty, and delicious, but cheaper than store-bought yet just as decadent!
        Course Dessert, Snack
        Cuisine French
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 1 hour
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Resting/cooling time 4 days
        Total Time 4 days 1 hour 15 minutes
        Servings 12 servings
        Calories 240kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 ½ lbs fresh chestnuts should give you 1.25lb/570g when peeled
        • 2 cups water more to boil chestnuts
        • 2 cups cane sugar or granulated sugar
        • 1 vanilla bean cut in half lengthwise

        Instructions

        • Place the chestnut on a cutting board flat side down. Hold it firmly between your index finger and thumb and make a horizontal slit and then turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut forming an “X.” Make sure to score through the hard outer shell and the fuzzy skin underneath. Do your best not to cut any deeper into the chestnut flesh. Repeat the same process for all of the chestnuts.
        • Fill a saucepan with cold water and bring it to a boil. Carefully place the chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for 15-20 minutes. The cut part will start opening up as they cook, revealing the fuzzy skin on the inside. To check for doneness, carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow flesh is fully cooked. If the pulp is soft and creamy, it is cooked. Remove the pan from the heat once they are all (mostly) open.
        • Using a slotted spoon, remove one to two chestnuts at a time, as they will be hot. If needed, use a kitchen towel to protect your hands. Carefully peel away the hard outer shell and the fuzzy inner skin, taking care not to break the chestnut. If the fuzzy skin is stuck in the folds of the chestnut, use the tip of a knife or a toothpick to remove it. If the skin is stubborn, return the chestnuts to the hot water for a minute to loosen it, then try peeling again. Once done, you can discard the shells, skins, and cooking water.
        • Place the now-boiled chestnuts into a colander and give them a quick rinse. Set aside.
        • To make the sugar syrup, add 2 cups of water and sugar to a medium-sized saucepan and bring it to a simmer over medium heat. Stir it continuously until the sugar dissolves. This should take no more than 7-9 minutes.
        • Carefully add the vanilla bean and chestnuts to the sugar syrup. Let them simmer for 10 minutes, stirring once every 2-3 minutes.
        • Turn the heat off. Carefully remove the vanilla bean and discard it. Put the lid on and let it sit at temperature for 24 hours.
        • After 24 hours, return the pan to the stove and bring the sugar syrup to a simmer, cooking the chestnuts for 3 minutes. Stir the syrup and chestnuts every few seconds to keep them from sticking to the pan. Once again, remove the pan from the heat, cover with a lid, and set aside at room temperature for 24 hours.
        • Repeat this process twice, heating and cooling every 24 hours (it should be 4 times in total).
        • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and place a wire rack over it. Preheat the oven to 120F (or as low as your oven can go.)
        • After the final time, carefully remove them one at a time with a slotted spoon. Let the syrup drip off as much as possible. Spread the chestnuts on the wire rack.
        • Transfer the baking sheet to the preheated oven. Bake low and slow for 1 hour*. The chestnuts should be dry and hardened on the outside. If they’re still sticky, turn the oven off, open the door, and leave the chestnuts to continue drying inside.
        • To serve, individually wrap the chestnuts in parchment paper or cellophane or place them in mini cupcake liners. Gift and/or enjoy.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 18-20 candied chestnuts, depending on the size of your chestnuts. I listed the serving as 10 (2 per person) and the nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Short on time? If you are planning to gift these candied chestnuts and make a bigger batch, you can save time by buying already cooked and peeled chestnuts. Just make sure that the only ingredient listed on the packaging is chestnuts.
        • Heat the syrup gently: As you warm up the sugar syrup, keep the sugar syrup at a gentle simmer rather than letting it boil. Also, it is best to stir regularly to prevent the chestnuts from sticking to the bottom of the pan and ensure they’re evenly coated throughout the whole process.
        • To store: Wrap each candied chestnut individually in parchment paper or mini cupcake liners. Place in a sealed container and refrigerate for up to a week. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 240kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 275mg | Sugar: 33g | Vitamin A: 15IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/feed/ 2
        45+ Thanksgiving Vegetable Sides https://foolproofliving.com/2017-thanksgiving-recipe-round-up/ https://foolproofliving.com/2017-thanksgiving-recipe-round-up/#comments Thu, 14 Nov 2024 02:57:33 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15416 Consider this your hub for vegetable ideas for Thanksgiving dinner. Whether you need fancy vegetable dishes worthy of your elegant…]]>

        Consider this your hub for vegetable ideas for Thanksgiving dinner. Whether you need fancy vegetable dishes worthy of your elegant holiday table, or if easy, make-ahead recipes for a low-key Friendsgiving are more your speed, you can find it all here.

        Grab a mug of tea and let’s map out your Thanksgiving day menu together. And rest assured—every recipe below is foolproof, big on flavor, and the perfect addition to complement the “gobble-gobble” star of the show. Without further ado, we present to you our best Thanksgiving vegetable recipes:

        A collage of images showing side vegetables for Thanksgiving dinner.

        If you adore a classic holiday table, then the recipes in this section will be your go-to vegetable sides for your Thanksgiving menu. These holiday veggie side dishes are our most popular for a reason: they’re timeless crowd-pleasers that everyone asks for, year after year.

        Sweet potato casserole and green bean casserole side by side.
        • Green Bean Casserole: You cannot serve vegetable casseroles for Thanksgiving dinner without including this signature green bean side dish. Our recipe foregoes the canned condensed soup and gives you a new, made-from-scratch way to add that umami flavor. This is also one of those vegetable side dishes that you can make ahead to better streamline your Thanksgiving day cooking schedule. 
        • Trisha Yearwood’s Sweet Potato Souffle: Also known as a sweet potato casserole, this Southern-style sweet potato souffle is one of our best Thanksgiving veggie recipes. The pecan topping is far superior to the more traditional marshmallow topping. This elevated Thanksgiving side will have everyone going back for seconds. 
        • Roasted Butternut Squash: Nothing smells like fall more than the scent of butternut squash roasting in the oven. Butternut squash pairs well alongside with any turkey recipe, but my favorite one is our roasted turkey tenderloin recipe, especially if I am serving a smaller crowd.
        • Roasted Delicata Squash Rings: Easy to prepare yet elegant in appearance, the delicate skin on this squash allows you to roast it whole, without removing the skin. The mild, nutty flavor can be enhanced on the plate with a drizzle of the sweet & sour “agrodolce” sauce you’ll find in this holiday vegetable recipe.
        Two vegetarian sides for Thanksgiving in a collage.
        • Make Ahead Roasted Carrots: Colorful carrots caramelized with maple syrup to perfection; these are one of those side vegetables that bring both a sweet and savory flavor combo. This simple carrot recipe tastes anything but. And, as a bonus, it is easy to make ahead of Thanksgiving day.
        • Vegan Stuffed Acorn Squash: This is one of those great vegetable sides that can also double as a main dish for any vegetarians/vegans at your holiday table. Stuffed with nutty quinoa, this hearty side dish packs in extra fall flavor with apples, cranberries, and pecans.
        • Baked Acorn Squash Slices: Acorn squash is another beautiful addition to your holiday feast. This recipe’s special touch? A maple syrup and cinnamon mixture that complements the nutty, buttery flavors of the squash. It’s a good vegetable dish for Thanksgiving that brings in natural sweetness to balance out the other more savory dishes.
        Harvest salad and cranberry sauce side by side.
        • Maple Syrup Cranberry Sauce: You’re making your Turkey Gravy homemade, so there’s no reason you should be serving your cranberry sauce from a can either! This recipe couldn’t be easier to make ahead. It’s naturally sweetened, warmly spiced, healthy, and vegan. Trust us—once you go homemade, you’ll never go back.
        • Harvest Salad: A well-balanced holiday meal calls for some crunch and this fall-inspired salad truly delivers. Packed with colorful fruits and vegetables, its festive appearance and surprisingly complex flavor profile will have even the pickiest eaters making room for salad first. 
        • Wild Rice Pilaf: While most people tend to think of potatoes as their go-to carb-centric Thanksgiving side dish, wild rice pilaf is a refined alternative to pair with your more gourmet vegetable side dishes. This recipe is a welcome addition if you’re curating a special Thanksgiving menu geared towards foodies.
        • Garlic Roasted Cauliflower: If you’d like to add some easy vegetable dishes for Thanksgiving that are lower in carbs to your holiday menu, then cauliflower is your superstar. Parmesan cheese and fresh garlic give this veggie side a savory profile that could easily take the place of traditional mashed potatoes alongside your Herb Roasted Turkey main dish. 
        • Balsamic Brussels Sprouts: Crispy, yet tender, these Brussels sprouts are roasted with a maple balsamic glaze and look like one of the fancier veggie side dishes on your holiday table. Expert tip: Don’t skip the toppings for extra crunch and sweetness.
        • Butternut Squash Quinoa Salad: Colorful, tasty, and oh-so-delicious, this roasted butternut squash dish is one of the most popular holiday favorites on this website. Packed with hearty cooked quinoa and chopped cranberries and drizzled with homemade balsamic vinaigrette, it is a make-ahead recipe that is guaranteed to impress.

        Green Vegetables for Thanksgiving Dinner

        With all of the decadent holiday menu items you’ll be serving, adding some greens for Thanksgiving dinner is always a good idea. Here are a few good vegetable side dishes for you to incorporate that include green veggies:

        Green side dishes for Thanksgiving dinner.
        • Butter Garlic Green Beans: If you’re skipping the green bean casserole this year and are looking for alternative Thanksgiving dinner vegetable recipes that include green beans, this side dish will delight your palate. Between the rich butter and the smoky garlic, you’ll be swooning over these tender green beans. 
        • Sauteed Asparagus and Mushrooms: Looking for Thanksgiving dinner vegetables that are a match made in heaven? Here is your crowd-pleasing duo. The flavors and consistency of asparagus and mushrooms pair perfectly together in this recipe and adapt well to everything else on your holiday plate.
        • Pan Sauteed Asparagus: These bright green asparagus spears add a pop of color to your plates and are easily prepared in under 10 minutes. They’re pan-seared in a little bit of butter, giving them a decadent yet plenty of flavor.
        • Baked Asparagus: When it comes to great vegetable recipes for Thanksgiving, you do not need to get complicated. This baked asparagus veggie side dish is simple and healthy. The fresh flavor is an excellent balance to the more indulgent items being served.

        Potato Vegetable Sides for Thanksgiving

        Let’s be real, Thanksgiving wouldn’t be Thanksgiving without the humble potato. Whether you like them mashed, smashed, or deviled, we have a recipe to meet your holiday menu planning needs. 

        Pick one from the recipes below or check out my collection of Holiday Potato Side Dishes for more inspiration.

        Mashed potatoes and potato roses side by side.
        • Garlic Rosemary Mashed Potatoes: Mashed potatoes are a classic Thanksgiving veggie side, and this recipe will ensure yours are incredibly fluffy, butter-y, and melt in your mouth delicious. The addition of rosemary is the best part; you will be surprised by how much this aromatic herb elevates this side dish.
        • Bacon Potato Roses: Have guests at your holiday table that you would like to impress? This is the best Thanksgiving vegetable dish when presentation matters. These potato roses are wrapped in bacon and add a visually stunning boost to the big feast.
        • Smashed Fingerlings: Fingerling potatoes, but make them crispy. This is one of those holiday veggie dishes that you make for Thanksgiving, then continue to make for every subsequent holiday throughout the year. They are that good.
        Deviled egg potato salad and muffin tin potatoes in a collage.
        • Muffin Tin Potatoes: Think of these as mini potato au gratin stacks. They’re a fun Thanksgiving dinner vegetable idea, particularly if you plan on individually plating your holiday meal for your guests. And the fresh thyme will fill your home with the cozy scent of autumn.
        • Deviled Egg Potato Salad: Deviled eggs? Yes. Potatoes? Yes. Together? YES. This salad is such a unique way to combine some of the most popular Thanksgiving side dishes into one unforgettable twist on classic potato salad. It’s also a great way to use leftover deviled eggs if you made far too many by (happy) accident.
        • Red Potato Salad: For those who like their salad less lettuce and more potato, we’ve got you covered. This classic potato salad includes crispy bacon bits, tender eggs, fresh dill, and briny pickles and gives you the cold holiday vegetable side dish you need to round out your Thanksgiving dinner.

        Sweet Potato Side Dishes

        Prefer sweet potatoes over traditional Yukon gold potatoes? Or perhaps you just like to offer a variety of potatoes to your holiday guests (we get it). Sweet potatoes are good vegetables for Thanksgiving—not only do they add color to the plate, but they also add a dimension of natural sweetness to all of the savory dishes being served. Here are a couple of our favorite sweet potato recipe to add to your turkey dinner:

        Sweet potato side dishes from the top view.
        • Sweet Potato Mash: In a mashed potato competition, we think you’d have a hard time deciding between traditional mashed potatoes and this sweet potato version. This is a creamy, dreamy vegetable side dish that only requires 7 ingredients and can be cooked completely on the stovetop (no oven required!).
        • Roasted Sweet Potato Salad with a Mediterranean Twist: Tired of serving the same roasted sweet potato dish every Thanksgiving? This vibrant salad offers a fresh and festive alternative to the traditional holiday sides. One recipe that I make every year! 
          Cubes of sweet potato are roasted with savory chickpeas, tossed with creamy feta, crunchy candied walnuts, and a bright lemon dressing, proving that this beloved root vegetable can absolutely take on a new, delicious Mediterranean twist.
        • Garlic Butter Sweet Potato Stacks: These are very similar to our Muffin Tin Potatoes recipe above, individually portioned and crispy, though the sweet potatoes make for a sweet + savory flavor combo that’s hard to resist. They are a playful way to sneak in vegetables at Thanksgiving that everyone will want on their plates. 
        • Roasted Sweet Potatoes and Brussels Sprouts: These two are another dazzling duo of Thanksgiving vegetables. Savory spices like paprika and cumin bring out their natural flavors and hold their own alongside the star of the show—the turkey.

        Vegetable Casseroles and Stuffing Recipes

        Few things are more American than a classic casserole side dish. Ditto stuffing for Thanksgiving dinner. Here are a few vegetable ideas for this Thanksgiving that deliver their goodness in a baking dish:

        Chestnut stuffing and wild rice stuffing side by side.
        • Chestnut Dressing: Did you know that while you can buy store-bought chestnuts, roasted chestnuts are an aromatic holiday treat when you make them at home? It may also come as a surprise to you that chestnuts are the base of a fabulous stuffing recipe, along with bread, onions, celery, fresh sage, and parsley. This is one of our favorite unique turkey day recipes that has the flexibility to be made vegetarian, if you prefer.
        • Wild Rice Turkey Stuffing: Looking for a gluten-free stuffing (or dressing) recipe? The wild rice blend and absence of bread make this stuffing gluten-free, plus it includes both fruits and vegetables for a holiday side dish that packs in all of the season’s signature flavors. 
        • Vegetarian Cornbread Dressing: If you love any opportunity to squeeze in more vegetables for Thanksgiving dinner, then you’ll love this veggie-packed, vegetarian-friendly version of Thanksgiving stuffing. This recipe isn’t made inside the turkey (but it can be, if preferred) and uses day-old jalapeno cheddar cornbread and green beans for a major pop of flavor.
        Cauliflower au gratin and wild rice mushroom stuffing side by side.
        • Mushroom Stuffing: Brioche bread is the star of the show in this vegetable side dish and we will let you in on a little secret—baking your own brioche is easier than you think and truly takes this dish to another level. The crisp exterior and creamy custard filling of this vegetarian stuffing make it one of our most popular Thanksgiving recipes for a reason.
        • Cauliflower Gratin: This feels far more decadent than it is, considering the base of the recipe is cauliflower. It’s a win-win! It is also one of those easy Thanksgiving veggie dishes that can be made ahead, saving you precious time on turkey day.
        • Cheesy Broccoli Casserole: When it comes to good vegetable sides for Thanksgiving, our list wouldn’t be complete without some form of broccoli with cheese. The crispy fried onions on top are the real showstopper of this classic casserole side dish. 

        Salad Recipes as Side Dishes

        Our best Thanksgiving veggie side dishes wouldn’t be complete without a section of fall salad recipes. While some people debate that there’s no room for salads with such a huge Thanksgiving dinner on the horizon, we believe the opposite is true. 

        Not only are these salads a fresh start to a heavy meal, they are also wildly complex in flavor and delicious in their own right. These are holiday side dishes that satisfy just as much as the rest on this list.

        Two salad side dishes side by side.
        • Roasted Pear Salad: The radiant homemade lemon vinaigrette in this recipe takes the warm maple roasted pears up a notch for a salad that feels wonderfully fresh and not too filling as a starter. Combining fruits and vegetables for Thanksgiving is one of our secrets for a balanced holiday flavor profile. 
        • Acorn Squash Salad: This salad is the epitome of fall, combining roasted acorn squash with arugula, pepitas, and cranberries. The salad is then topped off with creamy goat cheese and pomegranate seeds, for a balance of textures and a beautifully colorful presentation.
        • Shaved Brussels Sprout Salad: You can also think of this salad as a type of slaw. The shredded consistency of the shaved Brussels sprouts pairs well with the apples, hazelnuts, dried cranberries, and goat cheese. It’s all dressed beautifully with a lemony vinaigrette whose balancing tang comes from shallots. 
        • Apple Salad with Raisins: Don’t let the simplicity of this apple salad fool you. Between the apples, raisins, red onion, and yogurt dressing, the complexity of this dish will make your taste buds perk up. It’s crisp and refreshing—the ideal light bite before a big Thanksgiving meal. 
        Roasted Beet salad and kale brussel sprout salad side by side.
        • Beet Salad with Goat Cheese: If you love to incorporate colorful vegetable side dishes onto your holiday table, then the bright beets in this fall salad will ensure your Thanksgiving meal is utterly Instagramable. Sweet beets, earthy greens, and crunchy walnuts make for a salad worthy of seconds.
        • Kale Salad with Avocado: This salad will turn any kale-hater into a kale lover. Once you learn how to ensure your greens are tender (thanks to gently massaging kale) and pair them with a ripe avocado and pine nuts, you’re in for an absolute veggie side dish holiday delight. 
        • Caesar Salad: Everyone loves a classic Caesar salad. If you need a crowd-pleaser of a Thanksgiving vegetable side dish, then this salad is your fail-safe. Our homemade traditional Caesar salad dressing and garlic croutons keep it simple and satisfying.
        • Brussels Sprout and Kale Salad: Leave it to kale to bring the crunch to your Thanksgiving dinner table. In this light + bright veggie side dish, crunchy almonds, tangy Dijon mustard dressing, and rich Parmesan cheese make the salad shine. 

        Air Fryer Veggies for Thanksgiving

        This Thanksgiving day hero—the versatile air fryer—may very well be deserving of a holiday medal. Not only does using the air fryer save you precious oven space, it also makes a bunch of great Thanksgiving vegetable side dishes a little bit healthier in the process.

        Air fried potatoes and butternut squash in a collage.
        • Fingerling Potatoes in Air Fryer: Our fingerling potatoes are seasoned to perfection and come out of the air fryer with crisp exteriors and soft, pillowy insides in less than 20 minutes. If you don’t plan on serving them as a vegetable side dish for the main Thanksgiving meal, their finger-food quality also makes them a perfect appetizer. 
        • Air Fried Butternut Squash: Thanksgiving dinner vegetable recipes always include this seasonal squash, but roasting it in the air fryer makes it just as tasty as in the oven, but in half the cooking time. 
        • Red Potatoes in Air Fryer: For those who aren’t a fan of mashed potatoes, these roasted red potatoes make for an excellent alternative (and taste delicious with a little Turkey Gravy (or even beef gravy) on the side, too!). And because they are air-fried rather than traditionally fried, you can add these to your list of healthy vegetable dishes—score!
        • Asparagus in Air Fryer: Who knew that asparagus could come out so tender, yet crispy, in the air fryer? Air-frying asparagus is a revelation—one your guests won’t be able to stop talking about. This is a great way to get in your holiday veggies without feeling like you’re being punished. Flavorful and fresh, you may not want to cook asparagus any other way after trying this. 
        Air fried asparagus and air fryer beets from the top view.
        • Air Fryer Green Beans: If you’ve only got 15 minutes to devote to your green beans, then this is one of the top veggie side dishes you need to add to your holiday menu. Follow our foolproof method to air fry fresh green beans and get a flavor-packed side that everyone will love.
        • Air Fryer Beets: This is the ultimate way to serve beets. Not only is it far quicker to roast them in the air fryer, the end result is sophisticated and rich. Beyond the taste, they look lovely on your holiday table.
        • Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves: If you need roasted butternut squash for use in another vegetable dish such as Butternut Squash Soup, then using an air fryer is a no-fuss, time-saving way to get tender, caramelized, and flavorful squash.

        You Might Also Like

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/2017-thanksgiving-recipe-round-up/feed/ 16
        Herb Roasted Turkey https://foolproofliving.com/herb-roasted-turkey/ https://foolproofliving.com/herb-roasted-turkey/#comments Sat, 09 Nov 2024 15:49:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78821 Ingredients Let’s break down the ingredients we need to make this herb turkey recipe, including the best herbs for turkey,…]]>
        Aysegul

        Growing up in Turkiye, the idea of roasting a massive turkey for Thanksgiving wasn’t part of our holiday traditions. I only learned the art of turkey-roasting much later, after moving to the U.S. over two decades ago. After countless holiday dinners and plenty of trial and error, I can confidently say I’ve mastered a truly foolproof method.

        This Herb Roasted Turkey recipe is now my absolute go-to. I wrote the recipe so that even if you didn’t grow up cooking or eating turkey, you’ll end up with a perfectly roasted, juicy bird every time.

        It follows a classic roasting technique but is elevated by a personal touch: a potent, homemade turkey rub that completely infuses the meat with incredible flavor.

        And because the meal isn’t complete without the final essential ingredient, I’ve also included my rich, foolproof gravy recipe. Because let’s face it, what’s roasted turkey without a rich, delicious gravy on the side?

        Roasted turkey with herbs and fruit around it from the top view.

        Ingredients

        Let’s break down the ingredients we need to make this herb turkey recipe, including the best herbs for turkey, whether using fresh or dried. Here’s what you’ll need:

        The ingredients for the recipe including the best herbs for turkey from the top view with text on the image.
        • Whole Turkey: Most grocery stores sell frozen turkeys throughout the year. As we were testing this recipe, we used a 12-pound bird, but as long as it is somewhere between 12-16 pounds, you would be fine. The most important thing is to make sure that it is fully thawed before the seasoning and roasting process.
        • Unsalted butter: I like to use unsalted butter to control the salt, taking a little inspiration from our Turkey Compound Butter and Turkey Injection Recipe, but salted butter can be used. With that said, ½ cup olive oil can be substituted.
        • Sugar: A small amount of brown sugar (or coconut sugar for a refined sugar-free alternative) helps with browning and caramelization of the skin.
        • Herbs for turkey: For a classic and aromatic flavor, we recommend using a blend of rosemary, thyme, and sage, which we think are the best fresh herbs for turkey. These herbs infuse your bird with a fragrant, savory taste, perfect for the holidays. You can use fresh or dried herbs. If you are using fresh herbs, be sure to chop them finely. For dried herbs, substitute 1 teaspoon of dried herbs for every 1 tablespoon of fresh. And if you want a done-for-you dried herbs blend, use our Turkey Seasoning Rub.
        • Other seasonings and spices: Besides the herb blend, we added more flavor with paprika (sweet or smoked), garlic powder, onion powder, Kosher salt, and black pepper. We found garlic powder blends better with the butter, but freshly minced garlic cloves can be used instead.
        • Vegetables: Our aromatics include a classic mirepoix (onions, carrots, celery) that adds flavor to the turkey and the pan juices.
        • Lemon: A whole lemon is used to flavor the turkey itself. Adhering the lemon half to the turkey skin is a technique we learned to keep the turkey skin in place during roasting. Just like we did in our roasted turkey breasts recipe, using a half lemon in the neck of the bird will help the skin remain in place without shrinking.
        • Stock: Use Turkey Stock or Chicken Stock, whichever you have on hand.

        How to Make Herb-Roasted Turkey

        Now, the fun begins! This recipe for herb roasted turkey is all about using fresh ingredients and the right technique to build delicious layers of flavor in the oven. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        A collage of images showing how to prepare turkey for roasting.
        1. Prep turkey: Remove the turkey from the fridge an hour beforehand. Place it on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper (for easy cleanup and to prevent cross-contamination). Pat turkey dry with paper towels on all sides.
        2. Preheat oven: Remove the top rack from the oven and place the other rack in the lowest position. Thirty minutes before roasting, preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. (232 C).
        3. Prepare the herbed butter: In a small bowl, combine the softened butter, brown sugar, fresh thyme leaves, fresh sage leaves, fresh rosemary, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, one tablespoon of Kosher salt, and 1 teaspoon of black pepper.
        4. Season turkey with herbs: Season the turkey’s cavity with the remaining Kosher salt and black pepper.
        5. Loosen the skin: Gently separate the top skin from the meat with your fingers. It is best to take your time as you are doing this while being careful not to tear the skin.
        A person seasoning the skin of turkey with fresh herbed butter mixture.
        1. Add butter under skin: Evenly spread 2 tablespoons of the butter and herb mixture underneath the skin.
        2. Spread butter over the skin: Distribute the remaining herb butter evenly throughout the turkey, including drumsticks, thighs, and breasts.
        3. Add vegetables: Place half of the celery, carrots, onion, half lemon, and fresh sprigs of thyme, sage, and rosemary inside the bird’s cavity.
        Herb butter turkey neck filled with half lemon.
        1. Finish with lemon: Place the other half of the lemon in the neck of the bird, round-cut, and side up. Pull the skin over and secure it with a toothpick.
        2. Prepare a large roasting pan: Add the remaining vegetables and pour one cup of stock into the bottom of the roasting pan.
        A collage of photos showing the steps for preparing herb roasted turkey.
        1. Add turkey to V rack: Transfer the turkey to a V-rack fitted inside the roasting pan (please read notes for what to do if you do not have a V-rack).
        2. Position wings and drumsticks: Tuck wing tips under and tie the legs with butcher twine.
        3. Add temperature probe: Insert the probe in the thickest part of the breast without touching the bone. (Please read the notes about what to do if you do not own a meat thermometer probe.)
        A collage of images showing how to roast Thanksgiving herbed turkey in the oven.
        1. Set temperature: Set the temperature to 155 degrees F (68 C) (more on this below).
        2. Roast turkey: Place the turkey in the oven and roast for 30 minutes. Then, reduce the oven temperature to 325 degrees F (163 C). Roast for 2 – 2 ½ hours, or until it reaches 155 degrees F. (see times, temp below)
        3. Baste turkey: Place the remaining two cups of stock in a small saucepan over low heat to keep it warm. Baste turkey every 30-45 minutes with a baster or large spoon.
        4. Tent with foil (if needed): If the turkey seems like it’s getting too brown during cooking, cover it with aluminum foil.
        5. Rest the turkey: When the turkey reaches temperature, remove it from the oven and tent it with foil for 30 minutes. Do not remove the temperature probe until you are ready to carve. It should reach the safe 165 degrees F (74 C) as it sits, which should happen in about 15-20 minutes. Transfer it to a cutting board and let it rest.
        6. Prepare gravy: While the turkey is resting, prepare your favorite gravy. The juices in the roasting pan will be a perfect addition to flavor! If you want a good recipe, follow our Turkey Gravy from Drippings.
        7. Serve: Garnish with colorful fruits (optional) or carve and serve to wow all your guests at the table!
        A woman serving roasted herb turkey in a roasting pan from the front view.

        How to Store and Reheat Leftovers?

        We all love Thanksgiving turkey leftovers and we don’t want all our efforts going to waste. Here are my best storage and reheating instructions:

        • Storage: Bring the leftovers of your herb rubbed turkey to room temperature. Transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • Reheat: Reheat the leftover turkey slices in a skillet over medium-low heat and splash in some chicken or turkey broth. Cover and gently simmer until warm, about 5-8 minutes. Alternatively, place them in a casserole dish along with a splash of broth and reheat them in a preheated low heat oven (300 degrees F) until warmed thoroughly.

        Serving Suggestions

        Need some menu inspiration to serve this perfectly roasted herbed turkey? You can pick from my collection of Thanksgiving Vegetable Sides or Holiday Potato Side Dishes or try one of the recipes I hand-picked below:

        More Roasted Turkey Recipes

        While the full roasted turkey is perfect for a big holiday feast, sometimes you’re hosting a smaller crowd or simply don’t want a ton of leftovers. The good news is, you don’t have to skip the turkey!

        • My Baked Turkey Wings recipe requires only 10 minutes of hands-on time. Cooking the wings low and slow in the oven makes all the difference, resulting in tender, fall-off-the-bone meat-perfect for a smaller gathering.
        • The Roasted Turkey Breast with Gravy is the perfect choice when you want holiday flavor without the hassle of carving a whole bird. It cooks quickly, stays incredibly juicy, and ensures maximum meat with minimum fuss. We include a quick pan gravy made with the drippings to complete the meal.
        • The Turkey Tenderloin recipe is much faster to cook, uses a simple marinade to lock in moisture, and is your perfect starting point if you’ve never cooked turkey before.
        • My Roasted Turkey Drumsticks recipe delivers tender, dark meat with crispy skin. And let’s face it, it is the best part of the whole bird.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Herb crusted turkey roast garnished with fruit and placed on a table.
        Print

        Herb Roasted Turkey Recipe

        Seasoned with the best herbs for turkey, this Herb Roasted Turkey recipe is simple yet flavorful. Follow our step by step instructions for the best Thanksgiving turkey recipe anyone can make.
        Course Dinner
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 2 hours
        Resting time 1 hour 30 minutes
        Total Time 3 hours 45 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 620kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 Whole Turkey 12-16 pounds – fully thawed if frozen
        • 4 ounces unsalted butter at room temperature
        • 1 tablespoon brown sugar or coconut sugar
        • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme chopped plus two sprigs for cavity
        • 1 tablespoon fresh sage chopped plus one small sprig for cavity
        • 2 teaspoons fresh rosemary chopped plus one small sprig for cavity
        • 1 tablespoon paprika
        • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
        • 1 teaspoon onion powder
        • 2 tablespoons kosher salt divided
        • 2 teaspoons ground black pepper divided
        • 2 stalks celery roughly chopped
        • 2 carrots roughly chopped
        • 1 onion roughly chopped
        • 1 lemon cut in half
        • 3 cups chicken stock or turkey stock, more as needed – divided

        Instructions

        • Remove the turkey from the fridge an hour before roasting. Place it on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and use a few sheets of paper towels to dry it as much as possible.
        • Thirty minutes before roasting, preheat your oven to 450 degrees F. (232 C). Remove the top rack from the oven and place the other rack in the lowest position.
        • To make the butter herb mixture, place softened butter, brown sugar, fresh thyme, fresh sage, fresh rosemary, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, one tablespoon of kosher salt, and 1 teaspoon of black pepper in a bowl. Mix well to combine. Set it aside.
        • Season the turkey’s cavity with the remaining one tablespoon of kosher salt and one teaspoon of ground black pepper.
        • Using your fingers, gently separate the breast meat from the skin, being careful not to tear the skin. Do not rush this process.
        • Using your fingers, evenly spread two tablespoons of the butter and herb mixture underneath the skin.
        • Distribute the remaining butter herb mixture evenly throughout the turkey, including drumsticks, thighs, and breasts.
        • Place half of the celery, carrots, onion, half lemon, and fresh sprigs of thyme, sage, and rosemary inside the bird’s cavity.
        • Place the other half of the lemon in the neck of the bird round cut side up, pull skin over, and secure with a toothpick. This will help the skin remain in place without shrinking.
        • Add the veggies and one cup of the stock at the bottom of the roasting pack.
        • Transfer the turkey (breast side up) to a V-rack fitted in a roasting pan (please read notes as to what to do if you do not have a V-rack).
        • Tuck the wings under and tie the drumsticks with kitchen twine.
        • If you have a temperature probe for continuous monitoring, insert the probe in the thickest part of the breast, making sure that it does not touch the bone. (Please read the notes about what to do if you do not own a meat thermometer probe.)
        • Set the probe temperature to 155 degrees F. (68 C).
        • Place the turkey in the preheated oven and roast for 30 minutes. Then reduce the heat to 325 degrees F (163 C) and roast for 2 to 2 ½ hours or until it reaches 155 degrees F. (see times, temp below)
        • While the turkey is roasting, place the remaining two cups of chicken (or turkey) stock in a small saucepan over low heat and keep it warm. Baste turkey every 30-45 minutes.
        • If the turkey seems like it’s getting overly browned during the cooking process, cover it with aluminum foil.
        • Once the internal temperature is achieved, remove from the oven and tent with foil for 30 minutes. Do not remove the temperature probe until you are ready to carve. It should reach the safe 165 degrees F (74 C) as it sits, which should happen in about 15-20 minutes. Transfer it to a cutting board and let it rest.
        • While the turkey is resting, prepare your favorite gravy. The juices in the roasting pan will be a perfect addition to flavor!
        • Carve and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: When serving turkey the general rule of thumb is to serve 1 1/2 pounds per person. Our turkey was just over 12 lbs which serves comfortably for 8 servings. However, this recipe would work for a turkey that is up to 16 pounds. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Remove from fridge: It’s important to remove the fully-thawed turkey from the refrigerator at least 1 hour before roasting. This not only helps to prevent overcooking the turkey, but it makes the butter much easier to spread.
        • Check doneness: Nowadays most turkeys come inserted with a pop up timer, which pops when it reaches a preset temperature. If you do not have thermometer you can rely on that, but a better way measure doneness is a Probe Thermometer (affiliate link). We think that it works best because it takes the guesswork out of knowing when the turkey reaches the optimal temperature. With that said, you can use an instant read thermometer (affiliate link). If you do so, do not stick the breast multiple times. Instead, follow the timing listed on the recipe and check once or twice measuring both the breast and thigh. Also, as you are measuring, avoid touching a bone.
        • Leave the pop up timer in: Even if you have a thermometer, leave the pop up timer in and remove it after the roasting process is complete.
        • Roasting vessel: A Roasting Rack (affiliate link) elevates the turkey, allowing hot air in the oven to circulate. If you don’t have a rack, you can lay the turkey on top of the vegetables, which helps lift them a bit for the air to circulate throughout the bird. It also helps infuse flavor into the vegetables and makes an excellent base for gravy.
        • Basting: Basting is a wonderful method to prevent the herb-crusted turkey roast from drying out. Do so every 30 – 45 minutes with a turkey baster or large spoon.
        • Roasting temperature: If you have ever roasted turkey, you know that it can go from perfectly moist to terribly dry very quickly. While the FDA recommends roasting turkey to 165 degrees F, we intentionally take it out when it reach 155 degrees F. because the roasting process continues even after you take your bird out of the oven. During our testing, we found that it should reach to the safe temperature (165 F.) within 20-30 minutes of resting while proving a super moist and juicy turkey.
        • Garnish for presentation: Although optional, feel free to get creative and impress your guests with a beautiful presentation. We finished the turkey with an assortment of in-season produce, like pomegranate, blood orange, black grapes, and plenty of those flavorful fresh herbs for roasted turkey.
        • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature. Transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat oven (330 F.) with a splash of chicken stock.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 620kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 73g | Fat: 31g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 265mg | Sodium: 2256mg | Potassium: 982mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 3609IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 74mg | Iron: 4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/herb-roasted-turkey/feed/ 4
        Turkey Gravy with Drippings https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-gravy-with-drippings/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-gravy-with-drippings/#comments Sat, 09 Nov 2024 15:46:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78843 Ingredients All you need is 4 ingredients, along with the turkey drippings for gravy. Here are the ingredients we need…]]>
        Homemade turkey gravy in a gravy boat with a spoon.

        Ingredients

        All you need is 4 ingredients, along with the turkey drippings for gravy. Here are the ingredients we need to make turkey gravy out of drippings:

        Ingredients for quick turkey gravy from the top view with text on the photo.
        • Juices leftover (aka liquid gold): Use the drippings from the pan after roasting your turkey. Since we used aromatics in our herb-roasted turkey, these drippings are super flavorful. However, you can use the drippings from any turkey recipe by following this recipe.
        • Chicken or turkey stock: I recommend Homemade Chicken Stock (or store bought) instead of turkey stock since it is lighter and provides a cleaner flavor. However, both options would work.
        • Unsalted butter: I prefer to use unsalted butter to control the amount of salt in the gravy. However, you can use salted butter as well. Just be sure to taste it and salt it (if needed) after the gravy is thickened.
        • All-purpose flour: All-purpose flour is the thickening agent. If you want a gluten-free gravy, use a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend.
        • Turkey Gravy Seasoning: The best way to season turkey gravy is with fresh herbs, including fresh thyme and parsley. You can add additional herbs like fresh rosemary or fresh sage as well. If you prefer dried spices, use 1 teaspoon of dried herbs for every 1 tablespoon of fresh herbs.

        How to Make Turkey Gravy From Drippings?

        This gravy with turkey drippings recipe comes together in a few steps. I assure you, you’ll have a flavorful, smooth gravy that enhances your turkey and adds a delicious touch to everything on your Thanksgiving plate. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        A collage of images showing how to make turkey gravy from drippings.
        1. Remove the veggies:  While the turkey rests, remove the large pieces of vegetables (onions, celery, carrots) in the roasting pan with a slotted spoon.
        2. Strain the juices: Strain the juices from the pan into a gravy separator or through a fine mesh strainer into a glass measuring cup. 
        3. Remove the fat: Using a spoon, remove the top fat layer as much as possible.  You should end up with about 1 to 2 cups of liquid. Add chicken stock to ensure you have 3 cups of liquid.
        A collage of images showing how to make gravy from turkey juice.
        1. Make the roux: Set the now empty roasting pan over medium heat. Melt the butter, then add the flour, mixing with a wooden spoon until the flour is cooked and lightly browned, about 3-5 minutes.
        2. Add the turkey drippings: Slowly pour the separated juices into the flour mixture while constantly whisking. Bring to a boil and continue whisking constantly until thick, about 7-10 minutes. If needed, add more stock to adjust to your desired consistency.
        3. Add seasonings: Sprinkle in thyme, parsley, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. If you have one, place it in a gravy boat and serve with turkey on the side.

        How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat Leftovers?

        Turkey pan gravy is one of those Thanksgiving must-haves you will want the day of, as well as to enjoy all your leftovers. Since we don’t want any of this delicious brown turkey gravy going to waste, here are my best storage, freezing, and reheating instructions:

        • Storage: Cool the gravy to room temperature. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: Make sure the gravy is at room temperature. Transfer to a freezer-safe container or freezer bag, label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month. Thaw overnight in the fridge.
        • Reheat: Reheat in a saucepan over medium heat, stirring regularly. Or, microwave in 30-second increments, stirring each time in between. Please note that when you reheat, it will start as a congealed texture. For lack of a better term, it will be a blub. But as it heats, the gravy will return to its original consistency. 

        FAQs

        How to make thick gravy?

        Cook the gravy longer to evaporate excess water. You can thicken the sauce with a cornstarch slurry (by mixing an equal amount of cornstarch with an equal amount of liquid) if it’s not thickening.

        Can you make turkey gravy without drippings?

        Yes, you can. Start with a good chicken broth bouillon, but start with a small amount, as it can be salty. Add fresh herbs and use butter to make it silky smooth. Let it simmer to thicken.

        What to Serve with Turkey Gravy?

        If you are making this Thanksgiving gravy recipe with drippings for the holidays, here are my favorite serving suggestions:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Easy Homemade Turkey Gravy with Drippings recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Turkey gravy made with pan drippings in a gravy boat.
        Print

        Turkey Gravy with Pan Drippings Recipe

        Learn how to make rich, creamy Turkey Gravy with drippings! This easy homemade recipe is the perfect finishing touch to complement your Thanksgiving turkey.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine American
        Diet Halal
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 3 cups
        Calories 261kcal

        Ingredients

        • Juices leftover from the roasting pan
        • Chicken or turkey stock as needed to yield 3 cups gravy
        • ¼ cup unsalted butter
        • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
        • 2 teaspoons fresh thyme chopped
        • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped
        • Kosher salt to taste
        • Ground black pepper to taste

        Instructions

        • Using a slotted spoon, remove the large pieces of cooked vegetables and strain the juices from the pan into a gravy separator or glass measuring cup.
        • Let it sit for 10 minutes for the fat to separate*. Remove as much fat on top as you can with a spoon.
        • You will likely end up with 1 to 2 cups of drippings. Use chicken stock to bring it to 3 cups. Set it aside.
        • Melt the butter in the now-empty roasting pan over medium heat. Add the flour and whisk constantly until the flour is cooked and lightly browned, about 3-5 minutes.
        • Gradually pour the liquid into the roasting pan and boil while constantly whisking until thick, about 7-10 minutes. Add more stock to adjust to your desired consistency.
        • Stir in the thyme, parsley, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary.
        • Serve with turkey on the side.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 ½ to 3 cups of gravy, ideal for eight servings. The nutritional values below are per serving and approximate based on the amount of drippings.
        • Removing the fat on top: A fat separator will provide the best results. However, if you do not have a fat separator, strain the drippings into a glass measuring cup, then place it in the fridge for 10 minutes. The fat will slowly rise to the top. At this point, you can use a turkey baster to suck the fat off or slowly skim the fat off with a spoon. This step is crucial to prevent your gravy from separating.
        • Be sure to brown the flour: It’s important to cook the flour to diminish the raw flour taste. The flour is ready when it is golden brown and smells like popcorn.
        • Constantly whisk to avoid lumps: Whisking constantly when adding the liquid is key to a smooth gravy. If lumps do form, no worries. Strain it through a fine mesh strainer or use an immersion blender to make it silky.
        • Cooking pan matters: The cooking time will vary depending on the pan. If you use the same roasting pan you used to cook the turkey, the gravy will thicken faster since the water evaporates faster. If you use a saucepan, it will take longer. Bring the mixture to a gentle simmer, stirring often, until it thickens to your desired consistency.
        • Adjust for consistency: Cooking the gravy longer will reduce and thicken it. Remember gravy thickens as it cools, so make it a little thinner than you think if it will be sitting for a while. If you went too far and the turkey sauce is too thick, add more stock to thin it to your desired consistency.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 261kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 48mg | Sodium: 343mg | Potassium: 281mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 656IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-gravy-with-drippings/feed/ 2
        Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-mac-and-cheese/ https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-mac-and-cheese/#comments Mon, 28 Oct 2024 16:10:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78662 Our current cultural craze is all about getting more protein. Knowing what a protein powerhouse cottage cheese is, it got…]]>

        Our current cultural craze is all about getting more protein. Knowing what a protein powerhouse cottage cheese is, it got me wondering: Can you put cottage cheese in mac and cheese? Great news: Not only can you add protein to mac and cheese with cottage cheese, the actual cottage cheese cheese sauce comes together quickly in a blender and is ready in less than 30 minutes.

        While the main instructions you’ll find below are for a stovetop version of this recipe, this cottage cheese macaroni and cheese can also be prepped ahead of time to be baked later in a casserole dish if you’d like to add it to your holiday menu. Not to worry—the baked version of this recipe is also included below.

        Cottage cheese macaroni and cheese in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients and Substitutions

        This homemade mac and cheese with cottage cheese has an impressive depth of flavor for a dish with just a few simple ingredients:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Pasta: For our version of macaroni and cheese with cottage cheese, we selected the fun & familiar macaroni noodle that we all grew up eating. However, all pasta shapes are welcome as long as they’ll hold the sauce. And, if you have specific dietary needs/preferences, feel free to substitute gluten-free pasta (GF), chickpea pasta, or whole wheat pasta—they all adapt well to this recipe.
        • Cottage cheese: When adding cottage cheese to mac and cheese, I recommend that you go with the full 4% milkfat version. You can use a lower-fat version, but if you are like us and prefer a creamier dish, go for the 4% version.
        • Milk: The same goes here with the milk—I recommend choosing full fat regular milk for a luscious finished pasta. However, an equal amount of alternative dairy-free milk, like almond milk, can also be used.
        • Cheddar cheese: We used sharp cheddar cheese when testing this recipe. If you’d prefer a milder cheese flavor for your cottage mac and cheese, feel free to swap in gouda cheese in its place. 
        • Parmesan cheese: Take it from me—shredded parmesan cheese is essential to this cottage cheese mac and cheese recipe. Without it, the mac and cheese sauce with cottage cheese tasted a bit bland. The parmesan gives it the umami punch that will keep everyone reaching for second helpings.
        • Cornstarch: This helps to thicken your cottage cheese sauce. If you prefer arrowroot powder, you can swap that in instead.
        • Garlic: Garlic powder blends into the sauce evenly, which is what we used in our recipe trials. If you prefer the more intense flavor of fresh or roasted garlic, just be sure to mince or press it well before adding it to your blender. While it is not traditional, ½ teaspoon of onion powder can also be added if preferred.
        • Spices: Our cottage cheese mac and cheese recipe gets its traditional flavor with these three classic mac and cheese spices—paprika, nutmeg, and a touch of cayenne pepper. 
        • Veggies (optional): If you’d like to elevate your cottage cheese mac and cheese, feel free to mix in some cooked vegetables once the dish is complete, such as steamed broccoli, peas, or a handful of fresh baby spinach leaves.

        How to Make Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese?

        This mac and cheese recipe with cottage cheese comes together in three simple steps: First, you cook the pasta. Then, you make your high-protein cheese sauce with cottage cheese. Finally, you mix the two components together. And, voilà! It’s just that easy in under 30 minutes. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        Steps showing how to cook pasta and make the cottage cheese mac and cheese sauce in a blender.
        1. Cook the pasta: Fill a medium saucepan with water and season generously with salt. Bring it to a boil and add the pasta to the boiling water. Cook until your noodles are al dente, following the timing on the package’s directions.
        2. Drain the water: First, reserve ½ cup of the pasta water, then drain the pasta into a strainer and set aside. Return the pot to the stove (no need to wash it.)
        3. Blend your cheese mixture: Next, blend cottage cheese, milk, cheddar cheese, Parmesan cheese, cornstarch, garlic powder, paprika, black pepper, nutmeg, and cayenne pepper in a high-speed blender or a food processor until smooth for about 30 to 40 seconds.
        A collage of images showing how to cook mac n cheese with cottage cheese sauce.
        1. Cook your cottage cheese cheese sauce: Pour the blended sauce into the pot over medium-low heat. Using a wooden spoon, stir your sauce until it is slightly thickened, for about 1 to 1 ½  minutes. You will know that it’s ready when it coats the back of a spoon. Taste for seasoning, adding more flavor if you desire it. 
        2. Combine your pasta and sauce: Add the drained pasta back into the pot with the cottage cheese cheese sauce and stir to combine. Cook until the pasta is thoroughly warmed and coated with the cottage cheese mixture. Serve while still warm.

        How to Bake it?

        If you’re looking for a baked mac and cheese with cottage cheese recipe, then look no further. The baked version is a crowd-pleasing side dish for Thanksgiving, Christmas, or really any holiday potluck that you’re invited to. It can easily be adjusted as a baked version, and I’m going to show you how:

        1. Preheat the oven: Set the oven to 375 degrees F/190 degrees C. 
        2. Prepare your baking dish: Brush an 8X8 baking dish with 1 TBSP of butter.
        A collage of images showing how to make baked mac and cheese cottage cheese.
        1. Pour in your cooked cottage cheese mac n cheese: Put the cooked pasta and sauce mixture into the buttered 8×8 baking dish. Add an extra 3 tablespoons of pasta water into the mix.
        2. Top your pasta: Sprinkle the top of the cottage cheese macaroni with an additional ½ cup of parmesan cheese first, then ½ cup of panko breadcrumbs (or regular bread crumbs).
        3. Bake: Put the baking dish in the oven for 15 minutes, or until the breadcrumbs have toasted. 
        4. Brown the top, if preferred: If you’d like the top of your baked pasta to have a crunchier texture, switch the oven to broil and leave in the oven for an additional two minutes.
        Mac n cheese with cottage cheese in the pot being stirred by a person from the top view.

        How To Make Ahead and Store and Reheat Leftovers?

        • Make Ahead: If you’re looking to make this recipe in advance of an event or holiday dinner, we recommend that you prepare the baked version that you see above. Just pour the pasta mixture into your baked dish, allow it to cool to room temperature, and then cover and refrigerate. On the day of, remove the covering and add the toppings before baking. 
        • Storage: If you made the stovetop version of this mac & cheese recipe with cottage cheese, you can store any leftovers in an airtight container and keep it in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
        • Reheating: To reheat macaroni and cottage cheese leftovers, place the pasta in a saucepan and warm it on low heat on the stovetop. If the sauce is too thick, you may have to add some water to get it back to its creamy texture.

        What to Serve This Recipe?

        Our mac n cheese recipe with cottage cheese is adaptable and satisfying as either a side dish or vegetarian main dish: 

        Expert Tips

        Thankfully, the process of making this high protein cottage cheese macaroni and cheese recipe is a straightforward one without much room for error. However, there are a few things that I’d like to mention for the best results:

        • Don’t leave the cottage cheese mac and cheese sauce unattended while it’s cooking: The sauce comes together quickly—truly, within minutes. Once your pasta is cooked and you start to warm your sauce, it will thicken and be ready for the macaroni to be stirred in shortly.
        • Use full-fat dairy products: For the ultimate creamy, dreamy, high-protein mac n cheese, you’ll need to use full-fat regular milk and 4% cottage cheese. Trust me on this one. Skim just doesn’t cut it in this recipe. 
        • Cooking the cottage cheese cheese sauce in the saucepan before adding the pasta is very important: Because the cottage cheese mixture contains cornstarch as a thickening agent, it needs a few minutes to cook so that it blends in, thickens, and becomes “invisible,” flavor-wise. You don’t want to be able to taste the cornstarch!
        • Use water to adjust your sauce’s texture: If your blended cottage cheese mac and cheese is too thick, adding a small bit of the reserved pasta water to the mix will thin it out. 
        • Mind your salt: Because we are adding salt to our pasta water and using salty cheeses such as sharp cheddar and parmesan, you will notice that we did not include any additional salt in the recipe for our homemade protein mac and cheese. Please adjust and add salt according to your own taste.
        • Broiling browns the top of the baked macaroni and cheese with cottage cheese: We noticed in our testing of the baked version of this recipe that simply baking didn’t brown the breadcrumbs sufficiently. If you’d like that crunchy, browned top, be sure to broil it for 1 minute once it has finished baking.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make your own Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Cottage cheese macaroni and cheese in a pot from the top view.
        Print

        Cottage Cheese Macaroni and Cheese Recipe

        This Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese Recipe is our guilt-free alternative to traditional mac and cheese that is lower in calories, higher in protein, and doesn’t sacrifice the signature creamy deliciousness of the original dish. The cottage cheese sauce comes together easily in a blender and the whole dish is ready in less than 30 minutes. This recipe can be made on the stovetop, or as a baked version by following a few additional instructions below.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 461kcal

        Ingredients

        • 8 ounces pasta elbow macaroni
        • 1 cup cottage cheese 4% milk fat
        • ½ cup regular whole milk
        • 4 ounces sharp cheddar cheese shredded
        • 2 ounces Parmesan cheese shredded
        • 1 tablespoon cornstarch
        • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
        • ¼ teaspoon paprika
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • pinch nutmeg
        • pinch cayenne pepper optional

        Instructions

        • Bring a pot of generously salted water to a boil in a medium-sized pot. Add the pasta and cook according to package directions until al dente. Reserve ½ cup of the pasta water, then drain the pasta. Return the pot to the stove (no need to wash it.)
        • Meanwhile, place the cottage cheese, milk, cheddar cheese, Parmesan cheese, cornstarch, garlic powder, paprika, black pepper, nutmeg, and cayenne pepper in a blender or a food processor. Blend until smooth for about 30 to 40 seconds.
        • Pour the cottage cheese mixture into the pot and turn the heat to medium-low. Using a wooden spoon, stir until slightly thickened, for about 1 to 1 ½ minutes. It should be ready if it coats the back of a spoon. The sauce thickens very fast so do not leave it unattended. If it thickens too much you can thin it out using the reserved pasta water.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more salt and pepper, if needed.
        • Add the now-drained pasta into the pot and stir to combine. Cook until pasta is thoroughly warmed and coated with the cottage cheese mixture.
        • Serve while still warm.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 5 cups of macaroni and cottage cheese ideal for 4 generous servings. The nutritional values are per serving.
        • Baked Version: To make baked macaroni and cheese with cottage cheese, you will need 1 tablespoon of unsalted butter, 1/2 cup of panko breadcrumbs, and 1/2 cup (additional) shredded parmesan cheese. Below are the step by step instructions:
          • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F/190 degrees C.
          • Brush a 8X8 baking dish with butter.
          • Follow the recipe as written. Instead of serving, incorporate three tablespoons of the pasta water into the mac and cheese mixture.
          • Place the cottage cheese mac and cheese into the buttered dish.
          • Sprinkle with parmesan cheese and then panko breadcrumbs. Bake for 15 minutes or until breadcrumbs have toasted.
        • Make Ahead: If you’re planning to make this recipe in advance of an event or holiday dinner, we recommend that you prepare the baked version. Simply pour the pasta mixture into your baked dish, bring it to room temperature, and then cover and refrigerate. On the day of, remove the covering and add the toppings before baking as written above.
        • Storage and reheating instructions for the stovetop version: Any leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. You can reheat in a sauce pan with a splash of water over medium-low heat until heated through.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 461kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 51mg | Sodium: 593mg | Potassium: 271mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 580IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 462mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-mac-and-cheese/feed/ 2
        Butternut Squash Bruschetta https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/#comments Fri, 25 Oct 2024 15:11:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=8033 The best Thanksgiving hors d’oeuvres have it all, and this fall bruschetta is no different. The butternut squash cubes roast up…]]>

        The best Thanksgiving hors d’oeuvres have it all, and this fall bruschetta is no different. The butternut squash cubes roast up beautifully, leaving you with sweet, caramelized bits of squash. Layer that on top of a toasted baguette slice slathered with herbed goat cheese and cranberry sauce, and you will have a butternut squash crostini worthy of an elegant dinner party or casual finger food.

        If you are like us, a big fan of butternut squash appetizers, be sure to check out our Butternut Squash Salad and Butternut Squash Soup, as well.

        Thanksgiving bruschetta with butternut squash and cranberry sauce from the top view.

        Ingredients

        This easy butternut squash appetizer is easy to make with a few simple ingredients from the grocery store. We will need the following ingredients:

        • Butternut squash: Look for a medium-sized whole butternut squash heavy for its size. I prefer cutting butternut squash at home into small cubes rather than buying the precut packages. Alternatively, acorn squash, delicata squash, or any pumpkin variety can also be used in this recipe.
        • Olive oil: Go for extra-virgin olive oil for the fruity flavor.
        • Ground cinnamon: Ground cinnamon powder adds an extra background warmth.
        • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper enhances all those butternut squash flavors.
        • Goat cheese: I love creamy goat cheese here (check out any of my Goat Cheese Recipes), but you could also use Ricotta Cheese, cream cheese, or mascarpone cheese.
        • Heavy cream: Heavy cream adds extra richness and loosens the goat cheese to a spreadable consistency. Whole milk is a good substitute.
        • Scallions: Green onions add extra color and a mild onion flavor.
        • Garlic: Garlic gives us that punchy bite.
        • Fresh herbs: I love fresh parsley, but fresh thyme is a great option.
        • Crusty Bread: Hearty, thick slices of sourdough bread are divine, but you can also make No Knead Artisan Bread if you have the time or use slices of baguette for smaller bruschetta.
        • Cranberry sauce: I love to use my Maple Cranberry Sauce, which I always have in the fridge this time of year, but any leftover cranberry sauce will work.
        • Nuts: Toasted sliced almonds or walnuts add a layer of crunch and texture.
        • Honey: Floral honey elevates the butternut and cranberry with sweetness, but it is optional. Maple syrup can also be used.
        • Toppings: Feel free to add toppings such as flaky sea salt, red pepper flakes, chopped sage leaves, or rosemary for extra flavor.
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        Optional Add-Ins

        There are several additions to this butternut appetizer, such as:

        • Balsamic glaze: Omit the honey and finish it with a tangy and sweet balsamic glaze instead.
        • Caramelized onions: Give the butternut squash an extra layer of savory flavor with rich and delicious Caramelized Onions.
        • Apple: Butternut squash and apples go so well together, so roasting some cubed apples with the squash is a delicious addition. Good apples for cooking include Fuji, Granny Smith, Pink Lady, and Gala.
        • Pomegranate seeds: Sprinkle on some pomegranate seeds for additional color and sweet, tart flavor.

        How to Make Bruschetta with Butternut Squash?

        This autumn bruschetta is easy to make. I like to mix the goat cheese while the butternut squash is roasting in the oven. Here’s how to do it:

        1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
        Steps showing how to roast butternut squash and prepare goat cheese mixture.
        1. Season butternut squash: Add the small chunks of butternut squash cubes to the prepared sheet pan. Toss the butternut with olive oil, cinnamon, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, and black pepper and redistribute into a single layer.
        2. Roast squash cubes: Roast for 30 – 35 minutes, until fork tender and golden brown. Toss them halfway through for even browning.
        3. Whip goat cheese: In a small bowl, whisk together the goat cheese and heavy cream until smooth. Stir in the other teaspoon of Kosher salt, scallions, garlic, and parsley.
        4. Toast bread: Lightly toast the bread slices in the oven, toaster oven, or toaster.
        A collage of images showing how to assemble butternut squash bruschetta recipe.
        1. Assemble bruschetta: Spread 1-2 tablespoons of the goat cheese mixture on each slice of bread, followed by 1-2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce.
        2. Add roasted squash: Add the butternut squash mixture and sliced almonds or walnuts. Drizzle with honey, sea salt, and fresh sage, if using.

        Make Ahead and Storage

        Following the right storage instructions allows you to make this butternut crostini ahead of time. This allows you to get one step ahead if serving it as a party appetizer or as part of your Thanksgiving spread.

        • Make Ahead: Roast the squash and prepare the goat cheese mixture. Store each component separately in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.
        • Storage: The assembled butternut squash bruschettas will keep for one day. After that, the bread becomes soggy and soaks up too much moisture.
        Butternut bruschetta being drizzled with honey.

        If you try this Butternut Squash Bruschetta recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

        Butternut squash bruschetta with goat cheese from the top view.
        Print

        Butternut Squash Bruschetta Recipe

        A festive and colorful butternut squash bruschetta recipe featuring cinnamon-spiced roasted squash cubes atop layers of sourdough bread, goat cheese, and cranberry sauce. This is the perfect recipe to serve as an appetizer or use up the leftovers the day after Thanksgiving.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 1 hour
        Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 466kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Roasted Butternut Squash

        • 1 medium sized butternut squash peeled, deseeded, and cut into ½ inch cubes
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt divided
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Goat Cheese Spread

        • 8 ounces goat cheese at room temperature
        • 2 tablespoons heavy cream
        • 3 stalks scallions chopped
        • 1 clove garlic finely chopped or pressed
        • ¼ cup parsley chopped

        For The Bruschetta

        • 6 slices sourdough bread or any other crusty bread
        • 1 cup maple cranberry sauce
        • ½ cup sliced almonds or chopped walnuts
        • 1 tbs Honey (or more) optional drizzle
        • Sea salt optional sprinkle to finish
        • Handful of sage leaves chopped (optional)

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
        • Spread the butternut squash cubes on the prepared baking sheet. Drizzle with the olive oil and sprinkle with the ground cinnamon, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and pepper. Toss to combine.
        • Roast for 30 – 35 minutes, turning halfway through until tender. Remove from the oven and set it aside to cool.
        • Place the goat cheese and heavy cream in a bowl. Using a fork, stir and “whip” until smooth.
        • Stir in the other teaspoon of Kosher salt, scallions, garlic, and parsley.
        • Lightly toast the bread slices in the oven, toaster oven, or toaster.
        • Spread the bread with 1-2 tablespoons of the goat cheese mixture, followed by 1-2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce.
        • Add some roasted squash cubes and sprinkle each slice with almonds or walnuts.
        • Drizzle with honey, a pinch of sea salt, and chopped sage, if using.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 6 bruschettas, which is ideal for 6 servings. We roasted the butternut squash but you can use leftover squash as well. 
        • Enjoy warm or cold: You can enjoy the roasted squash bruschetta warm, just as all the components come out of the oven, or chilled if the squash and goat cheese have been made ahead. If you prefer it warm, rewarm leftover squash on a baking sheet in a low oven (300 degrees F) for 8-10 minutes, until warm.
        • Smear garlic on bread: For that traditional bruschetta approach, you have two options. You can smear a raw garlic clove over the surface of the toasted bread slices, or make a paste with roasted garlic and spread it on instead.
        • Storage: While you can store the leftovers in an airtight container for one day, we think this bruschetta tastes best on the day it is made.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 466kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 1306mg | Potassium: 197mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 756IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/feed/ 10
        Potato Roses https://foolproofliving.com/potato-roses/ https://foolproofliving.com/potato-roses/#comments Sun, 20 Oct 2024 12:51:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78546 Visually impressive, individual potato rosettes are an appetizer that delights for Thanksgiving and Christmas holiday dinners, or a pretty potato…]]>

        Visually impressive, individual potato rosettes are an appetizer that delights for Thanksgiving and Christmas holiday dinners, or a pretty potato flower recipe to enhance your Mother’s Day or Easter brunch. They are savory and decadent—the perfect complement to almost any meat, chicken, or veggie main dish. 

        If you’re looking to elevate your celebratory meals this year, this potato roses recipe will certainly dazzle your guests. For those who adore a good theme, we also have a tutorial on How to Make Apple Roses that can round out your floral feast.

        Potato roses on a plate from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        Don’t be intimidated by the intricate look of these rolled potato roses. We’ve tested this recipe again and again so we can share with you the simplest path to potato rosette success! You, too, can create a beautiful rose potato of your own with a few basic ingredients:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Unsalted butter: The unsalted butter in this recipe is used to grease your muffin tins. We tested the recipe with oil sprays, as well as olive oil, but butter created a far superior end result for these rose potatoes and ensured they did not stick to the pan.
        • Potatoes: While we used Yukon gold potatoes for the potato bacon roses pictured here, russet potatoes will also work just fine. We do recommend that you keep the skin on, as it not only helps to keep the potatoes intact, but also adds a nice visual edging to each potato rosette. 
        • Olive oil: The olive oil in this recipe for potato roses is used in coating the sliced potatoes. If you prefer avocado oil, it will work as a suitable alternative. 
        • Fresh herbs: For our bacon and potato roses, we used fresh rosemary. You could also substitute in fresh thyme or fresh sage. If you prefer to use dried herbs such as an Italian seasoning blend, just keep in mind that you’ll need to adjust the recipe to only 1 teaspoon, if you’re using dried herbs.
        • Garlic: We tested this potato rose recipe with both fresh garlic and garlic powder. While they both work, we preferred the result with the garlic powder, as it dispersed amongst the potato and bacon roses more evenly.
        • Seasonings: Beyond the fresh (or dried) herbs mentioned above, the only other seasonings you need are some Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper. 
        • Parmesan cheese: The parmesan cheese in our potato roses with bacon serves two main purposes—it adds a wonderful umami flavor to the dish, and it acts as a binder (or glue) to hold the layers together as it melts during the baking process. 
        • Bacon: We tested this recipe with both traditional bacon and with turkey bacon. They both came out excellent, so feel free to select your personal preference on the bacon. 

        How to Make Potato Roses?

        You needn’t have any special chef skills to achieve perfect potato roses with bacon. We have laid out the instructions step-by-step for you below. If you follow them, you will be able to prep your own in less than 30 minutes. 

        Person showing how to prepare potatoes to make this recipe in a collage of photos.
        1. Preheat your oven. Set the temperature to 400 degrees F/204 C. Take your 2 tablespoons of melted butter and generously coat 6 of the 12 muffin tin cups. Ensure each cup (including the corner and sides) is fully greased to prevent sticking.
        2. Slice your potatoes. With the skin on, slice your potatoes using a mandolin with a handrail (also referred to as a handguard) into very thin slices, approximately 1/16 – ⅛ thickness. If you do not have a mandolin, you can do this step with a sharp knife. However, do your best to slice them as thinly as possible.
        3. Mix & coat your potato slices. Transfer the potato slices into a large bowl. Add the olive oil, minced rosemary (or your chosen herbs), garlic powder, kosher salt, and black pepper. Toss to combine, ensuring you separate the slices to coat them evenly. Potato slices will release their juices after you mix them. Be sure to drain it before using them to assemble the roses.
        Person showing how to roll potato roses.
        1. Layer your potato rosettes. On a clean work surface, lay out a slice of bacon, then place a line of potato slices on top, overlapping each one until you have used approximately 20 slices. Then, sprinkle the potato layer with 1 to 2 tablespoons of Parmesan cheese.
        A collage of images showing how to make potato rosettes.
        1. Roll your potatoes into roses. Gently roll the bacon base around the potatoes until it has formed a rosette shape.  
        2. Arrange your potato roses in the pan. Place your potato rosette in a muffin cup, then add about 10 more potato slices around the bacon-wrapped rose. This is a visual choice—feel free to play around with the potato slices, adding more or less to “fluff” up the edges of your roses.  
        3. Finish assembling your bacon potato roses. Repeat the layering and rolling steps above with the remaining bacon, potato slices, and cheese. You will have 6 potato roses when you’re finished.
        Person showing how to remove potato roses from the muffin tin.
        1. Bake your rosette potatoes. Place your muffin tin in the oven and bake, uncovered, for 20 minutes. Then place your foil on top of the potato roses  to prevent them from burning and bake for an additional 30 minutes or until the centers are tender and cooked through. When inserted into the middle of the potato rose, a sharp paring knife will pierce the potato center easily.
        2. Serve your bacon potato roses. Let your potato roses rest for 10 minutes, then gently run a paring knife on the outer edge of each rose to remove them from the muffin tin. Place them onto a serving platter, or plate them individually on each dish.

        How to Store and Reheat Leftovers?

        If you happen to have leftover potato bacon roses (however unlikely that may be, considering what a crowd-pleaser they are!), you can store and reheat them for another snack or meal later. 

        • To store your potato roses: Allow them to come to room temperature; do not attempt to contain them while they’re still warm. Place them upright in an airtight container. Our potato roses recipe will keep for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. 
        • To reheat the potato rosettes: Place your rose potatoes on a baking sheet and heat them in a 300 degree F oven until warmed throughout—roughly 5-10 minutes. 

        Serving Suggestions

        This potato roses recipe is a malleable dish that wows in a variety of scenarios. Here are some pairing suggestions:

        A potato rosette on a plate.

        FAQs

        You’ve got rose potato questions, we’ve got answers! Also, if there is something we do not cover here, please feel free to head to the comments section and we will do our best to get back to you in a timely manner. 

        Do I need to soak potato slices in water before making potato rosettes?

        We found this to be an unnecessary step. However, if you have a desire to remove extra starch, you’re welcome to soak them, but be sure to dry them as much as you can prior to using them in the recipe.

        Do I need to cover my potato and bacon roses in foil?

        Yes. Covering the rosette potatoes with foil will help protect your petals and prevent them from burning. 

        How will I know when my bacon potato roses are fully cooked?

        The easiest way to test your potato roses for doneness is to take the tip of a sharp paring knife and gently poke the center of the potato rosette; it will pierce easily if it is done.

        If you make your own Potato Roses recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Bacon wrapped potatoes on a plate.
        Print

        Potato Roses Recipe

        Savory and decadent, bacon potato roses are an impressive appetizer or side dish for your holiday meals and other festive occasions. The potato rosette shape adds a playful element to your plates and is easy to achieve with this foolproof recipe.  
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 30 minutes
        Cook Time 50 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 245kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
        • 4 Yukon gold potatoes approximately 1.4 lbs, rinsed with the skin on
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary finely minced
        • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 cup grated parmesan cheese loosely packed (approximately 1 ounce)
        • 6 slices bacon pork or turkey

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 C. Brush 6 cups of a 12-cup muffin tin generously with melted butter*.
        • Thinly slice the potatoes using a mandoline with a handguard (aka handrail), or using a sharp knife to approximately 1/16 – ⅛ thickness.
        • Transfer the potato slices into a large bowl*. Add 2 tablespoons of olive oil, minced rosemary, garlic powder, kosher salt, and black pepper. Toss to combine.
        • On a clean work surface, lay out a slice of bacon, then place the potato slices overlapping each one until you have used approximately 20 slices.
        • Sprinkle 1 to 2 tablespoons of Parmesan cheese over the potatoes.
        • Gently roll up the combined bacon and potato slices until it has formed a rose.
        • Place your potato rosette in a muffin cup and add 10 more potato slices around the bacon-wrapped rose. If needed, you can adjust the potato slices to “fluff” out the edges of your rosette more.
        • Repeat with the remaining bacon, potato slices, and cheese. You will have 6 potato roses when you’re finished.
        • Place your muffin tin in the oven and bake, uncovered, for 20 minutes. Then place your foil on top of the potato roses and bake for an additional 30 minutes, or until tender and cooked through. A sharp paring knife, when inserted into the middle of the potato rose, will pierce the potato center easily.
        • Let your potato roses rest for 10 minutes, then gently run a paring knife on the outer edge of each rose to remove them from the muffin tin. Place onto a serving platter.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes six potato roses, but you can multiply it to serve a larger crowd. The nutritional values below are per rose.
        • Don’t skimp on the butter when greasing your muffin tin: A generous coating of butter will keep the rose potatoes from sticking to the pan. Make sure to coat not only the inside but also the outer edges of each muffin cup. This will ensure that the outer layers of the roses don’t stick as they bake and crisp up beautifully. We do not recommend using parchment liner as it didn’t allow the potato roses to crisp. 
        • Drain the liquid: After mixing the potato slices with the olive oil, rosemary, and seasonings, they tend to release some moisture. While we initially tried drying the slices with a kitchen towel before seasoning, we found that the potatoes still released juices once combined with the other ingredients. To avoid soggy potatoes, we recommend draining any excess liquid that collects at the bottom of the bowl before assembling your potato rosettes.
        • Separate the potatoes while you’re mixing them: Because your potato slices will be thin, it’s essential that you manually separate them during the mixing step into your olive oil and spices so that all of your slices get evenly coated.
        • A sharp knife can be used if you do not own a mandoline: While it may take you a bit longer (cue: patience) to slice your potatoes with a knife, it is doable. Do your best to slice them as thinly and evenly as possible.
        • Can I make potato roses in advance? Unfortunately, we do not recommend it. We attempted to prepare these bacon and potato roses ahead of time, but after sitting in the fridge for a night, the potatoes oxidized. The change in color wasn’t appetizing and they simply didn’t taste as fresh when they were baked. We encourage you to make your potato roses the day you plan on serving them.
        • Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for upto 3 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 245kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 689mg | Potassium: 523mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 273IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 164mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/potato-roses/feed/ 2
        Roasted Turkey Breast With Gravy https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-turkey-breast-with-gravy/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-turkey-breast-with-gravy/#comments Sat, 12 Oct 2024 15:11:46 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78380 Ingredients You’ll Need You’ll need three sets of ingredients to make this baked turkey breast recipe: The seasoning, the vegetables…]]>
        Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

        For years, my husband and I have celebrated Thanksgiving with close friends who, like us, don’t have big families. I used to make a whole turkey, but over time, I realized that roasting just the breast makes so much more sense for a smaller table.

        If I am being honest, I am always most excited about the gravy. I think we can all agree that it is what ties the whole meal together: the turkey, the mashed potatoes, even the stuffing. So, when I began developing this recipe, I wanted it to be simple, dependable, and complete.

        Here is what makes this recipe special for me:

        • Great for intimate gatherings: Ideal when you want the comfort of a Thanksgiving feast without the work of roasting a whole turkey.
        • It is quicker than roasting a whole turkey: It cooks faster, it is easier to carve, and with the right butter and herbs, it turns out just as juicy and satisfying.
        • No need to brine: The herb butter keeps the turkey juicy without any advance prep.
        • Everything in one pan: While the turkey rests, you can make the gravy right in the same roasting pan.
        • Tested for reliability: After four rounds of testing, I found the ideal timing, seasoning, and temperature for consistent results.
        • Beginner-friendly: I wrote the instructions in a clear, step-by-step way so even if you have never roasted a turkey breast before, you can do it with confidence.
        Roasted turkey breast served with gravy, mashed potatoes, green beans and cranberry sauce on a plate.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        You’ll need three sets of ingredients to make this baked turkey breast recipe: The seasoning, the vegetables and turkey breast, and the gravy ingredients.

        You can find the full list of ingredients with exact measurements in the recipe card below; however, I’ve included some notes from my recipe testing:

        For The Compound Butter

        To season my turkey breast, I opted for my trusty Thanksgiving turkey compound butter, not only because it flavors the turkey beautifully but also makes the drippings delicious for gravy later on.

        Now, you can certainly use the whole recipe (with one stick of butter), but I thought that the halved recipe was just the right amount for a 6-pound turkey breast.

        Seasoning ingredients for roasted turkey breast.

        Unsalted butter: I prefer unsalted butter to control the salt, but you can use salted butter. I would reduce the salt to ¼ teaspoon.

        Fresh herbs (or dried herbs): Hearty herbs like fresh rosemary, thyme, and sage make it feel like fall and hold up well during cooking. If you want to use dried herbs, reduce the quantity to ½ teaspoon per herb.

        Garlic: One fresh garlic clove gives us a delicious bite, but ¼ teaspoon of garlic powder would be a great substitute.

        Lemon zest: Do not skip this, as the zest from a fresh lemon balances and brightens all the earthy flavors of the herbs.

        Seasonings: Stick to a simple seasoning of Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper. It is optional, but if preferred, a teaspoon of paprika can be added to the mixture.

        Need more seasoning ideals? Try my Turkey Dry Rub or Turkey Injection Method. Both options give the meat and the gravy a rich, perfectly seasoned finish.

        For The Turkey Breast and Vegetables

        You do not need much when roasting a turkey breast, just a few basic staples:

        Ingredients for the recipe.

        Turkey breast: I use a bone-in, skin-on-whole turkey breast, also known as a hotel-style turkey breast. A whole turkey breast consists of two breasts joined at the breastbone. If you prefer a half breast (only one breast), ask the butcher to cut the whole breast in half.

        Aromatics: A classic mirepoix blend of onions, carrots, and celery, along with garlic, provides the base. Even more so, the vegetables elevate the turkey breast, creating enough circulation so you don’t need to use a V rack (or a wire rack) if you don’t have one.

        Lemon: One of my secrets in this recipe is to tuck a whole lemon into the cavity and secure it with a toothpick. It adds a subtle citrus note and helps keep the skin around the neck in place during roasting.

        Liquid: Dry white wine, such as a Sauvignon Blanc or Pinot Gris, keeps the turkey breast meat moist while cooking. If you prefer an alcohol-free recipe, use Chicken Stock, Vegetable Stock, or turkey stock instead.

        For The Gravy

        My favorite part of this recipe might just be the homemade gravy, made with the drippings from the roasted turkey. Here is what you will need:

        Ingredients to make the gravy from the top view.

        Unsalted butter: Again, I prefer unsalted butter to control the salt. Salted butter can also be used, but you’d have to adjust the salt accordingly.

        Flour: Regular all-purpose flour thickens the gravy to the right consistency. If you are following a gluten-free diet, use 1:1 gluten free flour such as Cup 4Cup.

        Drippings from roasting pan: A small amount of the pan drippings adds depth and meaty flavor.

        Stock: Use chicken stock, turkey stock, or vegetable stock, depending on what you have on hand. I recommend using homemade stock if possible, but store-bought works perfectly fine. If you go that route, choose a low-sodium option so you can better control the seasoning.

        Seasonings: I recommend tasting the gravy near the end of cooking before adding any more seasoning, as the pan drippings may already be salty. After tasting, add more salt and black pepper if needed.

        How to Roast a Turkey Breast in the Oven?

        This turkey breast with gravy recipe has become my go-to for whenever I host a smaller holiday gathering. And the best part, you ask? It is ready in just a couple of hours.

        Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        Step 1 – Preheat oven: Preheat your oven to 450°F (232°C). I recommend removing the turkey breast from the fridge about 30-60 minutes before cooking so it comes closer to room temperature. I’ve found that this small step helps it cook more evenly.

        A collage of images showing how to prepare turkey breast (and seasoning) for roasting.

        Step 2 – Prepare the herbed butter: In a small bowl, mix the butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, salt, and pepper.

        Pro tip: The important thing when making the butter mixture is to have your butter at room temperature, as it not only mixes easily but also spreads better on the meat.

        Step 3 – Pat dry: Pat dry the turkey breast and the cavity with paper towels as much as you can. Do not skip this step. Otherwise, it will be hard to spread the butter on top.

        Step 4 – Loosen turkey skin: To butter your turkey, gently separate the skin from the meat with your fingers, being careful not to tear it. I find it easier to start at the bottom and slowly work my way up the breast.

        Person showing how to spread butter over and under the skin of turkey breast.

        Step 5 – Add butter under skin: Lift the skin and place 3 tablespoons of the softened herb butter (about 1 ½ tablespoons on each turkey breast) underneath the skin on both sides.

        Step 6 – Spread butter over the skin: Spread the remaining herb butter on the top and sides of the turkey skin, then massage it underneath the skin into an even layer.

        Pro Tip: As you distribute the butter under the skin, be as gentle as possible and go slow. You don’t want to tear the turkey skin as it will expose too much flesh while cooking.

        Step 7 – Finish with lemon: Place the whole lemon in the neck cavity and secure it with a toothpick (this holds the lemon in place and prevents the skin around the neck from shrinking).

        Step 8 – Add vegetables: Spread the onions, carrots, celery, and garlic in one even layer in a large roasting pan or a casserole dish. Pour in the wine (or stock).

        A collage of images showing how to roast turkey breast in the oven.

        Step 9 – Position turkey: Place the turkey breast on top of the vegetables, skin side up, ensuring it is elevated, so hot air can circulate underneath and keep the meat tender without needing a wire rack. Feel free to rearrange the veggies a bit to help the turkey sit upright.

        Step 10 – Insert meat thermometer: If using a temperature probe, place it in the thickest part of the breast, being careful not to touch the bone. If you hit the bone, pull back by approximately ½ inch. Set it to alert at 155°F (68°C). (If you do not have a meat thermometer for the oven, skip this step.)

        Step 11 – Reduce oven temperature: Once the turkey goes in, immediately lower the oven temperature to 325°F (163°C).

        This was a turning point in my recipe testing, because lowering the oven temperature from very hot to medium helped the skin crisp beautifully while cooking the turkey gently, without drying it out.

        Step 12 – Roast the turkey: Cook for 1 ½ -2 hours, or until the internal temperature reaches 155°F (68°C).  If you do not have a temperature probe, check the turkey with an instant-read thermometer.

        Step 13 – Rest the turkey: Remove the turkey breast from the oven. Place it on a cutting board and lightly tent with aluminum foil. Do not remove the temperature probe. Let it rest for 30 minutes. Trust me when I say this is when the magic happens. All of the juices redistribute, and the carryover heat brings the internal temperature up to a perfect 165°F (74°C).

        Baked turkey breast fresh out of the oven.

        How to Make Gravy from Turkey Breast?

        While the turkey breast is resting, I make the homemade gravy. I always say this is where all those golden drippings come to life. It’s rich, silky, and full of that roasted flavor no one should ever waste.

        Here’s how I do it step by step:

        Step 1 – Remove vegetables: Remove the vegetables from the roasting pan and set them aside.

        Step 2 – Separate fat from drippings: Pour the pan drippings into a large glass measuring cup or a fat separator. Let it sit for about 10-15 minutes so the fat rises to the top. I use a small spoon to scoop off the excess fat. At that point, you will be left with all the rich liquid. You’ll need about 3 tablespoons of drippings for the gravy.

        Step 3 – Preheat the pan or saucepan: If you use an oven-safe roasting pan, you can use it to make the gravy. Place the roasting pan directly on the stove over medium-high heat. Otherwise, a medium saucepan would work just as well.

        A collage of images showing how to make gravy for turkey breast.

        Step 4 – Make the roux: Add the butter to the pan and let it melt for a minute. Then whisk in the flour, stirring constantly until it turns a light golden color, about 6-8 minutes. It will start to darken quickly, so keep an eye on the heat and lower the heat if needed.

        Pro Tip: The 6-8 minutes of stirring time might seem like a lot, but it is important for the final product’s taste. If you don’t cook the flour long enough, your gravy will have a noticeable floury taste that won’t go away no matter how long you cook it.

        Step 5 – Add pan drippings and stock: Add the reserved turkey drippings and stir, scraping up any “brown bits” from the bottom of the pan (that’s where all the flavor is). Gradually add the stock in a steady stream.

        Bring to a boil, then lower the heat to a simmer and cook, stirring frequently, until thickened to your desired consistency, about 10-15 minutes. 

        Step 6 – Add seasonings (if needed): I always recommend tasting the gravy before adding any extra salt, as those drippings can already be quite flavorful. Adjust with salt and black pepper only if needed. 

        Gravy Troubleshooting

        You can learn more about this in my Turkey Gravy with Drippings post, but if you feel like your gravy isn’t quite right, here are a few ways to fix it:

        • Too thick? Whisk in a splash (in 1-2 tablespoon increments) of warm stock until it loosens up.
        • Too thin? Let it simmer a few more minutes, keeping a close eye on it and stirring often; it will naturally thicken as it reduces.
        • Too salty? Stir in a bit of unsalted stock or a splash of heavy cream to balance the flavor.
        Images showing gravy strained and in a gravy boat.

        Step 7 – Strain: Place a fine mesh strainer over your serving bowl. Pour the gravy through the strainer. Use the back of a spoon or spatula to press out any residual “lumps.” Transfer it to a gravy bowl.

        Step 8 – Carve and serve: Use a sharp knife to slice the turkey breast into thin slices. Arrange them on a platter, and serve with warm gravy on the side, or, as I like to do, drizzle a little over the top.

        Person serving sliced roasted turkey breast with gravy on the side.

        Timetable for Cooking Turkey Breast in the Oven

        If you are wondering how long to cook a turkey breast in the oven, I have a foolproof timetable for you!

        However, there are a few essential factors to keep in mind. The cooking time will depend on your turkey’s weight.

        Additionally, the turkey must be thoroughly thawed. I always remove it from the fridge 30 to 60 minutes before cooking because the herbed butter spreads more easily, and the turkey is not cold.

        Following these guidelines, a bone-in turkey breast will take approximately 22-24 minutes per pound at 325°F (163°C).

        The internal temperature goal is 155°F (68°C) at the thickest part of the breast, as the carry-over heat will help raise it to the safe 165°F (74°C) as it rests.

        Turkey Breast WeightBone-In Turkey Breast Roast Time (325°F (163°C))
        2-3 pounds45 – 75 minutes
        4-6 pounds90 – 150 minutes
        7-8 pounds154 – 200 minutes

        How to Store and Reheat?

        We all love Thanksgiving leftovers, and I don’t want any of that gorgeous baked turkey breast and gravy to go to waste. Also, while roasting a turkey breast is typically associated with Thanksgiving, having some fresh turkey on hand is a great way to stock your fridge with some lean protein for lunch or dinner.

        Here are my best storage and reheating instructions:

        Storage: To store any leftovers, let the turkey breast and gravy cool to room temperature, then store them in separate airtight containers in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        To Reheat:

        • Turkey: I like to reheat turkey slices in a skillet with a splash of chicken or turkey broth, then cover and let them simmer gently over medium-low heat for 5-8 minutes. This will keep the meat moist and tender every time.
        • Gravy: Reheat in a small pot over medium heat until bubbly and warm, about 5 minutes. Your gravy will naturally thicken as it cools, so if it feels too thick, you can whisk in a little warm stock (in 2-tablespoon increments, depending on the amount you are reheating ) until it reaches a smooth texture.

        Expert Tips From My Recipe Testing

        Like with any turkey recipe, a few small details can make the difference between a dry turkey and one that’s juicy, tender, and golden brown. Below, I’m sharing what I’ve learned through years and years to make the best roasted turkey breast with gravy:

        Thaw your turkey: If your turkey breast is frozen, thaw it safely and completely in the fridge. Place the turkey (while it is still in its packaging) on a baking sheet (to catch any juices) and thaw in the fridge. It takes about 24 hours to thaw every 4 pounds of turkey, so your turkey breast can take anywhere from 36 – 48 hours, depending on the weight. Once thawed, the turkey should be cooked within 1-2 days.

        Remove the turkey from the fridge before cooking: I always let the turkey sit out for 30-60 minutes before roasting. I know it might sound like a small step, but it makes a big difference in helping the turkey cook evenly and stay juicy.

        Make the compound butter in advance: The herbed butter can be made 3-5 days ahead. Having it ready cuts down the prep time in half.

        Thickness of the turkey gravy: The gravy will thicken as it sits and even more so when stored in the fridge. You can thin it out with more stock (¼ cup at a time), just make sure to check the seasoning after each addition.

        Equipment you need: While you can bake the turkey breast in a large casserole dish, I had even greater success with a roasting pan (affiliate link) because you can easily roast the turkey and then make the gravy on the stove while it rests. You can prop the turkey up on the included V-Rack, but the veggies are enough to prop it straight if you do not have one.

        Use a meat thermometer: During my recipe testing, I used Digital Meat Thermometer with a probe. I especially liked that it lets you set a temperature alarm, so there is no guessing or opening and closing the oven.
        That said, you can use a regular instant-read thermometer. I would recommend checking at the 1 ½-hour mark, then every 10 minutes thereafter until the turkey reaches 155°F (68°C) at the thickest part of the breast.

        Don’t skip resting: Allowing the turkey to rest for at least 30 minutes helps redistribute the juices, resulting in a juicy, succulent turkey.

        Also, if you use a digital probe thermometer, do not remove it until after the turkey has rested. You don’t want all the good juices to escape! Letting the turkey rest with the thermometer still in place prevents any openings that could cause those flavorful juices to leak out, ensuring every bite is moist and delicious.

        Roasted turkey breast with gravy served on a plate with mashed potatoes and green beans.

        FAQs

        Should turkey breast be covered or uncovered when roasting?

        I did not think covering the turkey breast was necessary as we roasted it in a low-heat (325 degrees F) oven. The gentle heat cooks the turkey evenly and promotes a crispy, golden-brown skin; however, if you feel the breasts are browning too quickly (i.e., your oven is hotter than the recommended temperature), you can use a piece of foil to cover them.

        How do you keep turkey breast moist when reheating?

        I have found the best way to reheat turkey is to do so in a large skillet over medium heat with a splash of stock, either chicken broth, vegetable, or turkey. The added liquid helps retain moisture and flavor.

        How much turkey breast do I need per person?

        About ¾ lb of turkey breast per person is ideal. If you want leftovers, however, I would increase that to 1 pound of turkey breast per person. A 6-pound turkey breast will feed 6 people with some leftovers.

        Can I make the gravy ahead of time?

        Since this recipe relies on the drippings from the roasted turkey breast, it is best to make it right before serving. The good news is that it takes no more than 10 minutes from start to finish.

        What to Serve with Turkey Breast Roast

        Nothing beats the simplicity of this simple turkey breast recipe. It is easy and show-stopping at the same time. If you are serving a small gathering, I keep it simple with Maple Cranberry Sauce.

        But when I am making this roasted turkey breast for Thanksgiving or an elegant fall gathering, I make sure to have all the classic vegetable side dishes. My favorites include:

        More Turkey Recipes You Might Like

        This roasted turkey breast is one of my go-to recipes when I want something elegant but approachable. That said, I have a few other tested and trusted turkey recipes and techniques that I make every year, whether it’s for Thanksgiving or to bring to a smaller holiday party:

        • Whenever I crave a turkey recipe that cooks as quickly as chicken, I turn to my Roasted Turkey Loin recipe. I use my turkey tenderloin marinade, which doubles as a delicious sauce for drizzling later on.
        • If you’re feeling a little intimidated by cooking a whole bird, my Herb Roasted Turkey recipe will change that. It’s a beginner-friendly Thanksgiving classic that turns out tender, juicy, and golden brown every single time.
        • For something cozy and a little more casual, try my Roasted Turkey Legs. They’re prefectly crispy on the outside on juicy on the inside.
        • When I’m craving something simple yet satisfying, I make my Baked Turkey Wings. With just 10 minutes of prep, you’ll have tender and crisp wings that pair well with any vegetable sides.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        This post contains affiliate links. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases.

        Turkey breast roast served with gravy, potatoes, and green beans on a plate.
        Print

        Roasted Turkey Breast with Gravy Recipe

        Here's an easy recipe for Roasted Turkey Breast served with gravy on the side! Whether you are serving a smaller crowd for Thanksgiving or need a simple turkey dinner, this foolproof recipe will guide you through the process of making the turkey breast roast.
        Course Dinner
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 30 minutes
        Cook Time 2 hours
        Resting time 30 minutes
        Total Time 3 hours
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 658kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Turkey Breast:

        • 6 pound turkey breast skin and bone-in
        • ½ cup herb compound butter recipe below
        • 1 large onion sliced into thick rounds
        • 1 large carrot sliced in large chunks
        • 2 celery ribs sliced in large pieces
        • 3 cloves garlic peeled and rough chop
        • 1 lemon
        • ½ cup dry white wine such as sauvignon blanc or pinot gris (or chicken stock for an alcohol-free option)

        For The Herb Compound Butter:

        • 2 oz unsalted butter ½ stick – at room temperature
        • 1 ½ teaspoons fresh rosemary finely minced or ½ teaspoon dried rosemary
        • 1 ½ teaspoons fresh thyme finely minced or ½ teaspoon dried thyme
        • ½ teaspoon fresh sage finely minced or ¼ teaspoon dried sage
        • 1 clove fresh garlic finely minced or pressed
        • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For the turkey gravy:

        • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
        • 4 tablespoons all-purpose flour
        • 3 tablespoons drippings from roasting pan fat separated * it can be a little bit more or less
        • 3 cups chicken stock or turkey or vegetable stock
        • Salt and pepper to taste

        Instructions

        For The Turkey Breast:

        • Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F/232 degrees C.
        • Remove the turkey breast from the fridge 30 minutes or an hour before you are ready to roast it.
        • Meanwhile, make the herbed butter by mixing together butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, salt and pepper in a bowl until well combined.
        • Pat dry the turkey breast with paper towels on all sides.
        • Using your fingers, gently separate the top skin from the meat, being careful not to tear the skin.
        • Place three tablespoons of the softened herb butter underneath the skin on both sides.
        • Spread the remaining herb butter on the top and sides of the turkey skin.
        • Place one half of the lemon in the neck cavity rounded side up and secure the turkey skin with a toothpick*.
        • Spread onions, carrots, celery, and garlic in an even layer in a large roasting pan or a casserole dish. Pour in the wine (or chicken stock.)
        • Place the turkey breast on top of the vegetables. You may have to arrange the vegetables to “prop” the breast to stay upright.
        • If using a temperature probe, place it in the thickest part of the breast, being careful not to touch the bone. If you hit the bone, pull back by approximately ½ inch. Set it to alarm at 155 F/ 68 C. (see notes if you do not have a thermometer probe).
        • Place in the oven and immediately reduce the heat to 325 F/ 163 C.
        • Roast for 1 ½ -2 hours or until the internal temperature reaches 155 F/ 68 C.
        • Remove the turkey breast from the oven, place it on a cutting board, and lightly tent with foil. Do not remove the temperature probe if using it. Let it rest for 30 minutes. As it sits, it should reach 165 F/74 C with the help of the residual heat.

        To Make The Turkey Gravy:

        • Remove the vegetables from the roasting pan.
        • Pour the pan drippings into a glass measuring cup. Set aside so that the fat can separate, for about 10-15 minutes. Skim the fat off and discard. You should end up with three tablespoons of drippings. If you have more, you can discard the rest.
        • Place the roasting pan on top of the stove at medium-high heat. If you use an oven- and stove-safe roasting pan, you can use it to make the gravy. Otherwise, you can use a medium saucepan.
        • Melt the butter and then sprinkle the flour. Cook, stirring constantly with a whisk, until the flour is lightly browned, about 6-8 minutes. Keep a close eye on it and adjust the heat accordingly to prevent burning.
        • Add the drippings and stir, scraping up any “brown bits” from the bottom of the roasting pan.
        • Add the stock and bring to a boil, then lower the heat to a simmer and cook, stirring frequently, for 10-15 minutes until thickened to your desired consistency.
        • Taste the gravy and season with salt and pepper, if desired.
        • You can serve it as it is or if you prefer a smooth and silky gravy, you can strain it. To do that, place a mesh strainer over your serving bowl. Pour the now-cooked gravy into the strainer, and use the back of a spoon or spatula to press “lumps.”

        To Serve:

        • Remove the temperature prope.
        • Carve your turkey breast and transfer the slices onto a serving platter.
        • Serve with gravy on the side.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe serves 6 people (¾ lbs turkey breast) per person comfortably. The nutritional values below are per serving and include the calories coming from the gravy as well.
        • High and low temperature: We intentionally started with a high temperature to crisp up the skin and turned it down to a lower temperature to cook the breasts in a gentle heat. Also, because of the mild heat, we did not think that covering it with foil was necessary.
        • Lemon hack: Placing a whole lemon in the cavity helps prevent the turkey skin in the neck area from sinking, but it is an optional step.
        • Check doneness: A meat thermometer is the best tool for the most accurate results when cooking turkey. If you don’t have a probe thermometer, we recommend using a digital thermometer and following the time and temperature guide provided in the blog post above. Based on the weight of your turkey breast, it’s best to check doneness closer to the end of the cooking time.
        • Residual heat: We intentionally cooked the turkey to 155 degrees F, as the residual heat continued to cook it during the resting process. During our recipe testing, it took about 20 minutes of resting time for the roasted turkey breast to reach 165 degrees F.
        • Storage & serving leftovers: Leftover turkey breast and gravy can be refrigerated in airtight containers for up to 3 days. A foolproof method to reheat turkey is to slice the meat and place it in a pan or skillet. Add chicken or turkey broth, cover, and simmer over medium-low heat for 5-8 minutes. While the turkey breast is reheating, you can warm the leftover gravy in a small saucepan. 
        • Quantity of the gravy: The quantity will depend on the pan you use. When we used the roasting pan, there was a lot of evaporation because of the wide opening, resulting in 1 ½ cups of gravy. If you use a medium saucepan, you should end up with approximately 2 cups of sauce.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 658kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 102g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 279mg | Sodium: 1312mg | Potassium: 1348mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 2181IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-turkey-breast-with-gravy/feed/ 4
        Sweet Potato Stacks https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-stacks/ https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-stacks/#comments Thu, 03 Oct 2024 12:26:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78286 Versatile in flavor and impressive in appearance, this surprisingly easy-to-prepare sweet potato stackers recipe is the perfect side dish to…]]>

        Versatile in flavor and impressive in appearance, this surprisingly easy-to-prepare sweet potato stackers recipe is the perfect side dish to serve alongside just about any main dish. A great alternative to classic sweet potato casserole, this recipe takes about 20 minutes of prep time when you follow the uncomplicated step-by-step instructions below.

        After you give these crispy sweet potato stacks a try, we also have a Bacon Potato Roses and Sweet Potato Souffle recipe both of which are family favorites during the holiday season. And our Easy Mashed Sweet Potatoes are a fun spin on traditional mashed potatoes.

        Sweet potato stacks on a plate from the front view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        While these sweet potato stacks look like an elevated showstopper, this is truly a simple side dish—they’re essentially sliced sweet potatoes in a muffin pan. The rest of the ingredients may already be in your fridge and pantry. Otherwise, they can be easily obtained at your local grocer. Here’s what you’ll need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Sweet potatoes: We used the traditional orange sweet potatoes in this recipe. They’re the most common type of sweet potato that you can find in stores and hold their shape beautifully when sliced. Seek out relatively narrow potatoes of similar diameter so they will fit into the muffin tin cups uniformly.
        • Fresh thyme leaves: We prepared our sweet potato stacks recipe with fresh thyme, though dried thyme will work, if that’s what you have on hand. Just keep in mind that you’ll need to adjust the recipe to only 1 teaspoon, if you’re using dried. You can also swap in other fresh herbs, such as fresh rosemary and sage, if you prefer. But remember: small amounts go a long way!
        • Unsalted butter: If you only have salted butter in hand, that will work too. However, be sure to adjust the amount of additional salt you use in the seasoning step. While we love the flavor combination of butter and sweet potatoes, you can use an equal amount of olive oil or ghee for a dairy-free alternative.
        • Garlic: We tested this recipe with both fresh garlic and granulated garlic. We found that while both options are acceptable, the granulated garlic dispersed more evenly amongst the stacks, and we preferred the milder flavor overall. 
        • Seasonings: The naturally sweet flavor of the sweet potatoes doesn’t require much else by way of seasonings. And thus, we use an elegantly simple blend of Kosher salt and black pepper only. 
        • Maple Syrup (optional): If you’d like to lean into more of a sweet flavor profile, a drizzle of maple syrup adds a delicious touch. Alternatively, you can also make these sweet potato stacks with brown sugar.
        • Ground cinnamon (optional): If you’re adding maple syrup, ground cinnamon pairs well. Again, just remember that a little of this spice goes a long way.
        • Shredded Parmesan cheese (optional): If you’d like to make these sweet potato stackers more on the savory side, a ½ cup of grated parmesan cheese (or gruyere cheese) does the trick. Crispy parmesan sweet potato stacks are always a favorite when served with beef stew and pot roast.

        How To Make Sweet Potato Stacks in A Muffin Tin?

        Consider this recipe a grown-up version of a layered sweet potato bake. By finely slicing our sweet potatoes in muffin tins, we end up with lovely little stacks of potatoes that are crispy on the outside and buttery soft on the inside. 

        1. Preheat your oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C. 
        A collage of images showing how to prepare sweet potatoes to bake in a muffin pan.
        1. Grease your muffin tin: Using a pastry brush and 1 tablespoon of butter, apply a thin layer of coating to the inside of each individual muffin cup. Set the pan aside. 
        2. Slice your sweet potatoes: Using a mandolin or a sharp chef’s knife, slice the potatoes as thinly and evenly as possible. Transfer them to a large mixing bowl.
        3. Prepare your potatoes: In the bowl of sweet potatoes, add the rest of the melted butter, chopped thyme, garlic powder, kosher salt, and pepper. If you’re going with the maple syrup and cinnamon, add them at this step. Or, alternatively, if you’re using Parmesan for a savory touch, add the grated cheese at this step.
        4. Coat your sweet potatoes: Using tongs (or your clean hands work fine too!), toss the sweet potatoes to ensure that all of the slices are evenly coated with the rest of the ingredients in the bowl. 
        A collage of images showing how to make sweet potato stackers recipe.
        1. Assemble your sweet potato stacks: Layer the sweet potatoes in each muffin cup until they reach approximately ¼ inches above the rim. We used 30 (yes, 30!) ⅛ -inch slices of sweet potatoes in the batches pictured here.
        2. Bake: Bake your garlic butter sweet potato stacks for 30-35 minutes until tender and golden brown.
        3. Cool and serve: Remove the muffin tin from the oven and allow your sweet potato stacks to cool in the pan for 10 minutes. Then, delicately remove them from each muffin cup using an offset spatula (or a butter knife) and transfer them onto a serving platter. Garnish each stack with chopped thyme and serve while still warm.

        How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        If you plan on doing some advance meal preparations whether it be for a dinner party or holiday event, these muffin-tin sweet potatoes are the perfect flexible and easy side dish.

        • Make Ahead: These crispy sweet potato stacks can be prepped 1 day before you plan on serving them. Simply follow the instructions through Step 6, where you’ve assembled the stackers in the muffin tin, then wrap them tightly with aluminum foil and refrigerate. The next day, remove them from the refrigerator to bring to room temperature about 30 minutes before you plan on baking them, then bake as directed. 
        • Storage: If you have leftover sweet potato stackers, they will keep in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. Be sure to bring them to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container.
        • Reheating: To reheat your leftover sweet potato stacks, place them on a baking sheet (there’s no need to grease it this time). Warm your stackers in a 350-degree F oven for 5-7 minutes, or until heated through.

        If you make your own Sweet Potato Stacks following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Other Potato Recipes You Might Also Like

        Sweet potatoes cooked in a muffin tin on a plate.
        Print

        Sweet Potato Stacks Recipe

        Sweet potato stacks with crispy edges and tender centers, baked to perfection with butter and thyme—a showstopping side dish perfect for any time of the year, but especially for Thanksgiving or Christmas dinners when you want to impress.
        Course Vegetarian Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 35 minutes
        Total Time 55 minutes
        Servings 12 stacks
        Calories 98kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 – 4 sweet potatoes peeled (approximately 2 ½ pounds)
        • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme minced – plus more as garnish (or 1 teaspoon dried thyme)
        • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter + 1 tablespoon for greasing the muffin tin (melted and cooled divided)
        • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 3 tablespoons maple syrup optional
        • ½ teaspoon cinnamon optional

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C. Brush each muffin cup of a 12-cup muffin tin using 1 tablespoon of butter (for the whole muffin tin). Set it aside.
        • Using a mandolin slicer or a sharp chef’s knife, slice the potatoes as thinly (and evenly) as possible. Transfer the sliced potatoes to a large mixing bowl.
        • In the bowl, add the melted butter, chopped thyme, garlic powder, kosher salt, and pepper. If using, add the maple syrup, and ground cinnamon.
        • Using tongs or clean hands, toss to ensure that all of the potato slices are evenly coated with the rest of the ingredients in the bowl.
        • Layer the sweet potatoes in each muffin cup until they reach approximately ¼ inches above the rim. We used 30 ⅛ -inch slices of sweet potatoes.
        • Bake sweet potato stacks for 30-35 minutes until tender and golden brown.
        • Remove from the oven, let cool in the pan for 10 minutes. Using a butter knife or an offset spatula, carefully remove them from the muffin tray and transfer them onto a serving platter.
        • Garnish with chopped thyme and serve while still warm.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 12 roasted sweet potato stacks. The nutritional values below are per stack.
        • The size of the potatoes: When shopping for this recipe, pick out potatoes that are similar in size and large enough to fit in a muffin cup. 
        • Evenly sliced sweet potatoes are essential: The most crucial aspect of this recipe is that your sweet potato slices are thin and uniform in thickness (otherwise, baking times will be inconsistent). Using a mandoline slicer makes this task foolproof. If you don’t have one, then the next best option is a very sharp knife. Slicing them thinly with a knife requires a bit more patience, but it is doable.  Do your best to slice them as thinly (and evenly) as possible.
        • Greased muffin cups are the key to crispy sweet potato stacks: When testing this recipe, we tried lining the muffin cups with parchment paper, but the potatoes wouldn’t crisp. Don’t be shy when greasing your muffin cups – use plenty of butter. 
        • Layer plenty of sweet potatoes in your stacks: The sliced sweet potatoes in your muffin pan will compress while baking, so be sure to fill your muffin cups just slightly above the rim to get the most height out of your stackers. We used 30 slices of sweet potatoes in each muffin tin. You might consider it a lot, but it will shrink after it is baked.
        • There is no need to cover it with foil: During our recipe testing, we did not feel the need to cover the sweet potato stack with aluminum foil during the baking process. 
        • Make ahead: You can prep everything a day before, cover it tightly with foil, and store it in the fridge. On the day you plan to serve, remove it from the oven 30 minutes before you plan to bake it and bake it as directed in the recipe.
        • Storage: Bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 98kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 129mg | Potassium: 213mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 8160IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 0.5mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-stacks/feed/ 2
        Muffin Tin Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/muffin-pan-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/muffin-pan-potatoes/#comments Sun, 25 Aug 2024 21:31:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1836 If you’re a fan of potato dishes like we are, be sure to check out our other easy potato recipes…]]>

        If you’re a fan of potato dishes like we are, be sure to check out our other easy potato recipes like Smashed Fingerlings—crispy on the outside, tender on the inside, and perfect for dipping—or our creamy and comforting Rosemary Garlic Mashed Potatoes. These dishes are just as delicious and easy to prepare as this muffin tin potatoes gratin recipe, offering more ways to enjoy this versatile vegetable!

        Scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin baked until golden brown on a plate.

        Ingredients You’ll Need for Muffin Pan Potatoes

        Baking potatoes in a muffin pan is easy and quick. Plus, this recipe is made with a short list of simple ingredients readily available at the grocery store. We will need the following:

        Ingredients to make scalloped potatoes in muffin pan.
        • Potatoes: You can use a few types of white potatoes to cook in muffin cups. Go for Russet potatoes if you prefer a fluffy and light texture (similar to french fries) or use yellow potatoes, like Yukon gold potatoes, for a creamy, tender bite. If both are unavailable, red potatoes are the next best substitute.
        • Butter: We need unsalted butter to grease the muffin tins, but olive oil or avocado oil cooking spray can also be used.
        • Garlic: Fresh garlic offers a delicious savory punch, but garlic powder is a good substitute for a milder garlic taste.
        • Cheese: Parmesan cheese has a rich, slightly nutty flavor that works beautifully with scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin. Gruyere cheese or cheddar cheese would be just as delicious.
        • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper makes the cheesy potatoes to shine. But depending on your preference and serving accompaniments, you can try additional seasonings, such as chili powder, ground cumin, or Italian seasoning.
        • Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme offers a delicate and subtle earthy flavor, but you can substitute with dried thyme if fresh isn’t available, using about 1 teaspoon. Alternatively, you can other herbs like fresh rosemary, fresh parsley, dill, or chives, based on what you have on hand.
        • Cream: Heavy cream will provide a rich, buttery flavor, but whole milk can also be used.

        How to Make Muffin Tin Potatoes?

        Making scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin is straightforward and rewarding. The potato mixture can be prepped and ready in 15 minutes, with the oven doing the rest. Follow the below step-by-step instructions to create delicious, individual muffin tin potato stacks that are guaranteed to impress.

        1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C.
        A collage of images showing how to make muffin tin potatoes gratin.
        1. Prepare potato slices: Slice each into 1/4-inch thin slices using a mandolin slicer. If you do not own a mandoline, you can use a sharp knife to slice them as thin and evenly as possible.
        2. Grease muffin tray: Generously coat each muffin cup with the melted butter using a pastry brush.
        3. Begin stacking potatoes: Stack 3-4 slices of potatoes in each muffin cup of the prepared muffin tin. Then, sprinkle one-third of the garlic, parmesan cheese, Kosher salt, pepper, and thyme over each stack.
        A collage of images showing how to make muffin tin scalloped potatoes.
        1. Add a second layer of potatoes: Top each stack with 3-4 more slices of potatoes, then sprinkle with more garlic, cheese, salt, pepper, and thyme. Repeat this step until the muffin cup is fully filled with sliced potatoes. Continue to fill the rest of the muffin cups following the same order of ingredients.
        2. Add heavy cream: Gently pour one tablespoon of the heavy cream over each potato stack.
        3. Bake: Transfer it to the preheated oven and bake for 25-30 minutes, until tender and golden brown.
        4. Cool and serve: Cool in the muffin pan for 5 minutes, then run a knife around the edges, remove the potatoes, and serve. Garnish with fresh thyme leaves, if desired.

        How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

        While these muffin tin potatoes are best enjoyed fresh from the oven, they can be made ahead, stored, and reheated for later enjoyment. Here are some tips to help you make the most of these muffin tin potato stacks:

        • Make Ahead: Prepare the scalloped potato cups as instructed, but do not bake. Cover tightly with foil and place in the fridge for up to 1 day. When ready to bake, remove it from the refrigerator 30 minutes before baking it in the oven. Bake as directed.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Be sure to cool the potatoes completely before storing them. Warm potatoes will create excess moisture and condensation, making them soggy.
        • Reheat: Reheat the leftover mini potato gratin stacks in a preheated low-heat oven (300 degrees F) or toaster oven to ensure they stay crispy and delicious. 

        What to Serve It With?

        You can serve muffin pan scalloped potatoes as a side dish or an appetizer. They are perfect when served with eggs for breakfast or your favorite meat dishes. Some of my favorite dishes to serve them with are:

        Potatoes cooked in muffin cups served with eggs for breakfast.
        • Meat: Whether serving these potatoes as part of a casual weeknight dinner or an elevated side dish for special occasions and Christmas dinners, meat and potatoes are a match made in heaven. The crispy cheesy potato stacks go especially well with Prime Rib or Beef Tenderloin and a fresh salad.
        • Turkey: You can’t have Thanksgiving without potatoes, and what better way to impress your guests than with a platter of scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin. These are best served to a crowd with a classic Thanksgiving Turkey. Or, you could try Baked Turkey Wings or Baked Turkey Breasts when serving a small crowd.
        • Breakfast: Don’t save these potatoes just for the holidays. Think of them as a year-round recipe that can be served as part of your breakfast with eggs and bacon or alongside Feta and Spinach Frittata. If you are inspired, make cheesy bacon potato stacks by tossing in some cooked and crumbled bacon (or turkey bacon) between the slices.
        • Snack: There’s nothing more comforting than potatoes when you need something to munch on. Dollop the tops with sour cream or with Guacamole for a fun and delicious appetizer.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        While the recipe is straightforward, there are a few things to remember to succeed on your first try. Here are some of my expert tips for the best muffin tin potatoes recipe:

        • Check for doneness: The cooking time will vary depending on the thickness of the potato slices. If you can easily pierce the center of the potato stacks with a knife and they appear to have crispy edges, they are ready.
        • Pay attention to the size of the potatoes: No matter what potato you choose, muffin tin scalloped potatoes are best made with long and narrow-sized potatoes. As you shop for this recipe, take a few extra minutes to look for potatoes roughly the same size and diameter as your muffin tin.
        • Peel the potatoes: Peeling the potato skin is optional, but during our recipe testing, we found potatoes without the skins provided the best texture.
        • Mandoline will create the most uniform slices: A mandoline is a handy kitchen tool that will give you even slices. A sharp knife and a steady hand will suffice if you do not own a mandoline.
        • Brush the muffin cups generously with butter: Butter is potatoes’ best friend. We want to be generous when brushing the muffin tins with butter, as this will create crispier potatoes and easy removal. We do not recommend using parchment paper liners for this recipe.
        • Layer or toss with the seasonings: We found it easier to stack the potatoes, and then layer with the seasonings. However, you also have the option to toss the potato slices with the garlic, cheese, salt, pepper, and thyme in a large mixing bowl, then stack as directed.

        More Potato Recipes

        If you make this Muffin Tin Potatoes recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Muffin tin potatoes garnished with thyme.
        Print

        Muffin Tin Potatoes Recipe

        Muffin Tin Potatoes is the easiest yet most delicious appetizer or side dish. Stacked potato slices layered with garlic, parmesan cheese, and fresh thyme baked in a muffin cup to perfection.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 30 minutes
        Total Time 40 minutes
        Servings 12 servings
        Calories 114kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 medium russet potatoes peeled, about 1 ½ pounds
        • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
        • 4 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed or 2 teaspoons garlic powder
        • ½ cup Parmesan cheese grated
        • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper
        • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme
        • 12 tablespoons heavy cream or whole milk

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C.
        • Slice each potato into 1/4-inch (or thinner) slices using a mandoline. If you do not have one, use a sharp knife to slice them as thin and evenly as you can.
        • Using the pastry brush, generously coat each muffin cup with the melted butter.
        • Stack three slices of potatoes in each muffin cup. Lightly sprinkle one-third of the garlic, parmesan cheese, Kosher salt, pepper, and thyme over each stack.
        • Top each stack with three more slices of potatoes, then sprinkle a third of the garlic, parmesan cheese, Kosher salt, pepper, and thyme. Repeat this step again until you reach the top of the muffin tin cup.
        • Continue with the rest of the muffin cups, following the same steps.
        • Gently pour one tablespoon of the heavy cream over each muffin cup.
        • Bake for 25-30 minutes, until tender.
        • Let cool in the muffin pan for 5 minutes, then gently remove from the pan and serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe, baked in a 12-cup standart muffin tin, make 12 stacked potatoes. The nutrition information below is per potato stack.
        • Generously butter the muffin tins with butter: Do not skip buttering the muffin tins generously with butter; otherwise, it’ll be hard to get the butter stacks after they are baked. We tested this recipe with parchment muffin liners and thought the stacked potatoes were not as crispy.
        • Number of potato slices per cup: The number of slices per cup depends on the thickness of your potato slices. Aim for filling them all the way to the top and pack as many as you can. They tend to shrink as they bake.
        • Thickness of the slices: While a mandoline does a beautiful job, a sharp knife is just as efficient. And if potato slices are a bit thicker, do not worry; it will still bake beautifully. You’ll see in the video below (that I made in 2017) even thicker potato slices bake beautifully.
        • Covering it with foil: During our recipe, we found some versions of this recipe that recommended covering it with aluminum foil while baking. We tried that and did not feel it was necessary.
        • Storage: Bring the leftover potato stacks to room temperature, place them in an airtight container, and store them in the refrigerator for up to three days. Reheat in a low heat oven (250-300 degrees F) for 8-10 minutes or until they are warmed to your liking.
        • This recipe is adapted from Martha Steward’s Muffin Pan Potato Gratins recipe.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 114kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 267mg | Potassium: 174mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 340IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 0.5mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/muffin-pan-potatoes/feed/ 28
        Almond Flour Banana Muffins https://foolproofliving.com/easy-banana-nut-muffins/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-banana-nut-muffins/#comments Tue, 20 Aug 2024 15:22:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15318 This banana muffins with almond flour recipe is inspired by my Almond Flour Banana Bread. These muffins are a quick,…]]>

        This banana muffins with almond flour recipe is inspired by my Almond Flour Banana Bread. These muffins are a quick, easy, portable alternative and add to my library of Recipes with Almond Flour.

        If you love baking with almond flour, be sure to also check out my Apple Almond Flour Muffins, Carrot Almond Flour Muffins, Almond Flour Blueberry Muffins, and Zucchini Almond Flour Muffins.

        Gluten free banana muffins with almond flour and chocolate chips on a plate from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        These banana almond muffins are made with simple ingredients you probably already have in your pantry and fridge. We will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Almond Flour: Go for blanched almond flour for best results. You can either pick up a bag from the store or make your own DIY Almond Flour. Almond meal (ground almonds with the skins) can be used instead, but the muffins will turn out more dense.
        • Baking Powder
        • Baking Soda
        • Ground Cinnamon: A hint of cinnamon adds a delicate background warmth.
        • Kosher Salt: A pinch of salt is needed to enhance that banana flavor.
        • Extra Ripe Bananas: For best results, use overripe bananas. Brown-speckled bananas provide natural sweetness and make super moist banana muffins.
        • Sweetener: My favorite sugar is coconut sugar, but using an equal amount of brown sugar or pure maple syrup would also work. Alternatively, your favorite keto sweeteners, like monk fruit or Erythritol (affiliate link) can be used as well. If you have less of a sweet tooth, omit the sugar for a no added sugar version.
        • Large Eggs: Eggs provide the right amount of lift and structure, especially for gluten-free almond flour. Bring the eggs to room temperature before mixing.
        • Vanilla Extract: A hint of warm vanilla adds just another level of flavor.

        Optional Add-Ins

        • Dark Chocolate Chips: Toss in about ¼ cup chocolate chips (affiliate link) and have some extra on hand for sprinkling on top too.
        • Chopped Nuts: Give them a banana nut muffin vibe with ¼ cup chopped walnuts, almonds, or pecans.
        • Dried Fruits: Add a pop of sweetness with raisins, dried cranberries, or dried cherries.
        • Make it paleo friendly: For the paleo version, in place of 1 teaspoon of baking powder, you can mix together 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar.

        How to Make Banana Muffins with Almond Flour?

        Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos to make these gluten-free banana muffins:

        A collage of images showing how to make this recipe.
        1. Prep: Position the oven rack in the center of the oven. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F (180 C). Line a 12-cup muffin pan with parchment paper muffin liners.
        2. Mix dry ingredients: In a large bowl, mix together almond flour, baking powder, baking soda, ground cinnamon, and salt.
        3. Whisk wet ingredients: In another large mixing bowl, whisk mashed bananas, coconut sugar, eggs, and vanilla extract until thoroughly combined.
        4. Make muffin batter: Place the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients and stir with a rubber spatula until just combined. Do not overmix.
        Almond banana muffin batter in a muffin tin.
        1. Fill muffin cups: Divide the batter into each muffin cup, filling about ¾ way full. If preferred, sprinkle them with chocolate chips.
        2. Bake: Bake muffins for 25-30 minutes. The muffins are ready when a toothpick or cake tester inserted into the center of the muffin comes out clean.
        3. Cool: Cool in the muffin tin for 10-15 minutes. Then, place the muffins on a cooling rack to cool completely.

        How to Store, Freeze, & Thaw?

        What I love most about this almond flour banana muffin recipe is that you can make a batch and enjoy it throughout the week, as long as they are stored properly. Here are my best storage and freezing tips:

        • Storage: Store muffins in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 2 days. For longer storage, store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: Wrap each muffin in plastic wrap, then store it in a plastic freezer bag. Muffins can be frozen for up to 3 months.
        • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the fridge, or on the kitchen counter to room temperature.
        • Reheat: If you prefer your muffins warm, reheat in a low oven (300 degrees F) for 5-10 minutes, or pop one in the microwave for 5-10 seconds, until warm.
        Banana and almond flour muffins in a muffin tin right after they come out of the oven.

        Expert Tips

        While this recipe is pretty straightforward and easy to make. There are a few things that I’d like to share to help you make the best almond flour banana nut muffins on your first try:

        • Ripe bananas: Use extra ripe bananas for natural fruity sweetness and a better texture. I’ve found the best way to mash bananas is either with a potato masher or the back of a fork. Since bananas vary so much in size, it’s best to weigh the bananas after mashing (rather than using a measuring cup) to ensure the most precise measurement and the best consistency. 
        • Do not overmix: Just like traditional muffins with regular flour, do not overmix the batter. Overmixing will make them dense, which will result in them loosing their fluffy texture.
        • Don’t overbake: Start checking the muffins with the toothpick test at the 25-minute mark. The muffins will look underbaked, but they continue to bake while cooling.
        • Make it vegan: Vegan almond flour banana muffins will not rise as much but taste good. For the best egg substitute, substitute the eggs with flax eggs (1 flax egg = 1 tablespoon flaxseed meal + 3 tablespoons water).
        • Use parchment liners: Parchment paper liners (affiliate link) are the best and most efficient way to bake almond flour muffins and prevent sticking.

        FAQs

        Can I make this recipe with coconut flour?

        No. coconut flour is super absorbent and will alter the texture of the muffins dramatically. Stick to finely ground almond flour or almond meal.

        Why did my almond flour muffins sink?

        Muffins made with almond flour can sink if they are underbaked or overmixed, if there is too much moisture in the batter, if the oven temperature is lower than what is listed in the recipe, or if the leavening agents are not fresh.


        If you try this Almond Banana Muffin recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Almond Flour Recipes You Might Like

        Almond Flour Banana Muffins on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Almond Flour Banana Muffins

        Moist and fluffy Almond Flour Banana Muffins that are gluten-free, dairy-free and paleo-friendly. Quick and easy to make, these low-carb muffins can be served as a healthy breakfast or snack.
        Course Naturally sweetened dessert
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 12 muffins
        Calories 213kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 cups almond flour
        • 1 teaspoon baking powder
        • ½ teaspoon baking soda
        • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • 3 bananas overripe & mashed
        • ¼ cup coconut sugar or brown sugar or keto friendly sweetener of choice
        • 3 large eggs at room temperature
        • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
        • ¼ cup chocolate chips optional

        Instructions

        • Place a rack in the center of the oven and preheat to 350 degrees F (180 C). Line a 12-cup muffin tin with parchement paper liners. Set it aside.
        • Prepare the dry ingredients by placing almond flour, baking powder, baking soda, ground cinnamon, and salt in a large bowl. Whisk to combine all ingredients.
        • Prepare the wet ingredients by placing the mashed bananas, coconut sugar, eggs, and vanilla extract in a separate large bowl and whisking to combine thoroughly.
        • Place the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients and stir until just combined. Do not over mix.
        • Divide the batter, using about 2.5 oz. of muffin batter per cup, into each muffin cup so that you have 12 muffins. If using, sprinkle the top of the muffins with chocolate chips.
        • Place in the oven and bake for 25-30 minutes. A toothpick or cake tester should come out clean when inserted into the center of the muffin. At first, muffins might look underdone, but they will continue to cook while cooling in the muffin tin.
        • Let it cool in the pan for 10-15 minutes before removing it and placing it on a wire rack for at least 1 hour before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 12 muffins. The nutritional values below are per muffin and do not include the calories from optional chocolate chips.
        • For paleo banana bread muffins: To make almond flour banana muffins that are paleo friendly, mix together 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar and use it in place of baking powder.
        • Store: After they come to room temperature, leftover muffins can be stored in an airtight container. They will stay fresh for up to 5 days as long as they are stored in the fridge.
        • Freezing and thawing: Almond banana muffins can be stored in the freezer for up to 3 months. To prevent freezer burn, place them in an airtight container and remove all the air. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 213kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Trans Fat: 0.004g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 200mg | Potassium: 122mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 79IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 1mg

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/easy-banana-nut-muffins/feed/ 44
        Grilled Corn On The Cob https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-corn-on-the-cob/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-corn-on-the-cob/#comments Tue, 13 Aug 2024 14:08:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77631 In this foolproof guide, I’ll show you how to cook corn on the grill with and without the husk, as…]]>

        In this foolproof guide, I’ll show you how to cook corn on the grill with and without the husk, as well as other essential tips: how to buy corn for grilling, customize your seasoning, tailor your menu, and the best time and temperature to cook corn on the cob on the grill.

        If you prefer a quicker alternative to cooking corn on the cob, be sure to check out our Air Fryer Corn on The Cob recipe.

        Grilled sweet corn on a plate from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need for Grilled Corn

        It only takes a handful of fresh, simple ingredients to make this tasty summer staple:

        Ingredients for the recipe.
        • Ears of corn: We used six ears of fresh sweet corn to make this recipe, but you can easily multiply the recipe and use more. For the best result, do your best to pick the freshest corn. Take your time to examine each ear of corn to avoid moldy, wet, or limp ones while at the grocery store.
        • Olive oil: Olive oil is only necessary if you’re grilling corn without the husk, as it helps the corn develop that external char.
        • Butter: Though optional, a few tablespoons of unsalted butter can add richness and depth to your grilled, seasoned corn on the cob.
        • Seasoning: After cooking corn on the grill, you only need a sprinkle of kosher salt and black pepper to bring out the veggie’s natural flavors.

        How to Grill Corn on the Cob?

        Below, I’ll show you two ways to make this recipe for barbeque corn on the cob: 1.) grilled corn with the husk on and 2.) grilled corn with the husk removed (AKA “husked corn”). 

        In the Husk

        Grilling fresh corn with the husk on is an excellent option for those who prefer juicier, sweeter cobs. The soaked husks keep the kernels moist by “steaming” them, though this method doesn’t produce as much char as naked cobs.

        A collage of images showing how to grill corn on the cob in the husk.
        1. Remove the silk strands: Peel back the husks from the corn, ensuring they remain attached to the cob. Then, remove as many silk strings as possible before bringing the husks back over the cob, covering the kernels again.
        2. Soak the corn cobs: Fill a large pot with tap water and place the corn inside. Let the cobs and their husks soak for fifteen minutes.
        3. Prepare the grill: Preheat the gas grill to medium-high heat (about 450 degrees F.).
        4. Dry the soaked corn cobs: Remove the whole corn cobs from their water bath and shake them to remove as much water as possible.
        5. Grill: Place the corn on the medium-hot grill and cook for 15 minutes—uncovered—while rotating the cobs every 3-5 minutes. At the end of 15 minutes, each side should have an even level of cooking.
        6. Serve: When ready, remove the corn cobs from the grill and remove their husks. Serve them with butter, salt, and pepper (if desired), and enjoy!

        Without Husks

        I recommend grilling husked corn on the cob if you prefer a smokier, more prominent char on your veggies.

        1. Preheat the grill: Heat the grill to medium-high heat (about 450 degrees F.).
        A collage of images showing how to grill corn on the cob without husks on a gas grill.
        1. Prepare the corn: Remove husks and silk strands from the corn cobs, then brush each side with a generous layer of olive oil.
        2. Place the sweet corn on the grill: Place the corn cobs on the hot grill grates. Keeping the grill uncovered, cook the corn until it reaches your desired char level, rotating the cobs every 3-4 minutes (about 15 minutes in total). Finally, pierce a kernel with a sharp knife or fork to test for doneness. Your corn is ready if the kernels are tender, juicy, and lightly charred.
        3. Serve: Remove the grilled cobs from the grill and serve them with butter, kosher salt, and pepper (if using).

        Seasoning Ideas for Grilled Corn

        It’s no secret that salt and butter are iconic additions to grilled corn on the cob. However, the best grilled corn seasoning is one you can customize to fit any flavor profile.

        Below are a few of my favorite ways to take basic corn seasoning to the next level.

        • Butter and salt: Though a staple, plain butter and a sprinkle of salt don’t have to be boring. You can infuse your grilled sweet corn with complex, robust notes using compound butter (hello, Baked Garlic Butter!), garlic, and fresh herbs. Or, you can add lemon zest and pepper to melted butter for a zestier and brighter corn seasoning option.
        • Elote (Mexican Street Corn): Fresh, tangy flavors are at your fingertips when you use this Mexican seasoning for corn on the cob on the grill. All you need are a few simple ingredients—like lime juice, mayonnaise, cotija cheese, sour cream, and chili powder—and you’re ready to please any crowd. If you are short on time but love the flavors of Mexican street corn, try our Elote Corn Dip.
        • Barbecue sauce: With similarly smoky and sweet undertones, BBQ corn on the cob pairs brilliantly with BBQ sauce. You can even make homemade barbecue sauce to ensure a perfect flavor match.
        • Cajun spice: Want to give your corn a touch of spice? My Blackened Seasoning packs all the bold, spicy taste of Louisiana cuisine into one simple seasoning mix.
        • Parmesan cheese and basil: You can put a gourmet spin on your barbequed corn on the cob by sprinkling it with Parmesan cheese and fresh chopped basil—a herby, cheesy, and undeniably delicious combination.

        How to Store and Freeze?

        Of course, grill-roasted corn on the cob tastes best right after cooking. However, it’s also great for meal prep, including short- and long-term storage. 

        • Storage: After cooking corn on the grill, let your leftovers reach room temperature. To avoid sogginess, I recommend wrapping the cooled cobs in plastic wrap (or aluminum foil) and placing them in an airtight container. You can then store the cobs in the refrigerator for 3-5 days. 
        • Freezing: You can freeze your BBQ corn as whole cobs or just the corn kernels. Either way, begin by letting the corn come to room temperature. If you want to preserve the entire cobs, wrap them in tin foil or plastic wrap, then place them in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. Or, you can remove the corn kernels and put them in an airtight container. You can then store your corn (whole or cut) in the freezer for up to 2-3 months.
        • Thawing: To thaw your grilled corn, transfer it to the fridge overnight until ready to reheat.
        • Reheat: There are three options to reheat your grilled corn cobs. You can put them on a medium-heat grill, heat them in the oven at 350 degrees F. for five minutes, or (if you’re short on time) microwave them in 30-second increments until warmed.

        How to Serve Grilled Corn on the Cob

        Want to fill out your menu after cooking corn on the cob on the grill? Here, you’ll find all the grilled corn recipes you need to fill your table, whether you’re in the mood for a BBQ classic or a light lunch solution.

        • Burgers: Can you imagine a better match than juicy burgers and grilled corn cobs? Not me! I can’t resist serving my tender kernels with a loaded Bacon and Avocado Burger and a side of super-fresh Vegan Coleslaw or creamy Deviled Egg Potato Salad.
        • Grilled meats and seafood: If you’re in the mood for a savory, protein-packed main, barbecue corn on the cob compliments nearly any grilled meat or seafood dish. I love serving this corn recipe with succulent seafood, like my smoky Grilled Salmon or citrusy Grilled Mahi Mahi. Or, when I’m craving a little spice, Grilled Harissa Chicken is the perfect way to enjoy authentic North African eats at home.
        • Salads: This juicy corn recipe pairs incredibly well with garden-fresh salads, adding irresistibly smoky, mildly sweet undertones to all your favorite recipes. I love using this easy grilled corn in Mexican-inspired dishes, like my Street Corn Salad Recipe, tender Corn Black Bean Salad, and zesty Cowboy Caviar.
        Barbequed corn on the cob with and without the husk shown.

        Expert Tips

        If you want to make the most flavorful, tender grilled corn cobs, you’re in the right place. This simple guide has tips on everything you’ll need, from how to grill corn on a gas stove to selecting the best produce.

        • Charcoal grilled corn on the cob: If you prefer cooking corn on a charcoal grill, be sure that you never leave your veggies alone—especially when you plan on grilling the cobs with their husks. The husks may catch fire when the corn sits over direct heat, causing a minor flare-up. If this happens, move the corn to the cool side of the grill, close the lid, and wait until the flames dissipate.
        • Grilling corn inside on a gas stove: Want the savory, smoky flavor of grilled corn without the hassle of outdoor grilling? You can make this recipe indoors by cooking corn on a grill pan over a gas stove. However, keep in mind that grilling corn on a grill pan takes a bit more time than cooking it on the grill, so be patient.
        • Tips for buying corn: There are a few key things to consider when selecting the best corn. Try to choose corn cobs with the following: 1.) firm, plump, and even kernels; 2.) light tan, sticky silk; and 3.) bright green, intact husks. Though fresh corn is easiest to find when in season, as long as you avoid old or moldy-looking produce, you should be able to find corn year-round at your local grocery store.
        • Without soaking: If you’re grilling corn with the husk on, I highly recommend soaking the veggies beforehand, ensuring the kernels come out tender and moist. Of course, you can cook the cobs without soaking them first, but the kernels are prone to drying out after grilling, and the husks are more likely to burn.
        • Dry out: Though achieving photo-ready grill marks is tempting, you mustn’t accidentally overcook your corn—especially when you try to char corn cobs with their husks still on. Too much cooking can dry out the corn kernels, making them tough and flavorless.
        • Keep a close eye on it: Because corn is susceptible to overcooking, it’s essential to keep a close eye on your cobs during the grilling process. Furthermore, you must rotate your corn while cooking to ensure equal cooking around the cob.

        FAQs

        It’s easy to make corn on the cob grill. However, if you want to know more about this beginner-friendly recipe, I’ve answered all your questions below.

        How long do you grill corn on the cob?

        I recommend grilling corn cobs at 425 degrees F. for about 15 minutes, rotating them as needed. However, you might adjust your grilling time slightly, depending on your ideal level of char.

        Do you have to boil corn before grilling?

        If you want to reduce grilling time, you can parboil corn before grilling. However, this step is unnecessary, and there’s virtually no difference in taste or quality—as long as you grill your corn with a high enough heat.

        How to soak corn before grilling?

        Pre-soaking is a great way to give your kernels maximum tenderness and flavor when you want to grill corn on the cob in the husk. To soak your cobs, remove their silk strands, replace their external husks, and place them in a pot filled with cool water for fifteen minutes. When ready, shake off as much water as possible, and they’re ready to grill!

        Can you freeze grilled corn on the cob?

        Definitely! To do so, let your corn cobs reach room temperature, wrap them in tin foil or plastic wrap, and place them in a freezer-safe bag with as much air removed as possible. Then, you can freeze the grilled corn for 2-3 months.

        Can you grill corn on the cob frozen?

        Though not ideal, you can undoubtedly grill frozen corn on the cob. To do so, begin by slightly thawing the frozen corn (letting it rest for 30 minutes to an hour at room temperature should suffice). Then, brush it with olive oil and cook it on a 400-degree F. grill for 15-20 minutes, rotating them occasionally until the kernels become tender and have a slight char.

        How to tell when grilled corn on the cob is done?

        You can tell when your corn is done grilling by piercing one of its kernels with a fork or knife. Your cobs should be ready when the kernels are tender, juicy, and have a little char.

        Other Corn Recipes You Might Like

        If you love roasted corn on the grill, you’re in luck! With these easy recipes, you can enjoy corn’s tender-crisp, sweet flavor any day of the week.

        Grilled corn on the cob on a plate from the front view.
        Print

        Grilled Corn on The Cob Recipe

        Grilling corn on the cob is an easy way to prepare a fresh, sweet, and smoky side that’s fit for any occasion: weeknight dinners, outdoor cookouts, summer get-togethers, and beyond.
        Course Vegan side dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Soaking time (optional) 15 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 157kcal

        Ingredients

        • 6 ears corn
        • ¼ cup olive oil use only if grilling without husks
        • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter more as needed (optional)
        • Kosher salt and pepper to taste

        Instructions

        To prepare corn with husks:

        • Peel the husks back from the corn, keeping them attached to the cob.
        • Remove the silk strands as best as you can. Bring the husks back to cover the kernels and the cob.
        • Fill a large pot with tap water and place the cobs in the pot. Let them soak for 15 minutes.
        • Preheat the grill to medium-high heat, about 425 degrees F.
        • Remove the corn cobs from the water, shaking to remove as much water as possible.
        • Place cobs directly on the grill grate and grill for 15 minutes, uncovered, rotating every 3-5 minutes for even cooking.
        • Remove the husks from the cob and serve the corn with butter, kosher salt, and pepper, if desired.

        To prepare the corn without husks:

        • Preheat the grill to medium-high heat, about 425 degrees F.
        • Remove the husks and silk from the corn cobs.
        • Generously brush the olive oil over all the corn cobs.
        • Place the corn cobs on the grill grate. Grill, rotating every 3-4 minutes, and cook, uncovered, for 15 minutes or to your desired level of “char.” The corn is done when the kernels are tender and have a slight char. You can check by piercing a kernel with a knife or fork; it should be tender and juicy.
        • Remove and serve with butter, kosher salt, and pepper, if using.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes six grilled corn on the cob. The nutritional information below does not include the calories coming from the optional butter.
        • Soaked or not soaked: This recipe was tested as noted above (i.e., with soaked corn cob husks), but we also tried it without soaking the corn with husks first. The cob with soaked husks produced a moist cob, while the non-soaked husk corn tasted slightly dry.
        • With or without husks: Grilling with soaked husks vs. no husks is based on preference. The soaked husk is moist, but it results in a limited char. By contrast, the “naked” corn has a nice char and smoky flavor, but it isn’t as moist.
        • Keep a close eye on it: It is important to stay with the corn as it’s being grilled because the oil can cause flare-ups. The husks can also catch fire when unattended.
        • Storage: Barbecue corn on the cob tastes best on the day it is grilled. However, you can store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. To avoid sogginess, I recommend wrapping the cooled cobs in plastic wrap and placing them in an airtight container.
        • Do not throw away the cobs: Make use of all the corn cobs and make corn stock! It is such an easy and nice way to get more life out of your grilled corn.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 157kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 243mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 168IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 2mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-corn-on-the-cob/feed/ 2